Patent Publication Number: US-6704873-B1

Title: Secure gateway interconnection in an e-commerce based environment

Description:
FIELD OF THE INVENTION 
     The present invention relates to software framework designs and more particularly to providing a global internetworking gateway architecture. 
     BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 
     An important use of computers is the transfer of information over a network. Currently, the largest computer network in existence is the Internet. The Internet is a worldwide interconnection of computer networks that communicate using a common protocol. Millions of computers, from low end personal computers to high-end super computers are coupled to the Internet. 
     The Internet grew out of work funded in the 1960s by the U.S. Defense Department&#39;s Advanced Research Projects Agency. For a long time, Internet was used by researchers in universities and national laboratories to share information. As the existence of the Internet became more widely known, many users outside of the academic/research community (e.g., employees of large corporations) started to use Internet to carry electronic mail. 
     In 1989, a new type of information system known as the World-Wide-Web (“the Web”) was introduced to the Internet. Early development of the Web took place at CERN, the European Particle Physics Laboratory. The Web is a wide-area hypermedia information retrieval system aimed to give wide access to a large universe of documents. At that time, the Web was known to and used by the academic/research community only. There was no easily available tool which allows a technically untrained person to access the Web. 
     In 1993, researchers at the National Center for Supercomputing Applications (NCSA) released a Web browser called “Mosaic” that implemented a graphical user interface (GUI). Mosaic&#39;s graphical user interface was simple to learn yet powerful. The Mosaic browser allows a user to retrieve documents from the World-Wide-Web using simple point-and-click commands. Because the user does not have to be technically trained and the browser is pleasant to use, it has the potential of opening up the Internet to the masses. 
     The architecture of the Web follows a conventional client-server model. The terms “client” and “server” are used to refer to a computer&#39;s general role as a requester of data (the client) or provider of data (the server). Under the Web environment, Web browsers reside in clients and Web documents reside in servers. Web clients and Web servers communicate using a protocol called “HyperText Transfer Protocol” (HTTP). A browser opens a connection to a server and initiates a request for a document. The server delivers the requested document, typically in the form of a text document coded in a standard Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) format, and when the connection is closed in the above interaction, the server serves a passive role, i.e., it accepts commands from the client and cannot request the client to perform any action. 
     The communication model under the conventional Web environment provides a very limited level of interaction between clients and servers. In many systems, increasing the level of interaction between components in the systems often makes the systems more robust, but increasing the interaction increases the complexity of the interaction and typically slows the rate of the interaction. Thus, the conventional Web environment provides less complex, faster interactions because of the Web&#39;s level of interaction between clients and servers. 
     SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION 
     A system and method of providing a global internetworking gateway architecture in an e-commerce environment are provided. A plurality of gateways each situated in a distinct geographic location are coupled to an internet. A wide area network, separate from the internet, is coupled to each of the gateways for providing communication between the wide area network and the internet. Coupled to the wide area network is a central database for providing a central storage for data used in e-commerce carried out over the internet. 
     In one aspect of the present invention, the gateways may be intercontinental. For providing fault and performance management, a central management station may also be coupled to the wide area network. 
     In an embodiment of the present invention, at least one of the gateways includes at least one screening router coupled to the internet via an internet service provider, at least one firewall connected to the screening router, and a choke router coupled between the wide area network and the firewall. In one optional version of this embodiment, a pair of gateways may be provided along with a pair of screening routers, a pair of firewalls, and a pair of choke routers. In another optional version of this embodiment, a plurality of servers may be coupled to the firewall for storing the data. As a further option, this embodiment may additionally include a second wide area network connected to the firewall via a screening router. 
    
    
     BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
     The invention will be better understood when consideration is given to the following detailed description thereof. Such description makes reference to the annexed drawings wherein: 
     FIG. 1A illustrates an exemplary hardware implementation of one embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 1B illustrates a flowchart for a codes table framework that maintains application consistency by referencing text phrases through a short codes framework according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 1C is a flowchart depicting a method for providing an interface between a first server and a second server with a proxy component situated therebetween; 
     FIG. 1D shows the execution architecture for components that make up the SAP Framework Execution Architecture according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 1E is a flowchart illustrating a method for sharing context objects among a plurality of components executed on a transaction server; 
     FIG. 2 illustrates the create component instances method according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 3 illustrates multiple components in the same transaction context according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 4 illustrates the forcing of a component&#39;s database operations to use a separate transaction according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 5 illustrates the compose work form multiple activities in the same transaction according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 6 illustrates JIT activation where MTS intercepts the Customer creation request, starts a process for the Customer package containing Customer component, creates the ContextObject and returns a reference to the client according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 7 illustrates JIT activation when the customer object has been deactivated (the customer object is grayed out) according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 8A is a flowchart depicting a method for providing an activity framework; 
     FIG. 8B is an illustration of the MTS runtime environment according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 9A is a flowchart illustrating a method for accessing services within a server without a need for knowledge of an application program interface of the server; 
     FIG. 9B illustrates the different layers in a Site Server framework architecture according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 10 illustrates schema attributes and classes, with class “Role” and attribute “RoleName” shown; 
     FIG. 11 illustrates the creating of Container “Roles” according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 12 is an illustration of a graphic display at a point where a user has right-clicked on the Schema folder and selected New—Attribute according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 13 illustrates the adding of different Roles according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 14 illustrates an example of the graphic display showing the attributes of member “Joe Bloggs” according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 15A is a flowchart that illustrates a method for handling events in a system; 
     FIG. 15B illustrates a ReTA Event Handler framework that manages the informational, warning and error events that an application raises according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 16A is a flowchart depicting a method for managing user information; 
     FIG. 16B illustrates a User framework which enables two approaches to maintaining user information according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 17A is a flowchart that illustrates a method for managing business objects in a system that includes a plurality of sub-activities which each include sub-activity logic adapted to generate an output based on an input received from a user upon execution, and a plurality of activities which each execute the sub-activities in a unique manner upon being selected for accomplishing a goal associated with the activity; 
     FIG. 17B shows a SubActivity component using the Persistence framework to retrieve a Customer Object from the Database according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 18A is a flow chart depicting a method for persisting information during a user session; 
     FIG. 18B illustrates a Session Flow Diagram—On Session Start according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 19 illustrates a Session Flow Diagram—On Start ASP Page according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 20A is a flow chart illustrating a method for generating a graphical user interface; 
     FIG. 20B is an illustration showing the steps for generating a HTML page consisting of a form with a TextBox, a DropDown list and a PushButton according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 21A is a flow chart depicting a method for software configuration management 
     FIG. 21B is an illustration of an IDEA framework on which the ReTA Development Architecture Design is based according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 22 illustrates the Configuration Management Life Cycle according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 23 illustrates the change control ‘pipeline’ and each phase within the pipeline according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 24 depicts the application of Roles within the Microsoft Transaction Server (MTS) management console according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 25 illustrates an environment migration process that guides development within ReTA engagement environments according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 26 is an illustration of a Development/Unit test for existing applications according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 27 illustrates an assembly test for existing applications according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 28 illustrates a system test for existing applications according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 29 is a flowchart for production of existing applications according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 30 illustrates a graphic display of Visual Source Safe according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 31 illustrates a frame of PVCS Version Manager I-Net Client according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 32 is an illustration of a Build Source Control Model according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 33 illustrates an Assembly Test phase control mode according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 34 illustrates a Microsoft Visual SourceSafe ‘Labels’ dialog box according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 35 illustrates a Database Diagram within Visual Studio according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 36 illustrates Object Modeling within Rational Rose according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 37 illustrates directly calling a wrapped CICS component according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 38 illustrates indirectly calling a wrapped CICS component according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 39 illustrates RSW eTest Automated Testing Tool according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 40 is an illustration which describes the physical configuration necessary for ReTA development according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 41 illustrates the application &amp; architecture configuration for a typical ReTA Build environment according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 42 illustrates the application &amp; architecture configuration for a typical ReTA Build environment according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 43 illustrates an IDEA Framework with components in scope ReTA Phase 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 44 illustrates a NCAF Framework with the shaded components in scope for Phase 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 45 illustrates a MODEnc Framework according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 46 illustrates a NCAF Framework according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 47 illustrates the components that comprise the ReTA execution architecture and their physical location according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 48 illustrates a MODEnc Framework for Operations Architecture according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 49 is an illustrative representation of a solicited event resulting from the direct (synchronous) polling of a network component by a network management station according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 50 is an illustrative representation of when an unsolicited event occurs when a network component sends (asynchronously) data to the network management station according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 51 illustrates event management in a net-centric environment according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 52 illustrates event management in an Intranet-based net-centric model according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 53 illustrates event management when using an Extranet-based net-centric model according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 54 illustrates the tables and relationships required for the ReTA Phase 1 Architecture Frameworks according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 55 illustrates tables and relationships required for the ReTA Phase 1 validation application according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 56 illustrates the physical configuration of a possible ReTA-engagement development environment according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 57 illustrates the physical configuration of possible ReTA-based Assembly, Product and Performance testing environments according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 58 illustrates Separate Web and Application Servers according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 59 illustrates a Single Web and Application Server according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 60 illustrates a Commerce Membership Server [Membership Authentication] properties view according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 61 illustrates a Membership Directory Manager Properties Dialog according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 62 is an illustration of a Membership Server Mapping Property according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 63 is an illustration of a Create New Site Foundation Wizard according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 64 illustrates the web application being placed under the “Member” directory of “cm” in Windows Explorer according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 65 depicts a typical ReTA engagement development environment according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 66 illustrates the development environment configuration for a ReTA Phase 1 engagement according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 67 illustrates an interface associated with the ability of inserting or removing statements within a block without worrying about adding or removing braces according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 68 shows a Visual J++ Build Environment according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 69 shows an interface for attaching to the MTS Process for debugging according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 70 shows an interface for debugging an Active Server Page (example global.asa file) according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 71 illustrates an example of Rose generated java file and javadoc comments according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 72A is a flowchart illustrating a method for testing a technical architecture; 
     FIG. 72B illustrates the application &amp; architecture configuration for a typical ReTA Build environment according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 73 illustrates that the code for technology architecture assembly test may be migrated from the technology architecture component test environment as defined in the migration procedures according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 74 illustrates the application &amp; architecture configuration for a typical ReTA Build environment according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 75 illustrates the physical characteristics of the testing environment to be utilized during the Performance Testing Phases according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 76A is a flow chart depicting a method for managing change requests in an e-commerce environment; 
     FIG. 76B illustrates a framework associated with the change tracker according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 77 illustrates the Change Tracker Main Window according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 78 illustrates the Change Request Detail Screen according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 79 illustrates a History of Changes Window according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 80 illustrates the Ad-Hoc Reporting Window according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 81 illustrates the Manager Reporting Window according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 82 illustrates the Migration Checklist Window according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 83A is a flow chart illustrating a method for managing issues in an e-commerce environment; 
     FIG. 83B illustrates the Issue Tracker Main Screen according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 84 illustrates the New Issue Screen according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 85 illustrates the Modify Issue Screen according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 86 illustrates the Report Selection Screen according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 87A is a flow chart depicting a method for network performance modeling; 
     FIG. 87B illustrates the end to end process associated with Performance Modeling according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 88 illustrates the Effective Network Performance Management according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 89 illustrates an example of overhead introduced at lower layers according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 90 illustrates a graph depicting a Network Usage Profile according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 91 illustrates a Network Layout according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 92 illustrates how the four tool categories relate to each other according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 93A is a flow chart depicting a method for managing software modules during development; 
     FIG. 93B illustrates the PVCS Migration Flow according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 94 illustrates SCM Planning according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 95 illustrates an Identify CM Units &amp; Baselines Process Flow according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 96 illustrates a manner in which CM Repositories and Practices Process Flow are established according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 97 illustrates the Establish Change Control Process according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
       
     FIG. 98 illustrates Collect Metrics and Identify CI Activities according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 99 illustrates the Review/Establish Project Security according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 100 illustrates the Determine Training Requirements according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 101 illustrates the Create Project CM Plan according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 102 shows the Manage CM Repository Process Flow according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 103A is a flow chart illustrating a method for providing a system investigation report workbench; 
     FIG. 103B illustrates a SIR Workbench Main Window screen which provides navigation buttons for adding new SIRs, viewing existing SIRs, viewing/printing existing reports and help according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 104 illustrates New SIR window displayed upon select the New button on the Main Window according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 105 illustrates a window for reviewing and modifying existing SIRs according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 106 illustrates the Change Control Details Window according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 107 illustrates a Report Selection Screen upon selection the Report button from the main menu according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 108 illustrates a graphic display of SourceSafe Administrator according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 109A illustrates a configuration of a project tree within Visual SourceSafe Explorer according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 109B illustrates a dialog box of the projection tree in FIG. 109A designed to allow developers to quickly located and retrieve desired projects and/or files according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 110 illustrates a graphic display when the user gets the latest of the server-side application code from VSS according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 111 illustrates a window that appears where selection the Recursive checkbox permits copying of any sub-projects according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 112 illustrates a History window displayed upon selection of View History menu item according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 113 illustrates the VSS Explorer reflecting the status of the checked out files for other developers to see at a point where one can open the local project or files and make any desired changes according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 114 illustrates Check In from within the VSS Explorer according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 115 illustrates the prompting for Check In details according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 116 illustrates a label creation dialog box according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 117 illustrates a History of Project dialog box according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 118 illustrates a History Details dialog according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 119 illustrates the end to end evaluation process of an Internet firewall for ReTA according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 120 is a chart of Firewall Products according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 121 depicts the two firewall vendors selected for the product evaluation stage according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 122 is a diagram of the Activity Framework classes with the VBActivityWrapper according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 123 illustrates the relationships IVB Activity interface according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 124A is a flow chart depicting a method for providing a global internetworking gateway architecture in an e-commerce environment; 
     FIG. 124B illustrates a simple high level internetworking gateway architecture according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 125 illustrates an Internetworking Gateway with a Specialized Proxy/Cache Server according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 126 illustrates a high level global internetworking gateway architecture according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 127 shows an illustrative West Coast internetworking gateway architecture according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 128 shows a Remote Access Internetworking Gateway architecture according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 129 illustrates an Internetworking Gateway with Partner collaboration on Internet Development according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 130 illustrates a persistable business object extending Persistence. RetaPersistableObj. According to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 131 illustrates layers of a shared property group manager according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 132A is a flow chart depicting a method for initializing a database used with an issue tracker; 
     FIG. 132B illustrates configuring of an issue tracker tool for normal operation according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 133 illustrates a dialog box prompting to confirm the removal of linked tables within a database; 
     FIG. 134 illustrates a New Table’ dialog window being displayed upon selection of a ‘New’ button in order to insert a new table according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 135 illustrates a prompting by Access for selecting tables to link according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 136 illustrates a dialog box indicating linked tables according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 137 illustrates a ‘Welcome Form’ window according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 138 illustrates a ‘Issue Form’ window according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 139 illustrates a window which permits modification of the available reports within the Issue tool according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 140 illustrates a window displayed permitting modification of desired report elements to the new project name according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 141 illustrates a Team Code Table window which allows adding and deleting of project locations according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 142 illustrates a Team Membership Table window which allows adding and deleting of team members according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 143 illustrates a Project Phases Table window which allows changing of project phases according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 144 illustrates a Startup window which allows changing of the title of a database according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 145A is a flowchart depicting a method for generating software based on business components; 
     FIG. 145B illustrates a relationship between business components and partitioned business components according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 146 illustrates how a Billing Business Component may create an invoice according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 147 illustrates the relationship between the spectrum of Business Components and the types of Partitioned Business Components according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 148 illustrates the flow of workflow, dialog flow, and/or user interface designs to a User Interface Component according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 149 is a diagram of the Eagle Application Model which illustrates how the different types of Partitioned Business Components may interact with each other according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 150 illustrates what makes up a Partitioned Business Component according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 151 illustrates the role of patterns and frameworks according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 152 illustrates a Business Component Identifying Methodology according to an embodiment of the present invention; 
     FIG. 153 is a flow chart depicting an exemplary embodiment of a resources e-commerce technical architecture; 
     FIG. 154 is a flow chart illustrating a second exemplary embodiment of a method for maintaining data in an e-commerce based technical architecture; 
     FIG. 155 is a flow chart illustrating an exemplary embodiment of a method for providing a resources e-commerce technical architecture; 
     FIG. 156 illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a method for providing a resources e-commerce technical architecture; and 
     FIG. 157 illustrates an additional exemplary embodiment of a method for providing a resources e-commerce technical architecture. 
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION 
     The Resources eCommerce Technology Architecture (ReTA) is a solution that allows the use of packaged components to be integrated into a client based eCommerce solution. Before the present invention, the Resources architecture offerings provided services that supported the construction, execution and operation of very large custom built solutions. In the last few years, client needs have shifted towards requirements for solutions that continually integrate well with third party applications (i.e., data warehouse and portion of the present description management systems). Previous engagements have proven that it is difficult to integrate these applications into a new solution. As application vendors continue to produce new releases that incorporate technical advancements, it is even more difficult to ensure that these integrated applications continue to work with a given solution. 
     The ReTA approach to constructing, executing and operating a solution emphasizes the ability to change solution components with minimal impact on the solution as a whole. From this approach, ReTA views third party applications as another component in the overall solution. ReTA is component based, which means the engagement can choose to take only the pieces it needs to meet its specific business requirements. ReTA is especially suited to building small applications, implementing tools and packages, integrating applications and web enabling applications. 
     ReTA leverages the best capabilities from established market leaders such as Microsoft, SAP and Oracle. In addition, ReTA leverages some of the Resources prior efforts to integrate solutions. The present invention is an assembly of these best capabilities that helps to ensure a holistic delivered solution. 
     In short, the benefits ReTA provides to the Resources practice and clients are: 
     Save engagement teams the redundant effort of repeatedly evaluating the same technology. 
     Help engagement teams avoid the risk of combining solution components that may be difficult to get to work together. 
     Make it cost effective and low risk to apply upgrades to each of the solution products without negatively affecting the other solution components. 
     Show the clients a solution to a real challenge that cannot be offered by SAP, Microsoft, IBM, Oracle or many technology startups involved in eCommerce work. 
     Focus the Resources architecture offering on common technology choices that coexist nicely. 
     In accordance with at least one embodiment of the present invention, a system is provided for affording various features which support a resources eCommerce Technical Architecture. The present invention may be enabled using a hardware implementation such as that illustrated in FIG.  1 . Further, various functional and user interface features of one embodiment of the present invention may be enabled using software programming, i.e. object oriented programming (OOP). 
     Hardware Overview 
     A representative hardware environment of a preferred embodiment of the present invention is depicted in FIG. 1A, which illustrates a typical hardware configuration of a workstation having a central processing unit  110 , such as a microprocessor, and a number of other units interconnected via a system bus  112 . The workstation shown in FIG. 1A includes Random Access Memory (RAM)  114 , Read Only Memory (ROM)  116 , an I/O adapter  118  for connecting peripheral devices such as disk storage units  120  to the bus  112 , a user interface adapter  122  for connecting a keyboard  124 , a mouse  126 , a speaker  128 , a microphone  132 , and/or other user interface devices such as a touch screen (not shown) to the bus  112 , communication adapter  134  for connecting the workstation to a communication network (e.g., a data processing network) and a display adapter  136  for connecting the bus  112  to a display device  138 . The workstation typically has resident thereon an operating system such as the Microsoft Windows NT or Windows/95 Operating System (OS), the IBM OS/2 operating system, the MAC OS, or UNIX operating system. 
     Software Overview 
     Object oriented programming (OOP) has become increasingly used to develop complex applications. As OOP moves toward the mainstream of software design and development, various software solutions require adaptation to make use of the benefits of OOP. A need exists for the principles of OOP to be applied to a messaging interface of an electronic messaging system such that a set of OOP classes and objects for the messaging interface can be provided. 
     OOP is a process of developing computer software using objects, including the steps of analyzing the problem, designing the system, and constructing the program. An object is a software package that contains both data and a collection of related structures and procedures. Since it contains both data and a collection of structures and procedures, it can be visualized as a self-sufficient component that does not require other additional structures, procedures or data to perform its specific task. OOP, therefore, views a computer program as a collection of largely autonomous components, called objects, each of which is responsible for a specific task. This concept of packaging data, structures, and procedures together in one component or module is called encapsulation. 
     In general, OOP components are reusable software modules which present an interface that conforms to an object model and which are accessed at run-time through a component integration architecture. A component integration architecture is a set of architecture mechanisms which allow software modules in different process spaces to utilize each other&#39;s capabilities or functions. This is generally done by assuming a common component object model on which to build the architecture. It is worthwhile to differentiate between an object and a class of objects at this point. An object is a single instance of the class of objects, which is often just called a class. A class of objects can be viewed as a blueprint, from which many objects can be formed. 
     OOP allows the programmer to create an object that is a part of another object. For example, the object representing a piston engine is said to have a composition-relationship with the object representing a piston. In reality, a piston engine comprises a piston, valves and many other components; the fact that a piston is an element of a piston engine can be logically and semantically represented in OOP by two objects. 
     OOP also allows creation of an object that “depends from” another object. If there are two objects, one representing a piston engine and the other representing a piston engine wherein the piston is made of ceramic, then the relationship between the two objects is not that of composition. A ceramic piston engine does not make up a piston engine. Rather it is merely one kind of piston engine that has one more limitation than the piston engine; its piston is made of ceramic. In this case, the object representing the ceramic piston engine is called a derived object, and it inherits all of the aspects of the object representing the piston engine and adds further limitation or detail to it. The object representing the ceramic piston engine “depends from” the object representing the piston engine. The relationship between these objects is called inheritance. 
     When the object or class representing the ceramic piston engine inherits all of the aspects of the objects representing the piston engine, it inherits the thermal characteristics of a standard piston defined in the piston engine class. However, the ceramic piston engine object overrides these ceramic specific thermal characteristics, which are typically different from those associated with a metal piston. It skips over the original and uses new functions related to ceramic pistons. Different kinds of piston engines have different characteristics, but may have the same underlying functions associated with them (e.g., how many pistons in the engine, ignition sequences, lubrication, etc.). To access each of these functions in any piston engine object, a programmer would call the same functions with the same names, but each type of piston engine may have different/overriding implementations of functions behind the same name. This ability to hide different implementations of a function behind the same name is called polymorphism and it greatly simplifies communication among objects. 
     With the concepts of composition-relationship, encapsulation, inheritance and polymorphism, an object can represent just about anything in the real world. In fact, the logical perception of the reality is the only limit on determining the kinds of things that can become objects in object-oriented software. Some typical categories are as follows: 
     Objects can represent physical objects, such as automobiles in a traffic-flow simulation, electrical components in a circuit-design program, countries in an economics model, or aircraft in an air-traffic-control system. 
     Objects can represent elements of the computer-user environment such as windows, menus or graphics objects. 
     An object can represent an inventory, such as a personnel file or a table of the latitudes and longitudes of cities. 
     An object can represent user-defined data types such as time, angles, and complex numbers, or points on the plane. 
     With this enormous capability of an object to represent just about any logically separable matters, OOP allows the software developer to design and implement a computer program that is a model of some aspects of reality, whether that reality is a physical entity, a process, a system, or a composition of matter. Since the object can represent anything, the software developer can create an object which can be used as a component in a larger software project in the future. 
     If 90% of a new OOP software program consists of proven, existing components made from preexisting reusable objects, then only the remaining 10% of the new software project has to be written and tested from scratch. Since 90% already came from an inventory of extensively tested reusable objects, the potential domain from which an error could originate is 10% of the program. As a result, OOP enables software developers to build objects out of other, previously built objects. 
     This process closely resembles complex machinery being built out of assemblies and sub-assemblies. OOP technology, therefore, makes software engineering more like hardware engineering in that software is built from existing components, which are available to the developer as objects. All this adds up to an improved quality of the software as well as an increase in the speed of its development. 
     Programming languages are beginning to fully support the OOP principles, such as encapsulation, inheritance, polymorphism, and composition-relationship. With the advent of the C++ language, many commercial software developers have embraced OOP. C++ is an OOP language that offers a fast, machine-executable code. Furthermore, C++ is suitable for both commmercial-application and systems-programming projects. For now, C++ appears to be the most popular choice among many OOP programmers, but there is a host of other OOP languages, such as Smalltalk, Common Lisp Object System (CLOS), and Eiffel. Additionally, OOP capabilities are being added to more traditional popular computer programming languages such as Pascal. 
     The benefits of object classes can be summarized, as follows: 
     Objects and their corresponding classes break down complex programming problems into many smaller, simpler problems. 
     Encapsulation enforces data abstraction through the organization of data into small, independent objects that can communicate with each other. 
     Encapsulation protects the data in an object from accidental damage, but allows other objects to interact with that data by calling the object&#39;s member functions and structures. 
     Subclassing and inheritance make it possible to extend and modify objects through deriving new kinds of objects from the standard classes available in the system. Thus, new capabilities are created without having to start from scratch. 
     Polymorphism and multiple inheritance make it possible for different programmers to mix and match characteristics of many different classes and create specialized objects that can still work with related objects in predictable ways. 
     Class hierarchies and containment hierarchies provide a flexible mechanism for modeling real-world objects and the relationships among them. 
     Libraries of reusable classes are useful in many situations, but they also have some limitations. For example: 
     Complexity. In a complex system, the class hierarchies for related classes can become extremely confusing, with many dozens or even hundreds of classes. 
     Flow of control. A program written with the aid of class libraries is still responsible for the flow of control (i.e., it must control the interactions among all the objects created from a particular library). The programmer has to decide which functions to call at what times for which kinds of objects. 
     Duplication of effort. Although class libraries allow programmers to use and reuse many small pieces of code, each programmer puts those pieces together in a different way. Two different programmers can use the same set of class libraries to write two programs that do exactly the same thing but whose internal structure (i.e., design) may be quite different, depending on hundreds of small decisions each programmer makes along the way. Inevitably, similar pieces of code end up doing similar things in slightly different ways and do not work as well together as they should. 
     Class libraries are very flexible. As programs grow more complex, more programmers are forced to reinvent basic solutions to basic problems over and over again. A relatively new extension of the class library concept is to have a framework of class libraries. This framework is more complex and consists of significant collections of collaborating classes that capture both the small scale patterns and major mechanisms that implement the common requirements and design in a specific application domain. They were first developed to free application programmers from the chores involved in displaying menus, windows, dialog boxes, and other standard user interface elements for personal computers. 
     Frameworks also represent a change in the way programmers think about the interaction between the code they write and code written by others. In the early days of procedural programming, the programmer called libraries provided by the operating system to perform certain tasks, but basically the program executed down the page from start to finish, and the programmer was solely responsible for the flow of control. This was appropriate for printing out paychecks, calculating a mathematical table, or solving other problems with a program that executed in just one way. 
     The development of graphical user interfaces began to turn this procedural programming arrangement inside out. These interfaces allow the user, rather than program logic, to drive the program and decide when certain actions should be performed. Today, most personal computer software accomplishes this by means of an event loop which monitors the mouse, keyboard, and other sources of external events and calls the appropriate parts of the programmer&#39;s code according to actions that the user performs. The programmer no longer determines the order in which events occur. Instead, a program is divided into separate pieces that are called at unpredictable times and in an unpredictable order. By relinquishing control in this way to users, the developer creates a program that is much easier to use. Nevertheless, individual pieces of the program written by the developer still call libraries provided by the operating system to accomplish certain tasks, and the programmer must still determine the flow of control within each piece after it&#39;s called by the event loop. Application code still “sits on top of” the system. 
     Even event loop programs require programmers to write a lot of code that should not need to be written separately for every application. The concept of an application framework carries the event loop concept further. Instead of dealing with all the nuts and bolts of constructing basic menus, windows, and dialog boxes and then making all these things work together, programmers using application frameworks start with working application code and basic user interface elements in place. Subsequently, they build from there by replacing some of the generic capabilities of the framework with the specific capabilities of the intended application. 
     Application frameworks reduce the total amount of code that a programmer has to write from scratch. However, because the framework is really a generic application that displays windows, supports copy and paste, and so on, the programmer can also relinquish control to a greater degree than event loop programs permit. The framework code takes care of almost all event handling and flow of control, and the programmer&#39;s code is called only when the framework needs it (e.g., to create or manipulate a proprietary data structure). 
     A programmer writing a framework program not only relinquishes control to the user (as is also true for event loop programs), but also relinquishes the detailed flow of control within the program to the framework. This approach allows the creation of more complex systems that work together in interesting ways, as opposed to isolated programs, having custom code, being created over and over again for similar problems. 
     Thus, as is explained above, a framework basically is a collection of cooperating classes that make up a reusable design solution for a given problem domain. It typically includes objects that provide default behavior (e.g., for menus and windows), and programmers use it by inheriting some of that default behavior and overriding other behavior so that the framework calls application code at the appropriate times. 
     There are three main differences between frameworks and class libraries: 
     Behavior versus protocol. Class libraries are essentially collections of behaviors that you can call when you want those individual behaviors in your program. A framework, on the other hand, provides not only behavior but also the protocol or set of rules that govern the ways in which behaviors can be combined, including rules for what a programmer is supposed to provide versus what the framework provides. 
     Call versus override. With a class library, the code the programmer instantiates objects and calls their member functions. It&#39;s possible to instantiate and call objects in the same way with a framework (i.e., to treat the framework as a class library), but to take full advantage of a framework&#39;s reusable design, a programmer typically writes code that overrides and is called by the framework. The framework manages the flow of control among its objects. Writing a program involves dividing responsibilities among the various pieces of software that are called by the framework rather than specifying how the different pieces should work together. 
     Implementation versus design. With class libraries, programmers reuse only implementations, whereas with frameworks, they reuse design. A framework embodies the way a family of related programs or pieces of software work. It represents a generic design solution that can be adapted to a variety of specific problems in a given domain. For example, a single framework can embody the way a user interface works, even though two different user interfaces created with the same framework might solve quite different interface problems. 
     Thus, through the development of frameworks for solutions to various problems and programming tasks, significant reductions in the design and development effort for software can be achieved. A preferred embodiment of the invention utilizes HyperText Markup Language (HTML) to implement documents on the Internet together with a general-purpose secure communication protocol for a transport medium between the client and a company. HTTP or other protocols could be readily substituted for HTML without undue experimentation. Information on these products is available in T. Berners-Lee, D. Connoly, “RFC 1866: Hypertext Markup Language—2.0” (November 1995); and R. Fielding, H, Frystyk, T. Bemers-Lee, J. Gettys and J. C. Mogul, “Hypertext Transfer Protocol—HTTP/1.1: HTTP Working Group Internet Draft” (May 2, 1996). HTML is a simple data format used to create hypertext documents that are portable from one platform to another. HTML documents are SGML documents with generic semantics that are appropriate for representing information from a wide range of domains. HTML has been in use by the World-Wide Web global information initiative since 1990. HTML is an application of ISO Standard 8879; 1986 Information Processing Text and Office Systems; Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML). 
     To date, Web development tools have been limited in their ability to create dynamic Web applications which span from client to server and interoperate with existing computing resources. Until recently, HTML has been the dominant technology used in development of Web-based solutions. However, HTML has proven to be inadequate in the following areas: 
     Poor performance; 
     Restricted user interface capabilities; 
     Can only produce static Web pages; 
     Lack of interoperability with existing applications and data; and 
     Inability to scale. 
     Sun Microsystem&#39;s Java language solves many of the client-side problems by: 
     Improving performance on the client side; 
     Enabling the creation of dynamic, real-time Web applications; and 
     Providing the ability to create a wide variety of user interface components. 
     With Java, developers can create robust User Interface (UI) components. Custom “widgets” (e.g., real-time stock tickers, animated icons, etc.) can be created, and client-side performance is improved. Unlike HTML, Java supports the notion of client-side validation, offloading appropriate processing onto the client for improved performance. Dynamic, real-time Web pages can be created. Using the above-mentioned custom UI components, dynamic Web pages can also be created. 
     Sun&#39;s Java language has emerged as an industry-recognized language for “programming the Internet.” Sun defines Java as “a simple, object-oriented, distributed, interpreted, robust, secure, architecture-neutral, portable, high-performance, multithreaded, dynamic, buzzword-compliant, general-purpose programming language. Java supports programming for the Internet in the form of platform-independent Java applets.” Java applets are small, specialized applications that comply with Sun&#39;s Java Application Programming Interface (API) allowing developers to add “interactive content” to Web documents (e.g., simple animations, page adornments, basic games, etc.). Applets execute within a Java-compatible browser (e.g., Netscape Navigator) by copying code from the server to client. From a language standpoint, Java&#39;s core feature set is based on C++. Sun&#39;s Java literature states that Java is basically, “C++ with extensions from Objective C for more dynamic method resolution.” 
     Another technology that provides similar function to JAVA is provided by Microsoft and ActiveX Technologies, to give developers and Web designers wherewithal to build dynamic content for the Internet and personal computers. ActiveX includes tools for developing animation, 3-D virtual reality, video and other multimedia content. The tools use Internet standards, work on multiple platforms, and are being supported by over 100 companies. The group&#39;s building blocks are called ActiveX Controls, which are fast components that enable developers to embed parts of software in hypertext markup language (HTML) pages. ActiveX Controls work with a variety of programming languages including Microsoft Visual C++, Borland Delphi, Microsoft Visual Basic programming system and, in the future, Microsoft&#39;s development tool for Java, code named “Jakarta.” ActiveX Technologies also includes ActiveX Server Framework, allowing developers to create server applications. One of ordinary skill in the art readily recognizes that ActiveX could be substituted for JAVA without undue experimentation to practice the invention. Various aspects of ReTA will now be set forth under separate headings: 
     CODES TABLE FRAMEWORK 
     With reference to FIG. 1B, a codes table framework  140  is provided for maintaining application consistency by referencing text phrases through a short codes framework. First, in operation  142 , a table of codes each having a text phrase associated therewith is provided. Such table of codes is stored on a local storage medium. Next, in operation  144 , the table of codes is accessed on the local storage medium. One of the text phrases is subsequently retrieved by selecting a corresponding one of the codes of the table, as indicated in operation  146 . During operation, modification of the text phrases associated with each of the codes of the table is permitted. See operation  148 . 
     The modification may be carried out during a business logic execution. Further, various services may be provided such as retrieving a single one of the text phrases, retrieving all of the text phrases in response to a single command, updating a single code and text phrase combination, updating all of the code and text phrase combinations, naming the table, adding a new code and text phrase combination, removing one of the code and text phrase combinations, and/or adding another table. 
     Further, a name of the table may be stored upon retrieval of the text phrase. Further, a total number of code and text phrase combinations in the table may be determined and stored. In the case where a plurality of tables are provided, any number of the tables may be removed during operation. Additional information will be now be discussed relative to the various foregoing operations. 
     This portion of the present description details the ReTA Codes Table framework design from the perspective of the application developer. The purpose of a codes table is to maintain application consistency by referencing text phrases (to be displayed to the end user) through short codes. The code and text phrase (decode) are stored in a standard table format. The codes table component stores this table locally on the web server, thus reducing the overhead of accessing the database each time the application needs to translate a code. 
     Description 
     The role of this framework is to store frequently used code/decode sets on the web server and provide services that enable the application developer to retrieve the decode(s) associated with code(s). In addition, the framework provides services to enable the developer to modify the contents of the locally stored codes table during business logic execution. 
     Services 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Service 
                 Detail 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Retrieve from Codes Table 
                 Retrieve single decode value 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Retrieve all decode values 
               
               
                   
                 Maintain Codes Table 
                 Update single Code/Decode 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update all Codes/Decodes 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Set Table Name 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Add new Code/Decode 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Remove Code/Decode 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Add Table 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Remove Table 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Components 
     The Codes Table Framework consist of the following COM objects: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Service 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 AFRetrieval 
                 Retrieve decode(s) from the codes table. 
               
               
                   
                 AFMaintenance 
                 Maintain the codes table. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     These components are described in detailed in the following sub-sections. 
     AFRetrieval 
     The AFRetrieval component enables the application developer to load the specified codes table into local memory (for faster access) and retrieve the requested decode(s). 
     Methods 
     The IAFRetrieval interface defines the access to the AFRetrieval component. This interface supports the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 setTableName 
                 Retrieve the requested codes table into local 
               
               
                   
                   
                 memory and store the table name for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 subsequent retrieval requests (instead of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 retrieving from MTS shared memory). 
               
               
                   
                 getDecode 
                 Search through the currently identified local 
               
               
                   
                   
                 codes table and return the ‘decode’ associated 
               
               
                   
                   
                 with the ‘code’. Refer to setTableName 
               
               
                   
                   
                 method. 
               
               
                   
                 getNumRows 
                 Return the number of code/decode pairs 
               
               
                   
                   
                 contained in the currently identified local 
               
               
                   
                   
                 codes table. Refer to setTableName method. 
               
               
                   
                 getCodesTable 
                 Return all the codes and decodes for the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 specified codes table. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFMaintenance 
     The AFMaintenance component maintains the specified local codes table. 
     Methods 
     The IAFMaintenance interface defines the access to the AFMaintenance component. 
     This interface supports the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 setTableName 
                 Store the name of local codes table to be 
               
               
                   
                 accessed for subsequent maintenance requests. 
               
               
                 setCodeDecode 
                 Dynamically add a code/decode pair to the 
               
               
                   
                 currently identified local codes table. Refer to 
               
               
                   
                 set TableName method. 
               
               
                 Add 
                 Replace all code/decode pairs of currently 
               
               
                   
                 identified local codes table with the passed in 
               
               
                   
                 code/decode pairs. Refer to setTableName 
               
               
                   
                 method. 
               
               
                 Append 
                 Append the passed in code/decode pairs to the 
               
               
                   
                 currently identified local codes table. Refer to 
               
               
                   
                 setTableName method. 
               
               
                 setCodeDecodeByTable 
                 Return fully populated codes table directly 
               
               
                   
                 from the database. 
               
               
                 delCodeDecode 
                 Remove specified code/decode pair from 
               
               
                   
                 currently identified local codes table. Refer to 
               
               
                   
                 setTableName method. 
               
               
                 DelCodesTable 
                 Remove the currently identified local codes 
               
               
                   
                 table from local memory. Refer to 
               
               
                   
                 setTableName method. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     SAP FRAMEWORK DESIGN 
     FIG. 1C illustrates a method  150  for providing an interface between a first server and a second server with a proxy component situated therebetween. Initially, in operation  152 , a request for a business object is identified by an application on the first server. The first server is connected to the second server in operation  153 . In operation  154 , selection criteria from the first server is transmitted to the second server. In response to the selection criteria, the first server receives a first recordset and a second recordset from the second server in operation  155 . Business data is included in the first recordset and result codes are included in the second recordset. 
     The first and second recordsets are mapped to the business object in operation  156  and, in operation  157 , the business object is sent to the application on the first server. 
     The first and second recordsets may also be mapped to the business object using a utility conversion function. Additionally, the first and second recordsets may also be mapped to the business object using a utility conversion function. Optionally, the recordsets may be ActiveX data objects (ADO) recordsets. 
     The first server may also receive a third recordset from the second server in response to the selection criteria. This third recordset may include errors and references to an error table on the first server for allowing processing of the errors. 
     In a further embodiment of the present invention, changes to the proxy component may be prevented from affecting the application on the first server. Additionally, generation of a plurality of the proxy components by a user may be allowed. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     This portion of the present description details the ReTA SAP framework design from the perspective of the application developer. The role of this framework is to provide designs and templates that describe how to integrate an Internet application with a SAP server. Unlike the other ReTA frameworks, this does not provide any code components for connecting to SAP, but uses the SAP/DCOM component connector created jointly by Microsoft and SAP. This portion of the present description provides a framework for the design of the architecture using the SAP DCOM connector components to integrate with SAP. 
     The DCOM Component Connector provides interoperability between R/3 objects and COM objects across a heterogeneous network through well-defined business interfaces. It provides the development tools for connecting with SAP to standard SAP BAPI&#39;s (Business Application Programmer Interface) as well as custom developed or modified BAPI&#39;s. The DCOM component connector can connect to SAP on Windows NT or UNIX. The Application server needs to be R/3 Version 2.1 or higher or R/2 with 50D. 
     The ReTA SAP framework uses an adapter layer design that places a wrapper around the DCOM component connector. The adapter layer improves developer productivity by managing some of the lower level tasks, and improves the flexibility of the final solution. 
     The remainder of this portion of the present description describes the Execution and Development Architectures for the SAP framework. 
     SAP Framework Execution Architecture 
     The DCOM Component connector uses COM proxy components that map to SAP Business Objects. There is one proxy component for each SAP business object. The SAP business objects can contain both the standard BAPI&#39;s (Business Application Programmer Interface) as well as custom developed or modified BAPI&#39;s. The SAP/DCOM component generation wizard connects to SAP, examines the SAP business object, and generates a proxy component with the same interface. The SAP/DCOM connector component can connect to SAP on Windows NT or UNIX. FIG. 1C shows the execution architecture for components that make up the SAP Framework Execution Architecture  160 . 
     Referring again to FIG. 1C, the different layers in the SAP framework architecture are shown. The SAP/DCOM connector generated components  162  provide the actual connection to SAP  164 . These components are generated from the SAP Business Application Programmer Interface (BAPI)  166 , 168 . The BAPI&#39;s are either the standard SAP BAPI&#39;s, custom created BAPI&#39;s or Remote Function Calls. 
     The ReTA framework uses an Adapter layer to provide a thin wrapper on the SAP/DCOM connector components. The adapter layer provides the following benefits: 
     It insulates the application from changes in the SAP/DCOM connector components. 
     It provides utility functions for mapping the SAP/DCOM connector data types to the types required by the application. 
     It maps the SAP return error codes to the format required by the application. 
     The SAP/DCOM connector generated components use ADO (ActiveX Data Objects) recordsets to pass data to SAP. The adapter layer components map from these recordsets to the Business Objects or Business Data format used by the application. If a given method returns business data from SAP then this is in the form of an ADO recordset. If a method updates information in SAP then one must pass in an ADO recordset with all the data. To initialize this ADO recordset one calls a separate standard interface method of the proxy component. SAP returns business errors by returning a separate ADO recordset that references an error table. 
     The ReTA framework&#39;s adapter layer maps the ADO recordsets that the DCOM connector uses to the business objects or data objects used by the application. The adapter layer also maps the error table recordset returned by SAP to the error handling mechanism used by the application. 
     SAP Framework Development Architecture 
     SAP/DCOM Component Connector Generation 
     The SAP/DCOM connector portion of the present description gives a detailed description of how to generate a COM proxy component for a given SAP BAPI. The steps for creating a proxy component are: 
     Using the DCOM Component Connector browser based tool, create a destination entry for the SAP Application server. 
     Use the DCOM Connector wizard to connect to this destination. 
     Browse through the available SAP Business Objects on the remote SAP system. 
     Select a business object and click Generate Component DLL. 
     The DCOM Component connector may then generate C++ and IDL files, compile these files to create the proxy component and install this component in MTS. 
     SAP Adapter Component Design 
     This portion of the description describes the responsibility of the SAP adapter components and gives a template for a component. 
     The SAP Adapter components are responsible for: 
     Insulating the application from changes in the SAP BAPI. 
     Receiving business data from SAP 
     Updating business data in SAP 
     Mapping to/from the SAP returned data types 
     Mapping the SAP error return codes to the error handling mechanism used by the application. 
     There is a one to one mapping between the SAP Adapter components and the generated SAP/DCOM connector components. 
     SAP Adapter Component Template 
     This template gives an example of an SAP connector component with one method to receive business data and one method to send business data. It describes how to convert to/from the data types required by the SAP Connector component and how to manage the SAP return error codes. 
     Function GetSAPData(&lt;in&gt;selectionCriteria, &lt;out&gt;businessObject):integer 
     Create instance of the corresponding SAP connector component 
     Call corresponding SAP method passing in selectionCriteria.SAP may return an ADO Recordset with the business data and a second ADO Recordset with the Result codes. 
     Call an error utility function that maps the error return codes onto the applications error handling system. 
     Map the return recordset onto the businessObject (possibly using utility conversion function). Return the business object to the caller of the function. 
     Function SetSAPData(&lt;in&gt;businessObject):integer 
     Create instance of the corresponding SAP connector component 
     Call the SAP connector standard method DimAS to retrieve the recordset that may be populated from the businessObject. 
     Populate the recordset from the businessObject (possibly using utility conversion function). 
     Call the corresponding SAP method passing in the recordset. 
     Call the error utility function that maps the error return codes onto the applications error handling system. 
     Gives an example of an adapter component that demonstrates retrieving and updating SAP data and handling the SAP error codes. 
     MTS FRAMEWORK DESIGN 
     FIG. 1D illustrates a method for sharing context objects among a plurality of components executed on a transaction server. In operation  170 , a first component is executed on a transaction server. A context object is then generated for the first component in operation  172  to control a scope of the execution of the first component. In operation  174 , a call made by the first component is identified to execute a second component. The context object of the first component is utilized for controlling the scope of the execution of the second component in operation  176 . Optionally, the first and second components may be service order item components. 
     The first component may be an activity component and the second component may be a business component. As an option, a plurality of activity components may be provided. As another option, a call made by the activity component may also be identified to execute a second business component with the context object of the activity component utilized for controlling the scope of the execution of the second business component. As a further option, a call made by the activity component may be identified to execute an error logging component with an additional context object separate from the context object of the activity component being utilized for controlling the scope of the execution of the error logging component. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     This portion of the present description details the ReTA approach to performing “logical unit of work” database operations in the context of transactions. Applications developed with ReTA implement transactions through Microsoft Transaction Server (MTS). Within the MTS transaction context, ReTA applications group business components into transactions. The application developer designs each business component to define whether its actions should be performed within a transaction. 
     In addition, this portion of the present description details the MTS framework features and their implications on ReTA application design. 
     MTS Transactions: Application Design Implementation 
     Description 
     There are two main tasks the developer performs to design applications that use MTS to support transactions: 
     Code the application component to be MTS aware. 
     Use MTS services to group database operations into transactions. 
     Design MTS Aware Components 
     FIG. 2 illustrates a create component instances method  200 . MTS controls the scope of transactions by using transaction context objects. Each transaction server component has an associated MTS context object  202 , which controls the transaction context. If a component  204  needs to create instances of other components  206  during its processing, it uses the CreateInstance method of the MTS context object to create the new object. Calling this method ensures that the new component has an associated MTS context object  202  with the correct transaction scope. 
     Group Database Operations Into MTS Transactions 
     The following portions of the present description include three database operations grouping scenarios that a ReTA application developer can implement through MTS. 
     Compose Work From Multiple Components in the Same Transaction 
     As illustrated in FIG. 3, in this scenario, the developer composes the work of a business activity  300  into a single transaction. Activity  300  uses business objects in components  302  and  304  to compete its work. Any database operations generated by either of these business components are completed in the context of a single transaction. To achieve this functionality, the developer uses the default transaction context scope that MTS provides. The developer sets the transaction attribute of the Activity component to Requires a transaction and the attribute of the business components to either Requires a transaction or Supports transactions. When the activity component initializes, MTS creates a corresponding context object  306 . Subsequently, when the activity component initializes the business components, these business components share the same context object and are therefore committed in the same transaction. 
     When the Activity completes and the reference to the activity component is removed, the transaction is committed. If any of the database calls, fails or any of the components decides to abort the transaction, the transaction is aborted and all the database actions performed are rolled back. 
     Force a Component&#39;s Database Operations to Use a Separate Transaction. 
     In this scenario, as illustrated in FIG. 4, the developer creates a component whose database operations are always carried out in a separate transaction. For example, an error logging component  402  should not use the transaction context of the component generating the error. This could cause the error logged to the database to be rolled back if an error occurs in a separate database operation. This scenario has an activity component  400 , two business components  404 , 406  and an error logging component  402 . If an error occurs in the activity, then an error message is sent to the error logging component (which logs the error in a database). The transaction of the activity is rolled back, however, the transaction of the error logging component is committed to the database. 
     In this scenario, the developer uses the default behavior of MTS. The error logging component is registered as Requires a new transaction. When the activity component initializes the error logging component, MTS creates a new transaction context for the component. If an error occurs in the activity, the database operations for the activity is rolled back, but any database operations that the error component generates is committed. 
     Compose Work From Multiple Activities in the Same Transaction. 
     With reference to FIG. 5 (which illustrates the compose work form multiple activities in the same transaction), in this scenario, the developer creates two separate activities  500 , 502  whose work sometimes need to be composed into a single transaction. To achieve this functionality using MTS, the developer creates a third activity component  504  that calls the other two activities. The third activity component is registered as Requires a transaction. When this component initializes, MTS creates a new transaction context. When the activity  504  initializes the other two activities  500 , 502 , they share the same transaction context  506  (and any objects they create also have the ability to share the transaction context). 
     MTS Features: Application Design Implications 
     Description 
     Note: A FinancialWorks Knowledge Exchange (kX) posting (Optimizing Performance) provided most of the content for this portion of the description. 
     This portion of the description provides insight on the following MTS features: 
     Connection Pooling 
     Stateless/Stateful objects 
     Package threading 
     Transactions 
     Just in Time activation 
     Object creation 
     Parameter Passing. 
     Connection Pooling 
     MTS and ODBC provide connection pooling. MTS/ODBC associates a connection pool with a specific user account. Therefore, it is important that all data access components have a pre-defined account to use when requesting database connections. In addition, connections are pooled only within the same process. This implies that every MTS package may have a pool of connections, as each MTS package runs in its own process. 
     Note that the ODBC connections are pooled, not the ADO connections. When the application code closes the ADO connection, the corresponding ODBC connection stays in the pool until a configurable timeout expires (cptimeout). The configurable timeout key is in the registry under “Hkey_Local_MachineSoftware\ODBC\ODBCINST.INI\&lt;driver name&gt;\cptimeout” (with a default value of 60 seconds). Connection pooling can be turned off by setting this value to 0. In effect, connection pooling keeps more connections open with the database but saves the (expensive) overhead of re-creating the connection every time. 
     Note: Connection pooling is a feature of the ODBC resource manager. MTS automates the configuration of the ODBC resource to enable connection pooling. 
     Implications on Application Design: 
     Create accounts for account packages. Group components under the appropriate credentials and packages. The Database server is a resource bottleneck. To improve performance, ensure high bandwidth connections exist between application and database servers. 
     Connection pooling provides performance improvement especially in the case where connections are used and released frequently such as Internet application. 
     Stateful and Stateless Objects 
     MTS supports the concept of a stateful object. However, the object must satisfy the following conditions: 
     1) The object can not be transactional. 
     2) Even if it is marked as non-transactional, it cannot participate in a transaction (i.e. cannot be called from a transactional object or call a transactional object). The reason is that MTS implements an activity concept. In the activity concept, all objects participating in a transaction (or LUW) are logically “grouped” together. Upon the completion of that transaction, SetComplete is called and all objects in that activity are freed. Thus, no object in the transaction holds context (state) on transaction completion. 
     3) To enable a stateful object to participate in a transaction, partition the object into two parts: Stateful and Transactional. The Stateful part lives outside MTS and uses the TransactionContext object to manage manually (making explicit calls to start, commit and/or abort) the transaction inside MTS. To maintain transactional integrity, use the TransactionContext (as opposed to the ObjectContext) to create MTS objects. Therefore, the TransactionContext is passed inside MTS for later use of any MTS object instantiation. On the server, the code looks like the following: Set MtsObject=MtxTransactionContext.CreateInstance(“progid”) 
     Implication on Application Design: 
     In general, be deliberate with MTS and state. When working with MTS components, it is recommended to keep the context(state) on the client and have the server components be service driven. These components are instantiated to provide a service and then are freed. 
     Package Threading 
     Every time a package receives a method call, MTS creates a new thread to service the request. At the time of writing this portion of the present description, MTS packages have a maximum limit of 100 threads per package. If the number of the incoming concurrent calls exceeds 100, MTS serializes all excess calls. Project testing (a FinacialWorks project) proved that performance degraded significantly after reaching the 100 concurrent threads mark. 
     Implication on Application Design: 
     Due to this limitation, package the application DLLs in a way to minimize thread contention. For future releases of MTS, Microsoft claims the limit for concurrent calls may increase to 1000. 
     Activities 
     MTS defines an activity as set of objects acting on behalf of a client&#39;s request. Every MTS object belongs to one activity. The activity ID is recorded in the context of the object. The objects in an activity consist of the object created by a base client and any subsequent object created by it and all of its descendants. Objects in an activity can be distributed across several processes (and machines). 
     Whenever a base client creates an MTS object, a new activity is created. When a MTS object is created from an existing context, the new object becomes part of the same activity. The object&#39;s context inherits the activity identifier of the creating context. 
     Implication on Application Design: 
     Activities define a single logical thread of execution. When a base client calls into an activity, all subsequent requests from other clients are blocked until control is returned to the original caller. 
     Automatic Transaction Control 
     MTS initiates a transaction when a method on a transactional component is called. MTS records the transaction ID in the component&#39;s object context. This transaction ID is passed to other MTS components&#39; context objects requiring participation in the same transaction. 
     MTS operates with an optimistic assumption that the transaction is going to succeed. If the component never calls SetAbort, SetComplete, DisableCommit, or EnableCommit, the transaction commits when the client releases its last reference to the MTS component. 
     If the component calls SetComplete, the transaction commits as soon as the method call returns to the client. When the component calls SetAbort the transaction aborts as soon as the method call returns to the client. 
     If the component calls DisableCommit, the transaction aborts when the client releases its last reference to the component. If the component calls EnableCommit, the transaction commits when the client releases its last reference to the component. 
     Implications on Application Design: 
     When designing the transaction timeout, consider the potential for slow system and network response times. The application design should avoid long running transactions and attempt to break them into smaller ones. 
     Note: 
     There is no explicit Commit method. If no objects have aborted the transaction by calling SetAbort or disabled commitment by calling DisableCommit, MTS may automatically commit the transaction when the client releases its object references. 
     Manual Transaction Control 
     Transactions can also be manually controlled from a base client by using the transaction context to start and commit/abort a transaction. This is particularly useful in the case where a stateful base client activates an MTS-managed transactional object to carry out a distributed transaction. In order to achieve that, MTS uses the Transaction Context created by the base client. 
     Just-In-Time Activation 
     For every business object created, MTS intercepts the call and creates a sibling object called the Object Context. It is the object context that may manage the transaction and the business object activation/deactivation. 
     One of the interface methods on the context object is SetComplete. When SetComplete is called, the transaction (if any) is signaled as ready to be committed and the instance of the business object is destroyed releasing all resources used by it. The next time the client issues a method call, MTS creates a new instance of the business object and delegates the call to it (this is assuming that the client did not release its original reference to the MTS-supplied context wrapper). In the MTS world, this is known as JIT activation. 
     The Following Method Call Trace Illustrates JIT Activation: 
     The client application starts, and the client requests an instance of the CustomerInterface of the Customer component. 
     Set objICustomer=CreateObject(“CustomerComponent.CustomerInterface”). 
     COM searches the Running Object Table to determine whether an instance of the component is active on the client. 
     If not, COM searches the Registry for the information describing CustomerInterface and invokes the creation of the interface. 
     MTS  600  intercepts the Customer creation request  602 , starts a process for the Customer package containing Customer component  604 , creates the ContextObject  606  and returns a reference to the client. See FIG.  6 . 
     The client application requests an operation on the CustomerInterface. 
     MTS invokes the operation and commits the transaction (if any) by calling SetComplete. 
     MTS  700  deactivates the component, freeing the thread, the memory and returns the result to the client. FIG. 7 shows that the customer object  702  has been deactivated (the customer object is grayed out). 
     To take advantage of JIT activation, the clients do not release the reference to the MTS-supplied context wrapper (the client code does not set objICustomer=null). When the client requests a new operation, the Context wrapper creates a new instance of the Customer component and delegates the incoming call to it. By keeping the reference to the context wrapper, MTS does not need to recreate the object. 
     Implications on Application Design: 
     To take advantage of JIT activation, client applications acquire references to the server components as early as possible and uses them as needed. It would be ideal to obtain references at application startup, but this has the drawback of not being reliable. If for some reason the references were lost, this may result in run time errors. 
     Object Creation: New vs. CreateObject vs. CreateInstance 
     This portion of the description describes the appropriate usage of the different types of object creation methods. 
     New: 
     The keyword “New” creates an object with private instantiation property. It is used with early binding. 
     CreateObject: 
     Normally used with late binding and used to create objects with public instantiation property. If other MTS object are instantiated using CreateObject (on the server), they run the risk of running in the wrong context. CreateObject can be used from the client to instantiate any MTS object. 
     CreateInstance: 
     It is the interface method of the context object used to instantiate other MTS objects. This is the only way to guarantee the newly created object participates in the same current transaction. When MTS instantiates a transaction, it records the transaction ID in the component&#39;s object context. This transaction ID is passed to other MTS components only when CreateInstance is used to create these objects. 
     Implication on Application Design: 
     When CreateObject is used, Java/VB uses COM to create an instance of the object. If the Object is registered in MTS, MTS loads the DLL and creates a new instance passing back a MTS-managed handle to the object. The object gets a new MTS context. 
     When New is used in Java/VB, the action depends on where the object being created lives. If it is in a different DLL, COM is used and the mechanism is the same as CreateObject. If it is in the same DLL JavaNVB creates the instance internally and may not create a new MTS-managed object, whereas CreateObject may. Private classes can only be created using New since they are not exposed to COM. 
     When one MTS object creates another MTS object, the new object gets a new context. If CreateObject (or New for an object in a different DLL) is used, the contexts are independent of each other. If a transaction is involved, the new context manages a completely different transaction from the original. If CreateInstance is used, the new object&#39;s context shares the same transaction as the invoking one. 
     Using New is only a problem in the following scenario. The application contains one DLL that contains more than one MTS-managed class. The application wants an instance of one of these classes to create an instance of the other (in separate contexts). New may not do this, whereas CreateObject and CreateInstance may. However, CreateInstance is required if they are to run under the same transaction. 
     Parameter Passing 
     If Visual Basic is the language of choice, make sure to pass parameters by value (as the default in VB is by reference). This may help reduce network trips and hence improves performance. 
     If one is passing the collection object in MTS, make sure to use the Microsoft provided wrapper collection object. The standard VB collection object is known to cause errors when running under MTS. It is better to use a variant array instead of collection to pass information around. It is more robust and performs better. 
     As parameters, MTS registered business objects are passed by reference as they use standard marshalling 
     When working with MTS objects, ensure that object references are exchanged through the return from an object creation interface such ITransactionContext.CreateInstance or IObjectContext.CreateInstance. This allows MTS to manage context switches and Object lifetime. 
     Data Access and Locking Policy 
     Database Locking should be in place to ensure the integrity of the database in a multi-user environment. Locking prevents the common problem of lost updates from multiple users updating the same record. The optimistic approach of record locking is based on the assumption that it is rarely the case for multiple users to read and update the same records concurrently. Such a situation is treated as exceptional processing rather than normal. Optimistic locking does not place any locks at read time; locks are actually placed at update time. A time stamp mechanism should be provided to ensure that at update or delete times the record has not changed since the last time it is read. It is recommended to use optimistic locking with ADO and MTS to improve performance. If the data access mechanism uses ADO disconnected RecordSets, then the only possible locking policy is optimistic. 
     Implication on Application Design: 
     If one is using optimistic locking and ADO, it is recommended that one uses disconnected recordsets to marshal data. Project experience (FinancialWorks project) shows that the application should avoid using the ADO RecordSet.GetRows method, as it significantly slows performance. 
     Data Marshaling 
     Use disconnected Recordsets. This may ensure high performance result when marshaling data across a network. Client applications have to reference an ADOR.Recrodset, which is a lighter version of the ADODB.Recordset designed specifically for client&#39;s use. With disconnected Recordsets only optimistic locking can be employed. 
     If the marshalling of data from client to server is done by collection, beware to use the wrapper collection provided on the MTS site. MTS may not work correctly when passing the VB standard collection object. It is known to cause runtime errors. 
     ACTIVITY FRAMEWORK DESIGN 
     FIG. 8A illustrates a method for providing an activity framework. First, in operation  800  a plurality of sub-activities are created which each include sub-activity logic adapted to generate an output based on an input received from a user upon execution. In operation  802 , a plurality of activities are defined, each of which execute the sub-activities in a unique manner upon being selected for accomplishing a goal associated with the activity. Selection of one of the activities is allowed in operation  804  by receiving user indicia. In operation  806 , an interface is depicted for allowing receipt of the input and display of the output during execution of the sub-activities associated with the selected activity. 
     The sub-activity logic may be adapted for verifying that all required input has been received prior to generating the output. Access to the input received from the user by each of the sub-activities of the activities may also be allowed. 
     Optionally, the activity may include creating a service order. Further, the sub-activities each may additionally include at least one business component. 
     The interface may include a plurality of displays that are each displayed during the execution of a corresponding one of the sub-activities. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     This portion of the present description details the ReTA Activity framework design from the perspective of the application developer. The primary role of this framework is to provide services that support the “model view controller” (MVC) design pattern. In this pattern, the application implements a “separation of concern” among the user interface (view), logical unit of work (controller) and business components (model). Separating the user interface from the business logic increases reuse of the interface and the business component. In this design pattern, different types of interfaces can reuse the same model and the same interface can view different models. Another goal of separating presentation and storage responsibilities is to reduce the impact of change. For example, changing the user interface design should only impact the user interface components and not the business logic. Through modeling the “separation of concern” pattern, the ReTA Activity framework increases application maintainability and flexibility. It also encourages “best practice” coding standards. 
     Activity Framework 
     Description 
     See FIG. 8B, which illustrates the MTS runtime environment  830 . The ReTA Activity framework distributes the application development responsibilities as follows: 
     Web page (Active Server Page)(View/Controller) The application&#39;s web page logic  832  starts the activity  834 , executes the sub-activity and creates the user interfaces. No business logic is contained directly in the web page code. The application developer leverages the ReTA Session, ReTA Activity and the ReTA UJ frameworks from the web page code. 
     Activity Components (Controller) The application&#39;s activity logic implements the business process logic (functional control logic)  836 . Activities support high-level processes that are not the responsibility of any individual business components. This includes high-level steps related to a user&#39;s “logical unit of work” or business function. Thus, activities enable multiple web pages to implement a “logical unit of work”. An example of an activity implementing a “logical unit of work” with multiple web pages is “Create Service Order”. In this example activity, the user selects a service to order on the first page, enters the customer information on the second page, reviews and submits the order on the third page and receives an order confirmation on the fourth page. 
     Business Components: (Model) Business components  837  implement the application&#39;s business entity logic. These components represent individual business entities (such as customer or account). Each entity encapsulates its own data and behavior acting on that data. Note: The Activity implements business logic that spans multiple business components. 
     The ReTA Activity framework consists of the following three main components: 
     Activity 
     An activity  834  encompasses a combination of web pages, which fulfill a business function. The activity has the following responsibilities: 
     Provide a “logical unit of work” context to all sub-activities within the activity. The Activity framework uses Microsoft Transaction Server (MTS) transactions to implement the “logical unit of work” concept. On the completion of a transaction (whether successful or abort), MTS ensures that each sub-activity may be in a consistent state (either completed or rolled back). 
     Check that requested information and conditions are fulfilled before executing logic. 
     Maintain information shared between the pages of the activity. 
     Create, trigger and manage sub-activities. 
     Check page access authorization, when browsing through activity pages. 
     Release all maintained information when closed. 
     Execute post-conditions when closed. Examples of post conditions are releasing resources tied up for the activity or removing pessimistic locks on tables. 
     Commit or abort all opened sub-activities. 
     The activity (by itself) does not contain any business logic. Sub-activities (and their associated business components) provide the business logic. Thus, the activity maintains a context and provides a “logical unit of work” for a specific business functionality. 
     Sub-activity 
     A sub-activity  838  executes a sub-part of the overall activity business logic. The sub-activity represents the smallest grained business logic. For example in a “Create Service Order” activity, one sub-activity retrieves all the service types information to display on the first web page. A sub-activity has the following responsibilities: 
     Check pre-conditions. Ensure requested information and conditions are fulfilled before executing business logic. 
     Execute business logic 
     Execute post-conditions. 
     View 
     A view  840  defines the mapping between a user interface and business components containing the values to display. The view has the following responsibilities: 
     Unplugging the user interface from the business component values. 
     Automatically and transparent to the developer, capture all the values entered by the user and update the related business components. 
     Display the business component values attached to the user interface. 
     Trigger a sub-activity when capturing values. 
     Note: The Activity component maintains a separate view for each web page defined to be part of the activity. 
     Note: 
     The ReTA Activity framework fully supports business activity components written in Java or Visual Basic. In addition, the Activity framework provides partial support for business activity components written C++. For C++ components, the application developer must implement the services provided by the Activity utility classes AFView and AFViewBOMapping. 
     Services 
     The Activity Framework provides the following services: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Service 
                 Detail 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Logical unit of work 
                 Microsoft Transaction Server transaction 
               
               
                   
                 principles 
               
               
                 Maintain context 
                 Business Component context 
               
               
                   
                 User Interface context-List boxes 
               
               
                   
                 Sub-Activity context 
               
               
                 Security 
                 Page access authorization-Activity scope 
               
               
                 Validation 
                 Pre-conditions-Activity level check 
               
               
                   
                 Post-conditions-Activity level check 
               
               
                 Sub-Activity-Smallest 
                 Pre-conditions-Sub-Activity level check 
               
               
                 grained business logic 
                 Execute business logic 
               
               
                   
                 Post-conditions-Sub-Activity level check 
               
               
                 View-Mapping between 
                 Unplug user interface from business component 
               
               
                 a user interface and 
                 Capture user entry and update business 
               
               
                 business components 
                 component 
               
               
                   
                 Display value attached to business component 
               
               
                 Visual Basic support 
                 Wrapper to support Activities written in Visual 
               
               
                   
                 Basic 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Components and Classes 
     The Activity Framework implements these services through the following COM and Class objects: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Service 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFActivity 
                 Implements “logical unit of work”. Manages 
               
               
                   
                 collection of Sub-Activities and Views. 
               
               
                 AFSubActivity 
                 Implements a sub-part of the overall activity 
               
               
                   
                 business logic. 
               
               
                 AFCollection 
                 General purpose Collection component. 
               
               
                 AFVBActivityWrapper 
                 Enables Activity Components written in 
               
               
                   
                 Visual Basic. 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Class 
               
               
                 AFView 
                 For a specific Active Server Page, defines 
               
               
                 AFVBView 
                 the mapping between a collection of user 
               
               
                   
                 interface entry fields and the business 
               
               
                   
                 component instances containing the values to 
               
               
                   
                 display. Note: Multiple views can exist for a 
               
               
                   
                 single ASP. For example, a separate view 
               
               
                   
                 can be defined for each form on a page. 
               
               
                 AFViewBOMapping 
                 Defines the mapping between a user 
               
               
                 AFVBViewBOMapping 
                 interface entry field and the business 
               
               
                   
                 component instances containing the value to 
               
               
                   
                 display. 
               
               
                 AFViewRadioButtonBO 
                 Defines the mapping between a user 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 interface radio button field and the 
               
               
                 AFVBViewRadioButton 
                 business component instances containing the 
               
               
                 BOMapping 
                 value to display. 
               
               
                 AFViewDynamicBO 
                 Defines the mapping between a dynamically 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 created user interface entry field and the 
               
               
                 AFVBViewDynamicBO 
                 business component instances containing the 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 value to display. 
               
               
                 AFViewTextAreaBO 
                 Defines the mapping between a user 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 interface multi-line entry field and the 
               
               
                 AFVBViewTextAreaBO 
                 business component instances containing the 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 value to display. 
               
               
                 AFViewDropDownBO 
                 Defines the mapping between a user 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 interface drop down combo-box field and the 
               
               
                 AFVBViewDropDownBO 
                 business component instances containing the 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 value to display. 
               
               
                 AFViewUIListBOMapping 
                 Defines the mapping between a user 
               
               
                 AFVBViewUIListBO 
                 interface Selected List Box field and the 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 business components containing the values to 
               
               
                   
                 display. 
               
               
                 AFViewThumbNailBO 
                 Defines the mapping between a user 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 interface ThumbNail (iconic pushbutton) 
               
               
                 AFVBViewThumbNailBO 
                 field and the business components containing 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 the values to display. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     These components and classes are described in detailed in the following sub-portions of the description. 
     AFActivity 
     The AFActivity component provides the structure for implementing business logic, state management among web pages, management of views and sub-activities, and transactional support for carrying out a “logical unit of work”. The application developer creates an activity component for each specific business activity by extending the AFActivity component. 
     The activity component shares the services provided within the Activity framework allowing the application developer to concentrate on the business logic. Application business logic is organized into three separate areas within an activity: pre-conditions, execution, and post conditions. 
     Methods 
     The IAFActivity, IAFContext and IAFEventListener interfaces define the access to the AFActivity component. These interfaces support the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFActivity 
                   
               
               
                 Start 
                 Start the activity. The application developer calls 
               
               
                   
                 this method from the ASP page. 
               
               
                 Stop 
                 Release the activity and all its associated instances. 
               
               
                   
                 Calls the commit method. The application developer 
               
               
                   
                 calls this method from the last ASP page for the 
               
               
                   
                 business activity. 
               
               
                 Abort 
                 Gracefully abort the activity. Abort associated sub- 
               
               
                   
                 activities. Remove all references to sub activities, 
               
               
                   
                 business components and stateful UI components. 
               
               
                 Commit 
                 Declare that the current activity and all its sub- 
               
               
                   
                 activities have completed their work and should be 
               
               
                   
                 deactivated when the currently executing method 
               
               
                   
                 returns to the client. This method may call the 
               
               
                   
                 setComplete method of MTS. (See MTS portion of 
               
               
                   
                 the present description for more information) 
               
               
                 RetrieveUIInstance 
                 Retrieve a User Interface component instance from 
               
               
                   
                 the UI context of the activity. 
               
               
                 AddToUIContext 
                 Add a User Interface component to the UI context of 
               
               
                   
                 the activity. 
               
               
                 ExecuteSubActivity 
                 Execute the sub-activity related to the current page 
               
               
                   
                 for the Activity. Call the sub-activity precondition, 
               
               
                   
                 execute and postcondition methods. 
               
               
                 IsPartOfActivity 
                 If the ASP name passed as a parameter is part of the 
               
               
                   
                 activity, return true. This method calls the 
               
               
                   
                 AFTrackingManager component of the ReTA 
               
               
                   
                 Session framework in order to get the result. 
               
               
                 CheckPage 
                 Ask the tracking object related to the activity to 
               
               
                 Authorization 
                 check the page authorization (uses the AFTracking 
               
               
                   
                 Manager component of the ReTA Session 
               
               
                   
                 framework). If the user is allowed to access this 
               
               
                   
                 page, set the current page of the activity with the 
               
               
                   
                 page passed as parameter. 
               
               
                 UIFieldValue 
                 Return the business component value that is mapped 
               
               
                   
                 to the specified UI field (uses the Activity 
               
               
                   
                 framework View service). 
               
               
                 GetName 
                 Return the activity name. 
               
               
                 GetFrameName 
                 Return the name of the frame where to display the 
               
               
                   
                 encountered events. 
               
               
                 GetPageParameter 
                 Return a string containing all parameters to send to 
               
               
                   
                 the next page. This string contains the names of all 
               
               
                   
                 UI fields of the page and the JavaScript code needed 
               
               
                   
                 to retrieve their values. Called by the ReTA UI 
               
               
                   
                 framework component AFScriptGenerator. 
               
               
                 GetStartPage 
                 Return the starting page of the activity. 
               
               
                 getNextPage 
                 Return the next page for the current activity, based 
               
               
                   
                 on the current activity page saved in the AFTracking 
               
               
                   
                 object of the activity and on the action passed as 
               
               
                   
                 parameter. 
               
               
                 getCurrentPage 
                 Return the current page. 
               
               
                 retrieveBOInstance 
                 Return requested business component from the 
               
               
                   
                 activity business context. 
               
               
                 AddObject 
                 Add a business object (held by the activity&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 “business object context” object). 
               
               
                 GetObject 
                 Return the instance of the requested business object 
               
               
                   
                 (held by the activity&#39;s “business object context” 
               
               
                   
                 object). 
               
               
                 RemoveObject 
                 Remove the instance of the requested business 
               
               
                   
                 object (held by the activity&#39;s “business object 
               
               
                   
                 context” object). 
               
               
                 ContainsKey 
                 If the “label” of the requested business object exists 
               
               
                   
                 (held by the activity&#39;s “business object cotext” 
               
               
                   
                 object), return true. 
               
               
                 GetKeys 
                 Return all business object “labels” (held by the 
               
               
                   
                 activity&#39;s “business object context” object). 
               
               
                 receiveEvent 
                 Method called by the ReTA Session during an ASP 
               
               
                   
                 start page event to enable the architecture to capture 
               
               
                   
                 user entry from previous web page. The ReTA 
               
               
                   
                 Session component holds references to all registered 
               
               
                   
                 listeners (Activity components). 
               
               
                 AFEventListener 
               
               
                 getId 
                 Reference to the listener object. One listener object 
               
               
                   
                 is associated with each registered Activity 
               
               
                   
                 component. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Abstract Methods 
     The application developer implements the following abstract methods in the business activity component: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 CreateSub 
                 Create a Sub-Activity. 
               
               
                 Activity 
               
               
                 Name 
                 Return the Activity name. 
               
               
                 Precondition 
                 Pre-conditions required before executing the Activity. 
               
               
                 Postcondition 
                 Post-conditions required after executing the Activity. 
               
               
                 RequestedObjects 
                 Return the list of the requested business components. 
               
               
                 Views 
                 Return all the views for the activity. 
               
               
                 StartPage 
                 Return the Activity start page. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFSubActivity 
     The AFSubActivity component implements a sub-part of the overall activity business logic. The application developer creates a sub-activity component for each sub-part of a specific business activity by extended the AFSubActivity component. As with activities, the sub-activity workflow sequence is pre-condition, execution and post-condition. 
     Note: 
     There may be zero or more sub-activities on an ASP Page. 
     Methods 
     The IAFSubActivity interface defines the access to the AFSubActivity component. 
     This interface supports the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 precondition 
                 Pre-conditions required before executing the sub- 
               
               
                   
                 Activity. 
               
               
                 execute 
                 Execute the small grained business process logic. 
               
               
                 postcondition 
                 Post-conditions required after executing the sub-Activity. 
               
               
                 commit 
                 Declare that the current sub-activity has completed its 
               
               
                   
                 work and should be deactivated when the currently 
               
               
                   
                 executing method returns to the client. This method may 
               
               
                   
                 call the setComplete method of MTS. 
               
               
                 check 
                 Check that the business components requested for the 
               
               
                 Requested 
                 sub-activity are present in the Activity context. The 
               
               
                 Objects 
                 requested components are defined by the application 
               
               
                   
                 developer through implementing the sub-activity abstract 
               
               
                   
                 requestedObject method. 
               
               
                 initialize 
                 Store the requested component names (as defined by the 
               
               
                   
                 application developer). Store the passed in activity 
               
               
                   
                 component reference. Store the sub-activity name. 
               
               
                 getName 
                 Return the sub-activity name. 
               
               
                 getActivity 
                 Return the reference to the activity component associated 
               
               
                   
                 to the sub-activity. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Abstract Methods 
     The application developer implements the following abstract methods in the business sub-activity component: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 precondition 
                 Pre-conditions required before executing the sub- 
               
               
                   
                 Activity. 
               
               
                 execute 
                 Execute the small grained business process logic. 
               
               
                 postcondition 
                 Post-conditions required after executing the sub- 
               
               
                   
                 Activity. 
               
               
                 requestedObjects 
                 Return the requested business components for the sub- 
               
               
                   
                 activity. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFCollection 
     The AFCollection component is a general purpose collection component. The collection component can be used to store and retrieve a collection of COM components, integers or strings. 
     Methods 
     The IAFCollection interface defines the access to the AFCollection component. This interface supports the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 size 
                 Number of elements in the collection component. 
               
               
                 addElement 
                 Add an element to the collection component. 
               
               
                 elementAt 
                 Return the element at the requested index. 
               
               
                 addString 
                 Add a string element to the collection component. 
               
               
                 stringAt 
                 Return the string element at the requested index. 
               
               
                 addInt 
                 Add an integer element to the collection component. 
               
               
                 intAt 
                 Return the integer element at the requested index. 
               
               
                 isInt 
                 If collection component is storing integers, return true. 
               
               
                 IsString 
                 If collection component is storing strings, return true. 
               
               
                 Reset 
                 Remove all the elements from the collection component. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFVBActivityWrapper 
     The AFVBActivityWrapper component enables the application developer to add Activities that are written in Visual Basic. 
     Methods 
     The IAFActivity, IAFContext, IAFEventListener and IAFVBActivityWrapper interfaces define the access to the AFVBActivityWrapper component. These interfaces support the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFVBactivity 
                   
               
               
                 Wrapper 
               
               
                 AddVBActivity 
                 Store the VB activity name, the starting page for the 
               
               
                   
                 activity and the reference to the application 
               
               
                   
                 developer&#39;s VBActivity component to the 
               
               
                   
                 AFVBActivityWrapper component. 
               
               
                 getPageParameter 
                 Return a string containing all parameters to send to 
               
               
                   
                 the next page. This string contains the names of all 
               
               
                   
                 UI fields of the page and the JavaScript code needed 
               
               
                   
                 to retrieve their values. Due to non-support of class 
               
               
                   
                 inheritance by the VB language, the VB application 
               
               
                   
                 developer must implement the getPageParameter 
               
               
                   
                 logic supplied by superclass AFActivity for Java 
               
               
                   
                 applications. The VB developer copies the required 
               
               
                   
                 logic from the VB Activity shell code file. 
               
               
                 receiveEvent 
                 Method called by the ReTA Session during an ASP 
               
               
                   
                 start page event to enable the architecture to capture 
               
               
                   
                 user entry from previous web page. The ReTA 
               
               
                   
                 Session component holds references to all registered 
               
               
                   
                 listeners (Activity components). Due to non-support 
               
               
                   
                 of class inheritance by the VB language, the VB 
               
               
                   
                 application developer must implement the 
               
               
                   
                 receiveEvent logic supplied by superclass 
               
               
                   
                 AFActivity for Java applicants. The VB developer 
               
               
                   
                 copies the required logic from the VB Activity shell 
               
               
                   
                 code file. 
               
               
                 Start 
                 Start the activity. The application developer calls 
               
               
                   
                 this method from the ASP page. 
               
               
                 uIFieldValue 
                 Return the business component value that is mapped 
               
               
                   
                 to the specified UI field. Due to non-support of class 
               
               
                   
                 inheritance by the VB language, the VB application 
               
               
                   
                 developer must implement the uIFieldValue logic 
               
               
                   
                 supplied by superclass AFActivity for Java 
               
               
                   
                 applications. The VB developer copies the required 
               
               
                   
                 logic from the VB Activity shell code file. 
               
               
                 AFActivity 
               
               
                 Stop 
                 Release the activity and all its associated instances. 
               
               
                   
                 Calls the commit method. The application developer 
               
               
                   
                 calls this method from the last ASP page for the 
               
               
                   
                 business activity. 
               
               
                 abort 
                 Gracefully abort the activity. Abort associated sub- 
               
               
                   
                 activities. Remove all references to sub-activities, 
               
               
                   
                 business components and stateful UI components. 
               
               
                 commit 
                 Declare that the current activity and all its sub- 
               
               
                   
                 activities have completed their work and should be 
               
               
                   
                 deactivated when the currently executing method 
               
               
                   
                 returns to the client. This method may call the 
               
               
                   
                 setComplete method of MTS. (See MTS portion of 
               
               
                   
                 the present description for more information) 
               
               
                 retrieveUIInstance 
                 Retrieve a User Interface component instance from 
               
               
                   
                 the UI context of the activity. 
               
               
                 addToUIContext 
                 Add a User Interface component to the UI context of 
               
               
                   
                 the activity. 
               
               
                 executesSubActivity 
                 Execute the sub-activity related to the current page 
               
               
                   
                 for the Activity. Call the sub-activity precondition, 
               
               
                   
                 execute and postcondition methods. 
               
               
                 isPartOfActivity 
                 If the ASP name passed as a parameter is part of the 
               
               
                   
                 activity, return true. This method calls the 
               
               
                   
                 AFTrackingManager component of the ReTA 
               
               
                   
                 Session framework in order to get the result. 
               
               
                 checkPage 
                 Ask the tracking object related to the activity to 
               
               
                 Authorization 
                 check the page authorization (uses the 
               
               
                   
                 AFTrackingManager component of the ReTA 
               
               
                   
                 Session framework). If the user is allowed to access 
               
               
                   
                 this page, set the current page of the activity with 
               
               
                   
                 the page passed as parameter. 
               
               
                 getName 
                 Return the activity name. 
               
               
                 getFrameName 
                 Return the name of the frame where to display the 
               
               
                   
                 encountered events. 
               
               
                 getStartPage 
                 Return the starting page of the activity. 
               
               
                 getNextPage 
                 Return the next page for the current activity, based 
               
               
                   
                 on the current activity page saved in the AFTracking 
               
               
                   
                 object of the activity and on the action passed as 
               
               
                   
                 parameter. 
               
               
                 getCurrentPage 
                 Return the current page. 
               
               
                 retrieveBOInstance 
                 Return requested business component from the 
               
               
                   
                 activity business context. 
               
               
                 AddObject 
                 Add a business object (held by the activity&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 “business object context” object). 
               
               
                 GetObject 
                 Return the instance of the requested business object 
               
               
                   
                 (held by the activity&#39;s “business object context” 
               
               
                   
                 object). 
               
               
                 RemoveObject 
                 Remove the instance of the requested business 
               
               
                   
                 object (held by the activity&#39;s “business 
               
               
                   
                 object context” object). 
               
               
                 ContainsKey 
                 If the “label” of the requested business object exists 
               
               
                   
                 (held by the activity&#39;s “business object context” 
               
               
                   
                 object), return true. 
               
               
                 GetKeys 
                 Return all business object “labels” (held by the 
               
               
                   
                 activity&#39;s “business object context” object). 
               
               
                 AFEventListener 
               
               
                 GetId 
                 Reference to the listener object. One listener object 
               
               
                   
                 is associated with each registered Activity 
               
               
                   
                 component. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     IAFVBActivity Interface Methods 
     The application developer implements the following interface methods in the VB business activity component: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 CreateSubActivity 
                 Create a Sub-Activity. 
               
               
                 getRequested 
                 Copy the requested objects for the activity from the 
               
               
                 Objects 
                 Session context to the activity context. 
               
               
                 GetUIFieldValue 
                 Call getValueForUIField method of AFVBView 
               
               
                   
                 class to implement logic. The VB developer copies 
               
               
                   
                 this required logic from the VB Activity shell code 
               
               
                   
                 file. 
               
               
                 capture 
                 Call capture method of AFVBView class to 
               
               
                   
                 implement logic. The VB developer copies this 
               
               
                   
                 required logic from the VB Activity shell code file 
               
               
                 getPageParameter 
                 Call getParameter method of AFVBView class to 
               
               
                   
                 implement logic. The VB developer copies this 
               
               
                   
                 required logic from the VB Activity shell code file 
               
               
                 Precondition 
                 Pre-conditions required before executing the 
               
               
                   
                 Activity. 
               
               
                 Postcondition 
                 Post-conditions required after executing the 
               
               
                   
                 Activity. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFView (AFVBView) 
     The AFView class provides a mapping between a User Interface and a set of Business Components (the view maps one web page form to one or more business components). When the user requests the next web page, the previous web page values are passed along with the URL request. Upon starting the next web page, the Session framework invokes the receiveEvent method on the appropriate Activity component. The Activity component uses the View class to record, into the appropriate business component, the data entered by the user at the previous web page. Also, the View class obtains the current user interface field values for the next web page as requested by the application developer through ASP scripting logic. 
     Note: 
     Multiple views can exist for a single ASP. Since a view contains a collection of mapped field, one view can be defined for each form of an ASP. 
     Methods 
     The following AFView class methods are important for the application developer to understand: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFView 
                 Create a new AFView instance for the ASP page 
               
               
                 AFVBView 
                 passed as parameter. The application developer calls 
               
               
                   
                 this method from the implemented views method of 
               
               
                   
                 the business activity component. 
               
               
                 GetValueForUI 
                 Return the value for the UI field mapped to an instance 
               
               
                 Field 
                 of a business component contained in the activity 
               
               
                   
                 context. If the business component instance is not part 
               
               
                   
                 of the activity, then return the default value for the UI 
               
               
                   
                 field. From the ASP page, the application developer 
               
               
                   
                 calls this method to initialize the UI field values before 
               
               
                   
                 submitting the web page back to the client machine. 
               
               
                   
                 Note: for VB activities, this method is called by the 
               
               
                   
                 VB business activity component 
               
               
                 AddBOMapping 
                 Add a “UI field to business component attribute 
               
               
                   
                 mapping” object to the view. The application 
               
               
                   
                 developer calls this method from the implemented 
               
               
                   
                 views method of the business activity component. 
               
               
                 GetParameter 
                 Return a string containing all parameters defined for 
               
               
                   
                 this view to send to the next page. This string 
               
               
                   
                 contains the names of all UI fields for this view of the 
               
               
                   
                 page and the JavaScript code needed to retrieve their 
               
               
                   
                 values. Called by the getPageParameter method of the 
               
               
                   
                 AFActivity component. Note: for VB activities, this 
               
               
                   
                 method is called by the VB business activity 
               
               
                   
                 component. 
               
               
                 Capture 
                 Based on the parameters passed to the current Active 
               
               
                   
                 Server Page, update the business components 
               
               
                   
                 containing the values entered by the user from the 
               
               
                   
                 previous page. The Activity framework implements 
               
               
                   
                 this logic for the application developer. Note: for 
               
               
                   
                 VB activities, this method is called by the VB business 
               
               
                   
                 activity component 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFViewBOMapping (AFVBViewBOMapping) 
     The AFViewBOMapping component defines the mapping between a user interface entry field and the business component instances containing the value to display. 
     This class gets/sets an UI field value by getting/setting the business component instance contained in the activity context. Each mapped business component instance should implement the IAFEditable interface. This interface provides the setValue and getvalue methods used to set and get values of the business component instance. 
     Methods 
     The following AFViewBOMapping class methods are important for the application developer to understand: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFViewBO 
                 Create a new AFViewBOMapping instance defining a 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 UI field to business component attribute mapping for an 
               
               
                 AFVBViewBO 
                 ASP page (parameters passed by the application 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 developer). The application developer calls this method 
               
               
                   
                 from the implemented views method of the business 
               
               
                   
                 activity component. 
               
               
                 getParameter 
                 Return a string containing the parameters defined for 
               
               
                   
                 this “UI field to business component mapping” to send 
               
               
                   
                 to the next page. This string contains the name of the UI 
               
               
                   
                 field mapped to the business component attribute for 
               
               
                   
                 this view of the page and the JavaScript code needed to 
               
               
                   
                 retrieve its value. Called by the getParameter method of 
               
               
                   
                 the AFView component. The Activity framework 
               
               
                   
                 implements this logic for the application developer. 
               
               
                 capture 
                 Based on the parameter passed to the current Active 
               
               
                   
                 Server Page, update the business components containing 
               
               
                   
                 the value entered by the user from the previous page for 
               
               
                   
                 the mapped UI field. The Activity framework 
               
               
                   
                 implements this logic for the application developer. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFViewRadioButtonBOMapping (AFVBViewRadioButtonBOMapping) 
     The AFViewRadioButtonBOMapping component defines the mapping between a user interface radio button field and the business component instances containing the value to display. This class gets/sets an UI field value by getting/setting the business component instance contained in the activity context. Each mapped business component instance should implement the IAFEditable interface. This interface provides the setValue and getvalue methods used to set and get values of the business component instance. 
     Methods 
     The following AFViewRadioButtonBOMapping class methods are important for the application developer to understand: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFViewRadioButton 
                 Create a new 
               
               
                 BOMapping 
                 AFViewRadioButtonBOMapping instance 
               
               
                 AFVBViewRadio 
                 defining a UI field to business component 
               
               
                 ButtonBOMapping 
                 attribute mapping for an ASP page 
               
               
                   
                 (parameters passed by the application 
               
               
                   
                 developer). The application developer calls 
               
               
                   
                 this method from the implemented views 
               
               
                   
                 method of the business activity component. 
               
               
                 getParameter 
                 Return a string containing the parameters 
               
               
                   
                 defined for this “UI field to business 
               
               
                   
                 component mapping” to send to the next 
               
               
                   
                 page. This string contains the name of the 
               
               
                   
                 UI field mapped to the business component 
               
               
                   
                 attribute for this view of the page and the 
               
               
                   
                 JavaScript code needed to retrieve its value. 
               
               
                   
                 Called by the getParameter method of the 
               
               
                   
                 AFView component. The Activity 
               
               
                   
                 framework implements this logic for the 
               
               
                   
                 application developer. 
               
               
                 capture 
                 Based on the parameter passed to the 
               
               
                   
                 current Active Server Page, update the 
               
               
                   
                 business components containing the value 
               
               
                   
                 entered by the user from the previous page 
               
               
                   
                 for the mapped UI field. The Activity 
               
               
                   
                 framework implements this logic for the 
               
               
                   
                 application developer. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFViewDynamicBOMapping (AFVBViewDynamicBOMapping) 
     The AFViewDynamicBOMapping component defines the mapping between a dynamically created user interface field and the business component instances containing the value to display. This class gets/sets an UI field value by getting/setting the business component instance contained in the activity context. Each mapped business component instance should implement the IAFEditable interface. This interface provides the setValue and getvalue methods used to set and get values of the business component instance. 
     Methods 
     The following AFViewDynamicBOMapping class methods are important for the application developer to understand: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFViewDynamic 
                 Create a new AFViewDynamicBOMapping 
               
               
                 BOMapping 
                 instance defining a UI field to business 
               
               
                 AFVBViewDynamic 
                 component attribute mapping for an ASP page 
               
               
                 BOMapping 
                 (parameters passed by the application 
               
               
                   
                 developer). The application developer calls this 
               
               
                   
                 method from the implemented views method of 
               
               
                   
                 the business activity component. 
               
               
                 getParameter 
                 Return a string containing the parameters 
               
               
                   
                 defined for this “UI field to business component 
               
               
                   
                 mapping” to send to the next page. This string 
               
               
                   
                 contains the name of the UI field mapped to the 
               
               
                   
                 business component attribute for this view of 
               
               
                   
                 the page and the JavaScript code needed to 
               
               
                   
                 retrieve its value. Called by the getParameter 
               
               
                   
                 method of the AFView component. The 
               
               
                   
                 Activity framework implements this logic for 
               
               
                   
                 the application developer. 
               
               
                 capture 
                 Based on the parameter passed to the current 
               
               
                   
                 Active Server Page, update the business 
               
               
                   
                 components containing the value entered by the 
               
               
                   
                 user from the previous page for the mapped UI 
               
               
                   
                 field. The Activity framework implements this 
               
               
                   
                 logic for the application developer. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFViewTextAreaBOMapping (AFVBViewTextAreaBOMapping) 
     The AFViewTextAreaBOMapping component defines the mapping between a user interface multi-line entry field and the business component instances containing the value to display. This class gets/sets an UI field value by getting/setting the business component instance contained in the activity context. Each mapped business component instance should implement the IAFEditable interface. This interface provides the setValue and getvalue methods used to set and get values of the business component instance. 
     Methods 
     The following AFViewTextAreaBOMapping class methods are important for the application developer to understand: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFViewTextAreaBO 
                 Create a new AFViewTextAreaBOMapping 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 instance defining a UI field to business 
               
               
                 AFVBViewTextAreaBO 
                 component attribute mapping for an ASP page 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 (parameters passed by the application 
               
               
                   
                 developer). The application developer calls this 
               
               
                   
                 method from the implemented views method of 
               
               
                   
                 the business activity component. 
               
               
                 getParameter 
                 Return a string containing the parameters 
               
               
                   
                 defined for this “UI field to business 
               
               
                   
                 component mapping” to send to the next page. 
               
               
                   
                 This string contains the name of the UI field 
               
               
                   
                 mapped to the business component attribute for 
               
               
                   
                 this view of the page and the JavaScript code 
               
               
                   
                 needed to retrieve its value. Called by the 
               
               
                   
                 getParameter method of the AFView 
               
               
                   
                 component. The Activity framework 
               
               
                   
                 implements this logic for the application 
               
               
                   
                 developer. 
               
               
                 capture 
                 Based on the parameter passed to the current 
               
               
                   
                 Active Server Page, update the business 
               
               
                   
                 components containing the value entered by the 
               
               
                   
                 user from the previous page for the mapped UI 
               
               
                   
                 field. The Activity framework implements this 
               
               
                   
                 logic for the application developer. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFViewDropDownBOMapping (AFVBViewDropDownBOMapping) 
     The AFViewDropDownBOMapping component defines the mapping between a user interface drop down field and the business component instances containing the value to display. This class gets/sets an UI field value by getting/setting the business component instance contained in the activity context. Each mapped business component instance should implement the IAFEditable interface. This interface provides the setvalue and getvalue methods used to set and get values of the business component instance. 
     Methods 
     The following AFViewDropDownBOMapping class methods are important for the application developer to understand: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFViewDropDownBO 
                 Create a new AFViewDropDownBOMapping 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 instance defining a UI field to business 
               
               
                 AFVBViewDropDown 
                 component attribute mapping for an ASP page 
               
               
                 BOMapping 
                 (parameters passed by the application 
               
               
                   
                 developer). The application developer calls 
               
               
                   
                 this method from the implemented views 
               
               
                   
                 method of the business activity component. 
               
               
                 GetParameter 
                 Return a string containing the parameters 
               
               
                   
                 defined for this “UI field to business 
               
               
                   
                 component mapping” to send to the next page. 
               
               
                   
                 This string contains the name of the UI field 
               
               
                   
                 mapped to the business component attribute 
               
               
                   
                 for this view of the page and the JavaScript 
               
               
                   
                 code needed to retrieve its value. Called by 
               
               
                   
                 the getParameter method of the AFView 
               
               
                   
                 component. The Activity framework 
               
               
                   
                 implements this logic for the application 
               
               
                   
                 developer. 
               
               
                 Capture 
                 Based on the parameter passed to the current 
               
               
                   
                 Active Server Page, update the business 
               
               
                   
                 components containing the value entered by 
               
               
                   
                 the user from the previous page for the 
               
               
                   
                 mapped UI field. The Activity framework 
               
               
                   
                 implements this logic for the application 
               
               
                   
                 developer. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFViewUIListBOMapping (AFVBViewUIListBOMapping) 
     The AFViewUlListBOMapping component defines the mapping between a user interface Selected List field and the AFCollection component instance containing the values to display. This class gets/sets an UI field value by getting/setting the AFCollection component instance contained in the activity context. 
     Methods 
     The following AFViewSelectedListBOMapping class methods are important for the application developer to understand: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFViewUIListBO 
                 Create a new AFViewUIListBOMapping 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 instance defining the selected list box field 
               
               
                 AFVBViewUIListBO 
                 name (and optionally, the name of a sub-activity 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 to execute on the “capture” method invocation) 
               
               
                   
                 for an ASP page (parameters passed by the 
               
               
                   
                 application developer). The application 
               
               
                   
                 developer calls this method from the 
               
               
                   
                 implemented views method of the business 
               
               
                   
                 activity component. 
               
               
                 GetParameter 
                 Return a string containing the parameters 
               
               
                   
                 defined for this mapping to send to the next 
               
               
                   
                 page. This string contains the name of the 
               
               
                   
                 selected list box field and the JavaScript code 
               
               
                   
                 needed to retrieve its value. Called by the 
               
               
                   
                 getParameter method of the AFView 
               
               
                   
                 component. The Activity framework 
               
               
                   
                 implements this logic for the application 
               
               
                   
                 developer. 
               
               
                 Capture 
                 Based on the parameter passed to the current 
               
               
                   
                 Active Server Page, update the AFCollection 
               
               
                   
                 component containing the values entered by the 
               
               
                   
                 user from the previous page for the selected list 
               
               
                   
                 box field. The Activity framework implements 
               
               
                   
                 this logic for the application developer. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFViewThumbNailBOMapping (AFVBViewThumbNailBOMapping) 
     The AFViewThumbNailBOMapping component defines the mapping between a user interface ThumbNail (iconic pushbutton) field and the business component instances containing the value to display. This class gets/sets an UI field value by getting/setting the business component instance contained in the activity context. Each mapped business component instance should implement the IAFEditable interface. This interface provides the setvalue and getvalue methods used to set and get values of the business component instance. 
     Methods 
     The following AFViewThumbNailBOMapping class methods are important for the cation developer to understand: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFViewThumbNailBO 
                 Create a new AFViewThumbNailBOMapping 
               
               
                 Mapping 
                 instance defining the selected list box field 
               
               
                 AFVBViewThumbNail 
                 name (and optionally, the name of a sub- 
               
               
                 BOMapping 
                 activity to execute on the “capture” method 
               
               
                   
                 invocation) for an ASP page (parameters 
               
               
                   
                 passed by the application developer). The 
               
               
                   
                 application developer calls this method from 
               
               
                   
                 the implemented views method of the 
               
               
                   
                 business activity component. 
               
               
                 GetParameter 
                 Return a string containing the parameters 
               
               
                   
                 defined for this mapping to send to the next 
               
               
                   
                 page. This string contains the name of the 
               
               
                   
                 selected list box field and the JavaScript code 
               
               
                   
                 needed to retrieve its value. Called by the 
               
               
                   
                 getParameter method of the AFView 
               
               
                   
                 component. The Activity framework 
               
               
                   
                 implements this logic for the application 
               
               
                   
                 developer. 
               
               
                 capture 
                 Based on the parameter passed to the current 
               
               
                   
                 Active Server Page, update the business 
               
               
                   
                 components containing the value entered by 
               
               
                   
                 the user from the previous page for the 
               
               
                   
                 mapped UI field. The Activity framework 
               
               
                   
                 implements this logic for the application 
               
               
                   
                 developer. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     SITE SERVER FRAMEWORK DESIGN 
     FIG. 9A illustrates a method  900  for accessing services within a server without a need for knowledge of an application program interface of the server. A role container is first created in operation  902 . In operation  904 , a role class is defined and in operation  906  an attribute for the role class is generated which includes a default start page attribute. In the role container, a role object is made in the role class with the default start page attribute associated therewith in operation  908 . A uniform resource locator is selected in operation  910  for the default start page attribute. 
     A plurality of attributes may be generated for the role container. Further, these attributes may include a default start page attribute, a user name attribute, a user identifier attribute, and/or a role name attribute. 
     A user may be assigned to the role object. Optionally, a plurality of role objects may be made in the role class with each role object having a unique default start page associated therewith. As another option, an operator role object and a customer role object may be made as well. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     This portion of the present description details the ReTA Site Server framework design from the perspective of the application developer. The role of this framework is to provide components that allow one to integrate the ReTA custom frameworks with Site Server. This provides a user component connecting to Site Server, but does not require knowledge of the Site Server API itself to integrate with Site Server. 
     Site Server Framework Execution Architecture 
     To connect to Site Server a COM component (UserSS) is used to make calls to Site Server&#39;s API. The ReTA UserSS component allows the developer to access Site Server&#39;s Personalization and Membership Services without any knowledge of Site Server&#39;s API. 
     FIG. 9B illustrates Site Server Framework Architecture. This figure shows the different layers in the Site Server framework architecture. The UserSS COM component  930  connects to Site Server  932 . The UserSS component uses Site Server&#39;s Personalization and Membership; UserSS also performs security as well on a Commerce Site. The ReTA framework  934  uses the UserSS layer to provide access to Site Server. The UserSS layer provides the following benefits: 
     It insulates the application developer from Site Server&#39;s API. 
     It provides functionality for using Site Server&#39;s Personalization and Membership Services. 
     Site Server Framework Development Architecture 
     UserSS Interface Methods 
     The UserSS component interfaces with the SiteServer personalization and membership services. This component uses SiteServer to handle the user security, role and preferences. 
     Methods 
     The IAFUser, IAFUserPreferences, and IAFUserRole interfaces define the access to the AFUserSS component. These interfaces support the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Init 
                 This method initializes the UserSS Component. 
               
               
                 GetUserID 
                 This method returns a string value representing the user 
               
               
                   
                 id. SiteServer&#39;s API is used to obtain this value. 
               
               
                 GetUserName 
                 This method returns a string value representing the user&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 name. SiteServer&#39;s API is used to obtain this value. 
               
               
                 GetRealName 
                 This method returns a string value representing the user&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 real name. SiteServer&#39;s API is used to obtain this value. 
               
               
                 GetPref 
                 This method takes as input a preference label and returns 
               
               
                   
                 a string value representing the user&#39;s preference value. 
               
               
                   
                 SiteServer&#39;s API is used to obtain this value. 
               
               
                 SetPref 
                 This method accepts two parameters (String 
               
               
                   
                 thePrefLabel, String thePrefValue). The preference is set 
               
               
                   
                 that matches the “thePrefLabel” passed in. 
               
               
                 GetRoleID 
                 This method returns the current users Role id. 
               
               
                 GetRoleName 
                 This method returns the current user&#39;s role name. 
               
               
                 GetRolePref 
                 This method takes as input a preference label returns the 
               
               
                   
                 current user&#39;s role preference value. 
               
               
                 SetRolePref 
                 This method sets the current user&#39;s role preference 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Site Server Personalization and Membership/Directory Membership Manager 
     This portion of the description describes the required settings in Site Server Commerce Edition used by the ReTA frameworks. This portion of the description also describes the steps involved in creating the required settings. 
     ReTA Required Settings 
     The Membership Directory Manager is used to manage administration and access control for Membership Directory objects, including users and groups, and schema objects. The Membership Directory stores objects used by all Site Server features. The ReTA UserSS framework requires schema objects to be created. The schema objects required by the ReTA Frameworks are: Roles container  1000 , RoleName attribute  1002 , username attribute  1004 , webUserId attribute, and a Role class. FIG. 10 illustrates schema attributes and classes, with class “Role” and attribute “RoleName” shown. 
     Required Container, Class, and Attribute Setup Instructions 
     Users may have different roles within the system. In Site Server ReTA takes advantage of this by creating a Container “Roles” that contains different “Roles” or different objects of the class “Role”. These “Roles” have attributes such as a default start page. Therefore different “Roles” (different objects of the class “Role”) such as “Operator” or “Customer” may both have a default start page attribute that may point to different URL&#39;s. 
     The Site Server portion of the present description details how to setup a Container, Class, and Attributes. The following lists the steps involved to setup the required attributes for the ReTA Frameworks to integrate with Site Server. 
     Using the Site Server Console, Right Click on the Membership Directory Manager Folder. 
     Select New—Container, then type in Roles for the Container name. 
     FIG. 11 illustrates the creating of Container “Roles”. Right click on Membership Directory Manager  1100  and select New  1102 —Container  1104 . After creating the Container “Roles”, create the attribute “DefaultStartPage”, “username”, webUserId”, and “RoleName” in the Schema. To create these attributes expand the Admin Container under the Membership Directory Manager. 
     Right click on the Schema folder  1200  and select New  1202 —Attribute  1204  (See FIG. 12) 
     Define the class “Role” the same way by right clicking on Schema and selecting New—Class. 
     Select the “common-name” as a required attribute, also select the “DefaultStartPage” as an attribute but do not make it required. 
     Create the Roles for our Application, “Operator” and “Customer”. 
     See FIG. 13, which illustrates the adding of different Roles. Right click the Roles Container  1300  under the Membership Directory Manager folder  1302 . Select New  1304 —Object  1306 , select “Role” for the class of object to create, type the name of the object i.e. “Operator”, add the attribute “DefaultStartPage” by clicking Add Attribute button and enter the URL. 
     Once these have been created, a member of the system can be assigned to a “Role” and the ReTA Framework required attributes can be added to the user. FIG. 14 illustrates an example showing the attributes  1400  of member “Joe Bloggs” (Note RoleName). 
     EVENT HANDLER FRAMEWORK DESIGN 
     FIG. 15A illustrates a method  1500  for handling events in a system. In operation  1502 , an event which includes metadata is recognized. Next, in operation  1504 , the metadata of the event is read and, in operation  1506  a table look-up is performed for information relating to the event based on the metadata. The information includes a severity of the event and further information such as a type of the event, and a location where the event occurred. In operation  1508 , a message is displayed either in-line in a currently depicted display or in a separate display based on the severity of the event. 
     Optionally, the event may additionally be indicated to components of the system other than the component in which the event occurred. The type of the event may be a database error, an architecture error, a security error, and/or an application error. Further the location of the event may be at leas t one of a method and an object where the event occurred. Also, the information may further relate to a code associated with the event. 
     The message may include the information relating to the event. In additionally, the message may also include a time during which the event occurred. Further, the message may include a string altered based on a user profile. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     This portion of the present description details the ReTA Event Handler framework design from the perspective of the application developer. The role of this framework is to provide services to manage the informational, warning and error events that an application may raise. These services include: 
     Presenting the user with an understandable event explanation. 
     Informing other Components when errors happen (for example to restore transactional data to a consistent state) using a Publish/Subscribe mechanism. 
     Logging informational, warning and error event messages. 
     The Event Handler uses an Event Reference meta-data database table to maintain information about the types of events in an application and the policy for dealing with them. This gives a flexible approach and the event messages, the severity and other policies for the events can be changed during operations. 
     Phase 2—Event Handler Enhancements 
     For phase 2, Event Handler consists of the following enhancements: 
     The Event Handler framework is componentized. It no longer maintains references to any of the other framework components. Internally, the Event Handler continues to use the persistence light framework to log events to the database. 
     As in phase 1, it can be used as a Session level component. As an enhancement for phase 2, the Event Handler framework can be used as a stateless page level component. This means that a new instance of the component is created at the beginning of each ASP page and is released at the end of each page. 
     The Event Handler framework no longer requires Event Collection components as parameters to implement event handling, which only allowed handling events at the page level. In phase 2, the new method “processSingleEvent” takes the parameters of a single event as its input, which enables handling events at the occurrence of the event. 
     As in phase 1, The Event Handler can format error descriptions in HTML. As an enhancement for phase 2, the Event Handler can return the error message as a string and enables the application to implement client specific formatting (HTML or other). 
     The process event method no longer calls the ASP redirect method. Instead, it returns the severity level code. On return, the application logic determines whether to redirect to the error page or display the error in-line in the current page. 
     The Translator is no longer a separate component. Instead, it is a Java class inside the Event Handler component. 
     Event Handler Framework 
     Description 
     With reference to FIG. 15B, the ReTA Event Handler Framework  1530  manages the informational, warning and error events that an application raises. The following describes the ReTA event handling sequence: 
     1) The event(s) occurs 
     When an event occurs the following event information is recorded: 
     event type (defined in database Event Reference table), for example: 
     database error 
     security error 
     architecture error 
     application error 
     event location: 
     method and object name where the event occurred 
     event code (sub-type): 
     SQL error code, 
     application error code—mapped to a unique description in the database 
     architecture error code—mapped to a unique description in the database 
     event context: 
     Any relevant information about when the event occurred stored in a tagged 
     name value pair format. Eg. [OrderNumber=1][Description=“Repeat Order”] 
     If the event occurs within a Java class inside a COM object, use the Java exception mechanism by throwing an AFEventException. If the exception occurs elsewhere, call the add method on the Event Collection passing the event informnation. 
     Each method defining a COM component interface captures these event exceptions and either adds them to an Event Collection component or directly calls a method on the Event Handler component. 
     Events are processed from the ASP page by calling the process method of the Event Handler. Events can also processed from the point where the event occurred by calling the “processSingleEvent” method of the Event Handler. 
     2) The Event Handler processes the event(s): 
     For each event, set the user id and current page 
     For each event, retrieve the event severity from the event handler&#39;s “translator” class. This class caches in memory all event descriptions and severity levels retrieved from the event reference database table. 
     Add the events to the Event Handler context. 
     Implement the persistence policy on the events—events are logged in a batch. 
     Return the severity of the most severe event to the caller. The caller is responsible for either redirecting to the error page or displaying the event in-line in the Current Page. 
     3) Display the event: 
     Use the Event Handler component to generate the error message. This message can contain context information describing when the event was created. 
     Create the HTML formatting and display the event message. 
     The Error Message is either displayed in-line in the current page or in a separate error page. 
     4) The Event Handler generates error display message: 
     Get the event with the highest severity level from its event context. 
     If the most severe event is “fatal”, display the user description associated with the event. Broadcast a SESSION_ABORT message using the Publish/Subscribe mechanism. Any component that is interested in these events must implement the IAFEventListener interface and register with the Event Broadcaster component as interested. To do this they call the addListener method of the Event Handler component. 
     If the most severe event is “logical unit of work”, display the user description associated with the event. Broadcast an ACTIVITY_ABORT message using the Publish/Subscribe mechanism. 
     If the most severe event is “warning”, display the user description associated with the event. 
     Note: The user event descriptions are retrieved from the database either on session start or on demand and are cached by the Translator class. When generating the event description page, this description is requested from the Translator. Event descriptions can have embedded context parameters. 
     When generating the event description page, the event handler replaces these parameters with their values specified when creating the event. 
     Database Tables 
     The Event Handler uses two database tables: The T_AF_EventReference  1534  is a static table that describes the Event meta-data, giving the policies for each event type. The policies include: 
     The message that is displayed to the user. These messages can contain data from the Context that is included when the event is generated. 
     The severity of the event. The severity can be Information, Warning, Error and Fatal. 
     Whether to persist the event in the database event log. 
     The T_AF_EventLog  1536  contains the log of the events that occurred. The following information is logged: 
     Event type and Code 
     The location where the event occurred. I.e. ASP, Object name and Method Name. 
     The user that raised the event. 
     The datestamp. 
     The context information giving other information about what caused the event. 
     Services 
     The Event Handler Framework provides the following services: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Service 
                 Detail 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Register event 
                 Create event 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Maintain event reference 
               
               
                   
                 Process event 
                 Information 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Warning 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Logical Unit of Work 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Fatal 
               
               
                   
                 Display events 
                 Translate event 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Inform user 
               
               
                   
                 Persist event 
                 Log event to database 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Components and Classes 
     The Event Handler Framework implements these services through the following COM and Class objects: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Service 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFEvent 
                 Handle events generated by the system 
               
               
                 Handler 
               
               
                 AFEvent 
                 Contains a collection of events (AFEventException) 
               
               
                 Collection 
               
               
                 AFResult 
                 Defines the result returned by a method execution. 
               
               
                 Class 
               
               
                 AFEvent 
                 Contains single event information. 
               
               
                 Exception 
               
               
                 AFEvent 
                 Contains event reference information from database table 
               
               
                 Reference 
                 T_AF_EventReference 
               
               
                 AFTranslator 
                 Returns event reference information based on the event 
               
               
                   
                 type and event code 
               
               
                   
                 Note: multi-language translation functionality not 
               
               
                   
                 implemented 
               
               
                 AFPersistable 
                 This is the persistable class containing the information 
               
               
                 Event 
                 for a single event. It is a sub-class of the Persistence 
               
               
                   
                 PersistableObj class. The persistance mechanism can 
               
               
                   
                 insert, delete, select and update objects of this class in the 
               
               
                   
                 database. This class persists event information the 
               
               
                   
                 T_AF_EventLog table. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     These components and classes are described in detailed in the following sub-portions of the description. 
     AFEventHandler 
     The AFEventHandler component  1538  handles the events generated by the system. Depending on the severity level, the event handler may redirect the user to another ASP page and may abort the activity or session. The event handler also determines whether and when to log an event. 
     Methods 
     The IAFEventHandler interface defines the access to the AFEventHandler component. This interface supports the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 PersistAllEvents 
                 Persist all the events stored by the event 
               
               
                   
                 handler to the database. 
               
               
                 ProcessSingleEvent 
                 Gather associated event information. Call the 
               
               
                   
                 add method to persist the events in the event 
               
               
                   
                 log. Return the event severity to the caller. 
               
               
                   
                 This method is called either from the ASP page 
               
               
                   
                 or from a Java class where the Event was 
               
               
                   
                 trapped. 
               
               
                 Process 
                 Examine the events and gather associated 
               
               
                   
                 event information. Call the add method to 
               
               
                   
                 persist the events in the event log. Return the 
               
               
                   
                 event severity of the most severe event to the 
               
               
                   
                 caller. The application developer calls this 
               
               
                   
                 method from an ASP page to check the events 
               
               
                   
                 generated during the scripting logic execution. 
               
               
                 Generate 
                 Return generated HTML which describes the 
               
               
                   
                 severity of the error, gives the target URL 
               
               
                   
                 (depending on the severity previous page, 
               
               
                   
                 activity start page or home page) and an error 
               
               
                   
                 log. The Event Handler page calls this 
               
               
                   
                 method. 
               
               
                 Initialize 
                 The application developer can invoke this 
               
               
                   
                 method to load all event descriptions in 
               
               
                   
                 memory (nomially used to speed access during 
               
               
                   
                 user session). 
               
               
                 GetErrorDescription 
                 Return error message as a string, which 
               
               
                   
                 describes the severity of the error. This allows 
               
               
                   
                 the application to determine the HTML 
               
               
                   
                 formatting used to display an error. 
               
               
                 HasFatalError 
                 If the event handler contains at least one fatal 
               
               
                   
                 error, returns true. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFEventCollection 
     The AFEventCollection component contains a collection of events. 
     Methods 
     The IAFEventCollection interface defines the access to the AFEventCollection component. This interface supports the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 SpecifySubActivity 
                 Attach the sub-activity to all events contained 
               
               
                   
                 in the event collection. 
               
               
                 GetSubActivity 
                 Return the sub-activity attached to all events 
               
               
                   
                 contained in the event collection. 
               
               
                 Add 
                 Add an event to the event collection. 
               
               
                 Get 
                 Return the requested event. 
               
               
                 NumberOfEvents 
                 Return the number of events in the collection. 
               
               
                 Clear 
                 Clear all the events from the collection. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFResult 
     The AFResult component defines the result return by a method execution. 
     Methods 
     The IAFResult interface defines the access to the AFResult component. This interface supports the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 GetResult 
                 Return the result. 
               
               
                   
                 AddResult 
                 Add a result. 
               
               
                   
                 AddResultString 
                 Add the result as a string. 
               
               
                   
                 GetResultString 
                 Return the result as a string. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFTranslator 
     The AFTranslator class returns event reference information (based on the event type and event code. 
     Methods 
     The AFTranslator class has the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 GetEventTranslation 
                 Return the description for this event. 
               
               
                 GetEventSeverity 
                 Return the severity level for this event. 
               
               
                 GetEventPersist 
                 Return flag that defines whether to persist this 
               
               
                   
                 event. 
               
               
                 GetUserDescription 
                 Return the user description for this event. This 
               
               
                   
                 description is displayed to the user. 
               
               
                 GetDescription 
                 Return the description for this event. This 
               
               
                   
                 description is user by the technical support 
               
               
                   
                 team to analyze error. 
               
               
                 Start 
                 Initialize component. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFEventException 
     The AFEventException class contains the event exception information and is added to the AFEventCollection component for processing by the AFEventHandler component. 
     Methods 
     The following AFEventException class methods are important for the application developer to understand: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFEventException 
                 Create the event exception class and populate 
               
               
                   
                 it with 
               
               
                   
                 event type: 
               
               
                   
                 database error 
               
               
                   
                 Java error 
               
               
                   
                 security error 
               
               
                   
                 architecture error 
               
               
                   
                 application error 
               
               
                   
                 event location: 
               
               
                   
                 method and object name where the event 
               
               
                   
                 occurred 
               
               
                   
                 event code (sub-type): 
               
               
                   
                 SQL error code, 
               
               
                   
                 Application error code - mapped to a unique 
               
               
                   
                 description in the database 
               
               
                   
                 Architecture error code - mapped to a unique 
               
               
                   
                 description in the database 
               
               
                   
                 event context: 
               
               
                   
                 value of specific object 
               
               
                 AddToCollection 
                 Add the current event to event collection. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFEventReference 
     The AFEventReference component  1540  contains the event reference information that is defined by the application through database table T_AF_EventReference. The architecture reads the event reference data into memory on session start. 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 T_AF_EventReference: 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Column name 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Id 
                 Unique id 
               
               
                 Type 
                 The event type 
               
               
                 Code 
                 The event code 
               
               
                 SeverityLevel 
                 The event severity level: 
               
               
                   
                 1:Information 
               
               
                   
                 2:Warning 
               
               
                   
                 3:Abort the activity 
               
               
                   
                 4:Fatal, close the session 
               
               
                 Persist 
                 1:if the event should be persisted in the event log. 
               
               
                   
                 0:if the event should not be persisted 
               
               
                 Description 
                 Event description showed to the operator 
               
               
                 UserDescription 
                 Event description shown to the user. This description 
               
               
                   
                 can contain contextual information, which is specified 
               
               
                   
                 by adding tag like [ParameterName] in the description. 
               
               
                   
                 These tags are replaced by the event framework when 
               
               
                   
                 displaying the event to the user. 
               
               
                 Language 
                 Language of the description. This may be used by the 
               
               
                   
                 multi-language framework when developed. At this 
               
               
                   
                 time, set to ‘English’. 
               
               
                 Context 
                 Event context default value. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFPersistableEvent 
     The AFPersistableEvent  1542  contains the event information captured during the application execution that is persisted to the database table T_AF_EVENTLOG. 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 T_AF_EVENTLOG: 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Column name 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Id 
                 Unique id 
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 The event type 
               
               
                   
                 Code 
                 The event code 
               
               
                   
                 SeverityLevel 
                 The event severity level: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1:Information 
               
               
                   
                   
                 2:Warning 
               
               
                   
                   
                 3:Abort the activity 
               
               
                   
                   
                 4:Fatal, close the session 
               
               
                   
                 SubActivityLevel 
                 Name of Sub Activity where event occurred. 
               
               
                   
                 MethodName 
                 Name of class method where event occurred. 
               
               
                   
                 ObjectName 
                 Name of class where event occurred. 
               
               
                   
                 ASP 
                 Name of ASP page where event occurred. 
               
               
                   
                 Context 
                 Event context default value. 
               
               
                   
                 UserID 
                 ID of user logged in when event occurred. 
               
               
                   
                 LastUpdate 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     USER FRAMEWORK DESIGN 
     FIG. 16A depicts a method  1600  for managing user information. A site server is provided in operation  1602 . The side server has information stored on it including preferences, roles, and details relating to users. A database separate from the site server is provided in operation  1604 . The database has information stored thereon including preferences, roles, and details relating to the users. In operation  1606 , an identity of one of the users is authenticated. A single interface is displayed in operation  1608 , which provides the user access to both the site server and the database upon authentication of the identity of the user. In operation  1610 , the user is allowed to view and change the information that is stored on the site server and the database and that is associated with the user. The single interface is tailored in operation  1612  based on the information associated with the user. 
     The identity of the user may be authenticated by verifying a user name and a password, a secure sockets layer (SSL) certificate, and/or a log-in form. Further, the preferences relating to the users may include a currency in which monetary values are displayed and a language in which text is displayed. Also, the roles relating to the users may include a customer, a manager, and an employee. Additionally, the details of the users may include a user name and a legal name. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     This portion of the present description details the ReTA User framework design from the perspective of the application developer. The primary role of this framework is to provide services that allow the application developer to maintain user preferences, roles and security. 
     In regards to security, the User framework provides User Authentication services through any of the standard Internet Information Server security methods: 
     Username/Password sent in clear text. 
     SSL Certificates 
     Windows NT Challenge/Response (Intranet only) 
     HTML Forms login (Site Server version only) 
     Once the user has been authenticated, the User framework provides services for accessing: 
     User information—NT username, Real Name. 
     User Preference information—For example Language, Currency (These are configurable) 
     User Role information (e.g. Customer, Manager, Employee) 
     User Role Preference information 
     There are two implementations of the User Component: One is database driven and the other interfaces with Site Server Personalization and Membership directory. 
     User Framework 
     Description 
     With reference to FIG. 16B, the User framework  1630  enables two approaches to maintaining user information. The framework supports two approaches by exposing a single set of interfaces that can be used by either of the two user framework components. With the AFUserSS component  1632 , the framework interfaces with the Microsoft Site Server products Personalization and Membership Directory. For this user component, SiteServer holds and manages user information. With the AFUserDB component  1634 , the framework interfaces with database tables. For this user component, database tables define the user information. 
     Services 
     The User Framework provides the following services: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Service 
                 Detail 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 User Information 
                 User Role 
               
               
                   
                 Maintenance 
                 User RoleName 
               
               
                   
                   
                 User Preferences 
               
               
                   
                   
                 User Role Preferences 
               
               
                   
                   
                 User Id 
               
               
                   
                   
                 User Name 
               
               
                   
                   
                 User RealName. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Components 
     The User Framework implements these services through the following COM objects: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Service 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFUserDB 
                 User information maintained through the following 
               
               
                   
                 database tables. 
               
               
                   
                 T_AF_USERNAME, 
               
               
                   
                 T_AF_USERPREFERENCES 
               
               
                   
                 T_AF_USERROLES 
               
               
                 AFUserSS 
                 User information maintained through SiteServer. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     These components are described in detailed in the following sub-portions of the description. 
     AFUserDB 
     The AFUserDB component holds the user role, preferences and details retrieved from the database. When created the user component retrieves the user NT login name, user details and constructs the user preference and user role objects. 
     Methods 
     The IAFUser, IAFUserPreferences and IAFUserRole interfaces define the access to the AFUserDB component. These interfaces support the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Init 
                 This method retrieves the user&#39;s NT name, user details 
               
               
                   
                 from the database, constructs the preference object and 
               
               
                   
                 constructs user&#39;s role object. 
               
               
                 GetUserID 
                 Returns the user id. 
               
               
                 GetUserName 
                 Returns the user&#39;s NT account name. 
               
               
                 GetRealName 
                 Returns the user&#39;s real name. 
               
               
                 GetPref 
                 Returns user&#39;s preference based on label passed to this 
               
               
                   
                 method. 
               
               
                 SetPref 
                 This method sets the user&#39;s preference to the 2 nd   
               
               
                   
                 parameter passed in. 
               
               
                 GetRoleID 
                 Returns the user&#39;s role ID 
               
               
                 GetRoleName 
                 Returns the user&#39;s role name. 
               
               
                 GetRolePref 
                 Returns role preference. 
               
               
                 SetRolePref 
                 This method sets the current user&#39;s role preference 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFUserSS 
     The UserSS component interfaces with the SiteServer personalization and membership services. This component uses SiteServer to handle the user security, role and preferences. 
     Methods 
     The IAFUser, IAFUserPreferences, and IAFUserRole interfaces define the access to the AFUserSS component. These interfaces support the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Init 
                 This method returns a zero integer. It is here for 
               
               
                   
                 compatibility with the UserDB component. 
               
               
                 GetUserID 
                 This method returns a string value representing the user 
               
               
                   
                 id. SiteServer&#39;s API is used to obtain this value. 
               
               
                 GetUserName 
                 This method returns a string value representing the user&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 name. SiteServer&#39;s API is used to obtain this value. 
               
               
                 GetRealName 
                 This method returns a string value representing the user&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 real name. SiteServer&#39;s API is used to obtain this value. 
               
               
                 GetPref 
                 This method returns a string value representing the user&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 preference. SiteServer&#39;s API is used to obtain this value. 
               
               
                 SetPref 
                 This method accepts two parameters (String 
               
               
                   
                 the PrefLabel, String thePrefValue). The preference is set 
               
               
                   
                 that matches the “thePrefLabel” passed in. 
               
               
                 GetRoleID 
                 This method returns the current user id. 
               
               
                 GetRoleName 
                 This method returns the current user&#39;s role name. 
               
               
                 GetRolePref 
                 This method returns the current user&#39;s role preference. 
               
               
                 SetRolePref 
                 This method sets the current user&#39;s role preference 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     PERSISTENCE FRAMEWORK DESIGN 
     FIG. 17A illustrates a method  1700  for managing business objects in a system that includes a plurality of sub-activities which each include sub-activity logic adapted to generate an output based on an input received from a user upon execution, and a plurality of activities which each execute the sub-activities in a unique manner upon being selected for accomplishing a goal associated with the activity. First, in operation  1702 , an identifier and a reference to a business object are received from one of the sub-activities upon the execution thereof. In operation  1704 , a database is accessed and data from the database is retrieved based on the identifier. The business object is created and populated with the data retrieved from the database in operation  1706 . 
     The data may be stored on the database in tables. Further, the created business object may replace an existing business object. Additionally, the identifier may identify a customer and the business object may be a customer object. Also, a business object referenced by one of the sub-activities may be removed upon the execution thereof. 
     The business object may be a Visual Basic business object. In another aspect of the present invention, the business object may be a Java business object. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     This portion of the present description details the ReTA Persistence framework design from the perspective of the application developer. The role of this framework is to provide services that interact with application database(s) to create, retrieve, update and delete business objects. 
     Persistence Framework 
     Description 
     The ReTA Persistence framework provides a transparent and flexible mapping of the business object attributes to relational database tables. To implement this “business object to database table” mapping, the framework is tightly integrated with all business objects. The framework exposes abstract methods that the application developer implements in the business objects. In contrast with the other ReTA frameworks, the Persistence framework is not implemented as a separate component. The Persistence framework is a set of local language classes available in Java or Visual Basic. FIG. 17B shows a SubActivity component  1730  using the Persistence framework  1732  to retrieve a Customer Object  1734  from the Database. 
     Services 
     The Persistence Framework provides the following services: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Service 
                 Detail 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Database Connection 
                 Uncouple database connection from application 
               
               
                 Database mapping 
                 Map an object to a database table 
               
               
                 Object query 
                 Trigger queries on objects 
               
               
                   
                 Easily iterate through the results 
               
               
                 Record locking 
                 Optimistic locking 
               
               
                 Encryption 
                 Encode Database User Name and Password 
               
               
                   
                 Note: Encoding implemented only once (as part 
               
               
                   
                 of system set up). 
               
               
                   
                 Decode Database User Name and Password 
               
               
                   
                 Note: Used by persistence framework during all 
               
               
                   
                 database accesses. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Classes 
     The Persistence Framework implements these services through the following Java or Visual Basic Classes: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Service 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Java Class 
                   
               
               
                 AFPLPersistableObj 
                 This is the superclass of all Java Persistable Objects 
               
               
                   
                 in the application. Application developers create 
               
               
                   
                 a subclass for each Business Object and implement 
               
               
                   
                 all the abstract methods that this class defines. 
               
               
                 AFPLExtent 
                 Provides the mapping between the business object 
               
               
                   
                 and its associated database table and manages the 
               
               
                   
                 database connection. 
               
               
                 Visual Basic Class 
               
               
                 VBPersistObj 
                 This is the interface class that all Persistable VB 
               
               
                   
                 must implement. Application developers create 
               
               
                   
                 a subclass for each Business Object and 
               
               
                   
                 implement all the methods that this class defines. 
               
               
                 VBExtent 
                 Provides the mapping between the business object 
               
               
                   
                 and its associated database table and manages 
               
               
                   
                 the database connection. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     These classes are described in detailed in the following sub-portions of the description. 
     AFPLPersistableObj 
     The AFPLPersistableObj abstract class contains methods called by the application developer objects to manage attribute values common to all persistable business objects (user id and last update timestamp). In addition, the AFPLPersistableObj class represents the superclass of a persisted object. In order to persist a business class; the application developer extends AFPLPersistableObj and implements the AFPLPersistableObj abstract methods. 
     The AFPLPersistableObj defines the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 addColumnNames 
                 Return the column names common to all 
               
               
                   
                 persistable business objects (user id and last 
               
               
                   
                 update timestamp). The application 
               
               
                   
                 developer invokes this method from the 
               
               
                   
                 constructor method of a business object. 
               
               
                 addPersistedAttributes 
                 Return attributes common to all persistable 
               
               
                   
                 business objects (user id and last update 
               
               
                   
                 timestamp). The application developer 
               
               
                   
                 invokes this method from the 
               
               
                   
                 getPersistedAttributes method of a business 
               
               
                   
                 object. 
               
               
                 isEqual 
                 Abstract method that all Business Objects 
               
               
                   
                 must implement. If the passed in attribute is 
               
               
                   
                 one of the attributes common to all persist- 
               
               
                   
                 able business objects (user id and last update 
               
               
                   
                 timestamp), compare the passed in value to 
               
               
                   
                 the currently held attribute value. The 
               
               
                   
                 application developer should also invoke 
               
               
                   
                 the superclass isEqual. 
               
               
                 newFrom 
                 Abstract method that all Business Objects 
               
               
                   
                 must implement. Populate the Business 
               
               
                   
                 Object using the result set passed as an 
               
               
                   
                 attribute. The application developer 
               
               
                   
                 should also invoke the superclass 
               
               
                   
                 newFrom method to populate the 
               
               
                   
                 UserId and lastUpdate attributes. 
               
               
                 attributeGet 
                 Abstract method that all Business Objects 
               
               
                   
                 must implement. Return the value of the 
               
               
                   
                 attribute passed as parameter 
               
               
                 attributeSet 
                 Abstract method that all Business Objects 
               
               
                   
                 must implement. Set the value of the 
               
               
                   
                 attribute passed as parameter 
               
               
                 setUserId 
                 Set the user id value 
               
               
                 getUserId 
                 Return the user id value 
               
               
                 setTimeStamp 
                 Set the last update timestamp value 
               
               
                 getTimeStamp 
                 Return the last update timestamp value. 
               
               
                 setUserIdTimeStamptoObj 
                 Adds the last update timestamp value and 
               
               
                   
                 user id to the passed in persistable business 
               
               
                   
                 object. 
               
               
                   
                 The application developer invokes this 
               
               
                   
                 method from the setUserIdTimeStamptoObj 
               
               
                   
                 method of a business object. 
               
               
                 getColumnNames 
                 Return the database table column names. 
               
               
                 getPersistedAttributes 
                 Return all the attributes to persist. The 
               
               
                   
                 application developer invokes the 
               
               
                   
                 addPersistedAttribute method of the super 
               
               
                   
                 class to add user id and last update 
               
               
                   
                 timestamp attributes. 
               
               
                 getKeyNames 
                 Return the primary key field name. 
               
               
                 getKeyValues 
                 Return all the primary key values. 
               
               
                 getKeyAttributeVector 
                 Return vector of all key attributes. 
               
               
                 getKeyAttributes 
                 Return the array of all key attributes. 
               
               
                 getTableName 
                 Return the name of the database table 
               
               
                   
                 associated with this business object. 
               
               
                 columnList 
                 Returns a comma-separated list of all 
               
               
                   
                 columns corresponding with this class. 
               
               
                 attributesForInsert 
                 Returns a comma separated list of attribute 
               
               
                   
                 values for SQL insert command. 
               
               
                 attributesForUpdate 
                 Returns a comma separated list of attribute 
               
               
                   
                 name = attribute value pairs for SQL update 
               
               
                   
                 command. 
               
               
                 conditionForUpdateRemove 
                 Returns the ‘where’ clause for SQL update 
               
               
                   
                 or remove command (both are equal). 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFPLExtent 
     The AFPLExtent class provides the mapping between the business object and its associated database table. In addition, the AFPLExtent class represents the domain defined by the visible part of the database table for the specified user. This class holds the passed in database URL, username and password used during the access to the database. Lastly, the AFPLExtent class manages the database connection. 
     Methods 
     The AFPLExtent class implements the following methods used by the application developer from business factory objects: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Select 
                 Return all business objects matching the search 
               
               
                   
                   
                 criteria. 
               
               
                   
                 Update 
                 Update all business objects matching the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 search criteria 
               
               
                   
                 Delete 
                 Remove all business objects matching the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 specified criteria 
               
               
                   
                 Insert 
                 Insert new business object(s) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     VBPersistObj 
     The VBPersistObj interface class contains methods that need to be implemented on every VB Business Object. 
     The application developer implements the following methods from their business object: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 newFrom 
                 Create a new instance of that class using the 
               
               
                   
                 resultset passed as parameter 
               
               
                 GetValue 
                 Returns the value for the attribute passed as 
               
               
                   
                 parameter. 
               
               
                 SetValue 
                 Sets the value for the attribute passed as 
               
               
                   
                 parameter. 
               
               
                 GetColumns 
                 Return the database table column names. 
               
               
                 GetTableName 
                 Return the Table Name where this class is 
               
               
                   
                 stored in the database. 
               
               
                 attributesForInsert 
                 Returns a comma separated list of attribute 
               
               
                   
                 values for SQL insert command. 
               
               
                 attributesForUpdate 
                 Returns a comma separated list of attribute 
               
               
                   
                 name = attribute value pairs for SQL update 
               
               
                   
                 command. 
               
               
                 conditionForUpdateRemove 
                 Returns the ‘where’ clause for SQL update 
               
               
                   
                 or remove command (both are equal). 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     VBExtent 
     The VBExtent class provides the mapping between the business object and its associated database table. In addition, the VBExtent class represents the domain defined by the visible part of the database table for the specified user. This class holds the passed in database URL, username and password used during the access to the database. Lastly, the VBExtent class manages the database connection. 
     Methods 
     The VBExtent class implements the following methods used by the application developer from business factory objects: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Select 
                 Return all business objects matching the search 
               
               
                   
                   
                 criteria. 
               
               
                   
                 Update 
                 Update all business objects matching the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 search criteria 
               
               
                   
                 Delete 
                 Remove all business objects matching the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 specified criteria 
               
               
                   
                 Insert 
                 Insert new business object(s) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     SESSION FRAMEWORK DESIGN 
     FIG. 18A illustrates a method  1800  for persisting information during a user session. First, in operation  1802 , a session is initiated upon a user accessing a predetermined starting page. A current page accessed by the user is then tracked in operation  1804  while browsing a plurality of pages during the session. In operation  1806 , a record is maintained of a page previously accessed by the user during the session. Information is persisted in operation  1808 . This information is selected from a group of items such as user identifier, a time of a most recent user action during the session, activity components accessed during the session, and business components accessed during the session. During the session, the current page, previous page record, and information are provided to at least one activity component in operation  1810 . Also in operation  1810 , the activity component generates output based on input provided by the user via the plurality of pages. 
     In one embodiment of the present invention, the activity components to which the current page, previous page record, and information are provided may be selectively determined. In addition, the activity component may be provided an indication as to whether the user is permitted to access each of the pages. In such a case, the activity component may also be provided the indication as to whether the user is permitted to access each of the pages based on the previous page record. 
     In another embodiment of the present invention, the information may also include the user identifier. In such an embodiment, user preferences may be looked up based on the user identifier with the information including the user preferences. Also, in order to identify the persisted information, references to activity components, business components, a user component, a tracking manager component, a system preference component, and an event handler component may be employed. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     This portion of the present description details the ReTA Session framework design from the perspective of the application developer. The primary role of this framework is to provide services to handle the stateless nature of Internet. By default, the Internet does not provide services for maintaining information between pages. Without these services, it would not be possible to implement most eCommerce functionality. For example, session level state is necessary to implement eCommerce functionality where a customer can select products on multiple product description pages and then submit a complete product order request from a confirm order page. The ReTA Session framework leverages the Internet Information Server/Active Server Page (IIS/ASP) session object, which is automatically created when a user who has no open IIS sessions requests a Web page. 
     Session Framework 
     Description 
     FIG. 18B illustrates a Session Flow Diagram—On Session Start. As shown, a Session framework  1830  operates in the MTS Runtime Environment  1832 . FIG. 19 illustrates a Session Flow Diagram—On Start ASP Page. Again, the Session framework  1900  operates in the MTS Runtime Environment  1902 . The ReTA Session framework provides services required throughout a user session. The user creates the Session framework at log on and removes the Session framework at log off. During the lifetime of the user session, application and architecture components require certain data to persist. This framework provides services to store and retrieve all information needed for a particular user session. This information may persist throughout the user session. The Session framework also provides services to uniquely identify the user and enforce access rights. 
     The user information that the Session framework persists, in memory, between Active Server Page requests includes: 
     User id 
     Identifies session user 
     Last page 
     Last page accessed by the session user. 
     Current page 
     Current page accessed by the session user. 
     Last connection time: 
     Session user&#39;s last connection time. 
     Current activity: 
     Activity currently being executed by the session user (refer to activity framework design) 
     Activity Components 
     All activity components accessed during user session 
     Business Components 
     All business components accessed during user session required by multiple activity components. 
     Note: 
     This framework uses the Active Server Page&#39;s Session Object. Thus, the framework only works with browsers that accept cookies. For other browsers (or if cookies are disabled), a new ASP Session Object may start for each web page. 
     Services 
     The Session Framework provides the following services: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Service 
                 Detail 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Security 
                 User identification 
               
               
                   
                 Page access authorization - Session scope 
               
               
                   
                 Automatic abort - timeout 
               
               
                 Customized 
                 Customized user interface 
               
               
                 information 
                 Customized application access 
               
               
                 delivery 
               
               
                 Manage user session 
                 Inform user on session status 
               
               
                   
                 Abort session 
               
               
                 Flow control 
                 Page to open on action 
               
               
                   
                 Pages of activity 
               
               
                 Maintain context 
                 Activity Component context 
               
               
                   
                 Business Component context - shared among 
               
               
                   
                 activities 
               
               
                 Message Broadcast 
                 Register listener 
               
               
                   
                 Broadcast Message to registered listeners 
               
               
                 Encryption 
                 Encode Database User Name and Password 
               
               
                   
                 Note: Encoding implemented only once (as part of 
               
               
                   
                 system set up). 
               
               
                   
                 Decode Database User Name and Password 
               
               
                   
                 Note: Used by session framework during all 
               
               
                   
                 database accesses. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Components 
     The Session Framework implements these services through the following COM objects: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Service 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFSession 
                 Manages current user session 
               
               
                 AFSystemPreferences 
                 Contains System Preferences from database table 
               
               
                   
                 T_AF_SYSTEMPREFERENCES 
               
               
                 AFTrackingManager 
                 Contains security and flow control info from 
               
               
                   
                 database tables T_AF_PAGESOFACTIVITY, 
               
               
                   
                 T_AF_AUTHDESTINATIONPAGE 
               
               
                   
                 T_AF_AUTHSOURCEPAGE 
               
               
                   
                 T_AF_DESTINATIONFORACTION 
               
               
                 AFBrowserInfo 
                 Contains current user&#39;s web browser information 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     These components are described in detailed in the following sub-portions of the description. 
     AFSession 
     The AFSession component maintains the user&#39;s session state information. To maintain the state information, this component holds references to activity components (logical units of work—application flow logic), business components (business logic required across activity components), user component (user information), tracking manager component (web page access security and web page flow control information), system preference component (system preference information) and event handler component (event handler) created during the user&#39;s session. 
     From the application developer&#39;s perspective, the state maintenance work performed by the AFSession component is transparent. The application developer leverages the session services through populating the database tables with the client specific information. 
     Methods 
     The IAFSession, IAFEventBroadcaster and IAFContext interfaces define the access to the AFSession component. These interfaces support the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFSession 
                   
               
               
                 Start 
                 Start session - Called by ASP (global.asa 
               
               
                   
                 Session_OnStart). 
               
               
                 Stop 
                 Stop session - Called by ASP (global.asa 
               
               
                   
                 Session_OnStop). 
               
               
                 StartPage 
                 This method is called by ASP script logic at the 
               
               
                   
                 start of each page. It is used to broadcast a 
               
               
                   
                 pageStart event to all the listeners (activity 
               
               
                   
                 components) that have registered as interested 
               
               
                   
                 in pageStart events. It also stores this page as 
               
               
                   
                 the current page and moves the existing current 
               
               
                   
                 page into the last page (information held by the 
               
               
                   
                 session&#39;s “tracking” object). 
               
               
                 StopPage 
                 This method is called by ASP script logic at the 
               
               
                   
                 end of each page. It is used to broadcast a 
               
               
                   
                 pageEnd event to all the listeners (activity 
               
               
                   
                 components) that have registered as intrested in 
               
               
                   
                 pageEnd events. 
               
               
                 Abort 
                 This method is called when the session is to be 
               
               
                   
                 aborted. This method calls the abort method 
               
               
                   
                 on all activity components known to session 
               
               
                   
                 (held by the session&#39;s “activity 
               
               
                   
                 context” object). 
               
               
                 SetCurrentPage 
                 Sets the current Active Server Page (held by the 
               
               
                   
                 session&#39;s “tracking” object). 
               
               
                 GetCurrentPage 
                 Returns the current Active Server Page (held in 
               
               
                   
                 the session&#39;s “tracking” object). 
               
               
                 GetLastPage 
                 Returns the last Active Server Page accessed in 
               
               
                   
                 the session (held in the session&#39;s “tracking” 
               
               
                   
                 object). 
               
               
                 SetSessionId 
                 Update the sessionId attribute. 
               
               
                 GetSessionId 
                 Returns the current session Id. 
               
               
                 SetCurrentActivity 
                 Sets the current activity Page (held in the 
               
               
                   
                 session&#39;s “tracking” object). 
               
               
                 GetCurrentActivity 
                 Returns the instance of the current activity (held 
               
               
                   
                 in the session&#39;s “tracking” object). 
               
               
                 GetActivity 
                 Returns the instance of the requested activity 
               
               
                   
                 (held by the session&#39;s “activity context” 
               
               
                   
                 object). 
               
               
                 IsActivityInContext 
                 Ask session if it has a reference to the requested 
               
               
                   
                 activity (held by the session&#39;s “activity 
               
               
                   
                 context” object). If found, returns true, 
               
               
                   
                 else returns false. 
               
               
                 AddActivity 
                 Add the requested activity (references held by the 
               
               
                   
                 session&#39;s “activity context” object). Set the 
               
               
                   
                 requested activity to the current activity 
               
               
                   
                 (held in the session&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 “tracking” object). 
               
               
                 RemoveActivity 
                 Remove the current activity (held by the session&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 “activity context” object). 
               
               
                 GetNextPage 
                 Returns the next web page to access for the 
               
               
                   
                 current activity (information held by the 
               
               
                   
                 “tracking manager” component). 
               
               
                 GetAFUser 
                 Returns the “user” component (information 
               
               
                   
                 associated with the current logged in user). 
               
               
                 SetAfUser 
                 Sets the user for the current session. Returns an 
               
               
                   
                 integer indicating success or failure. 
               
               
                 GetTrackingManager 
                 Returns the “tracking manager” component. 
               
               
                 GetEventHandler 
                 Returns the “event handler” component. 
               
               
                 GetSystemPreference 
                 Returns the “system preference” component. 
               
               
                 AddObject 
                 Add a business object (held by the session&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 “business object context” object). 
               
               
                 GetObject 
                 Returns the instance of the requested business 
               
               
                   
                 object (held by the session&#39;s “business object 
               
               
                   
                 context” object). 
               
               
                 RemoveObject 
                 Remove the instance of the requested business 
               
               
                   
                 object (held by the session&#39;s “business object 
               
               
                   
                 context” object). 
               
               
                 ContainsKey 
                 Returns true if the “label” of the requested 
               
               
                   
                 business object exists (held by the 
               
               
                   
                 session&#39;s “business object 
               
               
                   
                 context” object). 
               
               
                 GetKeys 
                 Returns all business object “labels” (held by the 
               
               
                   
                 session&#39;s “business object context” object). 
               
               
                 AFEventBroadcaster 
               
               
                 AddListener 
                 Add the requested listener (activity component) to 
               
               
                   
                 list of interested listeners. If an activity is 
               
               
                   
                 intereted in a StartPage event (i.e., needs to 
               
               
                   
                 capture user modified data from the previous 
               
               
                   
                 web page), this method is called by 
               
               
                   
                 ASP script logic at the start of the page. 
               
               
                 RemoveListener 
                 Remove the requested listener (activity 
               
               
                   
                 component) from list of interested listeners. 
               
               
                 BroadcastEvent 
                 Invoke the receiveEvent method on all registered 
               
               
                   
                 listeners (activity components). Refer to  activity   
               
               
                   
                   framework design  for the automated user data 
               
               
                   
                 capture functionality. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFSystemPreferences 
     The AFSystemPreferences component contains system preferences (held during the session). This component uses the ReTA persistence framework to read the system preferences from the database (“system preferences” table). 
     Methods 
     The IAFSystemPreferences interface defines the access to the AFSystemPreferences component. This interface supports the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Start 
                 Reads and stores “system preference” data from “system 
               
               
                   
                 preferences” table. 
               
               
                 GetRootAsp 
                 Returns the application&#39;s ASP root location (as defined in 
               
               
                   
                 from “system preferences” table). 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFTrackingManager 
     The AFTrackingManager component provides page sequence security, dialogue flow and activity flow functionality for the session framework. 
     Page Sequence Security 
     The page sequence security is defined in the following tables: 
     Table “Authorized Destination Page”  1834 : 
     Define for each page, the pages that are allowed to be accessed. If no authorized destination pages are defined, the page is authorized to access any page: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Column name 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Id 
                 Unique id 
               
               
                   
                 CurrentPage 
                 Name of the current page 
               
               
                   
                 DestinationPage 
                 Page which is authorized to be access 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Table “Authorized Source Page”  1836 : 
     Define for each page, the pages that are allowed to access it. If no authorized source pages are defined, the page is authorized to be accessed by any page. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Column name 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Id 
                 Unique id 
               
               
                   
                 CurrentPage 
                 Name of the current page 
               
               
                   
                 SourcePage 
                 Page authorized to access the current page 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Dialogue flow 
     The dialogue flow is defined in the following table: 
     Table “Destination For Action”  1838 : 
     Define the action flow between the web pages (i.e., which ASP is open when a specified push button is clicked during a specified activity). 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Column name 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Id 
                 Unique id 
               
               
                   
                 CurrentPage 
                 Name of the current page 
               
               
                   
                 Action 
                 Name of the UI widget, which triggers the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 action. 
               
               
                   
                 Activity 
                 Name of the activity where the event is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 triggered 
               
               
                   
                 DestinationPage 
                 Name of the page to open 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Activity Flow 
     The activity flow is defined in the following table: 
     Table “Page Of Activity”  1840 : 
     Define the automated activity switching when the user jumps from one web page to another. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Column name 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Id 
                 Unique id 
               
               
                   
                 Activity 
                 Name of the activity 
               
               
                   
                 Page 
                 Name of the page belonging to the activity 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Methods 
     The IAFTrackingManager interface  1904  defines the access to the AFTrackingManager component. This interface supports the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 CheckAuthorizedSourcePage 
                 Determines if the previous page is in 
               
               
                   
                 the list of allowable sources for this 
               
               
                   
                 page (as defined in “Authorized 
               
               
                   
                 Source Page” table). If access is 
               
               
                   
                 allowed, returns true. Else, returns 
               
               
                   
                 false. 
               
               
                 CheckAuthorizedDestinationPage 
                 Determines if this page is in the list 
               
               
                   
                 of allowable destinations for the 
               
               
                   
                 previous page (as defined in 
               
               
                   
                 “Authorized Destination Page” 
               
               
                   
                 table). If access 
               
               
                   
                 is allowed, returns true. Else, 
               
               
                   
                 returns false. 
               
               
                 GetDestination 
                 Returns destination page for 
               
               
                   
                 requested action, activity, and 
               
               
                   
                 source page (as defined 
               
               
                   
                 Destination For Action” table). 
               
               
                 IsPartOfActivity 
                 Determines if this page is part of 
               
               
                   
                 requested activity (as defined in 
               
               
                   
                 “Page Of Activity” table). 
               
               
                   
                 If page is part of activity, returns 
               
               
                   
                 true. Else, returns false. 
               
               
                 Start 
                 Reads and stores the Authorized 
               
               
                   
                 Destination Page, Authorized Source, 
               
               
                   
                 Page, Destination For Action and 
               
               
                   
                 Page Of Activity tables. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFBrowserInfo 
     The AFBrowserInfo component contains the user&#39;s browser information. 
     Methods 
     The IAFBrowserInfo and IAFEditable interfaces define the access to the AFBrowserInfo component. These interfaces support the following methods: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 GetBrowserName 
                 Returns the name of the browser that the user 
               
               
                   
                 is currently running. 
               
               
                 GetBrowserVersion 
                 Returns the version of the browser that the 
               
               
                   
                 user is currently running. 
               
               
                 IsPluginSupported 
                 Note: not implemented 
               
               
                 IsCustomPluginSupported 
                 Note: not implemented 
               
               
                 IsMimeSupported 
                 Note: not implemented 
               
               
                 SetValues 
                 Sets the requested attribute&#39;s value. 
               
               
                 GetValue 
                 Returns the requested attribute&#39;s value. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     USER INTERFACE FRAMEWORK DESIGN 
     FIG. 20A illustrates a method  2000  for generating a graphical user interface. A form is initially created in operation  2002 . The form includes a plurality of attribute rules dictating a manner in which user interface objects are situated thereon. In operation  2004 , a plurality of user interface objects are selected. A page is generated in operation  2006  with the selected user interface objects situated on the page in accordance with the attribute rules of the form. JavaScript actions are attached to the selected user interface objects in operation  2008 . The JavaScript actions are capable of being executed upon detection of a user action involving one of the user interface objects. 
     The user interface objects may include one or more of the following: a push button, a text box, a text area, a radio button, a check box, a drop down, a blank item, a user interface list, and a static table. The user action may include at least one of clicking on one of the user interface objects, changing text in one of the interface objects, exiting a text box of one of the interface objects. Further, the user action involving one of the user interface objects may cause a predetermined event. Optionally, the page may be an HTML page. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     This portion of the present description details the ReTA User Interface (UI) framework design from the perspective of the application developer. The role of this framework is to provide services that generate the HTML code for UI widgets and attach Javascript actions to UI widgets. The UI framework exposes these services through a set of Component Object Model (COM) objects. The application developer uses these UI COM objects and their services through scripting logic added to the application&#39;s Active Server Pages (ASP). 
     User Interface Framework 
     The User Interface framework provides components for generating HTML. An HTML page is generated from a combination of the various UI Components. FIG. 20B shows the steps for generating a HTML page consisting of a form  2030  with a TextBox  2032 , a DropDown list  2034  and a PushButton  2036 . 
     The User Interface Framework provides the following services: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Service 
                 Detail 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Generate UI Items 
                 Form 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Push Button 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Text Box (single-line entry field) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Text Area (multi-line entry field) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Radio Button group 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check Box 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Drop Down List Box 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Blank Item 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Static Table 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Single-Select List Box 
               
               
                   
                 Generate UI actions 
                 JavaScript - action shell 
               
               
                   
                   
                 JavaScript - data type validation 
               
               
                   
                   
                 JavaScript - data range validation 
               
               
                   
                   
                 JavaScript - automatic navigation action 
               
               
                   
                 Generate Page Format 
                 Cascading Style Sheet 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Form (grid layout for form elements) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The User Interface Framework implements these services through the following COM objects: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Generates 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 AFForm 
                 Form containing the widgets 
               
               
                 AFPushButton 
                 Push button widget 
               
               
                 AFTextBox 
                 Single-line entry text box widget 
               
               
                 AFTextArea 
                 Multi-line entry text box widget 
               
               
                 AFRadioButton 
                 Radio button widget 
               
               
                 AFCheckBox 
                 Check box widget 
               
               
                 AFDropDown 
                 Combo box widget 
               
               
                 AFBankItem 
                 Blank item widget (used for spacing.) 
               
               
                 AFUIList 
                 Single-Select List Box widget - IE4 Only 
               
               
                 AFStaticTable 
                 Static Table widget 
               
               
                 AFHardCodedASPAction 
                 Javascript function - Move to next page 
               
               
                 AFJScriptAction 
                 HTML - attach Javascript function to a form 
               
               
                   
                 element 
               
               
                 AFScriptGenerator 
                 Javascript tag and functions 
               
               
                 AFStyleSheet 
                 Cascading style sheet (CSS) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     These components are described in detail in the following sub-portions of the description. 
     AFForm 
     The AFForm component is used in conjunction with form element widgets to build complex user interfaces. Initially, the application creates an instance of the form component and sets its attributes. Following this activity, the application creates instances of the associated form element widgets and adds them to the form using the form&#39;s add method. As another service, the form component provides methods to help align all associated form element widgets properly on the page. 
     Methods 
     The IAFForm interface defines the access to the AFForm component. This interface supports the following methods, which the developer uses to create a form. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Int left() 
                 Align the form left 
               
               
                 Int right() 
                 Align the form right 
               
               
                 Int center() 
                 Align the form centrally 
               
               
                 Int caption(String) 
                 Sets the caption that may appear at the top of 
               
               
                   
                 the form. 
               
               
                 Int name(String) 
                 Set the HTML name of the form. This option 
               
               
                   
                 is required by some of the items which can be 
               
               
                   
                 added to the form and should always be set 
               
               
                 Int value(String) 
                 Set the HTML value of the form. 
               
               
                 Int border(int) 
                 Sets the width of the border around the form 
               
               
                 Int size() 
                 Returns the number of form element widgets 
               
               
                   
                 added to form. 
               
               
                 String sendLocation(int, 
                 Value of the Location object attached to the 
               
               
                 eventcollection) 
                 members of this form. 
               
               
                 Int form_width(int) 
                 Sets the width of the form in UI elements. For 
               
               
                   
                 example if set to 2 a form 2 elements wide 
               
               
                   
                 would be created. A third element added to the 
               
               
                   
                 form would be placed on a new line. 
               
               
                 Int cell_width(int) 
                 Sets the HTML Cell padding value for the 
               
               
                   
                 form. A larger number may increase the 
               
               
                   
                 spacing between the form elements. 
               
               
                 Int lockTableWidth(int) 
                 Locks the width of the form to the input value 
               
               
                   
                 in percentage valid ranges (0-100%). Use this 
               
               
                   
                 option to set the amount of screen width the 
               
               
                   
                 form may occupy. 
               
               
                 Int Add(Widget Object, 
                 Add a widget object to this form. Widgets are 
               
               
                 eventcollection) 
                 created separately. 
               
               
                 String 
                 Generates the HTML code for the Form. The 
               
               
                 generate(eventcollection) 
                 return value is the output HTML and should be 
               
               
                   
                 printed to the screen. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFPushButton 
     The AFPushbutton component can only be used in conjunction with a AFForm component (the form&#39;s generate method iterates through the generate method for all form element widgets to build the necessary HTML code). An action object can be attached to a AFPushButton component. (Refer to AFHardCodedASPAction and AFJScriptAction for details). 
     Methods 
     The IAFPushbutton and IAFUIActionItem interfaces define the access to the AFPushbutton component. These interfaces support the following methods, which the developer uses to create a push button form element. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Int left() 
                 Align the button left 
               
               
                 Int right() 
                 Align the button right 
               
               
                 Int center() 
                 Align the button centrally 
               
               
                 Int caption(String) 
                 Set the text that may appear on the button. The 
               
               
                   
                 button may stretch its size to fit this text 
               
               
                 Int name(String) 
                 Set the name of the button. 
               
               
                 Int 
                 Set the button to be the default HTML reset 
               
               
                 setIsResetButton() 
                 button. When this method is called, clicking 
               
               
                   
                 on the button causes the 
               
               
                   
                 values of all HTML form elements in the form 
               
               
                   
                 to which this button belongs to be reset to their 
               
               
                   
                 values when the page was initially loaded. 
               
               
                 Int 
                 Resets the above method. The button returns 
               
               
                 setIsNotResetButton() 
                 to being a normal Widget item. 
               
               
                 Int addAction(Action) 
                 Adds an action to the button. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFTrextBox 
     The AFTextBox component can only be used in conjunction with a AFForm component (the form&#39;s generate method iterates through the generate method for all form element widgets to build the necessary HTML code). An action object can be attached to a AFTextBox component. (Refer to AFHardCodedASPAction and AFJScriptAction for details). 
     Methods 
     The IAFTextBox and IAFUIActionItem interfaces define the access to the AFTextBox component. These interfaces support the following methods, which the developer uses to create a Text Box form element. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Int left() 
                 Align the textbox to the left 
               
               
                 Int right() 
                 Align the textbox to the right 
               
               
                 Int center() 
                 Align the textbox to the center 
               
               
                 Int caption(String) 
                 Set the caption to appear next to the text box. 
               
               
                 Int name(String) 
                 Set the HTML name of the text box 
               
               
                 Int max_length(int) 
                 Set the maximum length of text in the box 
               
               
                 Int size(int) 
                 Set the visible size of the text box 
               
               
                 Int default_ 
                 Set the default text in the text box 
               
               
                 text(String) 
               
               
                 Int  
                 Adds data validation to the onBlur event of the text 
               
               
                 dataValidation(type, 
                 box. 
               
               
                 range, lower 
                 Data Type validation includes: 
               
               
                 bound, upper 
                 Numeric - DV_TYPE_ISNUMERIC, 
               
               
                 bound) 
                 Alpha - DV_TYPE_ISAPLHA, or 
               
               
                   
                 Date - DV_TYPE_ISDATE. 
               
               
                   
                 None - DV_NONE 
               
               
                   
                 Range validation* includes all 8 permutations - 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;less than&gt; through &lt;(less than equal) and (greater 
               
               
                   
                 than equal)&gt;. 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_LESSTHAN, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_LESSTHANEQUAL, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_GREATERTHAN, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_GREATERTHANEQUAL, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_LESSTHAN_GREATERTHAN, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_LESSTHAN- 
               
               
                   
                 EQUAL_GREATERTHAN, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_LESS- 
               
               
                   
                 THAN_GREATERTHANEQUAL, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_LESS- 
               
               
                   
                 THANEQUAL_GREATERTHANEQUAL 
               
               
                 Int 
                 This method sets a private member variable to an 
               
               
                 setTextBox- 
                 integer value, this value indicates if the textbox may 
               
               
                 Indicator(int) 
                 be the only textbox on the form that is to be 
               
               
                   
                 generated. 
               
               
                 Int 
                 Add an action to the onChange event of the text 
               
               
                 addAction(Action) 
                 box. 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 * Note:  
               
               
                 Range validation only occurs for “Numeric” data type.  
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFTextArea 
     The AFTextArea component can only be used in conjunction with a AFForm component (the form&#39;s generate method iterates through the generate method for all form element widgets to build the necessary HTML code). An action object can be attached to a AFTextArea component. (Refer to AFHardCodedASPAction and AFJScriptAction for details). 
     Methods 
     The IAFTextArea and IAFUIActionItem interfaces define the access to the AFTextArea component. These interfaces support the following methods, which the developer uses to create a Text Area form element. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Int left() 
                 Align the text area left 
               
               
                 Int right() 
                 Align the text area to the right 
               
               
                 Int center() 
                 Align the text area to the center 
               
               
                 Int caption(String) 
                 Set the caption to appear next to the text area 
               
               
                 Int name(String) 
                 Set the HTML name of the textArea. 
               
               
                 Int 
                 The name of the HTML form on which the textarea 
               
               
                 formName(String) 
                 is to be placed. This is a required method and the 
               
               
                   
                 textarea may not function correctly without this 
               
               
                   
                 value being set. 
               
               
                 Int setRows(int) 
                 Set the number of rows which the text Area may 
               
               
                   
                 display to the user 
               
               
                 Int setColunms(int) 
                 Set the number of columns, which the text Area may 
               
               
                   
                 display, to the user. 
               
               
                 Int 
                 Adds data validation to the onBlur event of the 
               
               
                 dataValidation(type, 
                 text box. Data Type validation includes: 
               
               
                 range, lower 
                 Numeric - DV_TYPE_ISNUMERIC, 
               
               
                 bound, upper 
                 Alpha - DV_TYPE_ISAPLHA, or 
               
               
                 bound) 
                 Date - DV_TYPE_ISDATE. 
               
               
                   
                 None - DV_NONE 
               
               
                   
                 Range validation* includes all 8 permutations -  
               
               
                   
                 &lt;less than&gt; through &lt;(less than equal) and 
               
               
                   
                 (greater than equal)&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_LESSTHAN, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_LESSTHANEQUAL, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_GREATERTHAN, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_GREATERTHANEQUAL, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_LESSTHAN_GREATERTHAN, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_LESS- 
               
               
                   
                 THANEQUAL_GREATERTHAN, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_LESS- 
               
               
                   
                 THAN_GREATERTHANEQUAL, 
               
               
                   
                 DV_RANGE_LESS- 
               
               
                   
                 THANEQUAL_GREATER- 
               
               
                   
                 THANEQUAL 
               
               
                 Int 
                 Set the name of the form onto which the textArea 
               
               
                 setForm- 
                 object is being added. This method is mandatory 
               
               
                 Name(String) 
                 for the correct functioning of the method. 
               
               
                 Int setMaximum- 
                 Set the maximum size of text, which can be 
               
               
                 Size(int) 
                 entered into the text area. When this value 
               
               
                   
                 is exceeded, a pop up window may warn the user 
               
               
                   
                 that they have exceeded the maximum size and 
               
               
                   
                 that their entry may be truncated to the 
               
               
                   
                 maximum value (which is set here). The 
               
               
                   
                 default value is 500. 
               
               
                 Int 
                 Add an action to the textarea. 
               
               
                 addAction(action) 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 *Note:  
               
               
                 Range validation only occurs for “Numeric” data type.  
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFRadioButton 
     The AFRadioButton component can only be used in conjunction with a AFForm component (the form&#39;s generate method iterates through the generate method for all form element widgets to build the necessary HTML code). An action object can be attached to a AFRadioButton component. (Refer to AFHardCodedASPAction and AFJScriptAction for details). 
     Radio buttons are used in groups. Because of the complexity of the client side script required in conjunction with the radio button component, the application developer must call the generateRadioButtonScript ( ) method on the AFScriptgenerator object on the page wherever radio buttons are used. This method takes as inputs: 
     The name of the form object to which the radio button has been added. 
     The name of the radio button group within the form 
     The default value the radio button group may pass to the page view if nothing is selected by the user. 
     The return value from this method is the generated HTML and Javascript which is written to the client browser within the &lt;HEAD&gt;&lt;/HEAD&gt;tag of the page. 
     Methods 
     The IAFRadioButton and IAFUIActionItem interfaces define the access to the AFRadioButton component. These interfaces support the following methods, which the developer uses to create a Radio Button form element. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Int left() 
                 Align the radio button left 
               
               
                 Int right() 
                 Align the radio button right 
               
               
                 Int center() 
                 Align the radio button to the center 
               
               
                 Int caption(String) 
                 Set the caption to appear next to the radio button 
               
               
                 Int name(String) 
                 Set the HTML name of the radio button 
               
               
                 Int deselect() 
                 Deselect the radio button. 
               
               
                 Int select() 
                 Select the radio button. (highlights button) 
               
               
                 Int 
                 Sets the name of the form onto which the radio 
               
               
                 setFormName(String) 
                 button is being added. This is a mandatory 
               
               
                   
                 method in order for the component 
               
               
                   
                 to function correctly. 
               
               
                 Int 
                 Set the number within the group, which this 
               
               
                 setGroupNumber(int) 
                 radio button is assigned 
               
               
                 Int getGroupNumber() 
                 Returns the group number of the Radio Button 
               
               
                 Int addAction(action) 
                 Add an action to the radio button. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFCheckBox 
     The AFCheckBox component can only be used in conjunction with a AFForm component (the form&#39;s generate method iterates through the generate method for all form element widgets to build the necessary HTML code). An action object can be attached to a AFCheckBox component. (Refer to AFHardCodedASPAction and AFJScriptAction for details). 
     Methods 
     The IAFCheckBox and LIFUIActionItem interfaces define the access to the AFCheckBox component. These interfaces support the following methods, which the developer uses to create a Check Box form element. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Int left() 
                 Align the checkbox to the left 
               
               
                 Int right() 
                 Align the checkbox to the right 
               
               
                 lnt center() 
                 Align the checkbox to the center 
               
               
                 Int caption(String) 
                 Sets the HTML caption value of the object. The 
               
               
                   
                 text may be displayed next to the checkbox 
               
               
                   
                 object. 
               
               
                 Int name(String) 
                 Sets the HTML name of the checkbox 
               
               
                 Int select() 
                 Mark as checked the checkbox when generating 
               
               
                   
                 it 
               
               
                 Int deselect() 
                 Mark as not checked the checkbox when 
               
               
                   
                 generating it. 
               
               
                 Int value(String) 
                 Sets the HTML value of the checkbox 
               
               
                 Int addAction(action) 
                 Add an action to the checkbox. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFDropDown 
     The AFDropDown component can only be used in conjunction with a AFForm component (the form&#39;s generate method iterates through the generate method for all form element widgets to build the necessary HTML code). An action object can be attached to a AFDropDown component. (Refer to AFHardCodedASPAction and AFJScriptAction for details). 
     Methods 
     The IAFDropDown and IAFUIActionItem interfaces define the access to the AFDropDown component. These interfaces support the following methods, which the developer uses to create a Combo Box form element. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Int left() 
                 Align the Combo Box to the left 
               
               
                 Int right() 
                 Align the Combo Box to the right 
               
               
                 Int center() 
                 Align the Combo Box to the center 
               
               
                 Int caption(String) 
                 Set the HTML caption of the object. 
               
               
                 Int name(String) 
                 Set the HTML attribute of the object. 
               
               
                 Int addData(String) 
                 Add a row of data to the Combo Box. 
               
               
                 Int formName(String) 
                 Set the name of the form onto which the 
               
               
                   
                 Combo Box component has been added. 
               
               
                 Int selected(int) 
                 Set the index of the data item on the 
               
               
                   
                 Combo Box, which may be selected. 
               
               
                 Int addAction(action) 
                 Add an action to the Combo Box. 
               
               
                 Int setCodesTable(String) 
                 Populate dropdown box with a Codes Table 
               
               
                   
                 value 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFBlankItem 
     The AFBlankItem component can only be used in conjunction with a AFForm component (the form&#39;s generate method iterates through the generate method for all form element widgets to build the necessary HTML code). 
     Methods 
     The IAFBlankItem interface defines the access to the AFBlankItem component. This interface supports the following methods, which the developer uses to create a blank item form element. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 int left() 
                 Align the blank item to the left 
               
               
                 int right() 
                 Align the blank item to the right 
               
               
                 int center() 
                 Align the blank item to the center 
               
               
                 int setWidths(int, int) 
                 Set the widths of the blank item in 
               
               
                   
                 percentage (%) 
               
               
                 int setValues(String, String) 
                 Set the values of the blank item. The first 
               
               
                   
                 String sets the text to appear in the first cell 
               
               
                   
                 and the second String sets the text to appear 
               
               
                   
                 in the second. 
               
               
                 int setColors(int, int) 
                 Sets the color of the elements of the blank 
               
               
                   
                 item. The two integer values represent the 
               
               
                   
                 color of the first and second cells. Valid 
               
               
                   
                 Values are 0 and 1. The default color is 
               
               
                   
                 white. Passing a value of 1 into either 
               
               
                   
                 parameter causes the blank item cell to be 
               
               
                   
                 displayed in the default highlighted color. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFUIList 
     The AFUIList component creates a sophisticated DHTML based single-select list box form widget. The list box widget consists of a fixed headings row and a scrollable set of data rows. The list box widget supports data entry through data row level associated check boxes and text boxes. In addition, action objects can be attached to the list box and are generated in the same way as described for other form components. (Refer to AFHardCodedASPAction and AFJScriptAction for details). 
     The list box widget refreshes itself by passing (as parameters) the selected item and the state of all check boxes and all text boxes. The AFUIList view captures the values and updates the state of the list box to reflect the user choice. 
     Note: 
     The sophisticated functionality provided by this widget requires DHTML support. As of this portion of the present descriptions release date (Phase 2), only Internet Explorer 4.0 provides the necessary DHTML services. Therefore, this component is not cross-browser compatible. 
     Methods 
     The IAFUIList interface defines the access to the AFUIList component. This interface supports the following methods, which the developer uses to create a single select list box. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Int left() 
                 Align the list box to the left 
               
               
                 Int right() 
                 Align the list box to the right 
               
               
                 Int center() 
                 Align the list box to the center 
               
               
                 Int setChecked() 
                 Set indicated Selected List row as 
               
               
                   
                 “checked” 
               
               
                 Int setUnChecked() 
                 Set indicated Selected List row as 
               
               
                   
                 “unchecked” 
               
               
                 Int setSelected() 
                 Set indicated Selected List row as 
               
               
                   
                 “highlighted” 
               
               
                 Int getSelectedRow() 
                 Return the currently selected list box row 
               
               
                   
                 number. 
               
               
                 Int getSelectedRowObjID() 
                 Return the object id of the currently 
               
               
                   
                 selected list box row. 
               
               
                 String getObjIdForRow() 
                 Capture the Object id for a given list 
               
               
                   
                 box row (used by the view mechanism). 
               
               
                 int 
                 Retrieve the list box row number, 
               
               
                 getRowForImageReference() 
                 which corresponds to an image reference. 
               
               
                 Int getCheckboxStatus() 
                 Get Check Box status of requested list box 
               
               
                   
                 row. 
               
               
                 Int setTextBoxValue() 
                 Set text box value for requested list box 
               
               
                   
                 row with passed in String value. 
               
               
                 String getTestBoxValue() 
                 Get text box value for requested list box 
               
               
                   
                 row. 
               
               
                 Int setName() 
                 Set list box name. 
               
               
                 Int getName() 
                 Get list box name. 
               
               
                 Int getNumberOf Rows() 
                 Get the total number of list box rows. 
               
               
                 Int addDataRowTokenized() 
                 Add a row to the list box. 
               
               
                 Int addDataRow() 
                 Add a row to the list box. 
               
               
                 Int setBorderWidth() 
                 Set border width. 
               
               
                 Int setValuesTokenized() 
                 Set the default values of the list box: 
               
               
                   
                 BorderWidth, cellPadding, Click Trigger 
               
               
                   
                 Flag and Double Click Trigger Flag. 
               
               
                 Int setValues() 
                 Set the default values of the list box: 
               
               
                   
                 BorderWidth, cellPadding, Click Trigger 
               
               
                   
                 Flag and Double Click Trigger Flag. 
               
               
                 Int reset() 
                 Clear all list box data rows. 
               
               
                 String generate() 
                 Generate the DHTML for the list box data 
               
               
                   
                 rows (bottom frame). 
               
               
                 String 
                 Return the results of the single click 
               
               
                 generateSingleClickAction() 
                 action, which was attached to the list box. 
               
               
                   
                 If no action is attached, return a blank 
               
               
                   
                 string. 
               
               
                 String 
                 Return the results of the double click 
               
               
                 generateDoubleClickAction() 
                 action, which was attached to the list box. 
               
               
                   
                 If no action is attached, return a blank 
               
               
                   
                 string. 
               
               
                 String generateScripts() 
                 Generate the scripts required to handle the 
               
               
                   
                 selected list. This method is executed on 
               
               
                   
                 the parent frame that the list box is 
               
               
                   
                 embedded. 
               
               
                 Int addClickAction() 
                 Add a click action to the list box. 
               
               
                 Int addDoubleClickAction() 
                 Add a double click action to the list box. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFThumbNailContainer 
     The AFThumbNailContainer component generates a set of thumbnail images. The thumbnails are used as iconic pushbuttons. The application developer defines the single click and double click action destinations in the ASP page by coding the JavaScript functions referenced by the AFThumbNailContainer “generate” method. 
     Methods 
     The IAFThumbNailContainer interface defines the access to the AFThumbNailContainer component. This interface supports the following methods, which the developer uses to create a Thumbnail container. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Int setSelected() 
                 Set indicated Thumbnail item as 
               
               
                   
                 “highlighted” 
               
               
                 String 
                 Return the selected item object id. If no 
               
               
                 getSelectedThumbNailObjectId() 
                 item is selected, return an empty string. 
               
               
                 String generate() 
                 Generate the HTML code for the 
               
               
                   
                 thumbnails. 
               
               
                 Int addItem () 
                 Add thumbnail image to container. 
               
               
                 Int setAttributes () 
                 Define the border width, the input path 
               
               
                   
                 to the thumbnail images and identify 
               
               
                   
                 the selected item. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFStaticTable 
     The static table component creates a standard HTML table with the parameters set by the developer through scripting logic added to application&#39;s ASP. 
     Methods 
     The IAFStaticTable interface defines the access to the AFStaticTable component. This interface supports the following methods, which the developer uses to create a static HTML table. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 int 
                 Adds a data element to the static table. The 
               
               
                 addDataElement(String, int) 
                 integer value passed as the second parameter 
               
               
                   
                 specifies the color to be applied to this cell 
               
               
                   
                 of the table. 
               
               
                   
                 0 indicates that it should be white, 
               
               
                   
                 1 indicates the default highlighted color, 
               
               
                   
                 2 indicates the default AF Blue color, 
               
               
                   
                 3 indicates a gray color. 
               
               
                 Int SetRowLength(int) 
                 Set the number of data elements before an 
               
               
                   
                 end of row is generated. 
               
               
                 Int GetRowLength() 
                 Returns the number of data elements in the 
               
               
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 int setBorderWidth(int) 
                 Set the width of the border, which may 
               
               
                   
                 appear around the table. Valid values are 0 
               
               
                   
                 through 10. Default is 0. 
               
               
                 Int getBorderWidth() 
                 Returns the current border setting for the 
               
               
                   
                 static table. 
               
               
                 Int SetCellPadding(int) 
                 Sets the HTML cell padding value that 
               
               
                   
                 may be applied to the form. This creates 
               
               
                   
                 space around the data in the table. Valid 
               
               
                   
                 values are 0 through 100. Default is 0. 
               
               
                 Int getCellPadding() 
                 Get the current cell padding value for 
               
               
                   
                 the static table. 
               
               
                 Int SetTableName(String) 
                 Sets the HTML name attribute on the 
               
               
                   
                 table object. 
               
               
                 String GetTableName() 
                 Returns the HTML name attribute on the 
               
               
                   
                 table object. 
               
               
                 String Generate () 
                 Returns the generated HTML for the static 
               
               
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 SetFontOffSet(int) 
                 Sets the size of the font to be used on the 
               
               
                   
                 static table. Valid values are −5 through +5. 
               
               
                   
                 Default is 0. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFHardCodedASPAction 
     The AFHardCodedASPAction component adds a user defined automatic navigation action to a UI component. The UI components that support this service include AFPushButton, AFTextBox, AFTextArea, AFRadioButton, AFCheckBox, AFDropDown and AFSelectedList. Attaching the navigation action to a UI item may automatically direct the user to the next page. The next page is identified by the flow control service of the session framework. This means that the developer does not have to specify the page to open. This service also ensures that all changes made to the open pages are capture before opening a new one. The navigation action is triggered when the user causes a defined event on the object. Defined events include clicking on a link or button and changing the text or exiting a text box. The Javascript events are onClick and OnChange. 
     The page that represents the target of the action must be entered into the database. The action logic may look to see which activity it belongs to and then look in the database to determine what page to show to the user. An example database entry in the T_AF_FWDestinationforaction table is: 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 T_AF_FWDestinationforaction 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Current Page 
                 Action 
                 Activity 
                 DestinationPage 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 100 
                 //ASP/SampApp/ 
                 Next 
                 Order 
                 //ASP/SampApp/ 
               
               
                   
                 Samp.asp 
                   
                   
                 SampNext.asp 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The id field must be a unique number, 
     The current page is the page on which the action is being triggered. 
     The Action is the name of the UI item which is triggering the action, 
     The Activity is the activity in which the action is taking place. 
     The Destination Page is the page to which the user should be redirected as the outcome of the action. 
     Methods 
     The IAFAction and IAFHardCodedASPAction interface defines the access to the AFHardCodedASPAction component. These interfaces support the following methods, which the developer uses to create a navigational action. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Int CreateSameFrame() 
                 The target of the action may be on the 
               
               
                   
                 same frame as that from which the action 
               
               
                   
                 is triggered. 
               
               
                 Int 
                 The target of the action may be on a new 
               
               
                 CreateOnNewWindow(String) 
                 instance of the web browser. 
               
               
                 Int 
                 The target of the action may be on the 
               
               
                 CreateParentFrame(String) 
                 parent frame of the frame, which 
               
               
                   
                 triggered the action. 
               
               
                 Int generate(String) 
                 Create HTML to call Javascript function 
               
               
                   
                 (“String value”) when the action 
               
               
                   
                 is triggered. 
               
               
                 InitializeLocation() 
                 Used to track frame location during 
               
               
                   
                 action. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFJScriptAction 
     The AFJscriptAction component adds a user defined action to a UI Component. The UI components that support this service include AFPushButton, AFTextBox, AFTextArea, AFRadioButton, AFCheckBox, AFDropDown and AFSelectedList. Attaching a Javascript action to a UI item may call a Javascript function when the action is triggered. Note: The application developer creates the called Javascript function on the correct application&#39;s ASP. The Javascript action is triggered when the user causes a defined event on the object. Defined events include clicking on a link or button and changing the text or exiting a text box. The Javascript events are onClick and onChange. 
     Methods 
     The IAFAction interface defines the access to the AFJscriptAction component. This interface supports the following methods, which the developer uses to create an action. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Int generate(String) 
                 Create HTML to call Javascript function 
               
               
                   
                 (“String value”) when the action is triggered. 
               
               
                 Int JScript(String) 
                 Create HTML to call Javascript function 
               
               
                   
                 (“String value”) when the action is triggered. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFScriptGenerator 
     The AFScriptGenerator component creates the Javascript functions needed by the actions. 
     Methods 
     The IAFScriptGenerator interface defines the access to the AFScriptGenerator component. This interface supports the following methods, which the developer uses to generate the appropriate Javascript functions. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Int generate(eventcollection) 
                 Generate the Javascript function block. 
               
               
                 Int 
                 Generate the Javascript function block for 
               
               
                 generateSelectedListScript 
                 a selected list box. 
               
               
                 (listener,eventcollection) 
               
               
                 Int 
                 Generate the Javascript function block for 
               
               
                 generateAutoSave 
                 autosave. 
               
               
                 (eventcollection) 
               
               
                 Int 
                 Generate the Javascript function block for 
               
               
                 generateRadioButtonScript 
                 radio button group. 
               
               
                 (listener,listener,listener) 
               
               
                 Int 
                 Generate the Javascript function block for 
               
               
                 generateAutoCapture 
                 auto capture. 
               
               
                 (eventcollection) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     AFStyleSheet 
     The AFStyleSheet Component creates the Cascading Style Sheet text for the application. 
     Methods 
     The I AFStyleSheet interface defines the access to the AFStyleSheet component. This interface supports the following method, which the developer uses to generate he appropriate Cascading Style Sheet text. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 String getStyleSheet() 
                 Generate the Cascading Style Sheet text. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     DEVELOPMENT ARCHITECTURE DESIGN 
     FIG. 21A illustrates a method  2100  for software configuration management. First, in operation  2102 , software configuration management units are identified. In operation  2104 , software configuration management repositories and practices are established for storing work product related to the software configuration management units. A change control process is determined in operation  2106  for implementing change requests relating to the work product. Access to the work product is monitored in operation  2108  by a plurality of users and audits are performed to indicate whether the access to the work product by the users is authorized. Further, training requirements are calculated in operation  2110  by identifying a skill set required for the implementation of the change requests and determining a current skill set. 
     As an option, the software configuration management units may be identified based on configuration types, project baselines, and/or naming standards. The software configuration management units may also have characteristics including a name, a modification log, and a release affiliation. Further, the software configuration management practices may include backing up the repositories. 
     The change control process may include identifying users authorized to implement the change requests, defining criteria for implementing the change requests, allowing evaluation of the change requests by the users based on the criteria, and monitoring the implementation of the change request. The present invention may also optionally include the creation of a training schedule to fulfill the training requirements. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     The ReTA Development Architecture Design includes a set of sub-components that represent all design aspects of the development architecture. The Development Architecture Design Deliverable is used to validate design of the development architecture against the requirements. After it is validated, it may be used as a basis for build and test of the architecture. 
     Development Architecture Component Design 
     Purpose 
     The ReTA Development Architecture Component Design is based on the IDEA framework  2130 . See FIG.  21 B. IDEA provides a development environment framework and associated guidelines that reduce the effort and costs involved with designing, implementing, and maintaining an integrated development environment. IDEA takes a holistic approach to the development environment by addressing all three Business Integration components: organization, processes, and tools. In order to accomplish this, several subcomponents  2132  are provided around a central system building  2134 . 
     The purpose of the development environment is to support the tasks involved in the analysis, design, construction, and maintenance of business systems, as well as the associated management processes. It is important to note that the environment should adequately support all the development tasks, not just the code/compile/test/debug cycle. 
     Configuration Management 
     The purpose of Software Configuration Management (SCM)  2106  is to establish and maintain the integrity of the components of an application throughout the project&#39;s life cycle. 
     This includes: 
     Comprehensively assessing and evaluating changes to a system after requirements have been agreed upon and commitments established. 
     Ensuring that approved changes are communicated, updated, verified and implemented properly. 
     Coordinate the project&#39;s day-to-day activities and avoid conflicting actions by controlling access to code and repositories. 
     The project manager is responsible for the completion of the Project Configuration Management Plan during Design—with the help of the project team. This may: 
     Clarify roles/responsibilities for migrations so that they are understood early in the project lifecycle. See FIG. 22, which illustrates the Configuration Management Life Cycle. First, a project study  2200  is created. Development and testing stages  2202 , 2204  follow the study. Finally, the implementation stage is reached  2206 . 
     Increase visibility of non-application components (e.g. database, architecture) in Configuration Management to improve quality of delivered products. 
     Many times these are the components that are missed during implementations. 
     The ReTA SCM Policy portion of the description can assist engagement executives in creating a project configuration management plan. 
     The following table provides a list of the active participants within the change control process. A person may have more than one role or responsibility depending on the size of the technical effort. Also note that the responsibilities are described here at a high level and are not intended to be all-inclusive. Most of the roles are would already exist on an engagement. However, there is one new role that is critical to the CM process, the Source Code Librarian. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Title 
                 Description &amp; Responsibilities 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Technical 
                 Typically an IS department head with responsibility 
               
               
                 Manager 
                 for the purchase and/or support of hardware and 
               
               
                   
                 software. In configuration management, this role is 
               
               
                   
                 more software oriented. Other responsibilities include: 
               
               
                   
                 Assign development and support staff to projects. 
               
               
                   
                 Review (accept/reject) technical approach proposed for 
               
               
                   
                 projects. 
               
               
                   
                 Monitor development and support budgets and personnel 
               
               
                   
                 - status of projects. 
               
               
                 Network 
                 This individual is responsible for the installation, 
               
               
                 System 
                 maintenance and support of the Unix and Windows NT 
               
               
                 Administrator 
                 servers including operating system, file systems, and 
               
               
                   
                 applications. Other responsibilities include: 
               
               
                   
                 Operating system installation, patch updates, migrations 
               
               
                   
                 and compatibility with other applications. 
               
               
                   
                 Installation and support of proper backup/restore systems. 
               
               
                   
                 Installation and support of other peripherals required for 
               
               
                   
                 installed (or to be installed) applications. 
               
               
                   
                 Proper portion of the present description of hardware 
               
               
                   
                 configuration and setup. 
               
               
                   
                 Maintenance of Windows Domain users and Groups as 
               
               
                   
                 well as other security issues. 
               
               
                 Database 
                 The DBA is responsible for proper creation and 
               
               
                 Administrator 
                 maintenance of production and system test databases. 
               
               
                   
                 The integrity of the database, as well as recovery 
               
               
                   
                 using backup/restore and logging, are priorities 
               
               
                   
                 for the DBA. Other responsibilities include: 
               
               
                   
                 Assist developers in maintaining development databases 
               
               
                   
                 by automating backup/recovery, applying changes to 
               
               
                   
                 database schema, etc. 
               
               
                   
                 Provide support for tuning, sizing and locating database 
               
               
                   
                 objects within allocated database space. 
               
               
                   
                 Applying change requests to databases. 
               
               
                   
                 Ideally maintain entity relationship diagrams for 
               
               
                   
                 databases. 
               
               
                   
                 Maintenance of database users and other database-related 
               
               
                   
                 security issues 
               
               
                 Source Code 
                 Individual responsible for development and maintenance 
               
               
                 Librarian 
                 of source code control tools, training materials, and 
               
               
                   
                 storage areas. The Source Code Librarian is also 
               
               
                   
                 responsible for the integrity of the source code 
               
               
                   
                 environment. Additionally: 
               
               
                   
                 Establishes source code directories for new 
               
               
                   
                 projects. 
               
               
                   
                 Provides reports on source code environment status 
               
               
                   
                 and usage per project. 
               
               
                   
                 Provides assistance/information as needed regarding 
               
               
                   
                 objects to check out for system test. 
               
               
                   
                 Assists production operations in building/moving all 
               
               
                   
                 applications into production. 
               
               
                 Business 
                 Individual or individuals responsible for managing the 
               
               
                 Analyst 
                 detailed design, programming, and unit testing of 
               
               
                   
                 application software. Other responsibilities include: 
               
               
                   
                 Developing/reviewing detailed designs. 
               
               
                   
                 Developing/reviewing unit test plans, data, scripts, 
               
               
                   
                 and output. 
               
               
                   
                 Managing application developers. 
               
               
                 Application 
                 Individual or individuals responsible for making changes 
               
               
                 Developer 
                 to source code defined by management. This person 
               
               
                   
                 typically: 
               
               
                   
                 Checks source code out of the source code environment. 
               
               
                   
                 Modifies code per user requirements or other 
               
               
                   
                 development portion of the present description. 
               
               
                   
                 Unit tests modifications in the development environment. 
               
               
                   
                 Checks modified code back into source code environment 
               
               
                   
                 in preparation for system test. 
               
               
                 System Tester 
                 This person or team is directly responsible for system 
               
               
                 Integration 
                 testing or integration testing of an application prior 
               
               
                 Tester 
                 to implementing in production. This may also take the 
               
               
                   
                 form of performance testing. Typically, a system or 
               
               
                   
                 integration test person or team may be responsible for: 
               
               
                   
                 Following production operation procedures for installing 
               
               
                   
                 a new application in the appropriate test environment. 
               
               
                   
                 Develop and execute a test plan to properly exercise 
               
               
                   
                 new application including new, modified, and 
               
               
                   
                 unmodified functionality. 
               
               
                   
                 Reporting results of test. 
               
               
                 Vendor 
                 For the purposes of this portion of the present 
               
               
                   
                 description, a vendor is defined as an organization from 
               
               
                   
                 which software has been purchased for use by the clients 
               
               
                   
                 systems. Alternatively, a vendor may distribute final 
               
               
                   
                 installable media in the form of tape or CD with upgrades 
               
               
                   
                 or new release of application. A vendor may: 
               
               
                   
                 Make modifications to application code at vendor offices 
               
               
                   
                 or within the engagement development environment. 
               
               
                   
                 Provide necessary information to Source Code Librarian 
               
               
                   
                 to store new code. 
               
               
                   
                 Assist Source Code Librarian in transferring 
               
               
                   
                 modifications to the engagement system test 
               
               
                   
                 environment. 
               
               
                   
                 Participate in system test (or performance test). 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Change Control 
     Description 
     Change requests as a consequence of changing requirements and changes requested due to nonconformity (or defects), either in the application software, or in the system software must be analyzed, authorized, scheduled, staffed, and tracked in a defined way. What, why, when, and who made a change must be tracked from the point of analysis to the reintroduction of the defective or changed component at the appropriate stage. Change control therefore governs what software component is changed, version controlled, and when it is re-migrated to a given development stage. 
     Configuration Management becomes more complex in a component-based development environment as the system is broken down to a greater level of granularity. For this reason, change control processes need to be clearly defined and communicated across the entire engagement team. 
     Tool Recommendation 
     ReTA Change Tracking Database 
     The Change Tracking Database is a Microsoft Access tool. It provides basic functionality of entering, modifying and reporting of system change requests encountered throughout the entire project life cycle. 
     Issues Tracking Database 
     The Issues Tracking Database is a Microsoft Access tool that is ideal for small to medium sized projects. It provides basic functionality of entering, modifying and reporting of project issues encountered throughout the entire project life cycle. 
     Procedures/Standards 
     FIG. 23 illustrates the change control ‘pipeline’  2300  and each phase within the pipeline. The Change Control process can be divided into many different phases. 
     They include: 
     Log Change Request 
     The first phase  2302  of the change control process is to log a change request. Regardless of who initiates a change request and how the change request enters into the engagement work-in-progress pipeline each change request should be logged Change Tracking tool. IT personnel who log change requests should record as much information as possible. 
     Change Control Committee Review 
     During the second phase  2304 , the Change Control Committee (CCC) meets regularly to review the change requests that have been logged to the Change Tracking tool in the past week. The committee also discusses the status of the changes scheduled for migration during the weekly migration windows, reviews the changes already moved to production, and sets the Staging Date for change requests. 
     Before each weekly meeting, the Change Control Committee facilitator may generate the following reports: 
     Report of the change requests that have been logged to the Change Tracking tool in the past week 
     Implementation Report that list all changes scheduled to be implemented 
     During the meeting the CCC may: 
     Review the new change requests 
     Discuss the cross-functional impacts 
     Verify that the target implementation date is realistic 
     Set the Staging Date 
     Update the status of the change requests scheduled to be implemented that week during one of the change windows 
     Evaluate the quality metrics of the changes that have been migrated to production and discuss any lessons learned 
     Statement of Work/Scope Definition Portion of the present description During the third phase  2306 , depending on the Change Category (Project, Enhancement, or Emergency), a Statement of Work or simple Scope Definition portion of the present description may or may not be required. These portions of the present descriptions both serve to define what the change request entails, and record what is agreed to by the change requester and IT. 
     The Statement of Work, which is currently in use sometimes in FIP, is a detailed portion of the present description that describes the work that may be done for the change request. The Scope Definition portion of the present description is a simple portion of the present description of the scope of the change. It can be an email message, a faxed letter, or a brief Microsoft Word portion of the present description. The following table shows what is required: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Change 
                 Statement 
                 Scope Definition Portion of 
               
               
                   
                 Category 
                 of Work 
                 the present description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Project 
                 Required 
                 Not Required 
               
               
                   
                 Enhancement 
                 Not Required 
                 Required 
               
               
                   
                 Emergency 
                 Not Required 
                 Not Required 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Once the developer starts working on the Statement of Work or Scope Definition portion of the present description, the developer should set the status of the change request in the Change Tracking tool to “Assigned”. 
     The Statement of Work/Scope Definition portion of the present description is sent to the change requester for sign-off. The sign-off needs to be checked-off on the Migration Checklist in the Change Tracking Tool in order to migrate the change to production. This sign-off serves as a quality checkpoint that the work on the change request may meet the business needs of the change requester. 
     Analysis &amp; Design 
     This phase  2308  is required only for project change requests. For example, the developer may create technical analysis and design specifications portion of the present descriptions. Other impacted groups may create a technical impact statement. 
     Code &amp; Unit Test 
     In this phase  2310 , the developer codes the change request and unit tests the code changes to ensure that it works as designed and that it meets the business needs. The developer should set the status of the change request in the Change Tracking tool to “Development”. 
     After the change has been coded and unit tested, the developer should fill in the Resolution field for the change request within the Change Tracking Database. The developer should also fill in the approximate number of hours it took to complete the change request in the Actual Hours field. 
     System Test 
     This phase  2312  is required for all project change requests and some enhancements. In this phase, the developer tests the change to ensure that the system&#39;s functionality works as designed. Furthermore, this test also ensures that the code change did not adversely affect other areas of the current system. This may entail running some pre-defined System Test scripts. For certain change requests, it is important to test the code change against a large volume of data. This may check if the change may handle all the data in the production environment. For any change requests which may impact interfaces both in and out of the target application, it is necessary to test that all the interfaces still work correctly. This may prevent a change request from adversely impacting other systems. 
     The developer should set the status of the change request in the Change Tracking tool to “Testing”. 
     User Acceptance Test 
     In this phase  2314 , the most appropriate person, whether it is the requester or a user who may be directly affected by the change, may assume the role of the test administrator. The administrator tests the change request to ensure that it meets the original business need. In some cases, the developer may actually run the test plans that the test administrator creates, and the test administrator may validate the test results. Once the test administrator agrees that the change satisfies all the test criteria, the developer needs to check the user acceptance test sign-off box in the Change Tracking Tool. 
     The sign-off is needed to migrate the change to production. This sign-off serves as a final quality checkpoint that the work on the change request meets the business needs of the change requester. 
     Fill Out Migration Form 
     In this phase, the developer goes through a final process before submitting the change request to be moved to production. The developer should move all objects associated with the change request from the testing environment to the staging area. 
     In order to move the change to production, the developer needs to complete the Migration Checklist form on the Change Tracking Tool and inform Production Control  2316  by the Staging Date. This form contains all the information about the objects that need to be moved from the staging area into the production environment. This form is a streamlined checklist of all the things that the developers must do in order for Production Services personnel to move the objects to production. Whenever a sign-off checkbox is checked or unchecked, the current user&#39;s ID and the current date may be captured by the Change Tracking tool. 
     The following Migration Checklist items are required for the different change categories: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Checklist Item 
                 Project 
                 Enhancement 
                 Emergency 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Statement of Work 
                 Required 
                 Not Required 
                 Not Required 
               
               
                 Scope Definition 
                 Not Required 
                 Required 
                 Not Required 
               
               
                 User Acceptance Test 
                 Required 
                 Required 
                 Not Required 
               
               
                 Tech/Code Review 
                 Required 
                 Required 
                 Not Required 
               
               
                 Complete Portion of 
                 Required 
                 Required 
                 Not Required 
               
               
                 the present description 
               
               
                 Complete Components 
                 Required 
                 Required 
                 Required 
               
               
                 Submit Production 
                 Required 
                 Required 
                 Required 
               
               
                 Move 
               
               
                 Distribution Lists 
                 Required 
                 Required 
                 Not Required 
               
               
                 Requirements 
               
               
                 (TCPIP, Special 
               
               
                 Forms, Microfiche, 
               
               
                 Electronic Files) 
               
               
                 Identify Impacted 
                 Required 
                 Required 
                 Not Required 
               
               
                 Systems 
               
               
                 Capacity Planning 
                 Required 
                 Required 
                 Not Required 
               
               
                 Ready to Migrate 
                 Required 
                 Required 
                 Required 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The Ready to Migrate checkbox is used to summarize that all the required sign-offs have been obtained and that the code is ready to be migrated to production. Finally, the developer should set the status of the change request in the Change Tracking tool to “Migrate”. 
     Move to Production 
     Once Production Services personnel examines a completed Migration Checklist form, they may verify that all objects to be moved into production are in order, and that the change can be moved on the migration night in phase  2318 . They may also ensure that all relevant items on the Migration Checklist have been completed. This check serves as the final quality checkpoint before the change goes into production. 
     Production Services personnel may move all project and enhancement change requests to the Production environment during prescheduled outages or immediately in the case of an emergency fix. Production Services may then informing all system users what changes have been moved into production. 
     Production Services personnel should set the status of each migrated change request in the Change Tracking tool to “Production”. They should also set the Actual Implementation Date to the date the change was moved to production. 
     Measure/Monitor Change in Production 
     Business users and developers should continue to actively monitor the change requests after it is migrated to production during phase  2320 . If no problems develop in production due to the change request, the Change Control Committee may confirm that the team leader of the change request should set the status of the change request in the Change Tracking tool to “Closed”. If problems do develop in production, the status should be set to “Re-Open”. The developer is then re-assigned to fix the change request. 
     If the change request in production caused other problems to jobs in production, and a new fix is needed, the change request is reopened once again. If the change request caused problems in other jobs that requires modification to the other jobs, then a new change request is created, and the source of the new request is tracked back to the old request. 
     The Change Tracking tool contains metrics to track the quality of the change request. The Change Control Committee may assign the Migration Metric and Production Metric values for each change request approximately 35 days after it was migrated into production. If problems occur during the migration of the change request, the Change Control Committee may assign a “Fail” for the Migration Metric. The Problem Description should then be completed to explain why this problem occurred. The Lessons Learned should be filled with what lessons can be learned from the experience. If no problems occur, the Migration Metric may be assigned a “Pass”. 
     If problems occur in production due to the change request, the Change Control Committee may assign a “Fail” for the Production Metric. The Problem Description and Lessons Learned fields should also be filled with the relevant information. 
     Below are the criteria for the Change Control Committee to use in deciding if a change request passed or failed the migration metric or the production metric. A change request may pass if it meets the following criteria. 
     Migration Metric Criteria 
     Flawless movement of all resources (Active Server Pages, MTS Components, Java Classes, Graphics, Data Model, etc.), from the staging environment to the production environment) is required. (I.e., resource movement must have no negative effects.) During implementation activities there must be no unplanned, adverse effect on regularly scheduled batch or online processing, online availability feeds to other systems and reports. 
     Production Metric Criteria 
     Production online processing and production batch processing must not experience any release-related abends. 
     The production implementation may not cause problems, interruptions in service or failures in other areas within 35 days of the initial implementation date. Any release with is backed out due to quality or problems may fail this criterion. 
     The change must be delivered when planned. A postponement due to external reasons may not cause the change to fail this criterion. Postponements due to quality or readiness of code must be communicated to the Change Control Committee, project team, and customers at least  3  days prior to the scheduled implementation date. 
     Migration Control 
     Description 
     Migration Control tools control multiple versions of source code, data, and other items as they are changed, tested, and moved from one development environment into another, for example, from development to test and from test to production. The list below provides a list of the various environments and their specific purpose within the project lifecycle. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Environment 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Build/ 
                 This ‘virtual’ environment is configured to reside 
               
               
                 Component 
                 nearly entirely on an individual developer workstation. 
               
               
                 Test 
                 Web and application services are running locally for 
               
               
                   
                 presentation and business logic. 
               
               
                   
                 Architecture components are accessed via a mapped 
               
               
                   
                 network drive. 
               
               
                   
                 A shared RDBMS Server or a local, more lightweight 
               
               
                   
                 version of the database can be used for database 
               
               
                   
                 services. 
               
               
                   
                 Different workstation configurations may exist for 
               
               
                   
                 component or user interface developers. Both types 
               
               
                   
                 of developers use a source code repository for check 
               
               
                   
                 in/out of code during development. 
               
               
                   
                 In the event that the required modifications affect 
               
               
                   
                 both a user interface and server-side components, 
               
               
                   
                 then both developers may share components and 
               
               
                   
                 interfaces using drive mappings. 
               
               
                   
                 As code changes are made a ‘Unit’ or Component 
               
               
                   
                 test is performed to ensure that changes made in one 
               
               
                   
                 area of the code do not have adverse affects on the 
               
               
                   
                 rest of the component. 
               
               
                   
                 When the build code is deemed fit for promotion, the 
               
               
                   
                 source code is checked into the source code repository 
               
               
                   
                 and the source code administrator is notified of the 
               
               
                   
                 status. 
               
               
                 Staging 
                 This environment is used to verify and test packaged 
               
               
                 Test 
                 systems and components. This allows developers to 
               
               
                   
                 verify the functionality and use of third party vendor 
               
               
                   
                 applications during the Build/Unit Testing phase. 
               
               
                 Assembly 
                 This environment is a smaller testing environment used 
               
               
                 Test 
                 to ensure that end-to-end functionality of the system and 
               
               
                   
                 to verify that changes made during any build efforts do 
               
               
                   
                 not impact other areas of the system. A single developer 
               
               
                   
                 lead (typically the Source Code Administrator) gets the 
               
               
                   
                 latest version of the source code from the source code 
               
               
                   
                 repository, performs a complete build, and executes a 
               
               
                   
                 complete regression test of the system. 
               
               
                   
                 When a point when the code is deemed stable and the 
               
               
                   
                 system test environment is ready, the code residing 
               
               
                   
                 on the integration server is checked back into the 
               
               
                   
                 source code repository using a version label. 
               
               
                   
                 Additionally, the binaries from the integration server 
               
               
                   
                 are copied to the system test server for continued testing. 
               
               
                 System 
                 This environment, sometimes referred to as Product Test, 
               
               
                 Test 
                 is used for complete system technical and functional 
               
               
                   
                 testing. Typically there are assigned project team 
               
               
                   
                 members tasked with writing and executing system test 
               
               
                   
                 scripts, logging errors as they are encountered and 
               
               
                   
                 ensuring that the delivered application satisfies the 
               
               
                   
                 functional requirements set by the client. 
               
               
                   
                 From this point, system application and architecture 
               
               
                   
                 binaries are promoted to the production environment. 
               
               
                 Performance 
                 This environment is used for conducting performance 
               
               
                 Test 
                 evaluations of the application and supporting architecture 
               
               
                   
                 components. This environment should be configured to 
               
               
                   
                 simulate the production system as closely as possible. 
               
               
                   
                 Additionally, data and transactional volume should be 
               
               
                   
                 configured to simulate the system under worst-case 
               
               
                   
                 scenarios. 
               
               
                   
                 Performance testing tools should be utilized to 
               
               
                   
                 simulate multiple users as well as monitor and report 
               
               
                   
                 performance results. 
               
               
                 Production 
                 This environment consists of key hardware and software 
               
               
                   
                 components to support the business operational systems. 
               
               
                   
                 Typically, only applications and components that have been 
               
               
                   
                 thoroughly tested for functional and technical accuracy are 
               
               
                   
                 moved into this environment. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     With a ReTA/Microsoft-centric environment, a few key issues arise with respect to environment migration. These issues relate to the fact that the application is based on the use of Active Server Pages, Microsoft Transaction Server components and Java Classes. 
     Sequence of Events 
     To perform the code migration, certain steps should be followed to ensure that users that are currently in the application are not adversely affected. This can be accomplished by performing the migration in the following order: Using the Internet Information Server administration utility, monitor the site&#39;s number of active users. A count of zero indicates that no clients are currently hitting the site. Shut down the web listener to prevent additional users from connecting to the site. 
     Within the MTS Administration tool, shut down all server processes. This cleans up an components that may still be awaiting garbage collection from the Java Virtual Machine. 
     If the component interfaces have not been modified, it is possible to copy the new version of the Java Classes directly to the new environment. If the interfaces have been changed, the MTS administrator may need to delete and recreate the individual components within MTS. 
     Copy any new web server files (ASP, HTML, graphics, etc..) to the target directories on the web server. 
     Restart the web listener to allow users access to the application. 
     Module Location 
     There are basically three types of modules that get migrated during a ReTA engagement. Web Server files, Application files and database objects. 
     Web Server modules include Active Server Pages (ASP), static HTML portion of the present descriptions, graphics or images and JavaScript files. The ASP and HTML portion of the present descriptions may have security restrictions placed on them from within Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) and from the Windows NT Server. Security can be set to include individual user accounts, groups/roles, or no security. 
     Application Server—Two file types are migrated within application servers, COM Dynamic Link Library&#39;s and Java Classes. Both files are created during the application and architecture build processes. The COM DLL&#39;s require registration within MTS by inserting them into a MTS Package. In the event that the Web and Application servers are two physically different machines, an export process is required between them to instruct the Web server where the business components physically reside. For more information on the registration and exporting processes refer to the MTS online help. 
     In the case of the Java Classes, they need to reside in a directory that is defined within the server&#39;s ‘CLASSPATH’ environment variable. For ReTA Phase 1 &amp; 2 development and testing all runtime files were located with C:\ReTA. Therefore the following classpath environment variable was defined on each developer&#39;s workstation: 
     CLASSPATH=C:\WinNT\Java\Classes;C:WinNT\Java\TrustLib;C:ReTA\Achitecture;C:\ReTA\Application 
     Database Server—These items include tables, views, sequences, triggers, stored procedures and functions, and user/schema information. These items are not necessarily particular to multi-tiered development. However, care should be taken to ensure that architecture tables and other objects are located separately from the application objects. 
     Security 
     Within the ReTA application model, security is enforced at the Web and Application Servers. In the case of Web server security, access to ASP and HTML files can be restricted using the Access Control List security provided by Windows NT. Security on these objects can be set at the group (role) or individual user levels. 
     A component within MTS utilizes role-based security to determine who may or may not have access to a specific COM component. A role is a symbolic name that defines a group of users for a package of components. Roles extend Windows NT security to allow a developer to build secured components in a distributed application. 
     For example, FIG. 24 depicts the application of Roles  2400  within the Microsoft Transaction Server Management console  2402 . The package labeled ‘ReTA Applications’  2404  has a single role defined as being able to access it, ‘ReTA User’  2406 . Users that are members of the local ‘ReTA Administrators’ and ‘ReTA User’ Windows NT groups  2408 , 2410  are allowed to function in the ReTA User capacity defined for this package. 
     Due to the security options available at both the Web and Application server levels, care should be taken during code migration to ensure that security settings are consistent and applied correctly to ensure accurate execution. 
     MTS Transactions 
     Within MTS, every component has a transaction attribute that can be set by the MTS administrator to indicate what level of participation a component has within a transaction. Care must be taken during MTS component migrations to ensure that the correct transactional attributes are set within MTS. 
     The transaction attribute can have one of the following values: 
     Requires a transaction. This value indicates that the component&#39;s objects must execute within the scope of a transaction. When a new object is created, its object context inherits the transaction from the context of the client. If the client does not have a transaction, MTS automatically creates a new transaction for the object. 
     Requires a new transaction. This value indicates that the component&#39;s objects must execute within their own transactions. When a new object is created, MTS automatically creates a new transaction for the object, regardless of whether its client has a transaction. 
     Supports transactions. This value indicates that the component&#39;s objects can execute within the scope of their client&#39;s transactions. When a new object is created, its object context inherits the transaction from the context of the client. If the client does not have a transaction, the new context is also created without one. 
     Does not support transactions. This value indicates that the component&#39;s objects do not run within the scope of transactions. When a new object is created, its object context is created without a transaction, regardless of whether the client has a transaction. 
     Tool Recommendation 
     Many configuration management tools are available on the market today, some of which provide many features useful for code promotion and management. During the ReTA Phase 1 engagement, Microsoft Visual SourceSafe was utilized for it&#39;s labeling and source code management capabilities. Additionally, the ReTA Change Tracker database could be utilized for source code migrations that required change management knowledge and approval. In the event that client requires the use of paper or email based migration control, the ReTA Migration Request template can be used. 
     Procedures/Standards 
     Processes 
     The processes that guide development within ReTA engagement environments are represented in FIG. 25, which illustrates an environment migration process  2500 . These processes include creating a new application  2502 , modifying an existing application, and applying emergency bug fixes  2504 . The solid lines represent stages required for new/modified application process. Dashed lines show the path for emergency bug fixes. Note: The term application used here is broadly applied to any managed module or component. 
     Processes are defined by stages shown as individual boxes. Through these stages, applications are eventually (or quickly in the case of emergency bug fixes) promoted to production. Stages provide for initiating, managing, securing and coordinating changes to applications. 
     The stages for the projects were developed in conjunction with representatives from each development team. It is important to note that the development stages represent the lifecycle of an application, not data. Within each development stage, there can be multiple data sets. For example, within the system test stage, an application team might wish to run several test cycles in parallel. In order to do that and keep the data consistent, a database for each cycle is required. 
     The CM process may ensure application modules are promoted through the development stages in a consistent manner. It is up to each application team to decide how to use each stage. For example, the application testing team may want four databases within the system test stage for different types of tests, whereas the assembly testing team may only want two. 
     *—Stage is used to consolidate and verify vendor changes. Depending on the change, it may be migrated to Development or System Test  2506 , 2508  directly. The order may be dictated by project requirements. 
     A very important tenet of the CM process is that an application modification can only be in one stage at any point in time. Consider the example of module 1 . Module 1  starts out in development. When the development team indicates, the Source Code Librarian moves module 1  into system test. As soon as that happens, no changes can be made to module 1 . Only after module 1  is promoted to production  2510  can modifications be made to the module (further enhancements, bug fixes, etc.). The purpose for this rule is to prevent the situation where one developer is modifying a module when that module needs to have a bug fix to continue testing. There is one exception to this rule, emergency fixes. 
     When the situation dictates an emergency fix, the module affected needs to be modified immediately. When this happens, the module in question should be fixed within the development stage. When the fix is made, the module may immediately be put back into production. However, the same change also needs to be applied/promoted to the module in system test stage. This may allow modules in system test to always be current with what is in production. 
     The CM process depends on change control records (CCR) for tracking changes to the system. A change control record is created for every new module or modification. The CCR is used to coordinate migrations and communicate status for each module in the system. One may see the use of the CCR throughout every process description. The CCR processing system may be automated through Notes. 
     Major tasks and responsibilities define each stage of a process and are covered in the pages that follow. These tasks and responsibilities are not intended to be a development methodology. Any references to deliverables and/or portion of the present descriptions is informational only and provided to help anchor an already existing development methodology. However, specific deliverables and portion of the present descriptions required for the change management process are required and may be highlighted. 
     Development/Unit Test 
     Development team checks required application source code out of source code control. See FIG. 26, which illustrates a Development/Unit test  2600  for existing applications. Note: In the event that this is a new application, the developer may use the appropriate template from source code control. 
     As needed, DBA  2602  checks required database source code out of source code control. Also as needed, DBA works with development team to approve and prepare modifications to development database. All work occurs on developer&#39;s workstation using local web and application server processes. Note: A shared web/application may be used for vendor staging. 
     Unit testing is ongoing during development. The development team checks modified application source code into source code control. The development team also fills in a change control record indicating which modules have changed. As needed, the DBA checks modified database source code into source code control. A source Code Librarian  2604  verifies/prepares necessary objects for building new applications. Unit test and development is completed. In some cases, a string test may be required. The system test team is notified, such as by e-mail. 
     Deliverables from this stage might include: 
     Modified or new application 
     Modified or new database objects 
     Unit test data and output 
     CM Deliverables from this stage include: 
     A change control record with developer information filled in. 
     Assembly Test 
     With reference to FIG. 27, an assembly test team  2700  reviews user requirements and prepares validation or test plan. Database modifications are fetched from source code control and applied to an assembly test environment  2702 . The Source Code Librarian fetches new application, builds it and copies it into assembly test environment  2704 . Validation or test plan is executed pass/fail/deviation. The assembly test team signs change control portion of the present description. Deliverables from this stage might include: 
     Completed validation or test plan with pass/fail/deviation information. 
     CM Deliverables from this stage include: 
     A change control record with assembly test information. 
     System Test 
     System test team reviews user requirements and prepares validation or test plan. See FIG. 28, which illustrates a system test  2800  for existing systems. Database modifications are fetched from source code control  2802  and applied to the system test environment  2804 . The Source Code Librarian fetches the new application, builds it and copies it into the system test environment. A validation or test plan is executed pass/fail/deviation. The system test team  2806  signs the change control portion of the present description. 
     Deliverables from this stage might include: 
     Completed validation or test plan with pass/fail/deviation information. 
     CM Deliverables from this stage include: 
     A change control record with system test informnation. 
     Production 
     FIG. 29 is a flowchart for production of existing applications. The change control record is forwarded to the production operations team  2900  responsible for scheduling changes to production. A promotion to production is scheduled on the production plan  2902 . Database modifications are fetched from source code control  2904  and applied to the production environment  2906 . 
     The Source Code Librarian fetches the new application, builds it and copies it into the production environment. The controlled change-tracking portion of the present description is signed and filed. Electronic copies of all portion of the present descriptions and portion of the present description can optionally be stored in source code control or other portion of the present description storage system. 
     Deliverables from this stage might include: 
     Application promoted to production. 
     CM Deliverables from this stage include: 
     A complete change control record with production information. 
     Version Control 
     Description 
     Version Control tools control access to source code as it is developed and tested and allow multiple versions to be created, maintained, or retrieved. For maintenance management purposes, it is desirable to designate one individual team member to function as the source control administrator. Duties for the source control manager would include the administration of source control users and projects, scheduling and performing periodic backups and applying labels to specific versions of the code (for migration purposes). 
     Examples of architecture and application source code maintained within the version control process include: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Location 
                 Types 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Web Server 
                 Static HTML, Images, JavaScript 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Active Server Pages (ASP) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cascading Style Sheets (DHTML) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Architecture ASP Header Files 
               
               
                   
                 Application 
                 Activities 
               
               
                   
                 Server 
                 Sub-Activities 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Business Components (factories, supporting 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Business Objects) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Architecture Frameworks 
               
               
                   
                 Database Server 
                 Database specifics (table, rollback segment 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and temporary space information) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Users, Roles 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Tables, Indexes, Triggers 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Procedures, Packages, Sequences 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Tool Recommendation 
     Many configuration management tools are available on the market today, some of which provide test data management functionality. 
     During the ReTA Phase 1 engagement, two different tools where utilized and evaluated: MicroSoft&#39;s Visual SourceSafe™ and Intersolve&#39;s PVCS Version Manager™. Both applications are relatively simple use and administer. Visual SourceSafe is preferred for small to medium sized engagements and PVCS Version Manager is preferred for large, enterprise-scale development efforts. For a complete description of the configuration and usage of the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe application as it was utilized on the ReTA Phase 1 engagement, refer to Source Control. 
     Visual SourceSafe 
     Visual SourceSafe from Microsoft ships with the Visual Studio suite and as such is tightly integrated with the Visual Integrated Development Environments. See FIG. 30, which illustrates a frame  3000  of Visual Source Safe. Check in and check out functions  3002 , 3004  can be performed from with Visual Basic or Visual J++. Additionally, Rational Rose is also tightly integrated with SourceSafe. 
     Additionally, this product provides: 
     Easy to use drag-and-drop for file check in and check out 
     Historical reporting and impact analysis 
     User and project level security 
     Archive and restore functionality 
     Version ‘Labeling’ for source code migration 
     Support for web based applications 
     PVCS Version Manager 
     PVCS Version Manager from INTERSOLV is the industry standard for organizing, managing and protecting your enterprise software assets. Version Manager enables teams of any size, in any location, to coordinate concurrent development, with secure access and a complete audit trail. See FIG. 31, which illustrates a frame  3100  of PVCS Version Manager I-Net Client. 
     PVCS VM Server extends the power of Version Manager to teams enterprise-wide via the Internet and Intranets. An intuitive Web client lets users connect to a secure archive and work interactively, anywhere in the world, while sharing protected, centrally managed software. 
     Additional features include: 
     I-NET client is simple and easy to use. It supports developers in many locations, working on many platforms 
     Organizes and references all project components graphically with a flexible, project-oriented approach 
     Use easy drag-and-drop to check files in and out of the system with the check in and check out buttons  3102 , 3104   
     Graphically view project history and see file differences in side-by-side comparisons 
     Branch and merge as needed, with automatic alerts of any conflicts 
     Automate development processes with event triggers 
     Set up projects quickly with online assistants for project configuration, security and customization 
     Procedures/Standards 
     Build &amp; Integration 
     FIG. 32 is an illustration of a Build Source Control Model. During the Build phase of a ReTA engagement, the workstation  3200  of each individual developer should be configured to function independently of other workstations and servers  3202  (except for the development database  3204 ). This process may require developers to first get an updated version of the application source files in addition to those files be checked out for modifications. 
     The benefits of this configuration are: 
     Individual development changes do not effect other developers 
     Easier debugging and testing 
     Different project team members may check out different versions and/or components of the application concurrently. Changes can then be merged later. 
     Assembly Test 
     FIG. 33 illustrates an Assembly Test phase control model. During the Assembly Test phase of a ReTA engagement, the Source Control Administrator may be responsible for the mass checkout and build of the entire application or architecture. Test workstations  3300  may access a web the app server  3302 , which is connected to the source code repository  3304  and the database server  3306 . 
     To aid in this process, the use of ‘Labels’ within the source code repository is employed to identify specific versions of files and projects. (See FIG. 34, which illustrates Microsoft Visual SourceSafe ‘Labels’  3400 ). Labels allow for marking a specific set of files within the repository with a logical name and version. At a later point, it is possible to display the different labels and retrieve the desired version. 
     Environment Management 
     This portion of the description identifies the miscellaneous application and system-level services that do not deal with the human-computer interface, communication with other programs, or access to information. Environment Management Services identify each component used to perform the operating system services, system level services, application services, and run-time services. 
     Systems Management 
     In order to maintain an effective and secure infrastructure, System Management procedures are essential in the success of obtaining a stable environment. These systems require tools, utilities and processes that allow administrators to monitor running components and change their configuration. Systems Management involves all functions required for the day to day operation of the ReTA environment (e.g. event monitoring, failure control, monitoring, tape loading, etc.). Regardless of the changes taking place within the Net-Centric environment, Systems Management activities must take place in an on-going manner. 
     System Startup &amp; Shutdown 
     A comprehensive development environment rapidly becomes sufficiently complex that the startup and shutdown of the environment must be managed carefully, and preferably automated. This is key to ensuring the integrity of the environment. Startup may involve the carefully sequenced initialization of networking software, databases, web servers and more. Similarly, shutdown involves saving configuration changes as needed and gracefully taking down running software in the correct sequence. 
     An Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) provides a server with power when the AC power fails or is marginal. The UPS may also shut the server down, in an orderly fashion, in the event of a power failure. The UPS may not shut down the server if the power failure is brief. 
     The Smart UPS  1400  should be configured with an interface to the server. The recommended interface is the serial port B (COM2) on most servers. PowerChute Plus 5.0 software from American Power Conversion is the recommended choice. 
     The basic purpose of PowerChute Plus is to safely shut down an operating system and server in the event of a power failure. To do this properly, PowerChute Plus needs the UPS to provide battery power to the system while PowerChute shuts down the system. This is where the correct sequencing of Events becomes important. 
     Clear and accessible portion of the present description of startup/shutdown procedures 
     Automated startup/shutdown process that rarely requires manual intervention 
     A product that has remote power on reset capabilities 
     Backup and Restore 
     The incremental value of the daily work performed on the development project is high. This investment must be protected from problems arising from hardware and software failure, and from erroneous user actions and catastrophes such as fires or floods. The repositories and other development information must therefore be backed up regularly. Backup and restore procedures and tools must be tested to ensure that system components can be recovered as anticipated. The large volumes of complex data generally require automation of backups and restores. 
     The advent of Netcentric technologies has introduced an increase in media content that requires storage. The environment may support a high volume of media files, which must be considered in the backup/restore plans. Storage capacity planning should allow for the typically increased size of these file types. 
     As the amount of storage may grow significantly over time on a large project, the hardware requirements may increase. Sufficient room for growth should be planned when selecting the tools and hardware. Switching tools and hardware can be problematic due to lack of upward compatibility (DDS—DLT, various tools etc.). 
     The time required for backups must also be considered. Usually the number of hours without development per day decreases over time and if backups can only be performed when no user is logged in, this might become a problem. It is generally the case that the project may benefit from buying the fastest and largest backup hardware/software it can afford. 
     Storage Management 
     ReTA may implement an automated tape management system that provides location/retention special handling, file integrity and data protection. 
     Archiving 
     Archiving can be particularly useful to safeguard information from previous versions or releases. More generally, it is used to create a copy of information that is less time-critical than the current environment at a given time. Archiving may be performed to a medium, which is different from the backup medium, and may involve other tools, which, for example, provide a higher compression ratio. 
     Performance Monitoring 
     Performance Management ensures that the required resources are available at all times throughout the distributed system to meet the agreed upon SLAs. This includes monitoring and management of end-to-end performance based on utilization, capacity, and overall performance statistics. If necessary, Performance Management can adjust the production environment to either enhance performance or rectify degraded performance. 
     Operating System 
     Windows NT may function as the ReTA Phase 1 Development Environment operating system, handling Environment System Services such as multi-tasking, paging, memory allocation, etc. 
     System Level Services 
     The Windows NT Domain Controller allows users and applications to perform system-level environment services such as a login/logoff process for authentication to the operating system; enforced access control to system resources and executables; and access to the local or remote system&#39;s user or application profiles. 
     Application Services 
     The ReTA Phase 1 Frameworks may perform application Security Services, Error Handling/Logging Services, State Management Services and Help Services within the application. 
     State Management 
     State Management Services enable information to be passed or shared among windows and/or Web pages and/or across programs. In Netcentric environments, the HTTP protocol creates a potential need for implementing some form of Context Management Services (storing state information on the server). The HTTP protocol is a stateless protocol. Every connection is negotiated from scratch, not just at the page level but for every element on the page. The server does not maintain a session connection with the client nor save any information between client exchanges (i.e., web page submits or requests). Each HTTP exchange is a completely independent event. Therefore, information entered into one HTML form must be saved by the associated server application somewhere where it can be accessed by subsequent programs in a conversation 
     Security Services 
     ReTA implements Application Security through the ReTA Session and Activity frameworks. The Session framework provides “Session level Page access authorization”, “User identification” and “session timeout” services. The Activity framework provides “Activity level Page access authorization”. 
     Error Handling/Logging Services 
     Error Handling Services support the handling of fatal and non-fatal hardware and software errors for an application. An error handling architecture takes care of presenting the user with an understandable explanation of what has happened and coordinating with other services to ensure that transactions and data are restored to a consistent state. 
     Logging Services support the logging of informational, error, and warning messages. 
     Logging Services record application and user activities in enough detail to satisfy any audit trail requirements or to assist the systems support team in recreating the sequence of events that led to an error. 
     Runtime Services 
     The ReTA Phase 1 Development Environment may use the Microsoft Transaction Server and the Microsoft Java Virtual Machine as a Run-Time Environment System Service. This affords a layer of abstraction between the applications and the underlying operating system. 
     Problem Management 
     Problem Management tools help track each system investigation request—from detection and portion of the present description to resolution (for example, Problem Tracking, Impact Analysis, Statistical Analysis). Several problem management software packages are available from a variety of vendors. 
     Tool Recommendation 
     SIR Workbench 
     The SIR Workbench is another Microsoft Access tool that was developed for small to medium sized projects. It provides basic functionality of entering, modifying and reporting of architecture and application problems encountered during the testing and release phases of the project life cycle. 
     Visual SourceSafe 
     Visual SourceSafe (VSS) from Microsoft ships with the Visual Studio suite and as such is tightly integrated with the Visual Integrated Development Environments. One of the features provided by VSS is the ability to search through the source code for given text strings. This is useful for performing impact analysis. 
     Security Management 
     Security Management tools provide the components that make up the security layer of the final system, and may provide required security controls to the development environment. While some of these tools may be considered as nothing more than security-specific Packaged Components, many are an integral part of the development environment toolset. 
     Database 
     Development Database security may be minimal. Database User IDs may be setup to grant user-level security. The engagement Database Administrator (DBA) may have a logon to allow for full permissions. Otherwise, a Developer ID may allow read/write access and a Core User ID may allow for read access only. 
     Network 
     A Windows NT Group created specifically for the engagement may protect the Development shared file folder and subsequent sub-folders (ex ‘ReTAArch’). Project members individual network accounts may be added to the Domain Group ensuring access. Local network administrators may be responsible for the creation and maintenance of individual and group account information. 
     Application Server 
     The application server has two forms of security: Static security and dynamic (context dependent) security. 
     A Windows NT group may be created for each Role in the completed application (e.g. Customer, Manager). Microsoft Transaction Server&#39;s integrated Windows NT security allows the developer to determine the security rights for each component. The dynamic, context dependent security is implemented by the developer using the Event Handler framework for the logging and display of errors to the user. 
     Web Server 
     The web server has static security for each page and security to maintain control of the flow between pages. The static security uses the Windows NT group for each user role to restrict access to each page. For the flow control, the developer uses the Session framework to restrict the ordering of page requests. The allowed ordering of pages are entered into the Session database tables. 
     Systems Building 
     System Building tools comprise the core of the development architecture and are used to design, build, and test the system. 
     Analysis &amp; Design 
     The BI Methodology has several application development routes that apply to different development scenarios. Routes currently exist in the methodology for custom and packaged application development. Component development is among several routes to be developed. Until the component development route is completed, component-based projects should be planned using a combination of BI Methodology and ODM task packages. 
     In general, BI Methodology should be used for all tasks that are independent of a specific technology. For example, tasks related to business modeling, user interface design, training development, package selection, and product testing should all be taken from BI Methodology rather than ODM. These technology-independent tasks typically occur early (business modeling, solution strategy, and requirements gathering) and late (product testing through deployment) in the project. ODM content should be used for all tasks that are related to component and object development. In addition, ODM is the primary source for those tasks related to obtaining characteristics associated with component- and object-based development (such as flexibility and reuse). When using ODM task packages, take care to ensure that one consider how they link with the other elements of business integration (such as human performance). 
     Data Modeling 
     Description 
     Data Modeling tools provide a graphical depiction of the logical data requirements for the system. These tools usually support diagramming entities, relationships, and attributes of the business being modeled on an Entity-Relationship Diagram (ERD). Several techniques have evolved to support different methodologies (e.g., Chen, Gane &amp; Sarson, and IDEF). 
     As systems are often built on top of legacy databases, some data modeling tools allow generation of an object model from the legacy database data model (DDL). By understanding the E-R diagram represented by the database, it is easier to create an efficient persistence framework, which isolates business components from a direct access to relational databases. Caution is required, however, as the resulting model is at best only partial, as an object model has dynamic aspects to it as well as static relationships, and may not correctly reflect the analysis performed in the problem domain. 
     When a component or object-based approach is used, data modeling is not performed. Rather, the object model represents both the data and the behavior associated with an object. In most systems, relational databases are used and the object model must be mapped to the data model. Standard mechanisms for mapping objects exist. 
     Tool recommendation 
     Visual Studio 
     Microsoft&#39;s Visual Studio 6.0 includes a database diagram tool that helps developers visualize structures of tables and relationships within a relational database. See FIG. 35, which illustrates a Database Diagram  3500  within Visual Studio  3502 . Using this project within Visual Studio it is possible to, for example: 
     Connect to existing Oracle 7.33+ or SQL Server 6.5+databases. 
     View, print and modify existing database objects including table attributes and properties, views  3504 , columns, indexes, relationships, procedures  3506  and functions  3508 . 
     Create new database objects. 
     Generate SQL scripts for schema creation and update. 
     Version control schema information using Visual SourceSafe. 
     Visual Studio 
     Additionally, Rational Software&#39;s Rational Rose 98 provides Oracle 8 data modeling functionality including schema analysis, SQL/DDL generation, reporting and editing. For a complete description of the product and its features visit the Rational Rose Website at www.rational.com. 
     Performance Modeling/Management 
     Description 
     The performance of a system must be analyzed as early as possible in the development process. Performance modeling tools support the analysis of performance over the network. A simple spreadsheet may be suitable in some well-known and understood environments, but dedicated performance modeling tools should be considered on any project with high transaction volumes or complex distributed architectures involving several platforms. 
     In the case of Internet-based applications, as the Internet is not a controlled environment, performance modeling is limited to those components within the domain of the controlled environment (i.e. up to the Internet Service Provider). However, in the case of intranet-based systems, where the environment is controlled from end-to-end, performance modeling may be performed across the entire system. 
     Performance modeling for components involves the analysis of the projected level of interaction between components and the level of network traffic generated by this interaction. It is important for performance reasons that communication between components is minimized, especially if these components are distributed. 
     Tool recommendation 
     Visual Quantify 
     Tivoli 
     Sniffer Basic 
     Application Expert 
     Object Modeling 
     Description 
     An object model usually contains the following deliverables: 
     Class Diagram (1 per functional area or 1 per component) 
     Class Definition (1 per class) 
     Class Interaction or Sequence Diagram (1 or more per scenario/workflow) 
     Class State Transition Diagram (1 per Class with complex state) 
     Tools such as MS Word, MS PowerPoint, ABC Flowchart (MicroGrafix), may be used to produce these deliverables. See FIG. 36 illustrating Object Modeling  3600  within Rational Rose  3602 . Specific modeling tools do exist, however, and provide advantages such as cross referencing (for example, are all the methods used in the Interaction diagrams described in the class definitions?), automatic propagation of changes to other diagrams, generation of reports, and generation of skeleton code. However, some tools have problems with: 
     Usability and stability 
     Single users or small numbers of concurrent users 
     Proprietary repositories (usually file-based, rather than DB-based) 
     Support of extensions/customizations 
     As well as providing the usual editing and graphical functionality, a good modeling tool should: 
     Interface with a repository (to support versioning) 
     Support multiple users 
     Generate code from the design 
     The industry standard to represent the object model is UML notation (adopted by OMG). 
     Tool recommendation 
     Rational Rose 98 
     Visio 5.0 
     Visual Modeler 2.0 (Only valid for VB and VC++) 
     Component Modeling 
     Description 
     Component modeling can mean either designing components from scratch, or customizing and integrating packaged software. No specific component modeling tools exist, and current object modeling tools only provide limited support for components (e.g. for packaging related classes together). Class packages can be used to separate the object models for different components, with a separate class package(s) for the component model. This approach, however, is not enforced by current modeling tools, and requires project naming and structuring standards. 
     When component modeling is being performed using existing packaged software, some form of reverse engineering or importing is required from the modeling tool to capture the existing design. 
     During component design, the partitioned component model is designed, which defines physical interfaces and locations for components. It is important for performance reasons that communication between components is minimized, especially if they are distributed. 
     Tool recommendation 
     Rational Rose 98 
     Visio 5.0 
     Visual Modeler 2.0 (Only valid for VB and VC++) 
     Application Logic Design 
     Description 
     Application Logic Design tools graphically depicts an application. These tools include application structure, module descriptions, and distribution of functions across client/server nodes. 
     A variety of tools and techniques can be used for Application Logic Design. Examples are structure charts, procedure diagrams (module action diagrams), and graphics packages to illustrate distribution of functions across client and server. 
     Application Logic Design functionality is also provided by a number of Integrated Development Environments (IDE). 
     With component-based development, Application Logic Design is performed through object and component modeling. The functionality is captured in use cases, scenarios, work flows and/or operations diagrams along with interaction diagrams/sequence diagrams. These are usually produced using MS Word, MS PowerPoint, ABC Flowcharter (Micrografix), or an object modeling tool. 
     Tool recommendation 
     Rational Rose 98 
     Visio 5.0 
     Database Design 
     Description 
     Database design tools provide a graphical depiction of the database design for the system. They enable the developer to illustrate the tables, file structures, etc. that may be physically implemented from the logical data requirements. The tools also represent data elements, indexing, and foreign keys. 
     Many data design tools integrate data modeling, database design, and database construction. An integrated tool may typically generate the first-cut database design from the data model, and may generate the database definition from the database design. 
     With an object-based or component-based solution, the data-modeling task changes. In most cases, relational databases are still used, even where there are no dependencies on legacy systems. As there is an ‘impedance mis-match’ between an object model and a data model, a mapping activity must be undertaken. There are standard mechanisms for doing this. There are also tools on the market which allow the mapping of classes to relational tables, and which generate any necessary code to perform the database operations. 
     There is a tendency (especially when dealing with legacy systems) to treat data models and object models the same. It is important to recognize that at best, the data model represents only the static part of the object model and does not contain any of the transient or dynamic aspects. The physical data model may also change significantly (for DB optimization), further confusing the issue. 
     There can be performance problems with objects mapped to a relational database. In a worst case scenario, an object can be spread across many tables, with a single select/insert for each table, and as each object is loaded one by one, the performance becomes very poor. Some tools provide lazy initialization (only loading the parts as they are needed) and caching (minimizing DB hits). 
     The current trend seems to be for object-relational databases, with vendors such as Oracle adding object features to their core products. Although the support provided at the moment is limited, it is likely that in future versions Java or C++ classes may be able to interface directly. 
     Tool recommendation 
     Rational Rose 98 (Only valid for Oracle 8) 
     ERwin 
     Presentation Design 
     Description 
     Presentation design tools provide a graphical depiction of the presentation layer of the application. Tools in this category include window editors, report editors, and dialog flow (navigation) editors. Window editors enable the developer to design the windows for the application using standard GUI components. Report editors enable the developer to design the report layout interactively. Placing literals and application data on the layout without specifying implementation details such as page breaks. The majority of these tools generate the associated application code required to display these components in the target system. 
     Using the dialog flow (navigation) editors, the developer graphically depicts the flow of the windows or screens. The Control-Action-Response (CAR) diagram is a commonly used technique for specifying the design of GUI windows. 
     The majority of Netcentric systems use Web browsers to provide a common cross-platform user interface. Presentation design for this type of environment therefore entails the generation of HTML pages, often with additional components (JavaScript, 3rd party ActiveX controls, Plug-ins) providing enhanced functionality or media content. Many tools are currently available for designing and creating web content, although HTML remains the common denominator, at the very least as a placeholder for the content. 
     In the case of systems published on the Internet, defining the target audience is less straightforward than in traditional systems, but equally important. Having a good understanding of the intended audience may be a big advantage when thinking about user interaction with the system, and therefore, the presentation layer of the system. 
     Within a ReTA based application, three types of web pages that are available include: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Page Type 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Static HTML 
                 This page consists of a single HTML file con- 
               
               
                   
                 taining static text, formatting, scripts, anchor 
               
               
                   
                 tags, and imbedded images. This type of portion 
               
               
                   
                 of the present description is the most common as 
               
               
                   
                 it can be created using an ASCII text editor 
               
               
                   
                 such as Windows Notepad. 
               
               
                   
                 For designing web pages in a WYSIWYG format, 
               
               
                   
                 Many popular editing tools are available including 
               
               
                   
                 Microsoft FrontPage, Microsoft Visual InterDev, 
               
               
                   
                 and HomeSite. 
               
               
                   
                 Design elements include: 
               
               
                   
                 Static HTML v3.2/v4.0 portion of the present 
               
               
                   
                 descriptions 
               
               
                   
                 Graphics/Images 
               
               
                   
                 JavaScript (client and server) v1.2 
               
               
                 Active Server Page 
                 This type of web page is created dynamically at 
               
               
                 (Non UI Framework) 
                 the web server and written to the requesting 
               
               
                   
                 client. These pages are useful when dynamic 
               
               
                   
                 data is required within the web page itself. 
               
               
                   
                 Microsoft FrontPage and Visual InterDev are 
               
               
                   
                 popular ASP editors with Visual InterDev 
               
               
                   
                 providing ASP debugging functionality as well. 
               
               
                 Active Server Page 
                 This type of web page is also created dynamically 
               
               
                 (Using UI Framework) 
                 at the web server and written to the requesting 
               
               
                   
                 client, however, they make use of the ReTA User 
               
               
                   
                 Interface Framework. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Tool recommendation 
     Microsoft Visual Studio 6.0 
     Rational Rose 98 
     Visio 5.0 
     Visual Modeler 2.0 (Only valid for VB and VC++) 
     Packaged Component Integration 
     Description 
     Packaged components are generally thought of as third party applications or services that provide ready-made business logic that is customizable and reusable. Additionally, legacy applications can be included in these discussions when there is a desire to reuse portions of or an entire pre-existing application. One of the benefits of component-based systems is the ability to separate the component interfaces from their implementation. This simple feature can help enormously with access to both third party components and legacy applications. The concept of putting an object or component interface on a non-object piece of software is called ‘wrapping.’ 
     There are several arguments for putting a wrapper around an third party application or legacy system instead of custom building or replacing the functionality that they provide: 
     The wrapped component may provide functionality that requires deep technical expertise or knowledge to develop. (e.g. hardware drivers, EDI applications) 
     The provided functionality may only be temporary. With a wrapper in place, the underlying implementation may change without affecting the consuming application. 
     The wrapped component can now be reused within additional applications without additional effort. 
     Wrapping can take considerably less time and effort than building the third party component or legacy application over again. The more complex the application being wrapped, the greater the cost savings in time and effort. 
     Within wrapped components, it is possible to consolidate several existing applications into a single new service. (e.g. customer details from a ERP package as well as from the new system) 
     Procedures/Standards 
     Pure Component Integration 
     Component standards are maturing, particularly in eCommerce Applications. Although plug and play is not yet a reality, more application and ISV vendors are developing component based solutions for the eCommerce market place. Generally, this is the simplest form of integration if leading-edge eCommerce architectures are being deployed. 
     Care should be taken to allow for the migration from one vendor to another. To allow for this, the application developer should investigate encapsulating the component within an application wrapper. 
     Wrapped Component Integration 
     Many of today&#39;s vendors provide ActiveX or Java classes that provide a direct component interface into their application or services. Some vendors such as SAP expose component interfaces which can be accessed by ORBs e.g. Microsoft&#39;s DCOM connector. The underlying architecture however is not component-based. This is not a problem providing the package provides scalable and robust application execution. 
     Another example is the use of Microsoft&#39;s COM Transaction Integrator  3700  and the Microsoft SNA Server for NT  3702 . These products allow for the wrapping of CICS transactions in COM component stubs  3704  that can be invoked from MTS components. See FIG. 37, which illustrates directly calling a wrapped CICS component  3706 . 
     Batch and Indirect Integration 
     This process of integration relies on the use of Message Oriented Middleware (MOM) to provide asynchronous messaging to and from the packaged application. This can be accomplished using Microsoft&#39;s Message Queue (MSMQ)  3800 , IBM&#39;s MQ/Series  3802  and Level 8&#39;s Falcon Bridge  3804  (to provide MSMQ to MQ/Series communication). See FIG. 38, which illustrates indirectly calling a wrapped CICS component  3806 . 
     Data Integration 
     This is the most common form of integration but restrictive because it involves development of duplicated business logic, risks breaking application integrity and causes maintenance overheads. 
     Construction 
     Construction tools and processes are used to program or build the application: client and server source code, windows, reports, and database. ReTA based development should use a base set of naming and coding standards. 
     Tool recommendation 
     Visual Studio 6.0 
     Rational Rose 98 
     Test 
     Testing applications (client/server or NetCentric) remains a complex task because of the large number of integrated components involved (i.e., multi-platform clients, multi-platform servers, multi-tiered applications, communications, distributed processing, and data). The large number of components result in a large number and variety of testing tools. 
     Test Data Management 
     Description 
     Members of the technology infrastructure and data architecture teams are often the ones who create and maintain the common test data. This requires full-time personnel, especially when a large number of test databases must be kept in synchronization. Many of the automated testing tools available on the market today provide test data management functionality. At a minimum, vendor or custom applications and processes should be in place to perform the following: 
     Database Schema Export &amp; Import 
     Individual or Bulk Table Deletion and Population 
     Data Refresh/Restore 
     Additional functionality may include data generation or conversion, versioning and validation. 
     Tool Recommendation 
     Many testing tools are available on the market today, some of which provide test data management functionality. 
     Procedures/Standards 
     The ReTA Component Test Workbook Plan-Prep provides the mechanism for maintaining component test data required during test execution. When creating the test data, all attempts should be made to make the test data reusable. 
     Test Data Manipulation 
     Description 
     There are a few avenues for the manipulation of test data. When considering this function during the component and assembly testing phases consider the following: 
     Create test data if the physical data model is stable. 
     Use the existing application if it can create valid data. 
     Convert production data if the Data Conversion Application and the production data are reliable. 
     Tool Recommendation 
     If possible, leverage any existing data manipulations that were included with the database suite. Many database vendors provide data management and manipulation applications with their database systems. Additionally, many development packages, including Microsoft Visual Studio™, provide database access and manipulation functionality. 
     For data generation, PLATINUM TESTBytes™ is a test data generation tool that connects to your database to create test data for your relational databases. With point-and-click action, one can specify the type of data needed. TESTBytes automatically generates up to millions of rows of meaningful test data, eliminating days or weeks of time-consuming effort and reducing costs. 
     Procedures/Standards 
     For data conversion, the best approach is to: 
     If data is going to be shared with an existing application, attempts should be made to reuse test data from the legacy system. 
     Use the existing data store capabilities to extract or massage the data into a format that is easily integrated into the new application. 
     Create one-time extract and formatting applications to extract the legacy data, perform formatting and business operations, and import the newly modified data into the new data store. 
     The ReTA Component Test Workbook Plan-Prep provides the mechanism for maintaining component test data required during test execution. When creating the test data, all attempts should be made to make the test data reusable. 
     Test Planning 
     Description 
     The test planning function during a ReTA engagement provides an opportunity to define the approaches, tools, environments and process to test the application and its individual components for functional and technical validation. This process is typically assigned to someone with experience in application development using similar technologies as those to be used on the new system. 
     Tool Recommendation 
     The ReTA Component Test Workbook Plan-Prep provides the mechanism for maintaining and communicating component test information. Component test planning information such as component test cycles and component test conditions are included. Both worksheets are to be completed during the design phase by the designer. 
     Test Execution 
     Description 
     If testing environments have been created, application testing scenarios and scripts should be created to evaluate the application functions as designed. Actual results are compared against expected results portion of the present description with the test conditions. The use of automated testing tools is essential for fast, accurate regression and performance testing. Ensure the tool used for automated testing is easily configured. Also, ensure the scripts can be quickly updated to allow for user interface changes. 
     Tool Recommendation 
     Component Test Workbook 
     The ReTA Component Test Workbook Plan-Prep provides the mechanism for maintaining and communicating component test information. Component test planning information such as component test cycles and component test conditions are included. Both worksheets are to be completed during the design phase by the designer. 
     Automated Testing Tool 
     There are many automated, web-based testing tools on the market today. Many tools provide record and playback scripting functionality. See FIG. 39 which illustrates RSW eTest Automated Testing Tool  3900 . Recommended features include: 
     Auto record and playback of test scripts 
     Data driven testing 
     Easy test modification (many tools have proprietary scripting languages) 
     Cross-browser support 
     Multi-user simulation for load &amp; performance testing 
     Test summaries and reporting 
     Procedures/Standards 
     In addition to the test planning elements of the CT workbook, component test execution worksheets are also included: component test script, test data, and expected &amp; actual results worksheets. These worksheets are to be completed by the developer during the build phase. These scripts may be used by the developer/tester to execute the individual component tests. In theory, since the steps of the component test are portion of the present description, any developer or tester should be able to execute the test by simply following the steps outlined in the test script. 
     Performance Management 
     Description 
     Performance Management tools support application performance testing. These tools monitor the real-time execution and performance of software. They help to maximize transactions and response time to the end user. They are also useful in identifying potential bottlenecks or processing anomalies. 
     Procedures/Standards 
     During the automated test execution process, the testing tool may automatically verify the current state of the system (i.e. actual results) against the expected state of the system (i.e. expected results) for each test case defined in the test script. Execution status may be reported through the reporting function of the toolset. In the case of performance or lead testing, the testing tool may provide a summary report including graphic illustrations describing the overall performance of the system. 
     Test Results Comparison 
     Description 
     Whether using automated or manual testing processes, after the completion of each testing cycle it should be clear as to what defects still exist within the system. By comparing actual results with expected results, the application tester and developer can quickly detect design and development errors within the system. 
     Tool Recommendation 
     The ReTA Component Test Plan-Prep Workbook provides the mechanism for maintaining expected and actual results. The Expected and Actual Results worksheet outlines the expected result for each condition and lists the actual result encountered during the test execution. 
     Procedures/Standards 
     During the automated test execution process, the testing tool may automatically verify the current state of the system (i.e. actual results) against the expected state of the system (i.e. expected results) for each test case defined in the test script. Execution status may be reported through the reporting function of the toolset. 
     Test Coverage Measurement 
     Description 
     Test Coverage Measurement tools are used to analyze which parts of each module are used during the test. Coverage analyzing tools are active during program operation and provide comprehensive information about how many times each logic path within the program is run. This Test Management and Quality Management tool ensures that all components of an application are tested, and its use is a vital and often overlooked component of the test process. 
     Tool Recommendation 
     Rational&#39;s Visual PureCoverage™ is an easy-to-use code-coverage analysis tool that automatically pinpoints areas of code that code that have and have not been exercised during testing. This greatly reduces the amount of time and effort required to test an entire application and its components, increases the effectiveness of testing efforts by providing insight into overall program execution, and helps ensure greater reliability for the entire program, not just part of it. 
     Procedures/Standards 
     Test coverage measurement ensures is used to ensure that the entire application or system is completely tested. A manual approach can be applied to ensure that every path of logic within the application is completely tested. To reduce the test preparation time, an automated testing tool that provides this functionality should be leveraged. 
     SIR Management 
     Description 
     SIR Management Tools help track each system investigation request from problem detection through portion of the present description resolution. 
     Tool Recommendation 
     SIR Management Tools help track each system investigation request from problem detection through portion of the present description resolution. During the testing phases of the engagement, it may be desirable to reuse the SIR tools and processes developed for and used for overall problem tracking SIR Workbench 
     The SIR Workbench is a Microsoft Access based tool that has been used on various component and client/server engagements. It provides basic functionality of entering, modifying and reporting of architecture and application problems encountered during the testing phases of the project life cycle. 
     Procedures/Standards 
     For a full description of the tool and its use, refer to the SIR Workbench. 
     Development Architecture Physical Model 
     Purpose 
     The ReTA Development Architecture Physical Model portion of the description shows the actual components comprising the Development Architecture and their relative location and interfaces. Additionally, the model depicts the platforms on which the components may reside as well as the distribution across the environment. 
     The components in the Physical Model may support a portion of a function or more than one function from the functional model. 
     Physical Configuration 
     FIG. 40 is an illustration that describes the physical configuration necessary for ReTA development. The development environment was composed of the following hardware and software configurations: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 CPU 
                 RAM 
                 Operating System 
                 Software 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 RETASRV1 
                 P-300 
                 128 
                 Windows NT Server 4.0 
                 Microsoft Internet Information 
               
               
                 (4000) 
                   
                 MB 
                 (SP4) 
                 Server 4.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Transaction Server 2.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Client 6.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 HP OmniBack II Client 
               
               
                 RETASRV2 
                 P-166 
                 60 
                 Windows NT 
                 Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 
               
               
                 (4002) 
                   
                 MB 
                 Workstation 4.0 (SP4) 
                 Server 6.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 HP OmniBack II Client 
               
               
                 RETADB1 
                 P-300 
                 128 
                 Windows NT Server 4.0 
                 Oracle Enterprise Edition 8.04 
               
               
                 (4004) 
                   
                 MB 
                 (SP4) 
                 HP OmniBack II Client 
               
               
                 RETADEV1 
                 P-300 
                 96 
                 Windows NT 
                 Microsoft Transaction Server 2.0 
               
               
                 (4006) 
                   
                 MB 
                 Workstation 4.0 (SP4) 
                 Microsoft Personal Web Server 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 4.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Client 6.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Visual J++ 6.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0 - 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Tools Only 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Oracle 8 Client 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Build Model 
     FIG. 41 illustrates the application &amp; architecture configuration for a typical ReTA Build environment  4100 . Each development workstation  4102  should be configured to provide systems management, configuration management and systems building support. In this model, all architecture and application components &amp; services reside on the developer workstation. This allows the developer to design, build, debug and test independently of other developers. 
     Assembly Test Model 
     FIG. 42 illustrates the application &amp; architecture configuration for a typical ReTA Build environment  4200 . In this model, the testing workstation  4202  is configured to provide presentation services by way of an HTML 3.2 &amp; JavaScript 1.2 compatible web browser. The web/application server  4204  is configured with the current assembly test versions of ReTA application and architecture components. 
     Security Management Architecture 
     Overview 
     The ReTA Security Management Architecture includes security issues, concerns and recommendations associated with Net-Centric Computing. The Security Management Architecture deliverable is used to illustrate the potential security implications. The ReTA Security Management Architecture portion of the present description is divided into three main portions in order to encompass security requirements for Development, Execution and Operation Architecture. 
     Development Architecture Security Management 
     Preserving security of information as it travels across the Internet, or even your own intranet, has become increasingly complex. The Internet is a public resource accesible worldwide, and is built on a foundation of inherently insecure technologies. Information which is available across the Internet is becoming more and more sensitive as business continue to deploy to the Internet. Implementing effective security in our new Net Centric computing environments presents some challenges without a doubt, but not insurmountable ones. By designing security into your Net Centric solution, and implementing the appropriate application, infrastructure, and procedural controls, security can be appropriately aligned with business risk. See FIG. 43, which illustrates an IDEA Framework  4300  with components in scope ReTA Phase 1. 
     Everyone today is talking about Net Centric security. Keeping up with all of the security issues surrounding Net Centric technologies is more than a full time job, it has become a full time obsession. When designing a Net Centric solution, security is always at the forefront of everyone&#39;s mind, but what are the important things to consider? How do I know that I&#39;ve addressed all the appropriate questions? How may my solution affect the security of my computing environment? How may that security impact my business? This paper may answer these questions, providing an overview of “things to consider” when designing a Net Centric solution. It may not attempt to provide detailed technical solutions, but it may navigate one to the right path to find that information. 
     Impacts 
     Security Impacts 
     There is no question that the trend toward Net Centric computing may impact the traditional computing environment. Systems are much more distributed, and applications are being used by a larger number of people to reach new objectives every day. Along with all of these changes come significant security impacts. So what is it about Net Centric computing that can lead to security problems? 
     First of all, the Internet is a public resource. Traditionally our computer systems were only used or accessible by a small audience which we knew and could control. Now our computer environment is linked to the Internet, which is accessible to virtually anyone who has the time and the money to invest. While most of these people have good intentions when it comes to using your resources, some have an evil purpose. Threats can come from many sources: teenage hackers, spies from other companies, even curious people who inadvertently cause damage. The public nature of the Internet also increases the ability of these malicious individuals to collaborate and recruit others, thus strengthening their cause. The Internet contains a wide variety of information that people are interested in, from public information resources to sensitive customer databases. 
     In addition to the very lure of interesting information on the Internet, there are vulnerabilities inherent to Internet technologies which can make that information more easily compromised. In fact, the original intent of the Internet was to share information, not to be used as a business tool. Security weaknesses are widespread and present in nearly all Internet related technologies. The very communication protocol used, TCP/IP, was designed with few provisions to protect the security of the data packet. 
     Of course, security problems weren&#39;t created with the Internet; many of our standalone computer systems have the same types of security exposures. However, the global nature of the Internet now transfers these insecure services rapidly around the world. Weaknesses that before could only have been exploited by a small number of users with access to the system, can now be exploited by virtually anyone. These breaches are also now publicized to the entire Internet community. For example, many high profile web pages have recently been attacked, including NASA, the Department of Justice, and the CIA. Although these attacks were limited to vandalizing their web pages, (as far as we know), the publicity generated from the attacks has raised questions about the security of their systems in general. Internet access not only made these attacks possible, it also publicized the attack around the world. 
     This rapid transfer of information raises an issue regarding the dynamic nature of today&#39;s environment. The Net Centric environment includes traditional long term users of systems, as well as one time users who require instant logons and immediate connections. Security may stand in the way of business objectives if it is not flexible and dynamic enough to adapt to ever-changing business and technology requirements. In addition, new threats and risks evolve quickly in the Net Centric environment, and security programs may become ineffective and obsolete if not reviewed and updated regularly. 
     The Internet also brings with it a whole new set of legal issues, and topping the list are potential privacy implications. Businesses can now track your every movement on the Internet, from your email and IP addresses, to each site you surfed to and which ad one clicked. Does this constitute an invasion of your privacy? One may have freely given other businesses sensitive information aboutonerself, such as one&#39;s credit card number or one&#39;s social security number. To what lengths must that business go to in order to protect that information? If and when that information is compromised, who is liable? What is the penalty for breaking into a computer to which one is not granted access? What if one just looks around and does not cause any damage? These questions are just beginning to be addressed as cases are introduced in court and legislation is passed in Congress. But we are a long way from finding all the answers. 
     All of these security concerns have been widely publicized in the media, to the extent that the public now perceives security as a major issue on the Internet. These concerns may have the effect of impeding the success of an Internet solution, or even delaying a business decision to deploy to the Internet. Even as new technology emerges to solve many Internet related security problems, public opinion, legitimate or not, may still impact the success of any Internet solution. 
     Application Impacts 
     There are obviously a myriad of security implications from the move towards Net Centric computing. The Internet, and the growth of local intranets, has made our computing environment look much different today than it did five years ago. So what does this mean? When designing a business solution in this new environment, security implications have to be considered at every step of the process. Application design presents a specific set of security related challenges. 
     Application Design 
     The underlying theme in application design, from a security perspective, is to design in security from the beginning. Talk to Information Security representatives, and even internal auditors early on, and get their approval for your design. This can save retrofitting costs in order to achieve an adequate level of security, and may also end up giving one a more secure solution by integrating security right into the design of the application. 
     Once one is considering security, what is the best way to design it into your application? Even the most pompous security expert should recognize that your primary goal is not to build an application with really good security, it is to build an application that achieves a specific business goal. The challenge is to integrate security into that business goal so that it may not impede efficiency. Often security is tacked on a the last minute and impedes performance in the application, such that users may bypass security if possible, and curse it if not possible. 
     The next step is to consider the basic parameters of your application and how security applies to each of them. 
     Who needs access to the application, i.e. what is your user group? Is it all Internet users or some authorized subset? Does one only have one type of user or are multiple levels of authorization required? 
     Where may your application may be accessed from, the Internet or your intranet? How much control do one has over the security of that location and PC? 
     What is the confidentiality of the information your application may be transmitting or accessing? What implications would there be if that information fell into the wrong hands? 
     Once these questions have been answered one can begin to choose the appropriate tools or mechanisms to provide an adequate level of protection. 
     When designing your application, consider implementing the minimum level of functionality and authority required to meet your business goal. This is often contradictory to basic instinct when designing a new solution, but consider the potential implications. If your application does not need to allow users to execute arbitrary operating system commands, don&#39;t let it. If your application does not need to run as root or supervisor, don&#39;t let it. Designing for minimum functionality may obviously be a tradeoff between business and security benefits, but in general, it is better meet the level of authority required, not exceed it. 
     Security Integration 
     When designing security into your application, remember that one may not have to re-invent the proverbial wheel. Most information security groups may have corporate security strategies with which one can integrate. For example, an enterprise wide authentication scheme may be in use, with which one can integrate for remote access. Or there may be a single sign-on product with which your application may need to be compatible. Even if there is not a corporate security strategy in place today, consider the direction that the company is moving toward, and provide for future integration if possible. 
     Auditing and Logging 
     Application auditing and logging is often overlooked because it is less than glamorous, but it does provide security administrators with a crucial tool for monitoring use of an application. Good logs should be searchable for known or suspected patterns of abuse, and should be protected from alteration. Logs can monitor a virtual myriad of data, including access times, user IDs, locations from where the application was accessed, actions the user performed, and whether or not those actions were successfully completed. 
     Web Browser Security 
     While web browsers may not be exactly part of your application design, they are intimately related to many of the design decisions one may make, such as the programming tools one uses and the format your user interfaces take. The application programming tools portion of the description, above, discussed some possible ways a Web browser can exploit application security flaws. There are also design anomalies within the Web browsers themselves which can be exploited. Microsoft has fixed many of these flaws in their newest release of Internet Explorer, but their older versions are still vulnerable. This type of problem demonstrates that when considering integration with the major commercial web browsers, it is important to monitor news releases for recent security flaws. One may want to consider requiring your users to use the latest, most secure version of their Web browser if possible. 
     Infrastructure Impacts 
     Today&#39;s Net Centric computing infrastructure requires a complex mix of operating systems, web servers, database servers, firewalls, management tools, routers, and underlying network components. Each different component of this infrastructure has specific security considerations which need to be addressed. These requirements are always growing and changing, as are the solutions which can be implemented. When designing this complex infrastructure, similar to designing an application, security should be considered early on in the process. 
     Operating System Security 
     It is crucial to choose an operating system (OS) which can provide adequate security; and once chosen it is just as important to configure that OS in a secure manner. Any OS must address the same basic security questions, such as restricting permissions for what each user can access, limiting what actions each user can perform, providing monitoring and logging of user access, and restricting what services are available. Windows NT is without exception. 
     NT has been publicly available for over three years now, and while security issues may have appeared, fresh out of the box NT is a very secure OS. But there are still steps to take to improve this security. Configure your OS securely from the start, implement tools where appropriate, and continue to monitor the bulletin boards and vendor announcements for problems as they come up. 
     Web Server Security 
     Many of the OS security guidelines apply to web servers as well. Regardless of your choice of web server, it is important to configure that server securely. The server should be set to run under an ID which is used only by that web server, and never as root. Directory permissions should be assigned according to a need to know philosophy, and your portion of the present description root (where published information is stored) should be different from your server root (where server binaries and configuration files are stored.) 
     In addition to these somewhat generic operating system security tips, there are several features which are specific to a web server which could create security exposures. In general, if one doesn&#39;t need a feature, don&#39;t turn it on; and if one does need a feature, make sure the potential security risks are understood. Server side includes allow HTML authors to place commands inside their portion of the present descriptions that cause output to be modified whenever that portion of the present description is accessed by a user. Hackers can take advantage of server side includes if they are able to place arbitrary HTML statements on your server and then execute them. 
     Legacy System Integration 
     In order to truly take advantage of the power of Net Centric computing, new technologies need to be mixed and integrated with existing systems. More sophisticated intranets and extranets often require on line transactions or database inquiries of legacy environments which may not have the level of granular control required for secure access. In some cases, it may be possible to mirror the information from an existing platform to a more securable web server or database. This may protect the integrity of your sensitive systems while still providing the access for your on-line transactions. If a mirror system is not possible, a thorough audit should be performed of the security of your legacy system, to ensure that one is providing access to only those resources which are allowed. 
     Network Security 
     Now one has chosen your access control mechanisms, configured your OS, and it&#39;s time to connect to your network. This action may strike fear into the heart of many network and system administrators, because this may create one more way network security can be compromised. Contrary to popular belief, it is possible to establish and maintain effective network security. The first step is to understand what all of your network components are, and how they are connected. By examining your network topology, one can determine where all of your access points are, and (hopefully) the way that access to them is controlled. If remote access directly into your network is required, the use of your modems must be appropriately restricted. Don&#39;t rely on knowledge of the phone number or a single static password as effective security controls. 
     In addition to identifying one&#39;s access points, one should examine the path that one&#39;s traffic follows, and determine if that path is vulnerable to snooping and attack. One of the more infamous hacker gangs, the Masters of Deception, once infiltrated a major telecommunication provider&#39;s data network, and had access to the corporate secrets of hundreds of companies as information was sent across the lines. Even if your data is just traveling over internal links, a network management station could still be monitoring traffic, or a sniffer could illicitly be installed anywhere along the line. There are two major security controls that mitigate these risks: firewalls to restrict who can access your secure network, and encryption to protect your data as it&#39;s sent over an insecure network. 
     Firewalls 
     Firewalls are often thought of as THE answer to network security. There is a common misconception that purchasing and installing the “best” firewall available may automatically protect your network from the Internet. This is not necessarily true. In fact there are many factors to consider when choosing a firewall, and when placing and configuring that firewall in your environment. First of all, consider the type of network connection your are trying to protect. Firewalls are not only used to separate your intranet from the Internet, they can also be used to segregate a particularly sensitive or particularly insecure area of your intranet from the rest of your network. Depending on the services one wants to provide your users and what risk one is willing to accept, your choice of the “best” firewall implementation may change. 
     There are many different components of the firewall architecture to consider. Packet Filtering Systems selectively route packets between internal and external hosts by either the type of packet, the originating host address, or the target host address. Packet filtering is typically implemented on a specific type of router called a screening router. 
     Proxy Services are specialized applications or server programs that run on a firewall host, which take users&#39; requests for Internet services (such as ftp and telnet) and forward them, as appropriate according to the site&#39;s security policy, to the actual services. The proxies provide replacement connections and act as gateways to the services. For this reason, proxies are sometimes known as Application Level Gateways. 
     A Bastion Host is typically a dual-homed gateway with one interface on the internal network and one on the external network. It can be used to run proxy services or perform stateful packet inspection. The bastion host typically acts as the main point of contact for incoming connections from the outside world, including email, ftp and telnet requests, and DNS queries about the site. 
     A Perimeter Network or DMZ refers to a small network between your internal network and the Internet which provides an extra layer of security. Any publicly available resources one provides, such as a Web server or an ftp server, may typically be located in the DMZ, and restricted from one&#39;s internal network by a firewall machine or bastion host. 
     There are many commercially available firewall products that provide some or all of these features. Which product or firewall configuration is right for one may depend on what one&#39;s network looks like, what one is trying to protect, and what your users require. 
     Event Monitoring 
     Before an incident can be responded to, it must first be detected. In the Net Centric environment, your firewall, routers, web servers, database servers, applications, and network management tools must be monitored to ensure they are working correctly and no violations have occurred. Monitoring packages can be configured to take different actions on a series of specified events, such as sending an email message if a log fills up, flashing an icon on a system administrator&#39;s screen if someone&#39;s user ID is disabled, or paging a network administrator if a link to the ISP goes down. Once this initial notification takes place, there should be escalation procedures to decide whom to notify next. For example, if the link to the ISP goes down, how long does one wait before notifying one&#39;s manager? one&#39;s users? In addition, not all monitoring needs to be reactive. There are proactive monitoring tools available which can detect patterns of abuse or failure which may lead to larger problems, and can help one detect those problems before they affect your users. 
     Backup and Recovery 
     People kick over servers, accidentally delete files, and spill coffee on machines. For these reasons and a host of others, Net Centric resources must be backed up in a manner so that they can be recovered. This does not mean dumping a bunch of files onto data tapes and stacking them in a corner of the server room. An effective backup and recovery strategy should address how backups may be taken, the media on which they may be stored, the location where they may be stored, and the frequency with which they may be taken. Backups should also be periodically tested to make sure that they are recoverable, for example to make sure the backup tape drive is still working. When designing your backup strategy one should also consider the specific types of applications, databases, and hardware which are in use in your environment. For example an Oracle database may probably not be recoverable from a .tar file. In addition to software resources, consider what would happen if your router or your ISP link were to go down. It may be necessary to maintain a backup link to a secondary service provider in the event that your ISP goes down for an extended period of time. 
     Execution Architecture Security Management 
     The Execution Architecture Security focuses on Authorization, Encryption and Authentication in order to securely support applications and ensure data integrity throughout the life cycle of a single transaction. The ReTA Effort chose the Netcentric Architecture Framework (NCAF) to identify the appropriate components to focus on within the Execution Architecture. See FIG. 44 which illustrates a NCAF Framework  4400  with the shaded components  4402  in scope for Phase 1. 
     Authentication 
     Regardless of the operating system that one is using, access control is a major security concern. NT authenticate users by their knowledge of an ID and password that can be used multiple times however, all passwords are vulnerable in some manner. The advent of sniffing technologies allows passwords to be monitored and read over the network. Even if passwords are encrypted as they are sent, a keystroke capturing program could be installed at the client PC and used to capture passwords before they are encrypted. Perhaps advanced client side security can mitigate this threat as well, but even with the highest technology solution, a user could write his password down and stick it to the side of his PC, thereby defeating all of the technology just implemented. 
     The solution to this problem is some type of two factor authentication, meaning that users are authenticated with something they have, and something they know. The “something they know” can still be a password, and the “something they have” can range from the high end being a one time password generator, to the low end being an ID file stored on the user&#39;s PC or on a disk. In choosing an appropriate solution, one should consider ease of management and ease of distribution, the required strength of the solution, and integration into your environment. There are several examples of technologies which can meet your requirements, including the use of one-time passwords, time based passwords, or challenge response schemes. Once chosen and implemented, a secure authentication mechanism can be incorporated with both your operating system and your application to remove the risks associated with static passwords. Some authorization options are depicted in this Authentication Matrix: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Product 
                 Description 
                 Pros 
                 Cons 
                 Implementation 
                 Vendors 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Smartcards 
                 The smart card is a plastic 
                 Strong 
                 Additional 
                 4-6 people 
                 WetStone 
               
               
                   
                 card having the size and 
                 Authentication 
                 Hardware 
                 weeks 
                 Schumberger 
               
               
                   
                 shape of a credit card, and 
                 Login from 
                 No Standard 
                   
                 SmartCard 
               
               
                   
                 containing a microprocessor 
                 various 
                 Slow 
                   
                 Technologies 
               
               
                   
                 chip with both secure storage 
                 locations 
                 Acceptance 
               
               
                   
                 of public/private key data and 
                 Scalability 
               
               
                   
                 cryptographic processing 
               
               
                   
                 capabilities 
               
               
                 PKI 
                 The system required to 
                 Strong 
                 Requires 
                 4-24 people 
                 GTE 
               
               
                   
                 provide public-key 
                 Authentication 
                 infrastructure to 
                 weeks 
                 Cybertrust 
               
               
                   
                 encryption and digital 
                 Enables the 
                 operate 
                   
                 VeriSign 
               
               
                   
                 signature services. The 
                 use of 
                 Certificate 
                   
                 Entrust 
               
               
                   
                 purpose of a public-key 
                 encryption and 
                 Management 
               
               
                   
                 infrastructure is to manage 
                 digital signature 
                 Services 
               
               
                   
                 keys and certificates. A PKI 
                 services across a 
               
               
                   
                 enables the use of encryption 
                 wide variety of 
               
               
                   
                 and digital signature services 
                 applications 
               
               
                   
                 across a wide variety of 
               
               
                   
                 applications. 
               
               
                 Hard Token 
                 A hard token is a physical 
                 Strong 
                 Increased 
                 4-8 weeks 
                 Enigma Logic 
               
               
                   
                 device that acts as 
                 Authentication 
                 Cost 
                 depending on 
                 Security Dynamics 
               
               
                   
                 “something a user has”. The 
                 Versatility 
                   
                 API config. 
                 Vasco 
               
               
                   
                 end-user then supplies 
                 Login from 
               
               
                   
                 “something the user knows”, 
                 various locations 
               
               
                   
                 namely a personal 
               
               
                   
                 identification number or PIN. 
               
               
                   
                 The combination of the token 
               
               
                   
                 and the PIN, along with the 
               
               
                   
                 user&#39;s public username, 
               
               
                   
                 provides strong two factor 
               
               
                   
                 authentication of the user. 
               
               
                 Soft Token 
                 A soft token is a software 
                 Provides a 
                 Users limited to 
                 3-6 weeks 
                 Axent 
               
               
                   
                 device that creates a unique 
                 significantly 
                 log on from one 
                 depending 
                 Defender 
               
               
                   
                 one-time password that 
                 higher level of 
                 computing 
                 on API 
                 Security 
               
               
                   
                 cannot be guessed, shared, or 
                 security than 
                 location 
                 config. 
                 Dynamics 
               
               
                   
                 cracked. The end-user then 
                 the reusable 
                 More easily 
               
               
                   
                 supplies a personal 
                 password 
                 compromised 
               
               
                   
                 identification number or PIN. 
                   
                 than hard token 
               
               
                   
                 The combination of the one- 
               
               
                   
                 time password and the PIN, 
               
               
                   
                 along with the user&#39;s public 
               
               
                   
                 username, provides two 
               
               
                   
                 factor authentication of the 
               
               
                   
                 user. 
               
               
                 ID/ 
                 A method of authenticating a 
                 Easy 
                 Password 
                 Native to 
               
               
                 Password 
                 user by which a user provides 
                 implementation 
                 Intensive 
                 Applet 
               
               
                   
                 a unique identifier and a 
               
               
                   
                 shared secret. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Encryption 
     In Net Centric computing it is likely that eventually your data may pass through a network that is not secure, where your data can be snooped or even changed. In order to guarantee confidentiality over any insecure network, including the Internet, some type of encryption must be used. Encryption may ensure that data cannot be read by anyone other than the secure target server, and that the data being transferred has not been altered. Today there are so many different strategies for implementing encryption, it is often difficult to choose which scheme is most appropriate. The specific encryption strategy chosen may rely on a number of factors. 
     What information exactly needs to be encrypted? If one is running a smart store over the Internet, maybe one only needs to encrypt the single piece of data that has the customer&#39;s credit card information. If one is allowing their system administrators to dial into their network via the Internet, one may probably want to encrypt the whole session. 
     How many users are there? If one want to just encrypt data between a few users and one&#39;s system, a private or secret key encryption scheme may be appropriate. If one is in a multi-user environment one may probably want to consider public key encryption, and the key management strategies that go along with it. 
     What does one&#39;s computing environment look like? If your applications or operating systems provide native encryption, these may be the easiest and most secure to implement. 
     Based on your answers to these questions, there are a number on encryption solutions available for implementation. If one is running a Netscape web server, one may want to consider Secure Sockets Layer, or SSL, which provides data encryption, server authentication, message integrity, and optional client authentication for a TCP/IP connection. Another WWW security solution is Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol (S-HTTP), which is a security-enhanced version of HTTP, developed by Enterprise Integration Technologies (EIT). S-HTTP supports end-to-end secure transactions by incorporating cryptographic enhancements to messaging at the application level. Pretty Good Privacy, or PGP, is a common encryption solution for electronic mail. PGP may both authenticate the sender of the message, and encrypt the contents of the message through the use of a public key/private key pair. In electronic commerce solutions, the Secure Electronic Transactions (SET) specification which is being jointly developed by Visa and MasterCard may be considered. SET may require authentication of all parties involved with a credit card transaction through the use of digital signatures and certificates, and may use a separate encryption handshake in order to guarantee both confidentiality and integrity. Other encryption solutions include Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP), Private Communication Protocol (PCT), or the use of CryptoAPI. Some available encryption options are depicted in the following Encryption Matrix: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Product 
                 Description 
                 Pros 
                 Cons 
                 Implementation 
                 Vendors 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Virtual 
                 A secure, end-to-end 
                 Application- 
                 High 
                 1-4 people 
                 Axent Raptor 
               
               
                 Private 
                 connection is 
                 independent 
                 implementation 
                 weeks. 
                 Firewall VPN 
               
               
                 Network 
                 established through 
                 channel 
                 cost 
                   
                 and Power 
               
               
                   
                 encryption in an 
                 Best suited for 
                 Requires 
                   
                 VPN 
               
               
                   
                 application- 
                 static business 
                 software for 
                   
                 Checkpoint 
               
               
                   
                 independent channel. 
                 relationships 
                 remote users 
                   
                 VPN 
               
               
                   
                 Encryption services 
                 Does not 
                   
                   
                 V-one 
               
               
                   
                 can be computationally 
                 require any 
                   
                   
                 SmartGate. 
               
               
                   
                 expensive and degrade 
                 additional 
               
               
                   
                 performance. 
                 software for 
               
               
                   
                 Hardware based 
                 enterprise users 
               
               
                   
                 encryption services 
               
               
                   
                 usually provide 
               
               
                   
                 increased performance 
               
               
                   
                 over software based 
               
               
                   
                 encryption. 
               
               
                 Protocol 
                 A secure, end-to-end 
                 Reduced cost 
                 Application 
                 2-8 people 
                 WorldTalk&#39;s 
               
               
                 Specific 
                 connection is 
                 over traditional 
                 dependent 
                 weeks 
                 WorldSecure 
               
               
                 VPN 
                 established through 
                 VPN 
                 channel 
               
               
                   
                 encryption for a 
                 Reduced 
               
               
                   
                 specific protocol. 
                 implementation 
               
               
                   
                   
                 time compared 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to traditional 
               
               
                   
                   
                 VPN 
               
               
                 Hardware 
                 Performs 
                 Increased 
                 Increased cost 
                 1-3 people 
                 Atalla 
               
               
                 Encryption 
                 cryptographic 
                 security and 
                 over software 
                 weeks 
                 SignMaster 
               
               
                   
                 processing features on 
                 performance 
                 encryption 
                   
                 Cylink 
               
               
                   
                 a dedicated hardware 
                 over software 
                   
                   
                 CryptoServer 
               
               
                   
                 device. 
                 encryption 
                   
                   
                 Timestep 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 PERMIT/Gat 
               
               
                 Secure 
                 SSL is a security 
                 Open standard 
                 Early 
                 Native to web 
               
               
                 Sockets 
                 protocol that prevents 
                 Low 
                 implementations 
                 components) 
               
               
                 Layer 
                 eavesdropping, 
                 implementation 
                 have security 
               
               
                   
                 tampering, or message 
                 cost 
                 vulnerabilities 
               
               
                   
                 forgery over the 
                 Strong take-up 
               
               
                   
                 Internet. 
                 in the U.S. vs. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 SET 
               
               
                 PKI 
                 The system required to 
                 Provides 
                 Expensive to 
                 4-24 people 
                 GTE 
               
               
                   
                 provide public-key 
                 security 
                 implement 
                 week 
                 Cybertrust 
               
               
                   
                 encryption and digital 
                 infrastructure for 
                 Requires 
                   
                 VeriSign 
               
               
                   
                 signature services. The 
                 multiple 
                 ongoing key 
                   
                 Entrust 
               
               
                   
                 purpose of a public- 
                 applications 
                 management 
               
               
                   
                 key infrastructure is to 
                 Provides 
                 activities 
               
               
                   
                 manage keys and 
                 authentication in 
               
               
                   
                 certificates. A PKI 
                 addition to 
               
               
                   
                 enables the use of 
                 encryption 
               
               
                   
                 encryption, digital 
               
               
                   
                 signatures, and 
               
               
                   
                 authentication services 
               
               
                   
                 across a wide variety 
               
               
                   
                 of applications. 
               
               
                 Symmetric 
                 The system required to 
                 Increased 
                 Authentication 
                 (solution not 
                 TriStrata 
               
               
                 Key 
                 provide symmetric key 
                 performance 
                 is not tied 
                 implemented) 
                 Portion of the 
               
               
                 Encryption 
                 encryption and 
                 over public key 
                 uniquely to one 
                   
                 present 
               
               
                 Infra- 
                 authentication 
                 encryption 
                 individual 
                   
                 description 
               
               
                 structure 
                 services. Similar to 
                 Toolkits can be 
                 Private 
                   
                 Security 
               
               
                   
                 kerberos, this system 
                 used to integrate 
                 information is 
                   
                 System 
               
               
                   
                 may provide a central 
                 security 
                 stored in a 
               
               
                   
                 repository for 
                 technology into 
                 central database 
               
               
                   
                 encryption and 
                 applications 
                 native in 
               
               
                   
                 authentication services 
                   
                 applications 
               
               
                   
                 across multiple 
                   
                 limited to 
               
               
                   
                 applications and 
                   
                 WIN95/NT 
               
               
                   
                 computing platforms. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Authorization 
     When a user requests access to network resources, the Authorization service determines if the user has the appropriate permissions and either allows or disallows the access. (This occurs after the user has been properly authenticated.) 
     The following are examples of ways to implement Authorization services: 
     Network Operating Systems—Authorization services are bundled with all network operating systems in order to control user access to network resources. 
     Servers, Applications, and Databases—Authorization can occur locally on a server to limit access to specific system resources or files. Applications and databases can also authorize users for specific levels of access within their control. (This functionality is within the Environment Services grouping in the execution architecture.) 
     Firewall Services protect sensitive resources and information attached to an Intxxnet network from unauthorized access by enforcing an access control policy. 
     Recommendation 
     ReTA may utilize all Windows NT-based resources, including those accessed using a Web browser, are represented as objects that can be accessed only by authorized Windows NT-based users. Access may be controlled through an Access Control List (ACL). 
     Operations Architecture Security Management 
     The Operations Architecture is a combination of tools, support services, procedures, and controls required to keep a production system up and running efficiently. Unlike the Execution and Development Architectures, its primary users are the system administrators and the production support personnel. 
     All components of the Operations Architecture are integral to the successful management of a distributed environment. Any processes, procedures, or tools developed or chosen as an operational management solution for a specific operational area must be able to integrate with any existing or planned process, procedure, tool solutions for other Operations Architecture areas. See FIG. 45 which illustrates a MODEnc Framework  4500  with an event processing component  4502  and an event and data generation component  4504 . 
     Execution Architecture Design 
     Overview 
     The Netcentric Architecture Framework (NCAF) identifies the run-time services required by Netcentric applications. The ReTA design effort used this framework to define the ReTA Execution Architecture requirements. Taken in the NCAF context, this portion of the present description describes the ReTA Execution Architecture implementation (through custom and/or vendor components) of the required run-time services. 
     The NCAF categorizes the runtime services into the following logical areas (see FIG. 46 which illustrates the NCAF Framework  4600 ): 
     Presentation Services  4602   
     Information Services  4604   
     Communication Services  4606   
     Communication Fabric Services  4608   
     Transaction Services  4610   
     Environment Services  4612   
     Base Services  4614   
     Business Logic  4616   
     Execution Architecture Component Design 
     Purpose 
     The Execution Architecture Component Design portion of the description describes the ReTA implementation of the NCAF defined run-time services. This portion of the description also maps the ReTA application architecture frameworks into the appropriate NCAF service component descriptions. 
     The ReTA Application Architecture comprises the following frameworks: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Framework 
                 Services 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Session 
                 Security 
               
               
                   
                 User identification 
               
               
                   
                 Page access authorization - Session scope 
               
               
                   
                 Automatic abort - timeout 
               
               
                   
                 Customized information delivery 
               
               
                   
                 Customized user interface 
               
               
                   
                 Customized application access 
               
               
                   
                 Manage user session 
               
               
                   
                 Inform user on session status 
               
               
                   
                 Abort session 
               
               
                   
                 Flow control 
               
               
                   
                 Page to open on action 
               
               
                   
                 Pages of activity 
               
               
                   
                 Maintain context 
               
               
                   
                 Activity context 
               
               
                   
                 Business Object context - shared among activities 
               
               
                   
                 Message Broadcast 
               
               
                   
                 Register listener 
               
               
                   
                 Broadcast Message to registered listeners 
               
               
                   
                 Encryption 
               
               
                   
                 Encode Database User Name and Password 
               
               
                   
                 Decode Database User Name and Password 
               
               
                 Activity 
                 Provide a logical unit of work 
               
               
                   
                 Microsoft Transaction Server transaction principles 
               
               
                   
                 Maintain context 
               
               
                   
                 Business Object context 
               
               
                   
                 UI context - List boxes 
               
               
                   
                 Sub-activity context 
               
               
                   
                 Security 
               
               
                   
                 Page access authorization - Activity scope 
               
               
                   
                 Validation 
               
               
                   
                 Pre-conditions 
               
               
                   
                 Post-conditions 
               
               
                   
                 Sub-Activity - Smallest grained business logic 
               
               
                   
                 Execute business logic 
               
               
                   
                 View - mapping between a user interface and a business 
               
               
                   
                 object 
               
               
                   
                 Capture user entry 
               
               
                   
                 Display value entered 
               
               
                 Persistence 
                 Database Connection 
               
               
                   
                 Uncouple database connection from application 
               
               
                   
                 Database mapping 
               
               
                   
                 Map an object to a database table 
               
               
                   
                 Object query 
               
               
                   
                 Trigger queries on objects 
               
               
                   
                 Easily iterate through the results 
               
               
                   
                 Record locking 
               
               
                   
                 Optimistic locking 
               
               
                   
                 Pessimistic locking 
               
               
                 Event 
                 Register event 
               
               
                 Handler 
                 Create event 
               
               
                   
                 Maintain event reference 
               
               
                   
                 Process event 
               
               
                   
                 Information 
               
               
                   
                 Warning 
               
               
                   
                 Logical Unit of Work 
               
               
                   
                 Fatal 
               
               
                   
                 Display events 
               
               
                   
                 Translate event 
               
               
                   
                 Inform user 
               
               
                   
                 Persist event 
               
               
                   
                 Log event to database 
               
               
                 User Interface 
                 Generate UI Items 
               
               
                   
                 Form 
               
               
                   
                 Push Button 
               
               
                   
                 Text Box (single-line entry field) 
               
               
                   
                 Text Area (multi-line entry field) 
               
               
                   
                 Radio Button group 
               
               
                   
                 Check Box 
               
               
                   
                 Drop Down List Box 
               
               
                   
                 Blank Item 
               
               
                   
                 Static Table 
               
               
                   
                 Single-Select List Box 
               
               
                   
                 Generate UI actions 
               
               
                   
                 JavaScript - action shell 
               
               
                   
                 JavaScript - data type validation 
               
               
                   
                 JavaScript - data range validation 
               
               
                   
                 JavaScript - automatic navigation action 
               
               
                   
                 Generate Page Format 
               
               
                   
                 Cascading Style Sheet 
               
               
                   
                 Form (grid layout for form elements) 
               
               
                 Codes Table 
                 Retrieve from Codes Table 
               
               
                   
                 Retrieve single decode value 
               
               
                   
                 Retrieve all decode values 
               
               
                   
                 Maintain Codes Table 
               
               
                   
                 Update single Code/Decode 
               
               
                   
                 Update all Codes/Decodes 
               
               
                   
                 Set Table Name 
               
               
                   
                 Add new Code/Decode 
               
               
                   
                 Remove Code/Decode 
               
               
                   
                 Add Table 
               
               
                   
                 Remove Table 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Base Services 
     Base Services provide server-based support for delivering applications to a wide variety of users over the Internet, intranet, and extranet. 
     Web Server Services 
     Description 
     Enables organizations to manage and publish information and deploy Netcentric applications over the Internet and Intranet environments. These services support the following: managing portion of the present descriptions in multiple formats, handling of client requests for HTML pages, processing server-side scripts, and caching web pages to improve performance. 
     ReTA implementation 
     ReTA implements web server services through Microsoft&#39;s Internet Information Server 4.0 (IIS). IIS provides the following services: 
     Process requests for static and dynamic web pages and graphics. 
     Implement appropriate security and authentication to public and private areas of a web site. 
     Execute application specific Active Server Pages. 
     Implement web activity tracking and reporting. 
     Implement application state and management capability. 
     ReTA uses the IIS Session object to hold references to architecture and application components during the user session. 
     Communication Services 
     Network services provided by the Communications Services layer are grouped into four major categories of functionality: Virtual Resource, Directory, Messaging, and Security services. The Virtual Resources Component is not implemented by ReTA Phase 1. 
     Directory Services 
     A full-featured Directory Service organizes, categorizes and names networked resources in order to provide a comprehensive picture of clients, servers, users, applications and other resources. The service typically includes a database of objects, representing all nodes and resources on a network. The database manages relationships between users and networks, network devices, network applications, and information on the network. The Directory service performs the following functions: 
     Stores information about network resources and users and tracks relationships 
     Organizes resource access information in order to aid resources in locating and accessing other resources throughout the network 
     Provides location transparency, since resources are accessed through a directory rather than based on their physical location 
     Converts between logical resource names and physical resource addresses 
     Interacts with Security services such as authentication and authorization track identities and permissions 
     Provides single network logon to file and print resources; can provide single network logon for network applications that are integrated with the Directory service 
     Distributes directory information throughout the enterprise (for reliability and location-independent access) 
     Synchronizes multiple directory databases 
     Enables access to heterogeneous systems (integration of various network operating systems, platforms, etc.) 
     Domain Services 
     Description 
     A network domain is a set of network nodes under common control (i.e., common security and logins, unified addressing, coordinated management, etc.). Domain services manage these types of activities for the network nodes in a domain. Domain services may be limited in their ability to support heterogeneous systems and in the ability to scale to support the enterprise. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements domain services through Microsoft&#39;s NT 4.0 Server. 
     Name Services 
     Description 
     The Name service creates a logical “pronounceable” name in place of a binary machine number. These services could be used by other communications services such as File Transfer, Message Services, and Terminal Services. A Name service can be implemented on its own, or as part of a full-featured Directory service. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements name services through Microsoft&#39;s NT 4.0 Server. 
     Messaging Services (Core) 
     Broadly defined, Messaging services enable information or commands to be sent between two or more recipients. Recipients may be computers, people, or processes within a computer. Core Messaging services are categorized by the characteristics of the information being transferred: 
     File Transfer 
     RPC 
     Message-Oriented Middleware—Not in scope for ReTA Phase 1 
     Streaming—Not in scope for ReTA Phase 1 
     File Transfer 
     Description 
     File Transfer services enable the sending and receiving of files or other large blocks of data between two resources. In addition to basic file transport, features for security, guaranteed delivery, sending and tracking sets of files, and error logging may be needed if a more robust file transfer architecture is required. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements file transfer services through Microsoft&#39;s Internet Information Server 4.0 (IIS) using the HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP). Within a Web-based environment, Web servers transfer HTML pages to clients using HTTP. HTTP can be thought of as a lightweight file transfer protocol optimized for transferring small files. HTTP reduces the inefficiencies of the FTP protocol. HTTP runs on top of TCP/IP and was developed specifically for the transmission of hypertext between client and server. 
     RPC (Remote Procedure Calls) 
     Description 
     RPCs (Remote Procedure Calls) are a type of protocol by which an application sends a request to a remote system to execute a designated procedure using the supplied arguments and return the result. RPCs emulate the function call mechanisms found in procedural languages. This means that control is passed from the main logic of a program to the called function, with control returning to the main program once the called function completes its task. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements RPC services through Microsoft&#39;s COM/DCOM mechanism and the Internet Information Server 4.0 (IIS) using HTTP. 
     Messaging Services (Specialized) 
     Specialized Messaging services extend the Core Messaging services to provide additional functionality, including: 
     Provides messaging among specialized systems by drawing upon basic messaging capabilities 
     Defines specialized message layouts 
     Defines specialized inter-system protocols 
     Suggests ways in which messaging draws upon directory and security services in order to deliver a complete messaging environment 
     Database Access 
     Description 
     Database Messaging services (also known as Database Access Middleware) provide connectivity for clients to access databases throughout the enterprise. Database messaging software draws upon basic inter-process messaging capabilities (e.g., RPCs) in order to support database connectivity. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Database Messaging services through Microsoft&#39;s Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) mechanism. ReTA abstracts database connection from the application developer through the Microsoft Transaction Server (MTS) 2.0 connection pooling mechanism. 
     Object Messaging 
     Description 
     Object Messaging enables objects to transparently make requests of and receive responses from other objects located locally or remotely. Objects communicate through an Object Request Broker (ORB). An ORB enables client objects to access server objects either locally or remotely over a network and invoke operations (i.e. functions and methods) on them. ORBs typically provide interoperability between heterogeneous client and server environments: across languages and/or operating systems and/or network protocols. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Object Messaging services through Microsoft&#39;s COM/DCOM mechanism. 
     Security Services 
     Communications Security services control access to network-attached resources. Combining network Security services with security services in other parts of the system architecture (e.g., application and database layers) results in robust security. 
     Authentication 
     Description 
     Authentication services verify network access requests by validating that users are who they claim to be. For secure systems, one or more authentication mechanisms can be used to validate authorized users and to verify to which functions and data they have access. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Authentication services through Microsoft&#39;s NT 4.0 Server (and IIS). 
     Authorization 
     Description 
     Authorization services determine if users have appropriate permissions and either allows or disallows the access. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Authorization services through Microsoft&#39;s NT 4.0 Server (and IIS). ReTA also supports application defined “required workflow sequence” web page access authorization through the ReTA Session framework. 
     Encryption 
     Description 
     Encryption services encrypt data prior to network transfer to prevent unauthorized interception. Encryption has two main components: the encryption algorithm, which is the series of steps that is performed to transform the original data; and the key, which is used by the algorithm in some way to encrypt the message. Typically, the algorithm is widely known, while the key is kept secret. There are several types of encryption in use today, including: 
     Secret key cryptography—uses one key (the secret key) both to encrypt the message on one side and to decrypt the message on the other side. 
     Public key cryptography—uses two keys, the public key and the private key. The public key and private key are mathematically related so that a message encrypted with the recipient&#39;s public key may be decrypted with the recipient&#39;s private key. Therefore, the public key can be widely published, while the private key is kept secret. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Encryption services through the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) mechanism. ReTA also implements encryption for the User ID and User Password used by the ODBC mechanism through the ReTA Session framework. 
     Environment Services 
     Environment Services provide miscellaneous application and system level services that do not deal directly with managing the user-interface, communicating to other programs, or accessing data. Sub-components covered during the Phase 1 of ReTA include: Application Services, Component Framework, Operating System, Runtime Services, and System Services. 
     Application Services 
     Application Services are miscellaneous services which applications can use for common functions. These common functions can apply to one application or can be used across applications. They include: Application Security Services, Error Handling/Logging Services, State Management Services, Help Services, and Other Common Services. 
     Application Security 
     Description 
     Besides system level security such as logging into the network, there are additional security services associated with specific applications. These include: 
     User Access Services—set of common functions that limit application access to specific users within a company or external customers. 
     Data Access Services—set of common functions that limit access to specific data within an application to specific users or user types (e.g., secretary, manager). 
     Function Access Services—set of common functions that limit access to specific functions within an application to specific users or user types (e.g., secretary, manager). 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Application Security through the ReTA Session and Activity frameworks. The Session framework provides “Session level Page access authorization”, “User identification” and “session timeout” services. The Activity framework provides “Activity level Page access authorization”. 
     Codes Table Services 
     Description 
     Codes Table Services enable applications to utilize externally stored parameters and validation rules. For example, an application may be designed to retrieve the tax rate for the State of Illinois. When the user enters “Illinois” on the screen, the application first validates the user&#39;s entry by checking for its existence on the “State Tax Table”, and then retrieves the tax rate for Illinois. Note that codes tables provide an additional degree of flexibility. If the tax rates changes, the data simply needs to be updated; no application logic needs to be modified. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Codes Table Services through the ReTA Codes Table framework. 
     Error Handling/Logging 
     Description 
     Error Handling Services support the handling of fatal and non-fatal hardware and software errors for an application. An error handling architecture takes care of presenting the user with an understandable explanation of what has happened and coordinating with other services to ensure that transactions and data are restored to a consistent state. 
     Logging Services support the logging of informational, error, and warning messages. Logging Services record application and user activities in enough detail to satisfy any audit trail requirements or to assist the systems support team in recreating the sequence of events that led to an error. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Error Handling/Logging Services through the ReTA Event Handler and Persistence frameworks. 
     Other Common Services 
     Description 
     Catchall category for additional reusable routines useful across a set of applications (e.g., Date Routines, Time Zone Conversions, Field Validation Routines). 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements client side Field Validation Services through the ReTA UI framework. 
     State Management 
     Description 
     State Management Services enable information to be passed or shared among windows and/or Web pages and/or across programs. In Netcentric environments, the HTTP protocol creates a potential need for implementing some form of Context Management Services (storing state information on the server). The HTTP protocol is a stateless protocol. Every connection is negotiated from scratch, not just at the page level but for every element on the page. The server does not maintain a session connection with the client nor save any information between client exchanges (i.e., web page submits or requests). Each HTTP exchange is a completely independent event. Therefore, information entered into one HTML form must be saved by the associated server application somewhere where it can be accessed by subsequent programs in a conversation. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements State Management Services through Microsoft&#39;s IIS Session component and the ReTA Session, Activity and UI frameworks. 
     Component Framework 
     Description 
     Component Framework Services provide an infrastructure for building components so that they can communicate within an application and across applications, on the same machine or on multiple machines across a network, to work together. COM/DCOM and CORBA described in Communication Services are the two leading component industry standards. These standards define how components should be built and how they should communicate. 
     Object Request Broker (ORB) services, based on COM/DCOM and CORBA, focus on how components communicate. Component Framework Services, also based on CORBA and COM/DCOM, focus on how components should be built. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Component Framework Services through the ReTA Activity framework. 
     Operating System 
     Description 
     Operating System Services are the underlying services such as multi-tasking, paging, memory allocation, etc., typically provided by today&#39;s modern operating systems. Where necessary, an additional layer or Application Programming Interface (API) may be provided to gain either operating system independence or a higher level of abstraction for application programmers. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Operating System Services through the NT 4.0 operating system. 
     Runtime Services 
     Runtime services convert non-compiled computer languages into machine code during the execution of a program. They include: Language Interpreter Service and Virtual Machine Service. 
     Language Interpreter 
     Description 
     Language Interpreter Services decompose a 4th generation and/or a scripting languages into machine code (executable code) at runtime. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Language Interpreter Services through NT server 4.0 and IIS 4.0. 
     Virtual Machine 
     Description 
     Typically, a Virtual Machine is implemented in software on top of an operating system, and is used to run applications. The Virtual Machine provides a layer of abstraction between the applications and the underlying operating system and is often used to support operating system independence. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Virtual Machine Services through NT 4.0 Virtual Machine component. 
     System Services 
     Services which applications can use to perform system-level functions. These services include: System Security Services, Profile Management Services, Task and Memory Management Services, and Environment Verification Services. 
     Environment Verification 
     Description 
     Environment Verification Services ensure functionality by monitoring, identifying and validating environment integrity prior and during program execution. (e.g., free disk space, monitor resolution, correct version). These services are invoked when an application begins processing or when a component is called. Applications can use these services to verify that the correct versions of required Execution Architecture components and other application components are available. 
     Profile Management 
     Description 
     Profile Management Services are used to access and update local or remote system, user, or application profiles. User profiles, for example, can be used to store a variety of information such as the user&#39;s language and color preferences to basic job function information which may be used by Integrated Performance Support or Workflow Services. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Profile Management Services through ReTA Session framework. 
     System Security 
     Description 
     System Security Services allow applications to interact with the operating system&#39;s native security mechanism. The basic services include the ability to login, logoff, authenticate to the operating system, and enforce access control to system resources and executables. 
     Task &amp; Memory Management 
     Description 
     Task &amp; Memory Management Services allow applications and/or other events to control individual computer tasks or processes, and manage memory. They provide services for scheduling, starting, stopping, and restarting both client and server tasks (e.g., software agents). 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Task &amp; Memory Management Services through MTS 2.0. 
     Information Services 
     Information Services manage electronic data assets and enable applications to access and manipulate data stored locally or remotely in portion of the present descriptions or databases. They minimize an application&#39;s dependence on the physical storage and location within the network. Information Services can be grouped into two categories: Database Services, and Portion of the present description Services. Portion of the present description Services may not be covered during ReTA Phase 1. 
     Database Services 
     Database Services are responsible for providing access to a local or a remote database, maintaining integrity of the data within the database and supporting the ability to store data on either a single physical platform, or in some cases across multiple platforms. Database Services include: Access Services, Indexing Services and Security Services. 
     Access 
     Description 
     Access Services enable an application to retrieve data from a database as well as manipulate (insert, update, delete) data in a database. This can be done through the following: 
     Standards Based Structured Query Language (SQL) API 
     SQL Gateways 
     Distributed Relational Data Access (DRDA) 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Database Access Services through the ReTA Persistence framework, which utilizes the Standards Based SQL API approach through ODBC. 
     Indexing 
     Description 
     Indexing Services provide a mechanism for speeding up data retrieval. In relational databases one or more fields can be used to construct the index. So when a user searches for a specific record, rather than scanning the whole table sequentially the index is used to find the location of that record faster. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Database Indexing Services through the Database Management System (either Oracle or SQL Server). 
     Security 
     Description 
     Security Services enforce access control to ensure that records are only visible or editable by authorized people for approved purposes. Most database management systems provide access control at the database, table, or row level as well as concurrency control. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Database Security Services through the Database Management System (either Oracle or SQL Server). 
     Presentation Services 
     Presentation Services enable an application to manage the human-computer interface. This includes capturing user actions and generating resulting events, presenting data to the user, and assisting in the management of the dialog flow of processing. Typically, Presentation Services are only required by client workstations. Sub-components covered during the Phase 1 of ReTA include: Window System, Desktop Manager, Form, Web Browser, Report &amp; Print, and Direct Manipulation. 
     Desktop Manager 
     Description 
     Desktop Manager emulates the idea of a physical desktop allowing one to place portion of the present descriptions on the desktop, launch applications by clicking on a graphical icon, or discard files by dragging them onto a picture of a waste basket. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Desktop Manager Services through the NT 4.0 operating system. 
     Direct Manipulation 
     Description 
     Direct Manipulation Services enable applications to provide a direct manipulation interface (often called “drag &amp; drop”). 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Desktop Manager Services through the NT 4.0 operating system. 
     Form 
     Description 
     Form Services enable applications to use fields to display and collect data. form Services provide support for: Display, Mapping Support, and Field Interaction Management. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Form Services through the NT 4.0 operating system. 
     Report &amp; Print 
     Description 
     Report and Print Services support the creation and on-screen previewing of paper or photographic portion of the present descriptions which contain screen data, application data, graphics or images. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Report and Print Services through the NT 4.0 operating system. 
     Web Browser 
     Web Browser Services allow users to view and interact with applications and portion of the present descriptions made up of varying data types, such as text, graphics, and audio. These services also provide support for navigation within and across portion of the present descriptions no matter where they are located, through the use of links embedded into the portion of the present description content. Web Browser Services retain the link connection, i.e., portion of the present description physical location, and mask the complexities of that connection from the user. Web Browser services can be further subdivided into: Browser Extension, Form, and User Navigation. 
     Browser Extension 
     Description 
     Browser Extension Services provide support for executing different types of applications from within a Browser. These applications provide functionality that extend Browser capabilities. The key Browser Extensions are: 
     Plug-in—a plug-in is a software program that is specifically written to be executed within a browser for the purpose of providing additional functionality that is not natively supported by the browser, such as viewing and playing unique data or media types. 
     Helper Application/Viewer—is a software program that is launched from a browser for the purpose of providing additional functionality to the browser. 
     ActiveX control—is also a program that can be run within a browser, from an application independent of a browser, or on its own. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA supports Browser Extensions through Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer. 
     Form 
     Description 
     Like Form Services outside the Web Browser, Form Services within the Web Browser enable applications to use fields to display and collect data. The only difference is the technology used to develop the Forms. The most common type of Forms within a browser are Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) Forms. The HTML standard includes tags for informing a compliant browser that the bracketed information is to be displayed as an editable field, a radio button, or other form-type control. Currently, HTML browsers support only the most rudimentary forms—basically providing the presentation and collection of data without validation or mapping support. When implementing Forms with HTML, additional services may be required such as client side scripting (e.g., VB Script, JavaScript). 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Form Services through the NT 4.0 operating system, Internet Explorer 4.0 and Netscape Navigator 4.0. ReTA supports creating the form objects and the JavaScripts used by the browsers with the ReTA UI framework. 
     User Navigation 
     Description 
     User Navigation Services within the Web Browser provide a user with a way to access or navigate between functions within or across applications. These User Navigation Services can be subdivided into three categories: 
     Hyperlink—the hyperlink mechanism is not constrained to a menu, but can be used anywhere within a page or portion of the present description to provide the user with navigation options. 
     Customized Menu—a menu bar with associated pull-down menus or context-sensitive pop-up menus. 
     Virtual Reality—A virtual reality or a virtual environment interface takes the idea of an image map to the next level by creating a 3-dimensional (3-D) environment for the user to walk around in. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements the Hyperlink functionality of web browser Navigation Services through the ReTA UI framework. 
     Window System 
     Description 
     Typically part of the operating system, the Window System Services provide the base functionality for creating and managing a graphical user interface (GUI)—detecting user actions, managing windows on the display, and displaying information in windows. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Window System Services through the NT 4.0 operating system. 
     Transaction Services 
     A transaction is a unit of work that has the following (ACID) characteristics: 
     A transaction is atomic; if interrupted by failure, all effects are undone (rolled back). 
     A transaction produces consistent results; the effects of a transaction preserve invariant properties. 
     A transaction is isolated; its intermediate states are not visible to other transactions. 
     Transactions appear to execute serially, even if they are performed concurrently. 
     A transaction is durable; the effects of a completed transaction are persistent; they are never lost (except in a catastrophic failure). 
     A transaction can be terminated in one of two ways: the transaction is either committed or rolled back. When a transaction is committed, all changes made by the associated requests are made permanent. When a transaction is rolled back, all changes made by the associated requests are undone. 
     Transaction Services provide the transaction integrity mechanism for the application. This allows all data activities within a single business event to be grouped as a single, logical unit of work. 
     Transaction Monitor 
     Description 
     The Transaction Monitor Services are the primary interface through which applications invoke Transaction Services and receive status and error information. Transaction Monitor Services, in conjunction with Information Access and Communication Services provide for load balancing across processors or machines and location transparency for distributed transaction processing. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Transaction Monitor Services through MTS 2.0. ReTA uses the Activity framework to define a transaction. 
     Resource Management 
     Description 
     A Resource Manager provides for concurrency control and integrity for a singular data resource (e.g., a database or a file system). Integrity is guaranteed by ensuring that an update is completed correctly and entirely or not at all. Resource Management Services use locking, commit, and rollback services, and are integrated with Transaction Management Services. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Resource Manager Services through MTS 2.0. 
     Transaction Management 
     Description 
     Transaction Management Services coordinate transactions across one or more resource managers either on a single machine or multiple machines within the network. Transaction Management Services ensure that all resources for a transaction are updated, or in the case of an update failure on any one resource, all updates are rolled back. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Transaction Management Services through Microsoft&#39;s Distributed Transaction Manager and MTS 2.0. 
     Transaction Partitioning 
     Description 
     Transaction Partitioning Services provide support for mapping a single logical transaction in an application into the required multiple physical transactions. For example, in a package or legacy rich environment, the single logical transaction of changing a customer address may require the partitioning and coordination of several physical transactions to multiple application systems or databases. Transaction Partitioning Services provide the application with a simple single transaction view. 
     ReTA Implementation 
     ReTA implements Transaction Partitioning Services through Microsoft&#39;s Distributed Transaction Manager and MTS 2.0. 
     Business Logic 
     The execution architecture services are all generalized services designed to support the applications Business Logic. Normally, how Business Logic is to be organized is not within the scope of the execution architecture. However, the ReTA Application Frameworks extend the services of the execution architecture to support the “Interface Controller Model” (ICM) pattern approach to packaging the Business Logic as components. 
     Business Logic is the core of any application, providing the expression of business rules and procedures (e.g., the steps and rules that govern how a sales order is fulfilled). As such, the Business Logic includes the control structure that specifies the flow for processing business events and user requests. In a ReTA application, the Application Frameworks define a structured approach to the concepts of Interface, Application Logic, and Data Abstraction. 
     Interface logic interprets and maps the actions of users into business logic processing activities. With the assistance of Presentation Services, Interface logic provides the linkage that allows users to control the flow of processing within the application. ReTA Implements this service through the UI and Activity Frameworks. 
     Application Logic is the expression of business rules and procedures (e.g., the steps and rules that govern how a sales order is fulfilled). As such, the Application Logic includes the control structure that specifies the flow for processing for business events and user requests. The isolation of control logic facilitates change and adaptability of the application to changing business processing flows. ReTA implements this service through the Activity Framework. 
     Information Access Services isolate the Business Logic from the technical specifics of how information is stored (e.g., location transparency, RDBMS syntax, etc.). Data Abstraction provides the application with a more logical view of information, further insulating the application from physical information storage considerations. ReTA implements this service through the Persistence Framework. 
     The ReTA Application Frameworks provides services that encourage and support the thin-client model. Also, the Frameworks shield business logic developers from the details and complexity of architecture services (e.g., information services, component services) and other business logic. 
     Execution Architecture Physical Model 
     Purpose 
     The ReTA Execution Architecture Physical Model portion of the description shows the actual components comprising the Execution Architecture and their relative location and interfaces. Additionally, the model depicts the platforms on which the components may reside as well as the distribution across the environment. The components in the Physical Model may support a portion of a function or more than one function from the functional model. 
     Physical Configuration 
     The content for this portion of the description is defined in the Technology Infrastructure Procurement List portion of the present description. 
     Physical Model 
     FIG. 47 illustrates the components that comprise the ReTA execution architecture  4700  and their physical location. In particular, the components are grouped through their association with the client  4702 , network  4704 , web server  4706 , application server  4708 , and database server  4710 . 
     Operations Architecture Design 
     Overview 
     The Operations Architecture is a combination of tools, support services, procedures, and controls required to keep a production system up and running efficiently. Unlike the Execution and Development Architectures, its primary users are the system administrators and the production support personnel. With reference to FIG. 48, all components of the Operations Architecture  4800  are integral to the successful management of a distributed environment. Any processes, procedures, or tools developed or chosen as an operational management solution for a specific operational area must be able to integrate with any existing or planned process, procedure, tool solutions for other Operations Architecture areas. 
     Operations Architecture Component Design 
     Physical Environment  4802   
     Implementing—Initial Installation 
     Description 
     Initial Installation prepares the physical location for the rollout of a new site or service, pre-assembles the equipment (hardware and software) based on developed specifications, installs the equipment and tests that the equipment is fully functional prior to allowing the users to utilize the system in a production environment. Precise build procedures must be delivered early enough to drive Release Testing, Procurement, and rollout plans. For large multi site installations that require significant rollout of new hardware, optimization of the configuration tasks (hardware and software) can be achieved through the use of a central staging facility. 
     Planning Considerations 
     The deployment of the physical environment must be scheduled as early as possible, and detailed communication regarding the technology infrastructure deployment plan should be distributed regularly to key stakeholders. 
     Where a pilot implementation has taken place previously, or is in progress, the experiences from this activity need to be incorporated into the deployment plans. The purpose of a pilot implementation essentially is to minimize the risks of full implementation. Any experiences from the pilot should be identified and plans to avoid trouble, or accelerate progress, should be included within the deployment work plan. 
     Ensure that the organizational functions are ready for the change. Functions of the organization may need to be ready for the technology infrastructure change before it is deployed. These functions include: 
     Help Desk 
     Support Systems 
     System Maintenance 
     Operations 
     The organizations supporting these functions need to understand how their support roles may change, and what new demands the technology infrastructure may place upon them. Ensuring that these areas are comfortable supporting the new infrastructure, and that they are able to troubleshoot problems is critical to the overall support and success of the business capability. 
     Event/Data Management 
     Event/Data management is the process of receiving and classifying events. An event is a change in the state of a network component. There are two types of events—solicited and unsolicited. A solicited event results from the direct (synchronous) polling of a network component  4900  by a network management station  4902  as represented in FIG.  49 . 
     An unsolicited event occurs when a network component  5000  sends (asynchronously) data to the network management station  5002  as represented in FIG.  50 . 
     Once the event is received, the management station classifies the event. If it is classified as a fault, it would then be passed to the fault management facility. Otherwise it is classified as a normal event and is logged for historical trending purposes. 
     Event Processing 
     Event processing manipulates the raw data obtained in the event/data generation layer into a more workable form. This layer performs functions such as event filtering, alert generation, event correlation, event collection and logging, and automated trouble ticket generation. Event processing routes the processed information on to either the presentation or management applications layers. Again it is important to consider the interface of the event processing component with the other components of the operational architecture. 
     Event Management in a Net-Centric Environment 
     The MODEnc project has further defined Net-Centric Computing as the standards and considerations involved with Internet/Intranet/Extranet environments. 
     When using the Internet-based net-centric model  5100 , as shown, for example, in FIG. 51, Internet standards such as TCP/IP, HTML and CGI are used to publish, interact, and transact with data/content on the public Internet  5102 . Typically, a firewall  5104  is implemented to secure a service provider&#39;s internal resources  5106  from the public Internet. A service provider locates Internet-based resources outside of the firewall and may provide controlled access from the web to internal information through mechanisms such as CGI  5108 . Access to Internet resources may be through web browsers as depicted or via other mechanisms such as e-mail or ftp. 
     When using the Intranet-based net-centric model  5200  as illustrated in FIG. 52, Internet standards are used within the confines of a private network to implement publish-, interact-, and transact-based applications. Browsers  5202  are used to access HTML pages or other services located and controlled through internal web servers  5204 . 
     When using the Extranet-based net-centric model  5300 , as illustrated in FIG. 53 companies share computing resources by connecting over the Internet  5302  or Virtual Private Network (VPN). Each company typically shields its internal networks from the public Internet via firewalls  5304 , 5306  and provides controlled access through the firewalls to its partner&#39;s resources. 
     When performing the Event Management function in a net-centric environment, the following factors should be considered: 
     Lack of event management on the Internet 
     New events 
     Integration with other system management tools 
     Centralized event polling issues 
     Intra-application events should be analyzed 
     SNMP difficulties in managing net-centric environments 
     Lack of Event Management on the Internet [Internet, Extranet] 
     Net-centric service providers must consider that the Internet provides few event management services. Though a service provider&#39;s systems that reside outside the firewall may host SNMP and/or other event management agents, public Internet hosts currently may not provide event management data to a 3 rd  party service provider. 
     New Events [Internet, Intranet, Extranet] 
     New event metrics such as metrics related to an Internet connection may be required to get an accurate overall picture of the net-centric environment health. The emerging thin client architecture may also require new event categories. 
     Integration with other System Management Tools [Internet, Intranet, Extranet] 
     Events generated by net-centric management tools may need to integrate with other system management applications. 
     Centralized Event Polling Issues [Internet, Intranet, Extranet] 
     Management of a net-centric environment relies more heavily on remote sites generating and queuing their own event management information. The reason for this is if there is a network failure, a centralized polling approach to event management may not be able to assess the health of nodes behind a broken network link. Remote nodes must generation their own events, queue them in case of failure, and resends the queued events upon reestablishment of network connections 
     Intra-application Events Should be Analyzed [Internet, Intranet, Extranet] 
     Service Providers should monitor not only what pages/interfaces that users are accessing, but what they are doing within each page/interface to maximize the marketing value of usage data. This can also provide valuable input to application design teams in making application refinements. 
     SNMP in a Net-Centric Environment [Internet, Intranet, Extranet] 
     Since SNMP traps may have to traverse multiple networks, and MIBs may need to send management information to multiple stakeholders, managing events across net-centric environments can be difficult. An Internet Service Provider (ISP) may have to consider clever filtering to ensure that the right traps get to the right users. 
     Presentation 
     The presentation component provides the interface between the manager(s) of the system and management data generated by the system. Data can be manipulated for various forms of output. By integrating the operational architecture it is possible to reduce the number of front-end interfaces required. Commonly, the presentation component uses a GUI front-end interface. This component is also responsible for real-time and historical report generation. 
     Management Applications 
     Management applications are those tools which are used to manage the system. Most of the MODE functions tie directly into this component. The management applications component ties in directly with the integration platform component as the management applications tools must comply with the standards set by the integration platform. Management applications receive data from the event/data generation, event processing, and repositories components and then send data to the presentation or repositories components. Management applications tools include capacity planning tools, performance management tools, license management tools, remote management tools, systems monitoring tools, scheduling tools, help desk tools, etc. Some Enterprise Management tools even poll the event/data generators for information but these options may impact network performance. Web Server management has been introduced as part of the management operations framework. As Corporate Internets and Extranets implement Web based software products to sell and advertise business services, corresponding administrative, security, event notification and performance requirements must be performed similarly for the companies web based system. The two critical path issues are security management and network management. 
     Security Management 
     Security Management controls both physical and logical security for a Net-Centric environment. Due to the nature of the environment, security may need to be managed either centrally, remotely or through a combination of the two methods. 
     Security Management also handles the logging of proper and illegal access, provides a way to audit security information, rectify security breaches and address unau thorized use of the system. 
     Network Management 
     Network &amp; Systems Management Planning is responsible for the planning activities involved in running the day-to-day operations and maintenance of the production systems 
     Capacity Planning 
     Performance Planning 
     Repositories 
     Repositories contain all the management data generated or used during the management process. This includes historical data, capacity data, performance data, problem knowledge bases, asset databases, solution sets, and management information bases (MIBs). The repositories component interacts with the management applications, integration platform, supporting infrastructure, and presentation components. Again it is important to make sure that the other components of the operational architecture are compatible with the database tools. 
     Backup/Restore 
     Archiving 
     Integration Platform 
     The integration platform provides a common platform for the operational architecture. At the lowest level this means deciding on common standards, interfaces, massage formats, and file logging forms to be used with all the management tools. Products like Tivoli Management Environment, require the use of a separate integration platform component into which the management applications are connected. Many third party vendors insist that they provide solutions which incorporate the event/data generation, event processing, repositories, and presentation components of the MAP operational architecture. It must be noted however that some of these total solution providers may sell a proprietary based solution, at best, and/or may include customized Application Programming Interfaces (API) or Software Development Kit capabilities in order to completely integrate your non-proprietary network. 
     Lastly, some environments use a home grown integration platform. The choice of integration platforms depends upon its ability to integrate with the execution and development environments. 
     Supporting Infrastructure 
     The supporting infrastructure is the subset of operating systems, utilities, languages, and protocols used to support the management of the system. The supporting infrastructure is most often determined by the execution and development environments and the business applications on the system. It is necessary to ensure that the other components of the operational architecture are compatible with the existing supporting infrastructure. 
     Managing Hardware 
     Managing hardware is all hardware directly used to manage the environment. This includes all staging components. These components are devoted to systems management functions. Examples of managing hardware include management servers, management controllers, management consoles, probes, and sniffers. One significant component in the hardware monitoring arena is Firewall access control policy management. Firewalls are regularly used for network based security management. It is typically a system or group of systems that enforce access control between two or more networks and/or perform network data packet filtering. Usually packet filtering router hardware and application gateways are used to block unauthorized IP packets and enforce proxy defined user commands. 
     Management Tool Selection 
     It is important to note that there may be requirements which cannot be met by any tools. In this case, in-house development may be an alternative. This approach is likely to be more expensive, however, and more difficult to support the long term, and thus should usually be avoided if possible. Were possible, the tool with the best fit should be purchased, and customized to meet the necessary requirements. Some additional considerations are outlined below: 
     Central vs. Distributed Control 
     Platform Constraints 
     Integration with other Functions 
     Anticipated Volume of Data &amp; Transaction Throughput 
     Number of Users for the Tool 
     Level of Support Required 
     INSTALLATION 
     Oracle Database Installation 
     Overview 
     Assumptions 
     This portion of the present description assumes: 
     That the target hardware configuration for the database server meets the specified requirements for the software being installed. 
     Embodiments mentioned within this portion of the present description may not be current as of the time of this reading. Care should be taken to ensure that the latest embodiments are used and that individual installation processes are reviewed to ensure that any changes are followed. 
     Individuals performing this installation have experience in relational database concepts, tools, administration and performance tuning. 
     Database Model 
     Users and Schemas 
     The following table provides a list of the user accounts, roles and schemas used during ReTA Phase 1 development. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Account Name 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 RETA_ARCH 
                 Architecture Schema. This account contains various 
               
               
                   
                 architecture-related objects (tables, sequences and 
               
               
                   
                 procedures). 
               
               
                 RETA_APPS 
                 Application Schema. This account contains 
               
               
                   
                 application-related objects (tables, sequences and 
               
               
                   
                 procedures). 
               
               
                 Reta_Admin 
                 Administrator Role. This role provides administration 
               
               
                   
                 privileges and rights to the administrator account. 
               
               
                   
                 Rights include full access to the architecture and 
               
               
                   
                 application schemas. 
               
               
                 Reta_User 
                 Application Role. This role provides rights and 
               
               
                   
                 privileges to application accounts. Rights include 
               
               
                   
                 full access to the application schema and insert on 
               
               
                   
                 selected architecture tables. 
               
               
                 RetaAdmin 
                 Administrator id. This account is used for 
               
               
                   
                 architecture and application maintenance. 
               
               
                 RetaUser 
                 Application id. This account is used to gain access 
               
               
                   
                 to application specific database objects during 
               
               
                   
                 application execution. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Architecture Tables 
     The ReTA Phase 1 Architecture Frameworks require the tables and relationships illustrated in FIG.  54 . Among these tables are user identification tables  5400 , user preference tables  5402 , and event log tables  5404 . 
     Application Tables 
     FIG. 55 illustrates tables and relationships required for the ReTA Phase 1 validation application. Among these are customer information tables  5500  and feedback tables  5502 . 
     Installation Process 
     Oracle Configuration 
     The following steps describe the process of installing and configuring a database for use during ReTA development and testing. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Step 
                 Step Description 
                 Notes 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 1 
                 Install “Oracle 8 Enterprise Edition” (Version 8.0.3.0.0 for Windows 
                 Though these 
               
               
                   
                 NT) 
                 steps describe 
               
               
                   
                 Run Setup on the installation CD. 
                 the installation 
               
               
                   
                 Choose the installation language, then select OK 
                 on a Windows 
               
               
                   
                 Choose the Company name, and change the default install directory to 
                 NT platform, 
               
               
                   
                 C:\Oracle, then select OK. 
                 they are nearly 
               
               
                   
                 Select Yes when asked whether to have the installation program make 
                 identical to the 
               
               
                   
                 changes to the PATH variable 
                 installation 
               
               
                   
                 Choose to install Oracle 8 Enterprise Edition. 
                 process on the 
               
               
                   
                 Select where the Oracle portion of the present description should be 
                 UNIX 
               
               
                   
                 installed. The default is to leave it on the CD. 
                 platform. 
               
               
                 2 
                 Create a directory for the application database. 
               
               
                   
                 Start the windows explorer 
               
               
                   
                 Select the directory where Oracle is installed (C:\Oracle) then the 
               
               
                   
                 subdirectory Database 
               
               
                   
                 Create a new folder for the Database files. Ex. “C:\Oracle\ReTA” 
               
               
                 3 
                 At this point a full operating system backup should be made, and the 
               
               
                   
                 backup set stored. In future, if the database server goes down, this 
               
               
                   
                 backup may be used to quickly restore the server to a point where the 
               
               
                   
                 Oracle Recovery Manager can take over and complete the backup. 
               
               
                 4 
                 Add registry keys for the database. The key locations are 
                 This key 
               
               
                   
                 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Oracle\. 
                 identifies the 
               
               
                   
                 Use the Start Menu to run the regedit application 
                 active database 
               
               
                   
                 Browse to the above key. 
                 to Oracle on 
               
               
                   
                 Right click on the entry ORACLE_SID and select Modify. 
                 startup. 
               
               
                   
                 Set the key value to RETA (or the SID) of the Database if this has been 
               
               
                   
                 modified. 
               
               
                   
                 Create a new key, NLS_DATE_FORMAT, and set the value to “DD- 
               
               
                   
                 MM-YY HH24:MM:SS” (include the quotation marks) 
               
               
                 5 
                 Perform the initial database creation. 
                 This batch file 
               
               
                   
                 Run the batch file Create ReTA Database.bat located in the 
                 is expects 
               
               
                   
                 Database\CreateDB subdirectory of the Architecture directory of the 
                 RETARUN.sql 
               
               
                   
                 supplied media. 
                 and 
               
               
                   
                 NOTE: The following batch files and database scripts may sometimes 
                 RETA1RUN.sql 
               
               
                   
                 generate errors of the form “Table/View does not exist.” This is 
                 to be located 
               
               
                   
                 because the scripts delete before trying to create objects - if the scripts 
                 in the same 
               
               
                   
                 are being run for the first time these objects may not exist and the 
                 directory. 
               
               
                   
                 errors may be generated. This is not a cause for concern. 
               
               
                 6 
                 Register your new databases with the TNS listener service to enable 
                 This step 
               
               
                   
                 other computers on the network to see it. 
                 enables 
               
               
                   
                 Open the file listener.ora located in the Net80\admin directory of the 
                 Oracle8 Client 
               
               
                   
                 Oracle directory. 
                 communication 
               
               
                   
                 Create entries identical to the ORCL entry at the end of the file, with 
                 with the data 
               
               
                   
                 the SIDs replaced by PROS, or the SID created in step 4. 
                 server. 
               
               
                   
                 Note: copy the entire code block - i.e. four lines of code. 
               
               
                   
                 The inserted code is the following: 
               
               
                   
                 (SID_DESC = ReTA Development Database) 
               
               
                   
                 (GLOBAL_DBNAME = &lt;Your computer name here&gt;) 
               
               
                   
                 (SID_NAME = &lt;Your database SID here&gt;) ) 
               
               
                   
                 Stop and restart the service Oracle TNS Listener 
               
               
                 7 
                 Create local connections to the new database. 
                 This step 
               
               
                   
                 Use the start menu to run the program Oracle for Win NT/Net8 Easy 
                 provides access 
               
               
                   
                 Config. 
                 to the database 
               
               
                   
                 Note: If one gets a Dr. Watson error on Java.exe, set the display to 256 
                 from 
               
               
                   
                 colors. 
                 SQL*Plus, 
               
               
                   
                 Select Add New Service, and supply a service name e.g. “RETA1” 
                 Oracle 
               
               
                   
                 Select Bequeath (local database). 
                 Navigator or 
               
               
                   
                 Select Next. 
                 other Oracle 
               
               
                   
                 Enter the database SID used in the database creation script (RETA by 
                 administrative 
               
               
                   
                 default) 
                 tools. 
               
               
                   
                 Select Test Service (Username: system; Password: Manager) and 
               
               
                   
                 when the test is successful push Done 
               
               
                   
                 Select Next, then Finish. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Application &amp; Architecture Database Objects 
     The following steps describe the process of creating user and schema accounts for use by the ReTA Phase 1 architecture and application services. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Step 
                 Description 
                 Notes 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                  9 
                 Create the users and roles for the database. To run a database script, 
                 Connect as 
               
               
                   
                 execute Oracle for WinNT\SQLPlus 8.0 from the start menu. A 
                 Username: 
               
               
                   
                 script is executed by typing ‘@’ followed by the full path and name of 
                 system; 
               
               
                   
                 the script. The scripts reside in the ReTA\Database\Create directory 
                 Password: 
               
               
                   
                 of the supplied media. 
                 manager; 
               
               
                   
                 Run the script CreateRoles.sql 
                 Host String: 
               
               
                   
                 Run the script CreateUsers.sql 
                 RETA1 - or 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the name of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 service created 
               
               
                   
                   
                 in step 5 
               
               
                 10 
                 Create and populate the architecture objects within the RETA_ARCH 
                 This step 
               
               
                   
                 account. The following scripts are in the ReTA\Database directory of 
                 creates the 
               
               
                   
                 the supplied media. 
                 architecture 
               
               
                   
                 Connect as RETA_ARCH, i.e. type connect 
                 framework 
               
               
                   
                 reta_arch/reta_arch@reta1 at the command prompt or within 
                 tables expected 
               
               
                   
                 SQL*Plus 
                 by the ReTA 
               
               
                   
                 Run the script CreateArchTables.sql 
                 Phase 1 
               
               
                   
                 Run the script GrantArchRights.sql 
                 architecture 
               
               
                   
                 Run the script PopulateArchTables.sql 
                 services. 
               
               
                 11 
                 Create and populate the application objects within the RETA_APP 
                 This step 
               
               
                   
                 account. The following scripts are in the Application\Database 
                 creates the 
               
               
                   
                 directory of the supplied media. 
                 tables 
               
               
                   
                 Connect as RETA_APP, i.e. type connect reta_app/reta_app@reta1 
                 necessary to 
               
               
                   
                 at the command prompt or within SQL*Plus 
                 run the ReTA 
               
               
                   
                 Run the script CreateAppTables.sql 
                 Phase 1 
               
               
                   
                 Run the script GrantAppRights.sql 
                 validation 
               
               
                   
                 Run the script PopulateAppTables.sql 
                 application. 
               
               
                 12 
                 Create synonyms and sequences for the both the architecture and 
                 This step 
               
               
                   
                 application account objects. 
                 creates public 
               
               
                   
                 Connect as the ReTA database administrator, i.e. type connect 
                 synonyms for 
               
               
                   
                 RetaAdmin/RetaAdmin@reta1 at the command prompt or within 
                 use by other 
               
               
                   
                 SQL*Plus 
                 database 
               
               
                   
                 Run the CreateArchSyn.sql script to create the architecture synonyms. 
                 accounts. 
               
               
                   
                 Run the CreateAppSyn.sql script to create the application synonyms. 
               
               
                   
                 Run the script CreateArchSeq.sql to create the sequences used by the 
               
               
                   
                 event log and the feedback application. 
               
               
                 13 
                 Modify the entries within the T_AF_USERNAME and 
                 Ensure that a 
               
               
                   
                 T_AF_USERPREFERENCE tables with any new account information. 
                 entry exists for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 each developer 
               
               
                   
                   
                 or tester. 
               
               
                 14 
                 It is recommended that at this point a full database export/backup be 
                 A clean 
               
               
                   
                 performed. 
                 database 
               
               
                   
                   
                 backup after 
               
               
                   
                   
                 install ensures 
               
               
                   
                   
                 that the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 database may 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be recovered 
               
               
                   
                   
                 from day one. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Technology Infrastructure Procurement List 
     Purpose 
     This portion outlines the minimum required hardware and software specifications for Phase 1 &amp; 2 of the Resources eCommerce Technical Architecture (ReTA) initiative. It should be noted that the actual configurations, tools and configurations may very depending on application and client requirements. 
     Environment Physical Components 
     Development Environment 
     FIG. 56 illustrates the physical configuration of a possible ReTA-engagement development environment  5600 . A developer workstation  5602  is connected to a file server  5604  and an architecture database  5606 . 
     Assembly/Product/Performance Testing Environments 
     FIG. 57 illustrates the physical configuration of possible ReTA-based Assembly, Product and Performance testing environments  5700 . A web and application server  5702  is connected to a testing client  5704  and a database server  5706 . 
     Production Environment 
     Because of the nature of netcentric applications, there are many possible physical configurations available for the production environment. The following illustrations provide views of two possible configurations. The main difference between the two is the separation of the web and application servers from one physical server into two separate physical boxes. 
     Later phases may add additional components, such as search servers, transient data servers and batch servers. FIG. 58 illustrates Separate Web and Application Servers  5800 , 5802  between an unsecured network  5804  and a secured network  5806 . FIG. 59 illustrates a Single Web and Application Server  5900  between an unsecured network  5902  and a secured network  5904 . 
     Development Environment Specifications 
     It is assumed that during the development phases of the engagement, developers may perform much of the application build and test on their individual machines. As such, each developer may have their own web client, web server and app server running on their machine. A shared database(s) may provide development and testing relational database services needed in support of the architecture frameworks. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Qty 
                 Hardware 
                 Software 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Developer 
                 1 per 
                 300 MHz (Pentium 
                 Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 
               
               
                 Workstations 
                 developer 
                 II) 
                 v4.0 (SP4) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 128 MB RAM 
                 Microsoft Internet Explorer v4.01 
               
               
                   
                   
                 3 GB Hard Drive 
                 Netscape Communicator v4.5 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CD-ROM Drive 
                 Microsoft Peer Web Server v4.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                 17″ Monitor 
                 Microsoft Transaction Server v2.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Site Server Commerce Edition 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 v3.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Visual Studio v6.0 (SP2) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Office 97 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Oracle 8.0.4 Client 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Rational Rose 98i - Java Edition 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (optional) 
               
               
                 File Server &amp; 
                 1 per 
                 Any platform 
                 Example: 
               
               
                 Source Code 
                 project 
                 supporting standard 
                 Microsoft Windows NT Server 
               
               
                 Repository 
                   
                 file server service 
                 OR 
               
               
                   
                   
                 provider. 
                 Novell Netware 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1 GB Disk Space 
               
               
                 Architecture 
                 1 per 
                 300 MHz (Pentium 
                 Microsoft Windows NT Server v4.0 
               
               
                 Database 
                 project 
                 II) 
                 (SP4) 
               
               
                 Server 
                   
                 128 MB RAM 
                 Microsoft SQL Server v7.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                 8 GB Hard Drive 
                 And/or 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CD-ROM Drive 
                 Oracle8 Enterprise Edition for NT v8.0.4 
               
               
                   
                   
                 15″ Monitor 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Assembly, Product and Performance Testing Environment Specifications 
     The following table provides basic requirements for the hardware/software needed for the Assembly, Product and Performance testing phases of a ReTA engagement. The testing environment(s) should be configured to match as closely to that of the production system as possible. 
     Note that the specifications for each of these environments are the same. However, typical projects may want to establish separate environments to house each phase of testing to ensure contained and controlled results, and allow for parallel testing efforts. 
     **Note that the recommendations on hardware attributes are greatly effected by functionality and complexity of the application, and may need to be analyzed against specific client needs. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Qty 
                 Hardware 
                 Software 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Testing Client 
                 1 per 
                 300 MHz (Pentium 
                 Microsoft Windows (NT or Windows 
               
               
                   
                 tester 
                 II) 
                 95/98) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 128 MB RAM 
                 Microsoft Internet Explorer v4.01 
               
               
                   
                   
                 3 GB Hard Drive 
                 AND/OR 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CD-ROM Drive 
                 Netscape Communicator v4.5 
               
               
                   
                   
                 17″ Monitor 
                 Microsoft Office 97 (optional) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Issue and Error Reporting/Tracking Tools 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (optional) 
               
               
                 Architecture 
                 1+ per 
                 (4) 400 MHz 
                 Microsoft Windows NT Server v4.0 (SP4) 
               
               
                 Database 
                 environ- 
                 Pentium II 
                 Microsoft SQL Server v7.0 
               
               
                 Server 
                 ment 
                 2 GB RAM 
                 OR 
               
               
                   
                   
                 8 GB Hard Drive 
                 Oracle8 Enterprise Edition for NT v8.0.4 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CD-ROM 
                 Operational Utilities (optional) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 15″ Monitor 
               
               
                 Web/Application 
                 1+ per 
                 (4) 400 MHz 
                 Microsoft Windows NT Server v4.0 (SP4) 
               
               
                 Server 
                 environ- 
                 Pentium II 
                 Microsoft Internet Information Server v4.0 
               
               
                   
                 ment 
                 2 GB RAM 
                 Microsoft Transaction Server v2.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                 8 GB Hard Drive 
                 Microsoft Site Server Commerce Edition 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CD-ROM 
                 v3.0 (optional) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 15″ Monitor 
                 Oracle 8.0.4 Client 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Operational Utilities (optional)   
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Production Environment Specifications 
     The following table provides basic requirements for the hardware/software needed for a possible Production environment of a ReTA engagement. 
     **Note that the recommendations on hardware attributes are greatly effected by functionality and complexity of the application, and may need to be analyzed against specific client needs. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Qty 
                 Hardware 
                 Software 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Application 
                 NA 
                 * Browser 
                 Microsoft Internet Explorer 
               
               
                 User 
                   
                 Dependent 
                 v4.01 OR 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Netscape Communicator v4.5 
               
               
                 Architecture 
                 1+ per 
                 (4) 400 MHz 
                 Microsoft Windows NT 
               
               
                 Database 
                 environ- 
                 Pentium II 
                 Server v4.0 (SP4) 
               
               
                 Server 
                 ment 
                 2 GB RAM 
                 Microsoft SQL Server v7.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                 8 GB Hard Drive 
                 OR 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CD-ROM 
                 Oracle8 Enterprise Edition 
               
               
                   
                   
                 15″ Monitor 
                 for NT v8.0.4 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Operational Utilities 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (optional) 
               
               
                 Web/ 
                 1+ per 
                 (4) 400 MHz 
                 Microsoft Windows NT 
               
               
                 Application 
                 environ- 
                 Pentium II 
                 Server v4.0 (SP4) 
               
               
                 Server 
                 ment 
                 2 GB RAM 
                 Microsoft Internet Information 
               
               
                   
                   
                 8 GB Hard Drive 
                 Server v4.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CD-ROM 
                 Microsoft Transaction Server 
               
               
                   
                   
                 15″ Monitor 
                 v2.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Site Server 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Commerce Edition v3.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (optional) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Oracle 8.0.4 Client 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Operational Utilities 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (optional) 
               
               
                 Firewall 
                 1+ 
                 300 MHz 
                 Microsoft Windows NT 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (Pentium II) 
                 Server v4.0 (SP4) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 128 MB RAM 
                 Firewall Software 
               
               
                   
                   
                 2 GB Hard Drive 
                 Operational Utilities 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CD-ROM Drive 
                 (optional) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 15″ Monitor 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Site Server Installation 
     Overview 
     This portion of the present description describes installation procedures for Microsoft SiteServer 3.0 (Commerce Edition) and the relevant configuration required to create a ReTA eCommerce application. 
     Site Server Installation 
     The following portion of the description describes the pre-installation suggestions and the installation steps required for setup and configuring Site Server 3.0 Commerce Edition. 
     Pre-Installation Suggestions 
     Do not install Site Server on a Backup Domain Controller. 
     Do not install Exchange Server on a Site Server. Both products are resource intensive. 
     Do not install Proxy Server on a Site Server. 
     Do not install Site Server on a Clustered NT System (MSCS). One can install Site 
     Server onto a Windows Load Balancing Service (WLBS). 
     Remove Content Analyzer from Visual Studio. 
     Only install Site Server on a NTFS Drive. 
     Disable or Remove all Anti Virus software during entire install process. 
     Do not change ANY setting in IIS before installing Site Server (On a clean/new install). 
     Have at least one gig free of disk space. 
     Verify that virtual memory is set to at least 128 MB during the install process. 
     Give your account administrative privileges on the local machine. 
     Installation Order for Site Server (This installation used with Oracle database). 
     Install Windows NT 4.0 Server or Windows NT Server 4.0 Enterprise Edition. 
     Install Windows NT Service Pack 3. 
     Install Internet Explorer 4.01 SP1 (choose standard install). 
     Install Windows NT Option Pack 
     Install Index Server and the SMTP Server components. 
     Make sure to configure MTS for local (not remote) administration. 
     Install Visual Studio 97 or Visual Studio 6&lt;optional&gt;—Do not install Visual Studio Analyzer Component. 
     Create a System DSN to point to the database that may contain the sample tables. 
     Install Site Server—Do not create new membership instances before installing Commerce Edition. 
     Install Site Server Commerce Edition (do not overwrite data in database during commerce server setup). 
     Select your DSN created earlier to create the sample database tables. 
     Install Visual Studio 97 SP3 Or Visual Studio 6 SP2&lt;if Visual Studio is installed&gt;. 
     Install Windows Service Pack 4 (do not install MDAC if prompted, this may be done in the next step). 
     Install MDAC 2.0 SP1. 
     Add the MaxBlock registry setting for MDAC. 
     Install Site Server 3.0 SP2. 
     Site Server Configuration Information Using ReTA Frameworks 
     This portion of the description details the settings that must be in place to use Site Server&#39;s Personalization and Membership Services, along with instructions on how to setup a sample site to be used in conjunction with the ReTA Frameworks. 
     Site Server Commerce Settings 
     After installing Site Server Commerce Edition v3.0 start the Site Server Admin Console and perform the following tasks: 
     Expand the Personalization and Membership folder. 
     Expand the computer name—i.e. “ZIMMERD3”. 
     Right click on the Commerce Membership Server (Membership Authentication) folder and select properties. 
     On the “Authentication Service” tab note the TCP Port number. 
     FIG. 60 illustrates a Commerce Membership Server [Membership Authentication] properties view  6000  which receives the computer name  6002 , user name  6004 , and password  6006 . 
     Right click on the Membership Directory Manager  6100  and select properties. 
     FIG. 61 illustrates a Membership Directory Manager Properties Dialog  6102 . Make sure the Port number  6104  here matches the one from step # 4 . 
     Site Server Commerce Sample Site Setup Instructions 
     To setup sample commerce site perform the following steps. 
     Right click on Default Web Site  6200  in Internet Information Server  6202 , select Task  6204 —Membership Server Mapping  6206  . . . . 
     FIG. 62 is an illustration of a Membership Server Mapping Property. 
     Select Intranet [Windows NT Authentication] Membership option. 
     Next create the sample site. 
     Right click on the “Computer name” under the Commerce Host Administration folder (Refer to FIG.  62 —Computer Name is “ZIMMERD3”  6208 ). 
     Select New—Commerce Site Foundation. 
     Create New Site Foundation Wizard  6300  appears. FIG. 63 is an illustration of a Create New Site Foundation Wizard. Select to create site on “Site Server Commerce Membership Samples Web Site” option  6302 . 
     Follow steps in the wizard. 
     After Site has been created, right click on Default Web Site in Internet Information Server, select Task—Membership Server Mapping . . . . 
     Change the Membership Server Mapping back to “Commerce Membership Server”. 
     Site Server Commerce Site Sample—Setup 
     We may create the ReTA Application site under the “Member” directory in Windows Explorer (this may enable the use of the HTML Forms login that uses the Personalization and Membership Services to verify authentication to the site), this may be the site that was created through the Wizard. 
     For example we created a site and the shortname was “cm”  6400 . (FIG.  64 ). Therefore our web application started under the “Member” directory  6402  of “cm”. 
     FIG. 64 illustrates the web application  6404  being placed under the “Member” directory of “cm” in Windows Explorer. 
     Place the Formslogin.asp, verifpwd.asp, and welcome_new.asp pages at the same level as the global.asa file. (These files one can copy from the Sample Site called “Trey Research”). 
     Starting up ReTA Framework Components Properly 
     We do not want to start the ReTA Framework components unless the user has authenticated properly. 
     strUsername=Request(“Username”) 
     strPassword=Request(“Password”) 
     On Error Resume Next 
     y=x.VerifyCredentials(strUsername, strPassword, strUrl) 
     checkPassword=x.VerifyPassword(strUsername, strPassword) 
     This line of code may verify that the user has authenticated with a proper username and password. 
     On Error Resume Next 
     ChkMemUserGUID=ChkUserObject.Get(“GUID”) 
     if Err.Number&lt;&gt;0 then 
     IsError=True 
     else 
     IsError=False 
     end if 
     if checkPassword=1 then 
     REM 
     &#39;Create Event Handler that may be used in this function and in the Session_Stop function 
     Set myEventCollection=Server.CreateObject(“EventHandler.AFEventCollection”) 
     Set Session(“AFEventCollection”)=myEventCollection 
     theCurrentPage=Request.ServerVariables(“SCRIPT_NAME”) 
     &#39;Create the ReTA AFSession Component 
     Set Session(“AFSession”)=Server.CreateObject(“Session.AFSession”) 
     &#39;create ReTA AFUser object—either the UserSS or UserDB Component 
     SiteServer=true &#39;change this to true for the SiteServer version 
     if (SiteServer=true) then 
     Set user=Server.CreateObject(“UserSS.AFUserSS”) 
     else 
     Set user=Server.CreateObject(“UserDB.AFUserDB”) 
     end if 
     theError=user.init( ) 
     &#39;Start the Session 
     theError=Session(“AFSession”).start(myEventCollection) 
     &#39;Add the User component to the Session. 
     theError=Session(“AFSession”).setAFUser(user) 
     &#39;get The EventHandler Component from the Session and add it to the ASP session so that other pages can reference it. 
     Set 
     Session(“AFEventHandler”)=Session(“AFSession”).getEventHandler(myEventCollection) 
     &#39;Process any errors on this page. The return code is the severity of the Error 
     theSeverity=Session(“AFEventHandler”).process(theCurrentPage,myEventCollection) 
     &#39;if the Severity is greater than 1 then redirect to the Error Page 
     if (theseverity&gt;1) then 
     response.Redirect(“/asp/ExamplePages/asp/frameworks/ErrorHandler.asp”) 
     end if 
     &#39;test if we are starting the application at the correct point. If not it is probably because 
     &#39;the Session timed-out and so display the timeout message 
     if theCurrentPage=“/asp/verifpwd.asp” then 
     &#39;do nothing 
     else 
     response.Redirect(“/asp/ExamplePages/timeout.htm”) 
     end if 
     end if 
     Here are some of the basic technologies utilized by Site Server Membership, including directory services, Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP), and Active Directory Service Interfaces (ADSI). A general knowledge of these technologies is important as one builds your Membership site. 
     Directory Services and the Membership Directory 
     A directory service is a database that stores organizational data and is highly optimized for database lookups (reads). Directory services provide an index of users and network resources. Site Server 3.0 contains Microsoft&#39;s most recent directory service, the Membership Directory. It is the central repository for user data, including member accounts, permissions, and site resources. All directory services use LDAP as their communicating protocol. In the future Microsoft Windows® 2000 Server may implement the much-talked-about Active Directory, which may take the Membership Directory to the next level. The Active Directory may also be responsible for storing all the information needed for the Windows NT domain architecture. 
     Lightweight Directory Access Protocol 
     Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is the underlying protocol used by Site Server Membership to communicate with the Membership Directory. LDAP was designed to be the standard Internet protocol for accessing directory services. LDAP runs on TCP/IP networks and is independent of platform, allowing directory-based information to be shared across operating systems. Site Server Membership implements an LDAP service for reading and writing information to the Membership Directory database. 
     Active Directory Service Interfaces 
     As stated previously, the Membership Directory must be accessed using the LDAP protocol. Rather than making raw LDAP calls to the Membership Directory, Site Server Membership uses Active Directory Service Interfaces, better known as ADSI. ADSI provides a common standard interface to multiple directory services (through ADSI providers) and communicates with the directory services using LDAP. ADSI makes life easier by allowing the developer to write code to one API while working with multiple directory services. 
     Active User Object 
     Site Server provides the Active User Object (AUO) as a single component that aggregates all of a user&#39;s attributes from multiple Active Directory Service (ADS) providers. The primary provider is always the Membership Directory. The AUO is a COM object called membership.userobjects. It uses ADSI to retrieve a user&#39;s information from the Membership Directory and greatly simplifies the code a developer writes by automatically binding to the current user&#39;s information in the Membership Directory. The binding occurs when the component is created, but requires that the Web site be mapped to a Membership Server and that the user is authenticated. 
     Membership Directory Authentication 
     Authentication Choices 
     When one sets up a Membership Directory for a Web site, one must choose the type of authentication to be used. Membership may be set up to use Windows NT accounts (Windows NT Authentication) or accounts that reside solely in the Membership Directory database (Membership Authentication). Windows NT Authentication is most useful for intranet sites where one wish to leverage existing accounts and use the Windows NT Security Accounts Manager (SAM) for authentication. However, Membership Authentication is a good choice for Internet sites, especially sites in which the number of users may increase dramatically over time. As your user base grows, it is much easier to administer your accounts and privileges using Membership Authentication. 
     Since Integrated Direct Channel (IDC) uses Membership Authentication for the purposes mentioned above, further detail into that authentication method is discussed below: 
     Membership Server Mapping 
     It is important to note that Membership Authentication maps Membership groups to proxy Windows NT group accounts to determine a member&#39;s security permissions. One still has the benefit of the strong security of Windows NT and can administer security permissions for a Membership group by assigning permissions (ACLs) to the proxy account. For every group in the Membership Directory, Membership creates a corresponding Windows NT group called Site_directoryname_groupname, where directoryname is the name of the Membership Directory and groupname is the name of the Membership group. 
     Membership Authentication Configuration Options 
     Under Membership Authentication, there are also several options for configuration. There are four Security Support Providers available: 1) Automatic Cookie Authentication, 2) HTML Forms Authentication, 3) Distributed Password Authentication (DPA), and 4) Clear Text/Basic Authentication. At all four of these levels, there is an Allow Anonymous option, which allows unrecognized users to access the site as a generic account called IUSR_[server_name]. 
     1. Automatic Cookie Authentication 
     This method provides us with a quiet and discreet authentication method for both anonymous users and registered members. Cookie authentication issues two cookies—SITESERVER and MEMUSER—to store information on the user&#39;s computer. When this option is selected, the ISAPI (Internet Server Application Program Interface) filter (which was installed by the mapping of the Membership Server) parses the headers of the client and looks for the two cookies. There are three possibilities. If the cookies exist then the information found therein is used to authenticate and bind to a member. If the cookies are invalid then the member is redirected to an ASP page in the _mem_bin virtual directory. If the cookies don&#39;t exist then the ISAPI filter creates and binds to a new member in the Membership Directory, in the ou=AnonymousUsers container. Once bound to this user, two cookies are written to the browser. These two new cookies SITESERVER and MEMUSER may be used in future sessions to identify the member uniquely. 
     2. HTML Forms Authentication 
     To provide a more secure (but equally simple) form of authentication, we can use HTML Forms Authentication. This method of authentication uses HTTP&#39;s POST method to send the user&#39;s credentials to an ASP page, which handles the submission. The ASP page then makes use of a special COM object—the VerifUsr object—to verify the user&#39;s credentials. HTML Forms Authentication also makes use of the ISAPI Membership Authentication filter. When a user makes a call to a page that uses HTML Forms Authentication, ISAPI traps that call and redirects to a special ASP page called FormsLogin.asp. This page is provided in the _mem_user virtual directory of the web application. FormsLogin.asp is nothing more than an asp page with form elements for user login name and password. Upon submission, the page redirects with the form elements to verifpwd.asp, which contains the script to verify a user&#39;s credentials. If the user is authenticated, the user is taken to the page s/he was trying to access and issues a FormsAuth cookie in addition to the SITESERVER and MEMUSER cookies. 
     3. Distributed Password Authentication (DPA) 
     DPA works for Membership authentication in much the same way as Challenge/Response works for Windows NT Authentication. For DPA, users are authenticated against the Membership Directory (rather than the Windows NT SAM database). Moreover, since the username and password are never sent across the wire, DPA is very secure. Unfortunately, it&#39;s only possible for Windows Internet Explorer clients to use DPA where usernames and passwords are hashed with a challenge sent by the server. 
     4. Clear Text/Basic Authentication 
     When we select Basic Authentication, we authenticate any user that requests a resource against the credentials stored in the Membership Directory. We can specify extra information with the user, from which to authenticate users. But here lies a difference between Basic Authentication under Windows NT authentication and Basic Authentication under Membership Authentication: in the former case this extra information is in the form of a domain, and in the latter case the information represents sub-containers in the directory. The Clear Text/Basic Authentication method is supported by a number of applications, including Netscape, and most clients should be able to use it. 
     Other Considerations 
     DPA and Clear Text/Basic Authentication can be selected simultaneously. In this case, the server may first attempt to issue a DPA authentication challenge. If (and only if) the client cannot interpret the challenge, the server may offer the Clear Text/Basic Authentication request. 
     IDC and Membership Authentication 
     The Integrated Direct team used HTML Forms Authentication with anonymous support under certain circumstances for a few reasons. First of all, this authentication method provides an html interface as opposed to a pop up dialog box. This gives the application a more consistent look and feel since the FormLogin.asp page is customizable with graphics and layout. HTML Forms Authentication is also has no compatibility issues that DPA or Clear Text/Basic Authentication methods may have. It is simply an html page, which posts form elements to another asp page, which contains authentication methods. Finally, HTML Forms Authentication issues one session essential cookie, the FormsAuth cookie. The use of one cookie makes user administration issues, such as session time and logout, simpler. 
     DEVELOPERS WORKSTATION INSTALLATION PROCESS 
     Description 
     This portion of the description provides the steps necessary to configure a workstation for use doing application or architecture development on a ReTA engagement. 
     Assumptions 
     This portion of the present description assumes: 
     That the target hardware configuration for the workstation meets the specified requirements for the software being installed. 
     Embodiments mentioned within this portion of the present description may not current as of the time of this reading. Care should be taken to ensure that the latest embodiments are used and that individual installation processes are reviewed to ensure that any changes are followed. 
     Individuals performing this installation have experience in Microsoft platforms and tools, and are familiar within web-based application development. 
     Development Environment 
     FIG. 65 depicts a typical ReTA engagement development environment  6500 , including a file server  6502 , developer workstation  6504 , a build and unit test DB server  6506 , an assembly test web and application server  6508 , and an assembly test DB server  6510 . 
     Installation Process 
     This is the script for the preparation of the run-time environment for the application and web server. It is applicable to a computer running Windows NT Workstation 4.0. 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Install/Configure Web and Application Server Components 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Step 
                 Step Description 
                 Notes 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 1 
                 Install Windows NT Workstation v 4.0. 
                 It may be necessary 
               
               
                   
                 Run install for Windows NT Workstation 
                 to reboot the 
               
               
                   
                 4.0 from boot disks. 
                 computer after the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 installation. 
               
               
                 2 
                 Install Service Pack 4.0 for NT 4.0 
                 It may be necessary 
               
               
                   
                 Run install for Service Pack 4.0 
                 to reboot the 
               
               
                   
                 (available from the Microsoft Website). 
                 computer after the 
               
               
                   
                 Ignore any warnings issued later in the 
                 installation. 
               
               
                   
                 installation process that are related to the 
               
               
                   
                 use of Service Pack 4.0. 
               
               
                 3 
                 Install Internet Explorer 4.01 Service Pack 1. 
                 This step installs 
               
               
                   
                 It is not important whether the desktop shell 
                 the Java virtual 
               
               
                   
                 update is installed or not. This step also 
                 machine used by 
               
               
                   
                 installs the Java virtual machine used by the 
                 the application. 
               
               
                   
                 application. It may be necessary to reboot the 
                 Reboot if prompted. 
               
               
                   
                 computer after the installation. 
               
               
                 4 
                 Set up the Web and Application Server. 
                 Installs IIS 4.0 
               
               
                   
                 Install the NT Option pack from the supplied 
                 and MTS 2.0. 
               
               
                   
                 media. This may not be possible unless the 
                 Reboot when 
               
               
                   
                 previous step has been completed correctly. 
                 prompted. 
               
               
                   
                 Choose to install the “custom set-up” of 
               
               
                   
                 the option pack. 
               
               
                   
                 Double click on the Personal Web Server 
               
               
                   
                 component. 
               
               
                   
                 Check the box for the Internet Service 
               
               
                   
                 Manager component 
               
               
                   
                 Click OK. 
               
               
                   
                 Double Click Transaction Server. 
               
               
                   
                 Check box for Transaction Server 
               
               
                   
                 Development. 
               
               
                   
                 Accept default location for WWW Service 
               
               
                   
                 install, Click Next 
               
               
                   
                 Accept default for Transaction Server 
               
               
                   
                 (should be Administration-&gt;local). 
               
               
                   
                 Application may begin to install. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Install/Configure Database Connectivity 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Step 
                 Description 
                 Notes 
               
               
                   
               
               
                  5 
                 Install Oracle 8 Client. 
                 Oracle 8 Client 
               
               
                   
                 Install Oracle Client Software R 8.0 
                 installed. 
               
               
                   
                 from the CD 
               
               
                   
                 Accept default home location. 
               
               
                   
                 Choose Custom Installation. 
               
               
                   
                 Select Oracle 8 Client Application User 
               
               
                   
                 Products. 
               
               
                   
                 Click Install. 
               
               
                   
                 De-Select Oracle Objects for OLE. 
               
               
                   
                 Click OK 
               
               
                   
                 Click Exit when finished. 
               
               
                  6 
                 Configure Oracle Networking 
                 Net8 provides the 
               
               
                   
                 Use the Oracle Net8 Easy Config Utility to 
                 networking 
               
               
                   
                 define a local service name. 
                 component of 
               
               
                   
                 To perform this operation one may need to 
                 Oracle8. 
               
               
                   
                 know the name of the Oracle instance 
               
               
                   
                 (default is ‘ORCL’), the hostname of the 
               
               
                   
                 server that Oracle resides on, and the port 
               
               
                   
                 that the Oracle database listener is on 
               
               
                   
                 (default is 1521). 
               
               
                   
                 Refer to the help portion of the present 
               
               
                   
                 description installed in step 5 
               
               
                   
                 for assistance. 
               
               
                  7 
                 Update MTS Settings for Oracle 8 client 
                 Currently, MTS 
               
               
                   
                 compatibility Open REGEDIT and within the 
                 v2.0 installation 
               
               
                   
                 LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE key 
                 is based on using 
               
               
                   
                 modify the Microsoft\Transaction 
                 Oracle 7.3 for 
               
               
                   
                 Server\Local Computer\My Computer 
                 Oracle connectivity. 
               
               
                   
                 entries: 
               
               
                   
                 Change the OracleSqlLib to “sqllib80.dll” 
               
               
                   
                 Change the OracleXaLib to “xa80.dll” 
               
               
                  8 
                 Install Microsoft Data Access Components 
                 Microsoft ODBC 
               
               
                   
                 Run install from NT Server 4.0 SP 4.0 disk 
                 for Oracle driver 
               
               
                   
                 (Caution, do not install NT Service Pack 4.0 
                 (MSORCL32.DLL 
               
               
                   
                 at this time) 
                 v 2.573.292700) 
               
               
                   
                 Select Custom Install. 
                 installed 
               
               
                   
                 De-select everything except for ODBC 
                 Reboot if prompted. 
               
               
                   
                 Components, OLE DB components, 
               
               
                   
                 Microsoft&#39;s Remote Data Services and 
               
               
                   
                 ODBC driver for Oracle databases. 
               
               
                  9 
                 Run MTS/Oracle Configuration Test Utility 
                 Use this test to 
               
               
                   
                 Copy the Oracle 8.0 version of 
                 ensure your oracle 
               
               
                   
                 TestOraclexaConfig.exe (from the 
                 client connection 
               
               
                   
                 Tools project within VSS) to your 
                 is transactional. 
               
               
                   
                 C:\Program Files/Mts folder. 
                 MTS installs Oracle 
               
               
                   
                 Copy over the existing .exe (version 7.3 
                 7.3 compatible 
               
               
                   
                 compatible). 
                 utility by 
               
               
                   
                 Run the TestOraclexaConfig.exe from the 
                 default. 
               
               
                   
                 command line; i.e. 
               
               
                   
                 TestOraclexaConfig.exe-U&lt;username&gt;- 
               
               
                   
                 P&lt;password&gt;-S&lt;Net8 Service&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 Ex. TestOraclexaConfig.exe-URetaUser- 
               
               
                   
                 PRetaUser - SReta1 
               
               
                 10 
                 Create Architecture and Application DSN&#39;s 
                 This process sets 
               
               
                   
                 (Data Source Names). 
                 up an ODBC 
               
               
                   
                 Run the 32Bit Administrator in the Control 
                 connection from 
               
               
                   
                 Panel. Make sure that the tab for System 
                 the developers&#39; 
               
               
                   
                 DSN is selected. 
                 machine to the 
               
               
                   
                 Select Add, then Microsoft ODBC for Oracle 
                 Database Server. 
               
               
                   
                 The Data Source Name is AFUser, and the 
               
               
                   
                 Server “reta1” for the above example) 
               
               
                   
                 Repeat the above two steps to add DSN&#39;s for 
               
               
                   
                 the data sources 
               
               
                   
                 AFPersistence, AFEvent, AFSession and 
               
               
                   
                 AFOrder 
               
               
                 11 
                 Test the DSN&#39;s defined 
               
               
                   
                 Test the connections established above using 
               
               
                   
                 the 32 Bit ODBC Test utility in the Oracle 
               
               
                   
                 for NT folder off the Start menu. 
               
               
                   
                 Select Connect, then Machine Data Sources, 
               
               
                   
                 then one of the connections 
               
               
                   
                 established above. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Configure Java Runtime Components 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Step 
                 Description 
                 Notes 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 13 
                 Apply Software Updates 
                 Reboot when 
               
               
                   
                 Install the updated latest Java Virtual 
                 prompted. 
               
               
                   
                 Machine (Downloaded from Microsoft) 
               
               
                 14 
                 Update the Runtime Java Classes 
               
               
                   
                 Using the WinntJava.Zip file provided 
               
               
                   
                 within the Tools project of SourceSafe: 
               
               
                   
                 Extract all files (use folder names) to 
               
               
                   
                 C:\WinNT\Java. 
               
               
                 15 
                 Create System Environment Variables 
                 These variables 
               
               
                   
                 Define the following Environment Variable; 
                 are used by the 
               
               
                   
                 CLASSPATH 
                 Java Virtual 
               
               
                   
                 C:\ReTA\Architecture;C:\ReTA\Application; 
                 Machine to find 
               
               
                   
                 C:\winnt\java\classes;C:\winnt\java\ 
                 Java runtime 
               
               
                   
                 packages;c:\winnt\java\trustlib 
                 classes and by the 
               
               
                   
                 INCLUDE 
                 development tools 
               
               
                   
                 INCLUDE; add 
                 for application 
               
               
                   
                 C:\ReTA\Architecture;C:\ReTA\Application; 
                 and architecture 
               
               
                   
                 C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio\ 
                 builds. 
               
               
                   
                 VC98\Include;c:\Program Files\MTS 
               
               
                   
                 PATH 
               
               
                   
                 - PATH; add C:\orant\bin;C:\Program Files\ 
               
               
                   
                 Mts;C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual 
               
               
                   
                 Studio\Common\Tools\;C:\Program Files\ 
               
               
                   
                 Microsoft Visual Studio\VC98\bin;C:\ 
               
               
                   
                 Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio\VJ98 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Install and Configure Development Software 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Step 
                 Step Description 
                 Notes 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 16 
                 Install Microsoft Visual J++ 
                 Restart if 
               
               
                   
                 If install detects an out of date version of 
                 prompted. 
               
               
                   
                 IE 4.0 then accept the version offered by 
               
               
                   
                 Visual J++ 6.0. 
               
               
                   
                 Reboot Computer, leave CD in drive. 
               
               
                   
                 Start install for VisualJ++ v 6.0, 
               
               
                   
                 select Install VisualJ++ 6.0 option. 
               
               
                   
                 Select Custom install: 
               
               
                   
                 Click Data Access, click Change Option 
               
               
                   
                 button, click Microsoft ODBC Drivers and 
               
               
                   
                 click Change Option button, - De-Select 
               
               
                   
                 Microsoft SQL Server ODBC Driver and 
               
               
                   
                 Microsoft Oracle ODBC 
               
               
                   
                 Driver, Click OK twice, Click Continue 
               
               
                   
                 button. 
               
               
                 17 
                 Install Microsoft Visual Studio 6.0 
                 Restart if 
               
               
                   
                 Components. 
                 prompted. 
               
               
                   
                 Select Custom install: 
               
               
                   
                 De-select everything except for Microsoft 
               
               
                   
                 Visual SourceSafe 6.0 and Microsoft Visual 
               
               
                   
                 C++ 6.0.. Ignore warning message when 
               
               
                   
                 deselecting the Data Access check box. 
               
               
                   
                 Click on Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0 
               
               
                   
                 Click Change Option. 
               
               
                   
                 De-select everything except for VC++ 
               
               
                   
                 Build Tools. 
               
               
                   
                 Click OK button. 
               
               
                   
                 Click Continue. 
               
               
                   
                 Click OK on register environment variables. 
               
               
                   
                 Click YES on Visual SourceSafe Database 
               
               
                   
                 Format dialog. 
               
               
                 18 
                 Apply Software Updates 
               
               
                   
                 In the event that updates are available for 
               
               
                   
                 either Visual J++ or Visual C++, 
               
               
                   
                 apply them now. 
               
               
                 19 
                 Install Service Pack 4.0 for NT 
               
               
                   
                 Run install for Service Pack 4.0. 
               
               
                 20 
                 Configure Web Server 
               
               
                   
                 Start the Internet Service Manager 
               
               
                   
                 Add a vistual directory where the application 
               
               
                   
                 may start. 
               
               
                   
                 On the virtual directory enable Server Side 
               
               
                   
                 ASP script debugging and Client Side 
               
               
                   
                 script debugging. 
               
               
                   
                 On the virtual directory, set directory 
               
               
                   
                 security for Basic Authentication only. 
               
               
                 21 
                 Configure encrypted database access 
                 This step creates 
               
               
                   
                 information 
                 an encrypted file 
               
               
                   
                 Open Command prompt in C:\ReTA\ 
                 located at the C:\ 
               
               
                   
                 Architecture Type ‘jview Session.Data- 
                 that contains the 
               
               
                   
                 baseUser.class’ 
                 database 
               
               
                   
                 When Prompted for the Architecture user id 
                 connectivity 
               
               
                   
                 and password enter: 
                 information. 
               
               
                   
                 (Userid: RetaUser, Password: RetaUser) 
               
               
                   
                 When Prompted for the Application user id 
               
               
                   
                 and password enter: 
               
               
                   
                 (Userid: RetaUser, Password: RetaUser) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     WEB &amp; APPLICATION SERVER ENVIRONMENT 
     Overview 
     Description 
     This portion of the description provides the steps necessary to configure a Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) web server and an application using Microsoft Transaction Server for use on a ReTA engagement. 
     Assumptions 
     This portion of the present description assumes: 
     That the target hardware configuration for both the web and application server meets the specified requirements for the software being installed. 
     Embodiments mentioned within this portion of the present description may not be current as of the time of this reading. Care should be taken to ensure that the latest embodiments are used and that individual installation processes are reviewed to ensure that any changes are followed. 
     Individuals performing this installation have experience in Microsoft platforms and tools, and are familiar within web-based application development. 
     Physical Configuration 
     FIG. 66 illustrates the development environment configuration for a ReTA Phase 1 engagement. A developer workstation  6600 , a database server  6602 , and a web and application server  6604  are connected together. 
     Installation Process 
     This is the script for the preparation of the run-time environment for the application and web server. It is applicable to a computer running Windows NT Server 4.0 Enterprise Edition. 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Install/Configure Web and Application Server Components 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Step 
                 Step Description 
                 Notes 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 1 
                 Install Windows NT Server v 4.0 Enterprise 
                 It may be necessary 
               
               
                   
                 Edition. 
                 to reboot the 
               
               
                   
                 Run install for Windows NT Server 4.0 from 
                 computer after the 
               
               
                   
                 boot disks. 
                 installation. 
               
               
                 2 
                 Install Service Pack 4.0 for Windows NT 4.0 
                 It may be necessary 
               
               
                   
                 Run install for Service Pack 4.0 
                 to reboot the 
               
               
                   
                 (available from the Microsoft Website). 
                 computer after the 
               
               
                   
                 Ignore any warning messages during the later 
                 installation. 
               
               
                   
                 steps of the installation process related to 
               
               
                   
                 the use of the Service Pack. 
               
               
                 3 
                 Install Internet Explorer 4.01 Service Pack 1. 
                 This step installs 
               
               
                   
                 It is not important whether the desktop shell 
                 the Java virtual 
               
               
                   
                 update is installed or not. This step also 
                 machine used by 
               
               
                   
                 installs the Java virtual machine used by the 
                 the application. 
               
               
                   
                 application. It may be necessary to reboot the 
                 Reboot if 
               
               
                   
                 computer after the installation. 
                 prompted. 
               
               
                 4 
                 Set up the Web and Application Server. 
                 Installs IIS 4.0 
               
               
                   
                 Install the NT Option pack from the supplied 
                 and MTS 2.0. 
               
               
                   
                 media. This may not be possible unless the 
                 Reboot when 
               
               
                   
                 previous step has been completed correctly. 
                 prompted. 
               
               
                   
                 Choose to install the “custom set-up” of the 
               
               
                   
                 option pack. 
               
               
                   
                 Double click on the Personal Web Server 
               
               
                   
                 component. 
               
               
                   
                 Check the box for the Internet Service 
               
               
                   
                 Manager component 
               
               
                   
                 Click OK. 
               
               
                   
                 Double Click Transaction Server. 
               
               
                   
                 Check box for Transaction Server 
               
               
                   
                 Development. 
               
               
                   
                 Accept default location for WWW Service 
               
               
                   
                 install, Click Next Accept default for 
               
               
                   
                 Transaction Server 
               
               
                   
                 (should be Administration-&gt;local). 
               
               
                   
                 Application may begin to install. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Install/Configure Database Connectivity 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Step 
                 Description 
                 Notes 
               
               
                   
               
               
                  5 
                 Install Oracle 8 Client. 
                 Oracle 8 Client 
               
               
                   
                 Install Oracle Client Software R 8.0 from 
                 installed. 
               
               
                   
                 the CD 
               
               
                   
                 Accept default home location. 
               
               
                   
                 Choose Custom Installation. 
               
               
                   
                 Select Oracle 8 Client Application User 
               
               
                   
                 Products. 
               
               
                   
                 Click Install. 
               
               
                   
                 De-Select Oracle Objects for OLE. 
               
               
                   
                 Click OK 
               
               
                   
                 Click Exit when finished. 
               
               
                  6 
                 Configure Oracle Networking 
                 Net8 provides the 
               
               
                   
                 Use the Oracle Net8 Easy Config Utility to 
                 networking 
               
               
                   
                 define a local service name. To perform this 
                 component of 
               
               
                   
                 operation one may need to know the name 
                 Oracle8. 
               
               
                   
                 of the Oracle instance (default is ‘ORCL’), 
               
               
                   
                 the hostname of the server that Oracle 
               
               
                   
                 resides on, and the port that the Oracle 
               
               
                   
                 database listener is on (default is 1521). 
               
               
                   
                 Refer to the help portion of the present 
               
               
                   
                 description installed in step 5 for assistance. 
               
               
                  7 
                 Update MTS Settings for Oracle 8 client 
                 Currently, MTS 
               
               
                   
                 compatibility 
                 v2.0 installation 
               
               
                   
                 Open REGEDIT and within the 
                 is based on using 
               
               
                   
                 LOCAL_MACHNE\SOFTWARE key 
                 Oracle 7.3 for 
               
               
                   
                 modify the Microsoft\Transaction Server\ 
                 Oracle connectivity. 
               
               
                   
                 Local Computer\My Computer entries: 
               
               
                   
                 Change the OracleSqlLib to “sqllib80.dll” 
               
               
                   
                 Change the OracleXaLib to “xa80.dll” 
               
               
                  8 
                 Install Microsoft Data Access Components 
                 Microsoft ODBC 
               
               
                   
                 Run install from NT Server 4.0 SP 4.0 disk 
                 for Oracle driver 
               
               
                   
                 (Caution, do not install NT Service Pack 4.0 
                 (MSORCL32.DLL 
               
               
                   
                 at this time) 
                 v 2.573.292700) 
               
               
                   
                 Select Custom Install. 
                 installed 
               
               
                   
                 De-select everything except for ODBC 
                 Reboot if 
               
               
                   
                 Components, OLE DB components, 
                 prompted. 
               
               
                   
                 Microsoft Remote Data Services and ODBC 
               
               
                   
                 driver for Oracle databases. 
               
               
                  9 
                 Run MTS\Oracle Configuration Test Utility 
                 Use this test to 
               
               
                   
                 Copy the Oracle 8.0 version of 
                 ensure your oracle 
               
               
                   
                 TestOraclexaConfig.exe (from the 
                 client connection 
               
               
                   
                 Tools project within VSS) to your 
                 is transactional. 
               
               
                   
                 C:\Program Files\Mts folder. 
                 MTS installs 
               
               
                   
                 Copy over the existing .exe (version 7.3 
                 Oracle 7.3 
               
               
                   
                 compatible). 
                 compatible utility 
               
               
                   
                 Run the TestOraclexaConfig.exe from the 
                 by default. 
               
               
                   
                 command line; i.e. 
               
               
                   
                 TestOraclexaConfig.exe-U&lt;username&gt;- 
               
               
                   
                 P&lt;password&gt;-S&lt;Net8 Service&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 Ex. TestOraclexaConfig.exe-URetaUser- 
               
               
                   
                 PRetaUser-SReta1 
               
               
                 10  
                 Create Architecture and Application DSN&#39;s 
                 This process sets 
               
               
                   
                 (Data Source Names). 
                 up an ODBC 
               
               
                   
                 Run the 32Bit Administrator in the Control 
                 connection from 
               
               
                   
                 Panel. Make sure that the tab for System 
                 the developers&#39; 
               
               
                   
                 DSN is selected. 
                 machine to the 
               
               
                   
                 Select Add, then Microsoft ODBC for Oracle 
                 Database Server. 
               
               
                   
                 The Data Source Name is AFUser, and the 
               
               
                   
                 Server “reta1” for the above example) 
               
               
                   
                 Repeat the above two steps to add DSN&#39;s for 
               
               
                   
                 the data sources 
               
               
                   
                 AFPersistence, AFEvent, AFSession and 
               
               
                   
                 AFOrder 
               
               
                 11  
                 Test the DSN&#39;s defined 
               
               
                   
                 Test the connections established above using 
               
               
                   
                 the 32 Bit ODBC Test utility in the Oracle 
               
               
                   
                 for NT folder off the Start menu. 
               
               
                   
                 Select Connect, then Machine Data Sources, 
               
               
                   
                 then one of the connections established 
               
               
                   
                 above. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Configure Java Runtime Components 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Step 
                 Description 
                 Notes 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 13 
                 Apply Software Updates 
                 Reboot when 
               
               
                   
                 Install the updated latest Java Virtual 
                 prompted. 
               
               
                   
                 Machine (Downloaded from Microsoft) 
               
               
                 14 
                 Update the Runtime Java Classes 
               
               
                   
                 Using the WinntJava.Zip file provided within 
               
               
                   
                 the Tools project of SourceSafe: 
               
               
                   
                 Extract all files (use folder names) to 
               
               
                   
                 C:\WinNT\Java. 
               
               
                 15 
                 Create System Environment Variables 
                 This variable is 
               
               
                   
                 Define the following Environment Variable; 
                 used by the Java 
               
               
                   
                 CLASSPATH 
                 Virtual Machine 
               
               
                   
                 C:\ReTA\Architecture;C:\ReTA\Application; 
                 to find Java 
               
               
                   
                 C:\winnt\java\classes;C:\winnt\java\ 
                 runtime classes. 
               
               
                   
                 packages;c:\winnt\java\trustlib 
               
               
                   
                 IF using this machine for development, 
               
               
                   
                 Add the following: 
               
               
                   
                 INCLUDE 
                 These variables are 
               
               
                   
                 INCLUDE; add 
                 used by the 
               
               
                   
                 C:\ReTA\Architecture;C:\ReTA\Application; 
                 development tools 
               
               
                   
                 C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio\ 
                 for application and 
               
               
                   
                 VC98/Include;c:\Program Files\MTS 
                 architecture builds. 
               
               
                   
                 PATH 
               
               
                   
                 - PATH add C:\orant\bin;C:\Program Files\ 
               
               
                   
                 Mts;C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual 
               
               
                   
                 Studio/Common/Tools/;C:\Program Files\ 
               
               
                   
                 Microsoft Visual Studio\VC98\bin; 
               
               
                   
                 C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio\ 
               
               
                   
                 VJ98 
               
               
                 16 
                 Install Service Pack 4.0 for NT 
                 Reboot when 
               
               
                   
                 Run install for Service Pack 4.0. 
                 prompted 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 IF using this machinge for development: 
               
               
                 Install and Configure Development Software 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Step 
                 Step Description 
                 Notes 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 16 
                 Install Microsoft Visual J++ 
                 Restart if 
               
               
                   
                 If install detects an out of date version of 
                 prompted. 
               
               
                   
                 IF 4.0 then accept the version offered 
               
               
                   
                 by Visual J++ 6.0. 
               
               
                   
                 Reboot Computer, leave CD in drive. 
               
               
                   
                 Start install for Visual J++ v 6.0, 
               
               
                   
                 select Install Visual J++ 6.0 option. 
               
               
                   
                 Select Custom install: 
               
               
                   
                 Click Data Access, click Change Option 
               
               
                   
                 button, click Microsoft 
               
               
                   
                 ODBC Drivers and click Change Option 
               
               
                   
                 button, - De-Select 
               
               
                   
                 Microsoft SQL Server ODBC Driver and 
               
               
                   
                 Microsoft Oracle ODBC 
               
               
                   
                 Driver, Click OK twice, Click Continue 
               
               
                   
                 button. 
               
               
                 17 
                 Install Microsoft Visual Studio 6.0 
                 Restart if 
               
               
                   
                 Components. 
                 prompted. 
               
               
                   
                 Select Custom install: 
               
               
                   
                 De-select everything except for Microsoft 
               
               
                   
                 Visual SourceSafe 6.0 and Microsoft Visual 
               
               
                   
                 C++ 6.0. Ignore warning message when 
               
               
                   
                 deselecting the Data Access check box. 
               
               
                   
                 Click on Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0 
               
               
                   
                 Click Change Option. 
               
               
                   
                 De-select everything except for VC++ 
               
               
                   
                 Build Tools. 
               
               
                   
                 Click OK button. 
               
               
                   
                 Click Continue. 
               
               
                   
                 Click OK on register environment variables. 
               
               
                   
                 Click YES on Visual SourceSafe Database 
               
               
                   
                 Format dialog. 
               
               
                 18 
                 Apply Software Updates 
               
               
                   
                 In the event that updates are available for 
               
               
                   
                 either Visual J++ or Visual C++, 
               
               
                   
                 apply them now. 
               
               
                 19 
                 Install Service Pack 4.0 for NT 
               
               
                   
                 Run install for Service Pack 4.0. 
               
               
                 20 
                 Configure Web Server 
               
               
                   
                 Start the Internet Service Manager 
               
               
                   
                 Add a virtual directory where the application 
               
               
                   
                 may start. 
               
               
                   
                 On the virtual directory enable Server Side 
               
               
                   
                 ASP script debugging 
               
               
                   
                 and Client Side script debugging. 
               
               
                   
                 On the virtual ditectory, set directory 
               
               
                   
                 security for Basic Authentication only. 
               
               
                 21 
                 Configure encrypted database access 
                 This step creates 
               
               
                   
                 information 
                 an encrypted file 
               
               
                   
                 Open Command prompt in C:\ReTA\ 
                 located at the C:\ 
               
               
                   
                 Architecture Type ‘jview Session.Data- 
                 that contains the 
               
               
                   
                 baseUser.class&#39; 
                 database 
               
               
                   
                 When Prompted for the Architecture user id 
                 connectivity 
               
               
                   
                 and password enter: 
                 information. 
               
               
                   
                 (Userid: RetaUser, Password: RetaUser) 
               
               
                   
                 When Prompted for the Application user id 
               
               
                   
                 and password enter: 
               
               
                   
                 (Userid: RetaUser, Password: RetaUser) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     STANDARDS 
     Objectives 
     Purpose 
     The purpose of this guide is to provide a reasonable set of coding standards and recommendations for producing structured, reliable and maintainable portion of the present descriptions in the HyperText Markup Language (HTML) on the World Wide Web. 
     This guide is intended for programmers who are at least familiar with the basics of the HTML. Accordingly, no attempt is made to explain HTML concepts such as frames and tables. 
     Scope 
     These standards are intended to be independent of any particular hardware, operating system, or development tool. Due to the nature of the Internet, platform independent code is imperative. 
     This guide covers standards for HTML 2.0 and does not cover standards for HTML 3.2. This embodiment can be assumed to be “safe” for all Web browsers. However, HTML 3.0 and 3.0+ offer an extensive array of non-standard elements which enhances the presentation of a Web page. This guide may include tables and frames which are not fully supported by all browsers. Thus, when implementing tables or frames, it is important to consider your target audience and the type of browsers they may be using to surf the Internet. 
     There are a variety of tools to aid the authoring process of HTML. A HTML editing tool like WebEdit or a HTML template like Internet Assistant may not be consistent with our standards and guidelines. Projects using these HTML editors and converters are subject to the proprietary standards of their respective software applications. 
     Convention 
     In this guide, standards are presented as follows: 
     *Text for rule or standard here. 
     The statement of one or more standards is usually followed by a discussion of the standard(s). Such a discussion may include justifications for using the particular rule, common alternatives, other supplementary information, or even situations where the standard may not apply. 
     Program Organization 
     Source Code 
     *Organize source code as follows: 
     file comment block 
     &lt;HTML&gt; 
     &lt;HEAD&gt; 
     &lt;TITLE&gt; 
     &lt;/TITLE&gt; 
     &lt;/HEAD&gt; 
     &lt;BODY&gt; 
     insert body text 
     &lt;/BODY&gt; 
     &lt;/HTML&gt; 
     Defining a standard source file layout makes it easier to understand and maintain code written by other programmers. 
     File Names 
     HTML files adhere to the same naming and directory standards set forth by the Internet Center of Excellence (ICE). For more information, refer to the ICE portion of the present description on file naming and directory standards. 
     Programming Styles 
     HTML Tags 
     *All HTML tags and attributes should be capitalized. 
     HTML is not case sensitive, however, to preserve readability, it is important to adhere to uppercase lettering for HTML tags. 
     However, some HTML editors, such as Microsoft FrontPage, generate lower-case HTML tages. Since more HTML editing may probably be done through similar tools, it does not make sense to have to go back through the code and make any changes. For this situation, simply adopt the format that your HTML tool generates, and make it consistent throughout your project. 
     *All open tags must be terminated by an end tag. 
     Excluding tags such as &lt;LI&gt;, &lt;HR&gt;, &lt;BR&gt;, &lt;IMG&gt;, &lt;META&gt;, &lt;BASE&gt;and &lt;P&gt;, it is important to close a HTML tag with a &lt;/(tag name)&gt;. For example, an open HTML tag is &lt;HTML&gt; and a closed HTML tag is &lt;/HTML&gt;. Failure to close a HTML tag may cause undefined behavior with the appearance of the HTML page. 
     *Do not skip levels of headings. 
     Headings should be not more than one level below the preceding heading level. For example, &lt;H 3 &gt; should not follow &lt;H 1 &gt;. 
     *Use underline for hypertext links only. 
     Adhere to this standard to eliminate any confusion between a hypertext link and a text underlined for emphasis. To emphasize text, use the following tabs: &lt;EM&gt; for emphasis in italics, &lt;STRONG&gt; for text emphasis, &lt;B&gt; for bold and &lt;I&gt; for italics. 
     *Employ the logical styles rather than physical styles. 
     Not all browsers are capable of displaying italics &lt;I&gt; or the boldface &lt;B&gt; tag. Physical styles indicate the specific appearance of individual words or sentences and include such tags as &lt;B&gt; for bold text, &lt;I&gt; for italic text, and &lt;TT&gt; typewriter text, e.g., fixed-width font. The following is a list of logical styles tags: 
     &lt;CITE&gt; for citation (e.g., HTML Coding Standards). Typically displayed in italics. 
     &lt;CODE&gt; for computer code (e.g., Enter &lt;stdio.h&gt;header file). Typically displayed in a fixed-width font. 
     &lt;DFN&gt; for definition (e.g., Guru means god-like). Typically displayed in italics. 
     &lt;EM&gt; for emphasis (e.g., It is advisable that one uses this than typing italics within a tag). Typically displayed in italics. 
     &lt;KBD&gt; for user keyboard entry (e.g., Enter passwd). Typically displayed in a fixed-width font. 
     &lt;SAMP&gt; for a sequence of literal characters (e.g., Segmentation fault: Core dumped). Typically displayed in a fixed-width font. 
     &lt;STRONG&gt; for strong emphasis (e.g., NOTE: This is a reminder). Typically displayed in bold. 
     &lt;VAR&gt; for a variable (e.g., rm filename deletes the file). Typically displayed in italics. 
     *The use of &lt;P&gt; should be avoided directly before any other element which already implies a paragraph break. 
     The &lt;P&gt; element should not be placed before the headings, HR, ADDRESS, BLOCKQUOTE, or PRE. 
     It should also not be placed immediately before a list element of any stripe. That is, a &lt;P&gt; should not be used to mark the end-of-text for &lt;LI&gt;, &lt;DT&gt; or &lt;DD&gt;. These elements already imply paragraph breaks. 
     *Investigate the possibility for using server-side includes for repeated blocks of HTML, such as footers and headers. 
     The server-side include tag allows one to keep one copy of a footer or header. Updating this one copy may update all portion of the present descriptions that reference it. 
     Investigate the Client&#39;s use of the &lt;META&gt; tag, which is used to help with searches and portion of the present description information. 
     The &lt;META&gt; tag provides a way to store information about the portion of the present description that is not available elsewhere in the portion of the present description. For example, the META tag can contain catalog, author, or index information that various search engines can use. 
     An example might be: 
     &lt;HEAD&gt; 
     &lt;META NAME=“keywords”CONTENT=“HTML portion of the present description reference Netscape”&gt; 
     &lt;/HEAD&gt; 
     This portion of the present description is indexed under the terms “HTML”, “portion of the present description”, “reference”, and “Netscape”. 
     HTML Tag Parameters 
     *Include HEIGHT and WIDTH attributes in all IMG tags. 
     Adhering to this standard may eliminate the problem when using JavaScript code in HTML portion of the present descriptions with IMG tags. Without the HEIGHT and WIDTH parameters in IMG tags, JavaScript event handlers are ignored on subsequent form elements and also images are not displayed on screen. As good practice, it is recommended to include all parameters in their appropriate HTML tags. 
     *Include alternate text for images. 
     Some Web browsers cannot display images and some Web users may not want to use image loading even if their software can display images because they are have a slow connection. For these browsers and users, the ALT attribute specifies the text to be displayed instead of the image. For example, &lt;IMG SRC=“aclogo.gif” ALT=“Andersen Consulting logo”&gt;. If a Web browser cannot display aclogo.gif or a Web user wishes not to view the logo, the text “Company Logo” may be displayed to screen instead. 
     *Indicate a specific font size rather than incrementing it with the ±. 
     Be careful when using the ± in the SIZE attribute in the FONT tags. Some Web users re-configure the font sizes in their Web browsers and the consequences of using the ± may have an adverse effect on the text. 
     *Always have &lt;NO FRAMES&gt; tags following the &lt;FRAMESET&gt; tag. 
     Not all Web browsers are “frame-capable.” Those “frame-capable” browsers may see the frames layout and others may view an alternate or a normal page without frames. The code for the page without frames is bounded by the open and closed NO FRAMES tag set and includes the open and closed BODY tags and all code therein. For example: 
     &lt;FRAMESET COLS=“80%,20%”&gt; 
     &lt;FRAME NAME=“column 1 ” SCROLLING=“no”NORESIZE SRC=“col 1 .html”&gt; 
     &lt;FRAME NAME=“column 2 ” SCROLLING=“yes”NORESIZE SRC=“col 2 .html”&gt; 
     &lt;/FRAMESET&gt; 
     &lt;NO FRAMES&gt; 
     &lt;BODY&gt; 
     body text 
     &lt;/BODY&gt; 
     &lt;/NO FRAMES&gt; 
     Path Names 
     In general, use relative links when referencing internal files. 
     There are exceptions to this standard and a uniform scheme should be determined prior to HTML development. 
     In general, it is easier to move a group of portion of the present descriptions to another location because the relative path names may still be valid. Also, relative paths are more efficient to connect to the server. An example of a relative path to a file “california.html” located in the subdirectory “unitedstates” would be: 
     &lt;A HREF=“unitedstates/california.html”&gt;California&lt;/A&gt;. 
     Absolute pathnames link to portion of the present descriptions that are not directly related and require the complete Uniform Resource Locator (URL) of the file. An example of an absolute path to a file “mteverest.html” in the subdirectory “nepal” on another server “Hiking Expeditions” would be: 
     &lt;A HREF=“www.hiking.com/nepal/mteverest.html”&gt;Trekking on Mt.Everest&lt;/A&gt;. 
     When making a directory reference, it is important to make sure to have a trailing slash on the URL. 
     For example, &lt;A HREF=“http://www.ac.com/news/”&gt;&lt;/A&gt;is correct, while &lt;A HREF=“http://www.ac.com/news”&gt;&lt;/A&gt;is not. 
     Formatting 
     General 
     Consistent use of a suitable formatting style makes HTML portion of the present descriptions much easier to read, comprehend, and maintain. Choosing a reasonable style and using it consistently is more important than the details of the style itself. 
     Screen Resolution 
     *All HTML files should be designed to fit on a 640×480 screen. 
     This standard is set forth for consideration of most display monitors, especially laptop users who have screen resolution of 640×480 only. 
     *Indent HTML tags when creating tables, frames, and lists. 
     Consistent use of a suitable formatting style makes programs much easier to read, comprehend and maintain. An example of this is as follows: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 &lt;TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;TH&gt;SampleHeading&lt;/TH&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;TR&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;TD&gt;Row 1 Column 1&lt;/TD&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;TD&gt;Row 1 Column 2&lt;/TD&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;TD&gt;Row 1 Column 3&lt;/TD&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;/TR&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;TR&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;TD&gt;Row 2 Column 1&lt;/TD&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;TD&gt;Row 2 Column 2&lt;/TD&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;TD&gt;Row 2 Column 3&lt;/TD&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;/TR&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;/TABLE&gt; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     An example of formatting an unnumbered list is as follows: 
     &lt;UL TYPE=“square”&gt; 
     &lt;LI&gt;Alligator 
     &lt;LI&gt;Bear 
     &lt;LI&gt;Cat 
     &lt;UL&gt; 
     &lt;LI&gt;Siamese Cats 
     &lt;LI&gt;Persian Cats 
     &lt;LI&gt;Tabby Cats 
     &lt;/UL&gt; 
     &lt;LI&gt;Deer 
     &lt;/UL&gt; 
     As one may notice, no closing LI tag is needed. The same format above would apply for numbered, i.e., &lt;OL&gt; and definition lists, i.e., &lt;DL&gt;. 
     Portion of the Present Description (Comments) 
     General 
     Include comments in code as it is being written and update them accordingly. Remember that bad comments are worse than no comments at all!Comments are also convenient for commenting out several adjacent lines of code for debugging purposes. 
     Inline Comments 
     *Insert portion of the present description information at the top of each HTML file in comment tags. 
     All HTML files should begin with the following information: 
     &lt;!—Portion of the present description name:—&gt; 
     &lt;!— 
     Description:—&gt; 
     &lt;!—Author:—&gt; 
     &lt;!—Date created:—&gt; 
     &lt;!—Last modified on:—&gt; 
     &lt;!—Any applicable copyright notices—&gt; 
     *Comments should begin with &lt;!—and closed with—&gt;. 
     *Include comments in places where the code is unclear and/or nonportable. 
     *Place comments above the appropriate tag/link. 
     *Indent inline block comments to the same level as the code they describe. 
     *Do not include comments for actions that can be stated in the language itself. 
     Good inline comments are brief and to the point; the author should assume that the reader is reasonably competent. 
     *Date Created and Date Modifications should be in the format of “January 10, 1996”, not “01/10/96”. 
     This is because, for some audiences, especially those from Europe, “01/10/96” means “October 01, 1996”. 
     *Portion of the present description modifications in comment tags. 
     If we are maintaining portion of the present descriptions on a long-term basis, not just for development, the following standard should be used to maintain HTML source. 
     Add notation to portion of the present description header. 
     Initialize and date the beginning and ending of modification if multiple lines. 
     Example of this is: 
     &lt;!—January 10, 1996 STP: Begin modified table entries—&gt;table . . . 
     &lt;!—January 10, 1996 STP: end of modification—&gt; 
     If single line modification, only mark line above. 
     Common Mistakes 
     This portion of the description lists a few of the most common mistakes made by HTML designers, experienced as well as beginners. They are as follows: 
     Remember to close HTML tags. 
     Remember to close all attribute tags with a quote. For example, linking to Andersen Consulting&#39;s Web site may look like: &lt;A HREF=“http://www.ac.com”&gt;. However, people may inadvertently leave off the close quote and instead type: &lt;A HREF=“http://www.ac.com&gt;. 
     Be sure all HTML files contain the main opening and closing tags in their respective order as follows: 
     &lt;HTML&gt; 
     &lt;HEAD&gt; 
     &lt;TITLE&gt; 
     &lt;/TITLE&gt; 
     &lt;/HEAD&gt; 
     &lt;BODY&gt; 
     &lt;/BODY&gt; 
     &lt;/HTML&gt; 
     Test all hyperlinks after completion of a HTML file. 
     A character reference and an entity reference are ways to represent information that might otherwise be interpreted as a markup tag. 
     For example: 
     &amp;lt; represents &lt; symbol; 
     &amp;gt; represents &gt; symbol; 
     &amp;quot; represents ” mark; 
     &amp;amp; represents &amp; symbol. 
     The most common errors in the use of entity references are leaving off the trailing semicolon and adding unnecessary spaces before and/or after the entity/character reference. 
     Java Programming Standard 
     Introduction 
     This portion of the present description describes the Programming Standard for Java in the Telebank project. It covers typical programming standard material, including the following: 
     Program organization 
     Naming standards 
     Code layout 
     Comments 
     In addition, it covers the following material: 
     Coding priorities 
     Programming style 
     Error handling 
     Debugging and Testing 
     The purpose of this portion of the present description is to help ensure a uniformly high source code quality. The rules and guiding principles have been chosen to support this goal. In cases with more than one acceptable alternative, one alternative has been chosen (more or less arbitrarily) rather than leaving it up to the individual programmer. The purpose of this is to ensure consistency in the source code. Note: Some of the rules are beneficial only if applied consistently. Apply them! 
     Coding Priorities 
     This portion of the description defines coding (and, to some extent, design) priorities on the various platforms. The first table defines the meaning of each priority item; the second table specifies their ranking on the three platforms. Use these tables as a guide for resolving design and implementation issues. In some cases, coding priorities are clearly opposed to one another. As an example, consider a choice of sorting algorithms. For simplicity and safety, there is nothing to beat the bubble sort—it is simple enough that one can code it from scratch each time one needs it and still be fairly confident that it works correctly the first time. The problem is, the bubble sort is slow. Just about any other sorting algorithm may be faster; it may also be complex enough that one may need to crack a book to implement it. In addition, one may have to test more thoroughly to be confident that the code works correctly. 
     In other cases, coding priorities work together. Small often equals fast, for example. 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Definitions of Priority Items 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Item 
                 Definition 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Correctness 
                 The code works correctly. This item might seem 
               
               
                   
                 superfluous, but experience tells us differently. 
               
               
                 Size 
                 This does not refer to the number of source code lines, 
               
               
                   
                 but to the total size of compiled code (the .class files). 
               
               
                   
                 It also includes overhead imposed by non-functional data, 
               
               
                   
                 e.g., strings used internally in the program. 
               
               
                   
                 Traditionally, size also includes memory usage. In our 
               
               
                   
                 case, the client/server network connection is the most 
               
               
                   
                 important bottleneck; what counts is what goes over 
               
               
                   
                 the wire. 
               
               
                 Speed 
                 This includes both execution speed (as measured by CPU 
               
               
                   
                 usage) and perceived responsiveness from the user&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 point of view. These are not necessarily the same thing. 
               
               
                   
                 A guideline is to make the code fast enough, but not to 
               
               
                   
                 waste time making it faster than that. If one needs to sort 
               
               
                   
                 5 records, choose bubble sort. If one is sorting a 
               
               
                   
                 million records, choose Quicksort. 
               
               
                   
                 Speed bottlenecks are rarely obvious. Before one decides 
               
               
                   
                 that an operation or a subsystem needs optimization, 
               
               
                   
                 try to get hard data on where the real bottleneck is. 
               
               
                 Robustness 
                 Tolerance towards erroneous input and other error 
               
               
                   
                 conditions. This does not mean that a program or routine 
               
               
                   
                 should accept garbage, but that is should handle it 
               
               
                   
                 gracefully. 
               
               
                 Safety 
                 Choose the implementation that one is most likely to 
               
               
                   
                 develop without any bugs. 
               
               
                 Testability 
                 Easy to test 
               
               
                 Maintainability 
                 Code that is easy to maintain typically has several 
               
               
                   
                 characteristics: 
               
               
                   
                 It is easy to read and understand. 
               
               
                   
                 It is well encapsulated. This allows changes (updates or 
               
               
                   
                 fixes) to be made with some confidence that it won&#39;t 
               
               
                   
                 blow up something else. Portion of the present 
               
               
                   
                 description, including comments in the code, is in 
               
               
                   
                 agreement with the code. 
               
               
                 Simplicity 
               
               
                 Reusability 
                 This can mean class or function reuse in the same 
               
               
                   
                 project, or it can mean preparing for reuse on a later 
               
               
                   
                 project. Designing for reuse typically has an overhead 
               
               
                   
                 of around 50%, split among additional design time 
               
               
                   
                 (to find good generalizations), additional portion of 
               
               
                   
                 the present description requirements and additional 
               
               
                   
                 testing. 
               
               
                   
                 A good compromise is often just to choose a design that 
               
               
                   
                 does not preclude reuse; the best tool for this is known as 
               
               
                   
                 encapsulation. 
               
               
                 Portability 
                 The code is reusable across platforms. Coding for 
               
               
                   
                 portability typically entails such things as: 
               
               
                   
                 Using a cross-platform library 
               
               
                   
                 Using a subset of a language or library that is common 
               
               
                   
                 and consistent across platforms 
               
               
                   
                 Isolating platform dependencies 
               
               
                   
                 In the specific case of Java, we need to accommodate 
               
               
                   
                 differences between Java VM implementations, 
               
               
                   
                 differences between library implementations and 
               
               
                   
                 differences between host GUIs. 
               
               
                   
                 Java as a totally portable programming environmnent is 
               
               
                   
                 a myth. One consequence is that we must test on a 
               
               
                   
                 number of platforms-different hardware platforms, 
               
               
                   
                 different operating systems and different Web 
               
               
                   
                 browsers. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Priority Rankings 
     These rankings are specific to the Telebank project. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Client 
                 NT Server 
                 Host 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Correctness 
                 Correctness 
                 Correctness 
               
               
                   
                 Size 
                 Robustness 
                 Robustness 
               
               
                   
                 Testability 
                 Safety 
                 Safety 
               
               
                   
                 Portability 
                 Testability 
                 Speed 
               
               
                   
                 Robustness 
                 Speed 
                 Testability 
               
               
                   
                 Safety 
                 Maintainability 
                 Maintainability 
               
               
                   
                 Maintainability 
                 Simplicity 
                 Simplicity 
               
               
                   
                 Simplicity 
                 Reusability 
                 Reusability 
               
               
                   
                 Reusability 
                 Portability 
                 Portability 
               
               
                   
                 Speed 
                 Size 
                 Size 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Program Organization 
     Module Organization 
     The term module in this context refers to a source file. A source file should contain one public class; it may contain additional non-public classes. 
     The elements of a module should be in the following order: 
     Package name 
     Import section 
     Class definition(s). 
     Class header 
     Constants (final class variables): public, protected, private 
     Public static inner classes 
     Protected inner classes, static or otherwise 
     Private inner classes, static or otherwise 
     Class variables (private only) 
     Fields (instance variables) (private only) 
     Constructors 
     Other Methods. 
     When ordering methods, ignore visibility specifiers (public, protected, private) and follow these guidelines instead: 
     Keep related methods together 
     When overriding superclass functions, keep them in the same order as in the superclass, and preferably together. 
     The class should end with the unitTest, getExpectedResult and main methods. 
     Module Header 
     The module header consists of the package name and the import section. In addition, there should be a comment at the top with SourceSafe keywords. With these in place, we can see at a glance what this file is about: 
     /* 
     *$Archive: $ 
     *$Revision: $ 
     *$Date: $ 
     *$Author: $ 
     */ 
     In the import section, list each imported module explicitly. 
     Example: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Right 
                 Wrong 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 IMPORT JAVA.AWT.FRAME; 
                 import java.awt.*; 
               
               
                 IMPORT JAVA.AWT.GRAPHICS; 
                 import java.awt.event.*; 
               
               
                 IMPORT 
                 import java.applet.*; 
               
               
                 JAVA.AWT.EVENT.WINDOWADAPTER; 
               
               
                 IMPORT JAVA.AWT.EVENT.WINDOW- 
               
               
                 EVENT; 
               
               
                 IMPORT JAVA.APPLET.APPLET- 
               
               
                 CONTEXT; 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Neither of these conventions is consistently maintainable, so don&#39;t put a lot of work into verifying that all listed modules are used. Likewise, don&#39;t spend time converting existing modules from one format to the other. 
     Code Layout 
     A good layout strategy should accurately and consistently represent the logical structure of the code, it should make the code readable, and it should be easy to maintain. The rules in this portion of the description are designed to meet those criteria. 
     Class Headers 
     Write class headers on a single line if there is room for it. 
     If not, break the line before extends and implements. Indent succeeding lines. 
     If the class header is on a single line, put the opening brace at the end of that line. 
     If the class header needs multiple lines, put the opening brace left aligned on a line by itself. 
     Method Headers 
     Write method headers on a single line if there is room for it. 
     If not, break the line immediately after the opening parenthesis. This leaves all the parameters on the same line. 
     If there still isn&#39;t enough room, put each parameter on its own line. 
     If the method header is on a single line, put the opening brace at the end of that line. 
     If the method header needs multiple lines, put the opening brace left aligned on a line by itself. 
     Indentation 
     Indentation is three (3) spaces. Actually, indentation is one tab, which should be set to display as three spaces. 
     Use tabs for indentation only. Any white space after the indentation level should be actual spaces, so that the formatting may be reasonable no matter how many spaces a tab equals. 
     White Space in the Code 
     Whitespacedoes,ingeneral,enhancereadability. 
     Add one space in the following places: 
     between operators 
     after comma in method declarations and invocations 
     after semicolons in for-loops 
     after opening parentheses 
     before closing parentheses 
     after opening square bracket (index operator) 
     before closing square bracket 
     before and after the assignment operator 
     No space in the following places: 
     Between a method name and the opening parenthesis 
     Between opening and closing parentheses in a function declaration or invocation with an empty parameter list 
     Between opening and closing square brackets in an array declaration where the number of elements is not specified. 
     This example illustrates the above rules: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 IF ( !MYCOMBOVALID ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 myAccounts.removeAll ( ) ; 
               
               
                   
                 for ( int iAccount = 0; iAccount &lt; accountList.size( ) ; 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 ++iAccount ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 MYACCOUNTS.ADDITEM( ACCOUNTLIST.GET( IACCOUNT 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 ) .TOSTRING ( ) ) ; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 final String strAccount = ContextManager.query( SOME_ID 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 ) ; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 int nIndex = getAccountIndex( strAccount ) ; 
               
               
                   
                 myAccounts.select ( Math.max( 0, nIndex ) ) ; 
               
               
                   
                 myComboValid = true; 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 } 
               
               
                 . . . 
               
               
                 private String myTitles[ ] = null; // array of strings 
               
               
                 myClient.height = 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 size.height - myInsets.top - myInsets.bottom - 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 myTitle.height; 
               
               
                 . . . 
               
               
                 public String getItem( int nRow, int nColumn ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 return (String) myVlist [ nColumn ] .elementAt ( nRow ) ; 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 } 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Use blank lines to separate “paragraphs” of related code lines. 
     Indentation hints for the Visual Studio Editor 
     Ctrl+Shift+8 toggles visibility of tabs and spaces. 
     To indent or outdent sections of code, select the code (at least one complete line) and use tab for indent, Shift-Tab for outdent. 
     To auto-format sections of code, select the code and hit Alt+F8. 
     Alt+Enter in the source window brings up the source file property dialog, which allows one to set indentation levels on a file-by-file basis. This is useful for viewing sample code, which is often formatted weirdly. 
     To set the number of spaces displayed per tab, select the Editor tab on the dialog box served up by the Tools, Options command: 
     Braces and Line Breaks 
     Always use (curly) braces, even for blocks with only one statement. This removes one common source of bugs and eases maintenance: 
     FIG. 67 illustrates an interface  6700  associated with the ability of inserting or removing statements within a block without worrying about adding or removing braces. One never has a problem matching else clauses to if clauses. 
     Example: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Right 
                 Wrong 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 IF ( NBOTTOM &lt; NINDEX ) { 
                 if (nBottom &lt; nIndex ) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 MYTOPROW = NINDEX − ROWS () + 1; 
                 myTopRow = nIndex − rows() + 1; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 } ELSE IF ( NINDEX &lt; MYTOPROW ) { 
                 else if ( nIndex &lt; myTopRow ) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 MYTOPROW = NINDEX; 
                 myTopRow = nIndex; 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 } 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     This rule applies to the following constructs: 
     for, while and do-while loops 
     if-else statements 
     try, catch and finally clauses 
     synchronized blocks. 
     Note that the opening brace is at the end of the first line, even for class and method definitions. The only exception is if the expression needs to be broken; in that case, readability is best served by putting the opening brace on the next line. 
     Aligning Assignment Statements 
     Align the = of related assignment statements. This sets them off as a group and shows clearly that they are related. 
     Do not align the = of unrelated statements. Such alignment gives an erroneous impression of relatedness. 
     Example: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Right 
                 Wrong 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 nPanelWidth = 90; 
                 NPANELWIDTH = 90; 
               
               
                   
                 nPanelHeight = 30; 
                 NPANELHEIGHT = 30; 
               
               
                   
                 nSelectedIndex = 0; 
                 NSELECTEDINDEX = 0; 
               
               
                   
                 nLastIndex = 12; 
                 NLASTINDEX = 12; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Line Lengths and Line Breaks 
     One statement per line. 
     Try to keep line lengths below 80 characters. This rule is not absolute; it is better to have a 90-character line than to break a statement. 
     If one must break a line, indent the continuation line(s). 
     If one must break a line, make it obvious by ending the first line with something that needs a continuation: 
     Break assignments after the assignment operator. 
     Break arithmetic and logical expressions after an operator. 
     Break the line to emphasize major sub-expressions. 
     Break method invocations after the opening parenthesis. If the parameter list still won&#39;t fit, break between each parameter or between each logical group of parameters if this seems better. 
     Break method declarations the same way, and put the opening brace on the next line, unindented. 
     If one need to break conditional expressions (e.g., in if or while-statements), follow rules 1 and 2 above, and put the opening brace on the next line, unindented. Using extra variables top hold partial (intermediate) expressions can help one avoid line breaks and at the same time improve readability by making the code self-portion of the present descriptioning. This is a judgement call; the following example goes too far, perhaps, but does at least illustrate the point: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Original condition 
               
               
                 IF ( LCLICKTIME − MYPREVIOUSCLK &lt; DOUBLECLICK_TIME &amp;&amp; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 MYSELECTION == NROWCLICKED ) 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 { 
               
               
                 . . . 
               
               
                 } 
               
               
                 Possible rewrite 
               
               
                 FINAL LONG LCLICKINTERVAL = LCLICKTIME − MYPREVIOUSCLK; 
               
               
                 FINAL BOOLEAN BDOUBLECLICK = (LCLICKINTERVAL &lt; DOUBLECLICK_TIME); 
               
               
                 FINAL BOOLEAN BCLICKSAMEROW = (MYSELECTION == NROWCLICKED); 
               
               
                 IF ( BDOUBLECLICK &amp;&amp; BCLICKSAMEROW ) { 
               
               
                 . . . 
               
               
                 } 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Switch/case Layout 
     Align each cases with the switch. Additional indenting of the cases does not contribute measurably to display the logical structure of the program, and leads to excessive indentation. 
     Indent the statements that belong to a switch, one statement to a line. 
     In the case of large, repetitive lists of cases, it may be better to do a table layout as follows: 
     switch (some_value) { 
     case case1: bla_bla[0]=value 1 ; break; 
     case case2: bla_bla[0]=value 2 ; break; 
     case case3: bla_bla[0]=value 3 ; break; 
     . . . 
     } 
     Consider, though: In cases where this looks good, perhaps a totally table-driven solution would be a better solution. 
     Anonymous Classes 
     An anonymous class is a particular form of inner classes; an innovation of Java 1.1. It is a curious enough construct that we supply two examples of how to format it. If one uses a class more than once, assign an instance to a variable: 
     ACTIONLISTENER ACTIONLISTENER=NEW ACTIONLISTENER( ) { 
     public void processActionEvent(ActionEvent e) { 
     . . . 
     } 
     }; 
     myComboBox.addActionListener(actionListener); 
     myButton.addActionListener(actionListener); 
     More often than not, the anonymous class is a listener designed to handle events from one specific widget only. In this case, define and instantiate the class directly in the code, as follows: 
     MYCOMBOBOX.ADDACTIONLISTENER(NEW ACTIONLISTENER( ) { 
     public void processActionEvent(ActionEvent e) { 
     . . . 
     } 
     }); 
     Naming Conventions 
     Package Names 
     Package names are always in lower case. To ensure global uniqueness, package names are prefixed with no.dnb.tb. 
     File Names 
     Path: The path follows the package name. If a file is part of the package no.dnb.tb.client, and one is using C:\Data\Telebank as your root directory, the path to the file is: 
     C:\Data\Telebank\no\dnb\tb\client 
     Note lower-case names of intermediate directories. 
     The name of the file must be the same as the name of the public class defined in the file (with exactly the same case), with the extension .java. Thus, the class Kontoutskrift in package no.dnb.tb.client.func resides here: 
     C:\Data\Telebank\no\dnb\tb\client\func\Kontoutskrift.java 
     Classes 
     Use proper case for all class names, with first character upper case. Separate multi-word class names using capitalization with no leading underscore. Architectural classes have English names; functional classes have Norwegian names (?) 
     Examples: 
     class FunctionPanel . . . 
     class Kontoutskrift . . . 
     A Note on Proper Case Identifiers 
     To create a proper case identifier, write down the identifier as normal words, e.g., “get customer name”. Next, capitalize each word except possibly the first, which is only capitalized for classes: “get Customer Name”. Finally, concatenate the words into a single word: getCustomerName. 
     Note that compound word usage differs across languages. If the above example were in Norwegian, the name should be hentKundenavn, not hentKundeNavn! 
     Methods 
     Method names are in proper case, with initial lower-case letter. If possible, construct method names that follow the action-object paradigm, i.e., getAccount, printAll. Prefer getSize( ) to size( ); this is consistent with changes to Java in JDK 1.1. 
     Method names do not use any hungarian prefixes to indicate return type. Return type can often be indicated by an object name in the method name, i.e., 
     getAccountList. 
     Methods are called in the context of their class. Accordingly, it is not necessary to repeat the class name in method names. If the class Customer has a method to retrieve the customer&#39;s name, name this method getName rather than getCustomerName. When users of the class invoke this method, they write something like customer.getName( ), which is preferable to customer.getcustomerName( ). 
     Fields 
     A field is a non-static member variable, sometimes called an instance variable. All field names start with the characters “my”, followed by a mixed-case identifier. This is standard practice in Java programming, and reminiscent of the C++ convention of prefixing member variables with “m_”. 
     Since the “my” convention is not easily combined with hungarian prefixes, try to make the type obvious in the variable name. 
     Examples: 
     private Dimension mySize; 
     private Account myAccount; 
     Class Variables 
     A class variable is a static member variable. 
     All class variables start with the characters “the”, followed by a mixed-case identifier. Since this convention is not easily combined with hungarian prefixes, try to make the type obvious in the variable name. 
     Examples: 
     private static AccountList theAccountList; 
     Local Variables 
     Local variables use hungarian prefix conventions. The following prefixes are used: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Prefix 
                 Data type 
                 Examples 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Str 
                 String 
                 strServer, strTitle 
               
               
                 N 
                 Integer 
                 nCustomers, nWidth 
               
               
                 I 
                 Integer used as an index in a for loop 
                 iCustomer, i 
               
               
                 A 
                 Array 
                 astrTitles [] 
               
               
                   
                 (put this in front of other prefix) 
               
               
                 Pnl 
                 Panel 
                 pnlMain 
               
               
                 clr 
                 Color 
                 clrForeground, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clrBackground 
               
               
                 . . . 
                 . . . 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Although this table may get additional entries over time, most objects do not have defined prefixes and never may. A reasonable name is often the same as the class name, but with lower-case first character, e.g.: 
     Account account=getContext( ).getCustomer( ).getAccount( ); 
     Constants 
     Constants are “static final” members of classes. Java has adopted the C convention for #defined constants and uses upper-case names. 
     Examples: 
     public static final int DEFAULT_COLOR=Color.black; 
     private static final String DEFAULT_SERVER=“\\LF 3 DEV 01 ”; 
     Javadoc comments are required for public, protected and package constants. 
     Exceptions 
     Exception names follow class naming conventions, with the additional requirement that the name end in Exception. 
     Programming Style 
     This portion of the description covers layout conventions and coding principles. 
     Visibility (Scope) 
     As a general rule, scope should be as narrow as possible. 
     All fields and class variables should be private. 
     If one absolutely needs outside access to such fields, use access methods, e.g.: 
     CLASS PERSON { 
     private String myName; 
     public void setName(Sring strName) { 
     MYNAME=STRNAME; 
     } 
     public String getName) { 
     RETURN MYNAME; 
     } 
     . . . 
     } 
     Be aware, however, that a proliferation of access methods conflict with the principles of good object-oriented design. Even though access is controlled, the implementation (in particular the data type) is fairly exposed; this creates a coupling between object definition and object use that may be tighter than necessary. 
     Try to think of objects in terms of their behavior rather than the data fields they contain. In the example above, ask yourself what one would like that Person object to be able to do, and provide methods for that instead. 
     Code Granularity (Method Size) 
     A reasonable line count for a method depends on its complexity. A module that consists of sequential statements can be longer than a method containing complex conditials and loops. If the sequential code is repetitive, such as an index-by-index array initialization, the method may be as long as it takes. (One should, however, think twice about your design. Perhaps there are better ways of doing it?) 
     A method should preferably do one single thing, and the method name should reflect this accurately. If it does more, ensure that this is reflected in the method name. If this leads to an ugly method name, reconsider the structure of your code. If one had a function named initPanelManagerAndReadAccountList, the code would probably benefit from a split into methods named initPanelManager and readAccountList. 
     Variables 
     Use only one variable declaration per line. This increases readability and eases maintainability: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Right 
                 Wrong 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 PRIVATE INT MYWIDTH = 150; 
                 private int myWidth = 150, 
               
               
                   
                 PRIVATE INT MYHEIGHT = 50; 
                 myHeight = 50; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     All fields and class variables should be private. 
     Initialization 
     All variables, including fields and class variables, should be initialized at the point of declaration if possible. Even though all Java declarations have default initialization values (0, null, false), spell this out explicitly. 
     Java allows initialization of arrays using the same syntax as C and C++, by enclosing a comma-delimited set of values in braces. A comma after the final value is permissible: use this facility, as it makes for easier maintenance—it is easier to add additional values to or remove values from the end of the list. 
     Java 1.1 allows initializer blocks among the declarations. An initializer block is a section of code enclosed in braces. There are two kinds of initializer blocks: static and instance. 
     Static initializer blocks are executed the first time a class is instantiated. During static initialization (class initialization), things happen in the following order: 
     Class initialization of the superclass is performed, unless it has been done earlier. 
     Static variables are initialized and static initializer blocks are executed. This happens in the order they are listed, from top to bottom. Instance variables, instance initializer blocks and methods don&#39;t figure into this. 
     Note that static and instance initializer blocks are allowed in Java 1.1. Static initializer blocks are executed in order when the class is first instantiated; instance initializer blocks are executed in order after the superclass constructor runs, but before the class constructor runs. 
     Instance initializer blocks are executed whenever a class is instantiated. During object initialization (instance initialization), things happen in the following order: 
     If this is the first time the class is instantiated, all the class (static) initialization takes place. 
     We enter a constructor. If we have not specified a constructor, a default constructor with no arguments is supplied automatically by the compiler. 
     The superclass constructor is called. If your constructor does not explicitly invoke a superclass constructor, the default (argument-less) superclass constructor is called anyway. 
     All instance variables are initialized and instance initializer blocks are executed. This happens in the order they are listed, from top to bottom. Class variables, class initializer blocks and methods don&#39;t figure into this. 
     Use initializer blocks to perform any initialization that can&#39;t be performed by direct variable initialization; put each initializer block immediately following the variable in question. In the examples below, note that the array can be initialized without using an initializer block, while the vector object requires one because of the calls to the addElement method. 
     Examples: 
     private Vector myListofSomething=new Vector ( ); 
     { // Instance initializer block 
     myListofSomething.addElement(someobject); 
     myListofSomething.addElement(anotherobject); 
     } 
     private static int[ ] anMultipliers={ 
       5 ,  4 ,  3 ,  2 ,  7 ,  6 ,  5 ,  4 ,  3 ,  2 , 
     }; 
     private static MyClass theMyClass=new MyClass ( ); 
     static { // Static initializer block 
     theMyClass.setValue(someValue); 
     } 
     Variable Usage 
     Always use a variable for a single purpose. At times it is tempting to reuse an existing variable; avoid this temptation: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 int i; 
               
               
                   
                 . . . 
               
               
                   
                 for ( i = 0; i &lt; myAccountList.size() ; ++i ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 . . . 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 . . . 
               
               
                   
                 // Swap elements: 
               
               
                   
                 i = someArray [ 0 ]; 
               
               
                   
                 someArray [ 0 ] = someArray [ 1 ]; 
               
               
                   
                 someArray [ 1 ] = i; 
               
               
                   
                 . . . 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The two uses of i above have nothing to do with one another. Creating unique variables for each purpose makes your code more readable. 
     Straight-line Code 
     Straight-line code divides into two categories: 
     A Sequence of Statements That Must be in a Specific Order 
     In this case, there are dependencies between statements; one statement must be executed before another for the program logic to work correctly. Here are a few simple guidelines: 
     Organize the code so that the dependencies are obvious. 
     Name methods so that dependencies are obvious at their point of call. 
     Use method parameters or return values to make dependencies obvious. 
     Portion of the present description unclear dependencies. 
     A Sequence of Statements Whose Order Doesn&#39;t Matter 
     In this case, the program may work correctly no matter what the order of statements. Organize the statements so that readers need not skip around to find needed information: 
     Keep related statements together 
     Localize references to variables, i.e., declare and initialize variables as close as possible to where they are used. 
     Conditionals 
     Complex conditions can be hard to read and understand. One way to alleviate this is by using extra boolean variables. In the first fragment below, the meaning of the test is not obvious; in the second, it is crystal clear: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Murky 
               
               
                 IF ( IELEMENT &lt; 0 ∥ MAX_ELEMENTS &lt; IELEMENT ∥ IELEMENT == ILASTELEMENT ) 
               
               
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 . . . 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 } 
               
               
                 Clear 
               
               
                 FINAL BOOLEAN BFINISHED = IELEMENT &lt; 0 ∥ MAX_ELEMENTS &lt; IELEMENT; 
               
               
                 FINAL BOOLEAN BREPEATEDENTRY = IELEMENT == ILASTELEMENT; 
               
               
                 IF ( BFINISHED ∥ BREPEATEDENTRY ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 . . . 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 } 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     This approach both simplifies and portion of the present descriptions complex expressions, making them easier to program without errors and easier to maintain. 
     Never use &gt; or &gt;= in comparisons. Instead, switch the operators around and use &lt; or &lt;=. In this way the smaller number is always on the left-hand side, a practice that has been shown to be more readable when applied consistently. 
     If in doubt about operator precedence, don&#39;t look it up; use parentheses instead. They may not be needed, but they cost nothing, and save code readers from looking up the same thing. 
     If one codes a chain of if-then statements, code the most common cases first. 
     Strive to minimize the number of branches in your code. Whenever one finds himself or herself dealing with a special case, take a moment to consider if it is possible to handle the problem in a more general fashion. Linear code is far easier to test. 
     Make conditional blocks of code short enough to view all at once. Around 30 lines is enough. 
     Limit nesting to three levels. 
     Compare boolean values to true or false implicitly, not explicitly: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Right 
                 Wrong 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 IF ( BVALID) { 
                 if (bValid == true ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 . . . 
                 . . . 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 if ( !bValid ) { 
                 if (bValid == false ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 . . . 
                 . . . 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
                 } 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Loops 
     Prefer a for loop whenever possible. The advantages of the for loop is that it collects the loop control in a single place, and that it allows one to declare a loop control variable that is not accessible outside the loop. Example: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 for ( int i = 0; i &lt; vector.size(); ++i ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 . . . 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Never modify the loop control variable inside the for loop. If this becomes necessary, use a while loop instead. Consider the example above: If the purpose of the loop were to delete selected items from the vector, a for loop would be inappropriate since one wouldn&#39;t increment the loop control variable consistently: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 No 
               
               
                 for ( int iItem = 0; iItem &lt; vector.size (); ++iItem ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 MyClass item = (MyClass) vector.elementAt ( iItem ); 
               
               
                   
                 if ( item.isOldAndTired () ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vector.removeElementAt ( iItem ); 
               
               
                   
                 - -iItem; //  Loop control is off limits!  
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 } 
               
               
                 Yes 
               
               
                 INT IITEM = 0; 
               
               
                 WHILE ( IITEM &lt; VECTOR.SIZE() ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 MYCLASS ITEM = (MYCLASS) VECTOR.ELEMENTAT 
               
               
                   
                 ( IITEM ); 
               
               
                   
                 IF ( ITEM.ISDELETABLE() ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 VECTOR.REMOVEELEMENTAT ( IITEM ); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } ELSE { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 ++IITEM; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 } 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Prefer loops that test exit conditions at the top or the bottom. If this cannot be easily accomplished, rewrite the loop as a while (true) ‘infinite’ loop with a test in the middle. 
     If possible, use only a single break statement to exit the loop. 
     If possible, make loops short enough to view all at once. This is especially important if the loop body is complex. If the loop code grows beyond about 30 lines, consider restructuring the code. 
     Limit nesting to three levels. 
     Switches 
     Never let flow control “fall through” from one case label to the next by omitting the break statement. If you feel an urge to do this because of common code, consider factoring out the common code in a new helper method. 
     Exceptions 
     Type Conversions 
     Notes on Specific Keywords and Constructs 
     final 
     The final keyword is a relative of the C++ keyword const (though not the same). 
     Apply it to classes, methods and all kinds of variables: 
     A final class may not be subclassed. 
     A final method may not be overridden. 
     A final variable may never be changed. 
     Using final on a class or method may have an optimization effect as well. The compiler may be able to perform inlining or compile-time linking instead of dynamic linking at run-time. For this reason, apply final to all classes and methods that are not intended to be subclassed or overridden. (This is not to say that all non-final classes or methods are subclassed or overridden.) 
     Likewise, all variables (including function parameters) that can be final should be final. In the case of constants, this may allow inlining by the compiler, and it is in any case an excellent portion of the present description tool. 
     return 
     A method that returns a value should have a single return statement at the end of the method. 
     If compliance with rule 1 makes your code needlessly complex put your single return statement elsewhere. 
     If compliance with rule 2 makes your code needlessly complex use multiple return statements. 
     One is, in other words, free to do as one likes. The overall goal is readability. If one breaks rule 1, make sure that: 
     the structure of your method is obvious, and that the return statements are clearly visible, perhaps by setting them off with a blank line above and below, or an obscene end-line comment. 
     If one does feel an urge to break these rules, take a minute to consider if an alternative design might be possible, perhaps by offloading some of the methods work on helper methods. 
     transient 
     This keyword is applied to data elements that should not be serialized. Consider the Customer class as an example: it has a private member of type Thread that is used for background downloading of the customer&#39;s account list. A thread is not serializable, so the Thread member is declared transient. 
     Constructors 
     There should normally be only one “main” constructor in a class. Additional convenience constructors may be defined, but they should be implemented in terms of the main constructor. The point of this is to avoid duplicate code: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 “Main” Constructor 
               
               
                   
                 public MultiLineLabel( String strLabel, 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 int 
                 nMarginWidth, 
               
               
                   
                 int 
                 nMarginHeight, 
               
               
                   
                 int 
                 nTextAlignment, 
               
               
                   
                 int 
                 nFixedSize ) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 breakLabel ( strLabel ); 
               
               
                   
                 myMarginWidth = nMarginWidth; 
               
               
                   
                 myMarginHeight = nMarginHeiqht; 
               
               
                   
                 myTextAlignment = nTextAlignment; 
               
               
                   
                 myFixedwidth = nFixedSize; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 Wrong convenience constructor (repeats code from above) 
               
               
                   
                 public MultiLineLabel ( String strLabel ) 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 breakLabel ( strLabel ); 
               
               
                   
                 myMarginWidth = 0; 
               
               
                   
                 myMarginHeight = 0; 
               
               
                   
                 myTextAlignment = LEFT; 
               
               
                   
                 myFixedWidth = 0; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 Correct convenience constructor 
               
               
                   
                 PUBLIC MULTILINELABEL ( STRING STRLABEL ) 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 THIS( STRLABEL, 0, 0, LEFT, 0 ) ; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Threads 
     Debugging and profiling can be made significantly more effective by naming all threads explicitly. Therefore, make sure always to use the Thread constructors that take a name parameter, e.g. use Thread (String name) instead of Thread( ). 
     Portion of the Present Description (Comments) 
     JavaDoc 
     Use javadoc comments for all classes, methods and constants. 
     As a general rule, member variables (fields) are private, and don&#39;t need javadoc comments. If public or protected fields are required for some particular reason, these must be javaportion of the present descriptioned. 
     Macros to insert skeleton comment blocks may be provided. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Class Headers 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 /** 
                   
               
               
                   
                  * class description 
               
               
                   
                  * 
               
               
                   
                  * @author 
                 your name (your company) 
               
               
                   
                  * @author 
                 another name (his or her company) 
               
               
                   
                  * @author 
                 . . . 
               
               
                   
                  * @version 
                 $Revision $ 
               
               
                   
                  * @see 
                 some other class 
               
               
                   
                  * @see 
                 . . . 
               
               
                   
                  */ 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Use a short form of company name, such as AC or DnB. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method Headers 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 /** 
               
               
                  * Validates user id and password; returns a Context structure 
               
               
                  * This is a synchronous service. 
               
               
                  * 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                  * @param 
                 strUserId 
                 User id 
               
               
                  * @param 
                 strPassword 
                 Password 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                  * @return 
                 A Context structure if logon succeeds, else null 
               
               
                  * @see 
                 no.dnb.tb.types.Context 
               
               
                  * @see 
                 no.dnb.tb.interfaces.Isession 
               
               
                  * @exception 
                 java.rmi.RemoteException if the connection fails 
               
               
                 */ 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 public Context getContext( 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 String strUserId, 
               
               
                   
                 String strPassword ) *throws java.rmi.RemoteException 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 { 
               
               
                 . . . 
               
               
                 } 
               
               
                 Note that the @exception tag requires an explanation after the exception 
               
               
                 name! 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     SourceSafe Fields 
     The SourceSafe $Revision $ keyword is used in the @version field. 
     Comments in the Code 
     Use //-style comments rather than /* . . . */ comments in the code. This allows one to comment out large blocks of code using /* . . . * /. (If comments nested this would not be a problem. They don&#39;t, however.) 
     Add a blank line before any stand-alone comment line. If the comment is extensive or important, add a blank line below as well. 
     Indent the comment with its corresponding code. 
     Comments should clarify the intent of the code, not repeat the code in a more verbose way. Aim for a higher level of abstraction than the code itself. Focus on the why rather than the how; the how should be obvious from the code. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Wrong 
                   
               
               
                 I = 0; 
                 // SET I TO 0 
               
               
                 WHILE ( I &lt; VECTOR.SIZE() ) { 
                 // LOOP OVER VECTOR ELEMENTS 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 CMBNAMES.ADD( VECTOR.ELEMENTAT( I ) ); 
                 // ADD ELEMENT TO COMBOBOX 
               
               
                   
                 ++I; 
                 // INCREMENT I 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 } 
               
               
                 Better 
               
               
                 // ADD ALL THE ELEMENTS TO THE COMBO BOX: 
               
               
                 I = 0; 
               
               
                 WHILE ( I &lt; VECTOR.SIZE() ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 CMBNAMES ( VECTOR.ELEMENTAT ( I ) ); 
               
               
                   
                 ++I; 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 } 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     If the code is not obvious, your first course of action should be to restructure the code to make it obvious. If this is not possible, portion of the present description the how, by all means. 
     End-line comments should apply to a single line only. Comments that apply to more than one line should be above the code. 
     Working Comments: 
     Insert comments containing the words TODO as a reminder to yourself or others that something remains to be done, or that there is an unresolved issue. 
     Error Handling 
     Java&#39;s method of choice for handling error conditions is exception handling. Exception handling allows one to keep the sequential flow of the functional code separate from the error handling. This leads to less complex code. 
     Error Handling on the Server 
     Signaling Errors to the Client 
     Whenever an error occurs in a remote method invocation, this may normally be signaled to the client by throwing an exception. Technical errors are always signaled by an exception; functional errors may be returned in the form of objects if that is more convenient. 
     Logging 
     Logging to the NT event log is done through the ErrorLog class. 
     Error Handling on the Client 
     Logging 
     The context manager allows logging from the client to the server. This is done through the ContextManager.safeLog* family of methods. 
     Reporting Errors 
     Error reporting on the client is done by publishing an ERROR, e.g.: 
     try { 
     . . . something . . . 
     } 
     catch (SomeException e) { 
     . . . 
     ContextManager.publish(ContextManager.ERROR, e); 
     . . . 
     } 
     The context manager may take care of informing the user, if necessary; a special message panel may be created for this purpose. Application code may not normally have to deal directly with error reporting. 
     When an error occurs on the server (during a remote method invocation), the server throws an exception. In the case of data downloads (Kontoutskrift, etc.) this is handled uniformly in the download threads. In the case of truly synchronous calls, the functional code must handle the exception as shown in the example above. 
     Debugging and Testing 
     This portion of the description describes how one can code to ease debugging and testing. The actual processes of debugging and testing are described elsewhere. 
     Debugging 
     Pure debug code can be enclosed in special comment delimiters that may be stripped off in a release build. A debug block starts with //{{DEBUG and ends with //}}DEBUG, the only difference being direction of the braces. 
     The class no.dnb.arch.util.Debug contains methods useful for debugging; in particular, it holds trace and assert methods. 
     Unit Testing 
     The Main Method 
     Java allows any class to define a main function, even though the class may not be intended to be an application&#39;s entry point. This feature can be used for unit testing of classes. For example, the AccountNumber class might provide the following main function to exercise the class: 
     //{{UNITTEST 
     public static void main(String[ ] args) { 
     AccountNumber account=new AccountNumber(“42600505380”); 
     System.out.println(“account=\”“+account+ 
     ”\“; isValid=”+account.isValid( )); 
     account=new AccountNumber(“42600505381”); 
     System.out.println(“account=\”“+account+”\“; isValid=”+account.isValid( )); 
     } 
     //}}UNITTEST 
     Note that the above method may never be called except in explicit unit testing. It does, however, bloat the code needlessly. To enable us to strip it out for a release build, pure unit test code should be enclosed in special comment delimiters. A unit test block starts with //{{UNITTEST and ends with //}}UNITTEST, the only difference being direction of the braces. 
     Specific Unit Testing Methods 
     In some cases, unit testing can be completely or partially automated. The requirement is that the test produces text, and that this text can be reliably compared to another text, the expected result. 
     To build automated unit testing into a class, define two static methods as follows: 
     public static void unitTest(PrintWriter ps); 
     This method exercises the class, printing its output on ps. 
     public static String getExpectedResult( ); 
     This method should return a (hard-coded!) string. 
     The automated testing loops through all classes and compares the output from the unitTest method with the string returned from getExpectedResult. This setup is intended to simplify regression testing. There are limitations: this method cannot test interaction with widgets, for example, nor can it handle dynamic results. (An output such as today&#39;s date can&#39;t be hard-coded into getExpectedResults. Using method invocations in getExpectedResults would defeat the whole purpose of the test, as we might well be comparing garbage to identical garbage.) 
     The following example shows how this framework might be applied to the Account class. Note that the main function in this case merely invokes the unitTest function. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 public class Account . . . { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 //{ {UNITTEST 
               
               
                   
                 public static void unitTest( PrintWriter ps ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 try { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Account account = 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 new Account( ″42600505380″, ″Konrad 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Kunde”, CHECKING ); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 ps.println( ″account = \″ ″ + account + ″\″ ″); 
               
               
                   
                 // Next statement trows exception due to illegal 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 account #: 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 account = 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 new Account( ″42600505381″, ″John Doe″, 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 CHECKING ); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 catch ( java.text.ParseException e ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 ps.println( e ); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 public static String getExpectedResult() { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 return 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 ″account = \″4260.05.05380 (LØNN) Konrad 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Kunde\″\n″ + 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 ″java.text.ParseException: Illegal account number\n″; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 public static void main( String args [] ) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Debug.trace( Debug.unitTest( 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 ″no.dnb.tb.types.Account″ ) ); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 // } }UNITTEST 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 } 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     In addition to the possibilities for automating regression testing, this approach has the benefit that the code, the test conditions and the expected results are close together and easy to keep synchronized. 
     Further Reading 
     Core Java, Gary Cornell/Cay S. Horstmann [The SunSoft Press 1996] 
     Covers Java 1.02. Good introduction to Java. 
     Java in a Nutshell, David Flanagan [O&#39;Reilly 1997] 
     Covers Java 1.1; includes examples. Strong coverage of inner classes. 
     Writing Solid Code, Steve Maguire [Microsoft Press 1993] 
     Debugging techniques and attitudes. 
     Code Complete, Steve McConnel [Microsoft Press 1993] 
     Detailed coverage of software construction techniques. 
     Design Patterns: Elements of Reusable Object-Oriented Software, Gamma, Helm, Johnson, Vlissides [Addison-Wesley 1995] 
     Practical guide to object-oriented design and programming. 
     PROJECT STANDARDS 
     Application Development Standards and Procedures 
     The ReTA Application Development Standards and Procedures portion of the description consists of the standards, rules, and guidelines to be followed during the application development process for programming and portion of the present descriptioning programs. This portion of the present description is not meant to be a training manual. Rather, it is a reference for the standards set by the development architecture. 
     Use of Application Development Standards and Procedures to provide a consistent way of designing, portion of the present descriptioning, programming, etc. over the different areas of work, such as user interface design, and data design. 
     Build Process 
     Editing Source Code 
     To enter and edit source code for a ReTA Application, the standard tool is Microsoft Visual J++ 6.0. This Development Environment allows the user to edit and create Java source files, IDL source files, and Active Server Pages. 
     Editing Java source files are done by opening the Java project which contains the desired source file to be edited. Locate the Java source file in the project and enter the necessary changes. Once changes have been made the file must be saved. 
     Editing IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are opened up individually in the Microsoft Visual Studio J++ 6.0 Development Environment. The file is opened and changes are made, once changes are made the file is saved. 
     Editing ASP (Active Server Pages) files are done by opening up the file in Microsoft Visual Studio J++ 6.0 Development Environment. The file is opened and changes are made, once changes are made the file is saved. 
     Compiling VJ++ Projects/IDL 
     To compile the Microsoft Visual J++ Projects and build COM components in ReTA there are steps that must be followed. 
     Generate the Type Libraries. 
     Use the midl.exe command line tool is used to generate the type libraries. 
     Generate the stubs from the Type Libraries. 
     Use the javatlb.exe to generate the stubs from the .tlb files. 
     javatlb/d./p Activity/p:b- AFActivity.tlb 
     Use the javaguid.exe to generate the guid&#39;s for the stubs. 
     javaguid CodesTable\CAFCTRetrieval.class CodesTable\IAFCTRetrieval.class 
     Compile the Microsoft Visual J++ Project. 
     FIG. 68 shows a Visual J++ Build Environment  6800 . To begin a build, the Build button  6802  is selected and Build  6804  is selected from the corresponding menu. 
     Generate the DLL&#39;s. 
     Use the exegen.exe command line utility. 
     Source Code Debugging 
     ReTA developers have the ability to debug the Architecture files, Business Objects, Application files, and Active Server Pages. 
     Debugging Architecture or Application Files 
     To debug Architecture or Application Java source code, the developer may open up the Microsoft Visual J ++ 6.0 project that contains that Java source file. Select the Debug menu and then the processes option, set a breakpoint where the code is suspect and attach to the “MTX” process. For help on how to attach to a process refer to the Microsoft Visual J++ help. 
     FIG. 69 shows an interface  6900  for attaching to the MTS Process for debugging. Processes  6902  and their corresponding titles  6904  are shown. 
     Debugging Active Server Pages 
     To debug an Active Server Page (assuming the ASP page is written in VBScript) the developer may code in the key word “stop” where the developer would like to start the debugging. The developer can then step into the ASP code, this applies to the global.asa file as well. For more information regarding debugging Active Server Pages, refer to the Visual Studio online help. 
     FIG. 70 shows an interface  7000  for debugging an Active Server Page (example global.asa file  7002 ). 
     Unit Testing Business Objects 
     For a ReTA developer to perform a unit test on a Business Object, the developer may code a “main” method on the Java source file. This may allow the developer to call the various methods of the Business Object and inspect the results to ensure the object is working properly. The developer may invoke the main method from the command line using the Java command line utility “Jview.exe.” 
     public static void main(String[ ] args) 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 { 
               
               
                   
                 if (args[0].equals(“1”)) { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 JUnitOFWork connection=null; 
               
               
                   
                 try 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 //Create the Domain 
               
               
                   
                 JDomain myDomain=new 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     JDomain(AFConstants.getAFProsisInterfaceDSNLabel( ),AFPersistableObj.getAppli cationDatabaseUsername( ),AFPersistableObj.getApplicationDatabasePassword( )); 
     //Create a connection connection=(JUnitOfWork)myDomain.newConnection( ); 
     //create an extent for the class we wish to persist. JExtent extent=(JExtent)new JExtent(“BObjects.RetaCustomer”); System.out.println (” Domain and Extent Created Success”); 
     //Create our Customer Object System.out.println (” Create Customer”); RetaCustomer theObj=new RetaCustomer( ); theObj.setSsn(123456789); theObj.setName(“Esch Raphael”); theObj .setLevel(“Partner”); theObj.setAge( 99 ); 
     System.out.println (” Going to update record”); 
     extent.update(theObj ,connection); 
     System.out.println (” Done OK.”); connection.close( ); 
     . . . 
     Code Generation using Rational Rose 
     The Rational Rose modeling tool allows developers to define and communicate software architecture, resulting in: 
     Accelerated development, by improved communication among various team members 
     Improved quality, by mapping business processes to software architecture, and 
     Increased visibility and predictability, by making critical design decisions explicit visually. 
     Rational Rose has the ability to generate Java Class files and within these files javadoc comments are generated along with rose comments. 
     FIG. 71 illustrates an exemplary frame  7100  of Rose generated java file and javadoc comments  7102 . 
     STANDARDS 
     Naming Standards 
     Folder/Directory 
     Internet Information Server WWWRoot Folder 
     The naming standard for ReTA web-based applications. 
     C:\InetPub\wwwroot\ReTAApplication\XXXName 
     In IIS 4.0 a virtual directory is defined to point to the preceding path. The properties on the directory allow execute and basic authentication permissions. For each separate application there may be a global.asa file which may reside in the “root” folder of the application. 
     Files 
     Naming conventions used and recommended. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 File Type 
                 Naming Standard 
                 Comments 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Business 
                 BO&lt;business 
                 ATI business objects may 
               
               
                 Object 
                 object 
                 start with a ″BO″ 
               
               
                 Java File 
                 name&gt;.java 
                 prefixed to their name. 
               
               
                 Business 
                 BO&lt;business 
                 All class factories may be 
               
               
                 Object 
                 object name&gt; 
                 prefixed with ″BO″ and 
               
               
                 Class Factory 
                 Factory.java 
                 suffixed with ″Factory″. 
               
               
                 Java File 
               
               
                 Activity 
                 AXX&lt;activity 
                 All activities may be 
               
               
                 Java File 
                 name&gt;.java 
                 prefixed with an ″A″ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 then a two-character 
               
               
                   
                   
                 initial for the activity, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 followed by the full name of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the activity. 
               
               
                 Sub-Activity 
                 SAXX 
                 All sub-activities may be 
               
               
                 Java File 
                 &lt;sub-activity 
                 prefixed with SA, and then a 
               
               
                   
                 name&gt;.java 
                 two-character name initial that 
               
               
                   
                   
                 denotes which activity it belongs 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to (″XX″), followed by the sub- 
               
               
                   
                   
                 activity full name. 
               
               
                 Business 
                 BO&lt;business 
                 All business objects may start with 
               
               
                 Object 
                 object name&gt;.idl 
                 a ″BO″ prefixed to their name 
               
               
                 IDL File 
               
               
                 Activity 
                 AXX&lt;activity 
                 All activities may be prefixed 
               
               
                 IDL File 
                 name&gt;.idI 
                 with an ″A″ then a two-character 
               
               
                   
                   
                 initial for the activity, followed by 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the full name of the activity. 
               
               
                 Sub-Activity 
                 SAXX 
                 All sub-activities may be prefixed 
               
               
                 IDL File 
                 &lt;sub-activity 
                 with SA, and then a two-character 
               
               
                   
                 name&gt;.java 
                 name initial that denotes which 
               
               
                   
                   
                 activity it belongs to (″XX″), 
               
               
                   
                   
                 followed by the sub-activity full 
               
               
                   
                   
                 name. 
               
               
                 Active Server 
                 &lt;xxxname&gt; 
                 The Active Server Page may be 
               
               
                 Page:File - 
                 index.asp 
                 a single mixed-case meaningful 
               
               
                 Activity Page 
                   
                 word that reflects the activity 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the ASP page belongs to suffixed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 with ″index″. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Therefore the activity page for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Customer would look like 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ″CustomerIndex.asp″. 
               
               
                 Active Server 
                 &lt;subactivity- 
                 The Active Server Page may be 
               
               
                 Page File - 
                 name&gt;.asp 
                 a single mixed-case meaningful 
               
               
                 SubActivity Page 
                   
                 word that reflects the SubActivity 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the page performs. Therefore a 
               
               
                   
                   
                 SubActivity that reviews all 
               
               
                   
                   
                 customers in the ″Customer″ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Activity would look like 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ″ReviewAllCustomers.asp″ 
               
               
                 Image Files 
                 &lt;activityInitial&gt; 
                 Images may be contained within an 
               
               
                   
                 name.jpg or 
                 ″images″ directory for each 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;activityInitial&gt; 
                 application. For example an images 
               
               
                   
                 name gif 
                 directory for the ″Billing″ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 application would exist in the file 
               
               
                   
                   
                 system as ″/Billing/images″. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 All images may reside in this 
               
               
                   
                   
                 directory for that application. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Therefore an image that belongs to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the ″CustomerLookup″ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 activity in the ″Billing″ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 application would be named 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ″CLWarning_icon.jpg″. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Application Files 
     Business Object 
     BORetaCustomer.java OR BORetaCustomer.idl 
     Business Object Class Factory 
     BOCustomerLookupFactory.java 
     Activity 
     ACLCustomerLookup.java OR ACLCustomerLookup.idl 
     Sub-Activity 
     SACLCustDetailCommit.java OR SACLCustDetailCommit.idl 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Architecture Files 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 File Type 
                 Naming Standard 
                 Comments 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Architecture Java 
                 AFXX&lt;filename&gt;.java 
                 All java architecture files 
               
               
                 Files 
                   
                 may be prefixed with 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “Arch”, then two letter 
               
               
                   
                   
                 initial that identifies the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 package it belongs to. For 
               
               
                   
                   
                 example an architecture 
               
               
                   
                   
                 file that is from the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Session package would 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be named 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “AFSEfilename.java”. 
               
               
                 Architecture IDL 
                 IAFXXfilename.idl 
                 Interfaces for architecture 
               
               
                 files 
                 AFXXfilename.idl 
                 components that do not 
               
               
                   
                   
                 include any “coclass” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 statements are prefixed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 with an “I”. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 All java packages may 
               
               
                   
                   
                 have a corresponding IDL 
               
               
                   
                   
                 file. For example 
               
               
                   
                   
                 EventHandler may have 
               
               
                   
                   
                 an IDL with this name, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 within this IDL may be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 all the associated 
               
               
                   
                   
                 coclass&#39;s that make up 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the package. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Proposed Convention 
     Interfaces for architecture components that do not include any “coclass” statements are prefixed with an “I”. 
     IAFSEEventListener.idl 
     All architecture components may use the component name as the filename for the IDL. For example, if the component name is AFSESystemPreferences the IDL filename may be: 
     AFSESystemPreferences.idl 
     All Java packages may have a corresponding IDL file. For example EventHandler may have an IDL with this name, within this IDL may be all the associated coclass&#39;s that make up the package. 
     EventHandler.idl- &lt;EventHandler—name of java package&gt; 
     Example of—coclasses defined within “EventHandler.idl” 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 [ 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 uuid(F9205423-38B6-11d1-A328-0060080FBDF2), 
               
               
                   
                 helpstring(“XXEventHandler Class”), 
               
               
                   
                 JAVACLASS(“EventHandler.XXEventHandler”), 
               
               
                   
                 PROGID(“EventHandler.XXEventHandler”), 
               
               
                   
                 TRANSACTION_SUPPORTED 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 ] 
               
               
                   
                 coclass CXXEventHandler 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 [default] interface IXXEventHandler; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 }; 
               
               
                   
                 [ 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 uuid(C82965A3-6A3B-11d1-A3A9-0060080FBDF2), 
               
               
                   
                 helpstring(“AFEventCollection Class”), 
               
               
                   
                 JAVACLASS(“EventHandler.AFEventCollection”), 
               
               
                   
                 PROGID(“EventHandler.AFEventCollection”), 
               
               
                   
                 TRANSACTION_SUPPORTED 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 ] 
               
               
                   
                 coclass CXXEventCollection 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 [default] interface IXXEventCollection; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 }; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Version Control Process 
     Coding Standards 
     Active Server Pages 
     Delimiters 
     ASP delimiters (&lt;%&#39;s and %&gt;&#39;s) are placed in the very left hand margin, not in the middle of lines (unless 1. One uses the “&lt;%=variable %&gt;” format or unless 2. This way, all the code can be included on one line, in which case one still puts the “&lt;%” on the left margin). This improved code readability and made it easier to determine where ASP code blocks began and HTML ended, and vice versa. 
     Option Explicit 
     If using VBScript within the Active Server Page, the keywords “Option Explicit” should appear at the beginning of every script block. Enabling Option Explicit may cause the scripting engine to fault when it encounters an undeclared variable (a variable is declared with the Dim statement). VBScript is not a compiled language, and the runtime interpreter does very little to catch your programming errors. Therefore using Option Explicit should be absolutely mandatory. 
     Variable Declaration 
     If using VBScript within the Active Server Page, put multiple Dims on a single line for faster execution (verified by Microsoft) 
     i.e. do this: 
     Dim a, b, c 
     . . . instead of this: 
     Dim a 
     Dim b 
     Dim c 
     Error Handling 
     Currently, it is required to invoke the EventHandler.process method passing in the ReTA EventCollection after every application Activity or architecture Session call. In the event that an error did occur during the prior application call, the EventHandler may process the error information and issue a HTTP Redirect to direct the client browser to the error page. 
     Local Functions 
     Where Active Server Functions are embedded within a page they should be placed at the start of the page after the standard HTML header. Functions themselves should be written to the standard for the language in which they are written, VB Script or JavaScript within &lt;% %&gt; quotes. 
     ASP Architecture Header 
     On any Active Server Page using the ReTA Architecuture there are some necessary statements needed at the beginning of each ASP page. Each page must include a ”#Include” statement. This may bring in the architecture header file, which contains common variable definitions and architecture initialization statements. 
     To include the header file, add the following statement at the top of the Active Server Page. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 &lt;% Option Explicit %&gt; 
                   
               
               
                   
                 &lt;!-- #include virtual=“/postTest/retaASPHeader.inc” 
                 --&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;!-- 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 ********************************************************- 
               
               
                   
                 -&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;!-- 
                 --&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;!-- All asp pages must include the Include file 
                 --&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;!-- retaASPHeader.inc file. 
                 --&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;!-- 
                 --&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;!-- 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 ********************************************************- 
               
               
                   
                 -&gt; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Variable Naming Conventions 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 g_Name 
                 Any global variable (declared outside of a Sub or 
               
               
                   
                 Function) 
               
               
                 s_Name 
                 a variable referencing a Session Variable 
               
               
                 a_Name 
                 a variable referencing an Application Variable 
               
               
                 f_Name 
                 a variable containing information from the Form 
               
               
                   
                 collection 
               
               
                 SName 
                 Any string of characters 
               
               
                 Iname 
                 Any number 
               
               
                 BName 
                 a Boolean value of TRUE or FALSE 
               
               
                 OName 
                 an object 
               
               
                 CoName 
                 a collection of objects 
               
               
                 XNameArray 
                 An array, where ‘x’ may be ‘s’ for string, ‘b’ for 
               
               
                   
                 Boolean, etc. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Control Naming Conventions 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 BtnName 
                 Button 
               
               
                   
                 TxtName 
                 Text box or area 
               
               
                   
                 OptName 
                 Option button (aka radio button) 
               
               
                   
                 ChkName 
                 Check box 
               
               
                   
                 SelName 
                 Combo box/drop down/SELECT control 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Create Server Side Variable Sparingly 
     Developers should ensure that variables declared in the Active Server Page are reused if at all possible to try and reduce the memory demands on the web server. An example would be the use of an ‘err’ variable to capture the return code from all MTS component calls. 
     Comments 
     While the use of comments within an Active Server Page are useful for describing the logical flow of the application, overuse should be avoided as comments are evaluated during execution and can hinder overall performance. Comments should be used sparingly and only to describe code that is difficult to understand or follow otherwise. 
     HTML 
     HTML guidelines are necessary so each HTML programmer on the project can share in a common effort to establish best practice across the whole of the project. By moving beyond the HTML 2.0 Specification, the application can support Java, frames, and tables, among other added features. 
     File names may be composed of a single lower-case meaningful word that reflects the file&#39;s contents (i.e. financial.htm). Since different platforms handle capitalization differently, we may avoid capital letters to avoid any possible conflicts. All file names should end with “.htm”. The “.html” ending leads to problems when porting to a machine that only recognizes three character file identifiers. Most importantly, files should be saved within the appropriate folder upon creation (i.e. financial/financial.htm). Names should easily convey the functionality or dialog that it belongs to. 
     Page Title 
     It is crucial that users recognize that they are on a ReTA page, especially if they have accessed the site via a search engine (in this case, they would not have the “natural or the normal entry page” introduction to the site). The user would need to access the welcome page to the application. The title of the page should reflect the application name “/” activity name. 
     Data Validation Header File 
     Every static HTML page or every top frame page must include the ReTA Data Validation JavaScript file if they are going to create Form elements that utilize the UI Framework client-side validation functions. Adding the following code after the &lt;HEAD&gt; tag may include this file and bring it down to the browser level. Note that this only needs to done once in the event of a HTML Frame based application. 
     &lt;Script Src=“/ReTAScripts/retaDataValidation.js” Type=“Text/JavaScript”&gt; 
     Image File Names 
     Image file names may be composed of a single lower-case word that consists of a two letter initial that stands for the activity they belong to (i.e. clwarning_icon.gif). Since different platforms handle capitalization differently, we may avoid capital letters to avoid any possible conflicts. Most importantly, files should be saved within the appropriate folder upon creation (i.e. financial/images/txdollarsign.gif). 
     Image ALT Tag 
     Always use the ALT tag with images, in case the site is accessed by a browser with limited support for browsers (or a user who stops the page download before it is complete). 
     &lt;IMG SRC=“/App/Images/imgStart.gif” ALT=“[ReTA Start Application]”&gt; 
     META Tag Name 
     The &lt;META&gt; tag provides a way to store information about the portion of the present description that is not available elsewhere in the portion of the present description. For example, the META tag can contain catalog, author, or index information that various search engines can use. 
     This example illustrates a portion of the present description that is indexed under the terms “ReTA”, the activity of the page is “ACLCustomerLookup”, and the subactivity is “SAReviewAllCustomers”. 
     &lt;HEAD&gt; 
     &lt;META NAME=“keywords” CONTENT=“ReTA ACLCustomerLookup SAReviewAllCustomers”&gt; 
     &lt;/HEAD&gt; 
     Alternate Text for Images 
     Some Web browsers cannot display images and some Web users may not want to use image loading even if their software can display images because they are have a slow connection. For these browsers and users, the ALT attribute specifies the text to be displayed instead of the image. For example, &lt;IMG SRC=“aclogo.gif” ALT=“Andersen Consulting logo”&gt;. If a Web browser cannot not display aclogo.gif or a Web user wishes not to view the logo, the text “Company logo” may be displayed to screen instead. 
     Comments 
     While the use of comments within an HTML portion of the present description are useful for describing the logical flow of the application, overuse should be avoided as comments are evaluated during execution and can hinder overall performance. Comments should be sparingly used and only to describe code that is difficult to understand or follow otherwise. 
     Comments for HTML code should conform to the following guidelines: 
     Introduce code with the following comments: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 &lt;!--Filepath: 
                 /Application/html/appStart.htm 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;!--Created By: 
                 Jane Doe 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;!--Modified By: 
                 John Doe 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;!--Modification Date: 
                 1/1/99 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;!--Revision #: 
                 1.1 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Limit comments for describing complex statements that are not easily followed. Eliminate all comments promoting the HTML code generating application (i.e. &lt;—! This page generated by Front Page—&gt;). 
     Screen Resolution 
     All HTML files should be viewable at resolutions of 800×600 and above. This standard allows for a range of screen resolutions to ensure that all users may be able to view the pages. However pages should be tested at screen resolutions of 640×480 and 1024×768 pixels in order to ensure that layout and presentation do not deteriorate at different resolutions. At 640×480 the appearance of scroll bars is acceptable, as this resolution is not directly supported by the applications being developed. 
     Graphics Sizes 
     Explicitly define the height and width of images used in pages. When this definition does not take place, browsers size the images themselves, which slows down the painting process. Browsers that do not have support for the WIDTH and HEIGHT attributes to the IMG tag may simply ignore them and lay out the portion of the present description normally. 
     &lt;IMG SRC=“iso-ne.gif” WIDTH=413 HEIGHT=356&gt; 
     JavaScript 
     JavaScript provides a powerful tool for the creation of client side functionality. It suffers however from limited error handling capabilities and problems of compatibility between web browsers. JavaScript should be used only where the required client side functionality cannot be implemented in HTML and should be kept as simple and concise as possible. Completed JavaScript should be tested in as wide a variety of browsers as possible, especially Internet Explorer. (V4+) and Netscape Navigator (4+) as scripts which function cleanly in one browser may throw exceptions in another. 
     Variable Declaration 
     When declaring variables in JavaScript, one may declare multiple variables on a single line or one may declare variables on a separate line. One may also initialize a variable to a value in your declaration. 
     var a, b, c, d, e; 
     var sum; 
     var message=“hello”; 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Variable Naming Conventions 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 returnCode 
                 Local variables are written in mixed case starting with 
               
               
                   
                 lower case 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Constants were not defined (DV_NONE) as this caused problems when attempting to stay compatible for both browsers (IE 4.0 and Netscape Navigator 4.0). When attempting to use constants such as “DV_NONE” Netscape failed and MS IE did not. Thus we used the corresponding numbers and added comments for the constants. 
     //DV_TYPE_ISNUMERIC—data type must be numeric 
     case 1: 
     . . . 
     Local Functions 
     Local functions in JavaScript should be in mixed case, starting with lower case, mixing with upper case. 
     function retaDataValidation( ) 
     Error Handling 
     Currently there is no error handling in JavaScript. In JavaScript 1.3 both Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator may support the try/catch statement. The try/catch may be similar to the try/catch used in Java. It may be our recommendation to use the try/catch statement in the next release of JavaScript. 
     Coding Conventions 
     In JavaScript, constructs&#39; may always use the curly brace (“{”) to format following lines of code, even if there is only one line of code that follows the construct. 
     Example: 
     If(testvar==inputvar) 
     { 
     statement(s) . . . ; 
     } 
     while(!fs.EOF) 
     { 
     statement 1  . . . ; 
     statement 2  . . . ; 
     } 
     if(testvar!=inputvar) 
     { 
     statement 1  . . . ; 
     } 
     else 
     { 
     statement 2  . . . ; 
     statement 3  . . . ; 
     } 
     The above example demonstrates how to use the formatting that was described above. This enables the developer when debugging/developing pieces of code to better read and understand what is in progress in the code. The learning curve may be reduced if the developer does not have poorly formatted code to read (especially when dealing with complex code). This promotes easy code maintenance. 
     Commenting 
     JavaScript ignores comments; therefore comments may be detailed if necessary without effecting performance. Any comments that may be contained on a single line may use the “//” comment style. This treats any comments after the “//” to the end of the line as a comment. 
     //this is an example of a single line comment in JavaScript&#39; 
     Comments that explain a complex block of code which require more that on sentence of explanation may use the “/** . . . */” comment style. We use the javadoc style of commenting for multiple line comments. 
     /** 
     *This is another example of comments in JavaScript. 
     *It has multiple lines. 
     */ 
     ReTA architecture makes use of a JavaScript “js” file. This file resides on the Web Server and assists in performing client side validation. Commenting in this file is detailed, as this may not be visible to the client. The beginning of the file has a comment block that describes the purpose of the file and lists the author and any modification made to the file. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 /************************************************************ 
               
               
                 ****** 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** 
                 RETA Distributed Component Architecture JavaScript File 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** FILENAME 
                 : retaDataValidation.js 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** DESCRIPTION 
                 : Data validation functions 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** 
                 retaDataValidation( ) 
               
               
                 ** 
                 retaValidateDateFormat( ) 
               
               
                 ** 
                 retaIsLeapYear( ) 
               
               
                 ** 
                 retaPadDateSegment( ) 
               
               
                 ** 
                 retaPadDateSegment( ) 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** AUTHOR 
                 : MEVANS 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** DATE CREATED 
                 : 01/19/99 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 ** REVISION HISTORY: 
               
               
                 ** 
               
               
                 ** DATE REVISED BY SIR # DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE 
               
               
                 ** -------- ----------- ------- ------------------------------------- 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** 01/19/99 MEVANS 
                 Original code. 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 ************************************************************ 
               
               
                 *******/ 
               
               
                 The “js” file contains a detailed comment block describing each function. 
               
               
                 This comment block should precede each function in the JavaScript source 
               
               
                 file. 
               
               
                 /************************************************************ 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** 
                 Distributed Component Architecture JavaScript Function 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** FUNCTION 
                 : retaParseDateSegment 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** DESCRIPTION 
                 : This function returns requested date segment. 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** 
                 Date segments: month, day, year 
               
               
                 ** 
                 Date segment delimiters: “/”, “-”, “\” 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** INPUTS 
                 : inputDate 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** 
                 dateSegmentIndex 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** OUTPUTS 
                 : dateSegment 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** 
                 - returns “” if segment not found 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 ** CALLED FUNCTIONS: 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** AUTHOR 
                 : MEVANS 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** DATE CREATED 
                 : 01/19/99 
               
               
                 ** 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 ** REVISION HISTORY: 
               
               
                 ** 
               
               
                 ** DATE REVISED BY SIR # DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE 
               
               
                 ** -------- ----------- ------- ------------------------------------- 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ** 01/19/99 MEVANS 
                 Original code. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 ************************************************************ 
               
               
                 */ 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     For multi-line comments required within the function itself, use the multi-line comment style. 
     Java 
     JAVA guidelines are necessary so each JAVA programmer on the project can share in a common effort to establish best practice across the whole of the project. 
     Variable Declaration 
     When declaring local member variables in a java source file an declare them as private. 
     private String m_name=new String( ); 
     Temporary variables to be used within a method may be declared in lowercase and at the beginning of the method, ensure a meaningful name is used. 
     public void functionName( ) 
     { 
     String valuetotest=“”; 
     Int position=0; 
     . . . 
     } 
     Constants may be declared in a constant java file and may be in upper case. Make all constants public members, as this may provide direct access to the variable. If a change is made to the variable one must re-compile the java file and re-build the DLL&#39;s. 
     public class ReTAHTMLConstants 
     { 
     public final static int 
     DV_RANGE_LESSTHANEQUAL_GREATERTHANEQUAL=8; 
     } 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Variable Naming Conventions 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 m_returnCode 
                 Local variables are written in mixed case starting with 
               
               
                   
                 lower case 
               
               
                 DV_NONE 
                 Constants are declared in all uppercase 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Coding Conventions 
     In Java, constructs may always use the curly brace (“{”) to format following lines of code, even if there is only one line of code that follows the construct. 
     Example: 
     If(testvar==inputvar) 
     { 
     statement(s) . . . 
     } 
     while(!fs.EOF) 
     { 
     statement(s) . . . 
     } 
     if(testvar!=inputvar) 
     { 
     statement 1  . . . 
     } 
     else 
     { 
     statement 2  . . . 
     } 
     The above example demonstrates how to use the formatting that was described above. This enables the developer when debugging/developing pieces of code to better read and understand what is in progress in the code. The learning curve may be reduced if the developer does not have poorly formatted code to read (especially when dealing with complex code). This promotes easy code maintenance. 
     Method Names 
     Method names in java use mixed case, starting with lower case. 
     public String generateJavaSrc( ) . . . 
     Method Comments 
     For comments use the javadoc commenting style. This style provides useful portion of the present description (in HTML format) that may be generated by the javadoc.exe utility. Comments begin with a slash and two asterisks. The first sentence should be concise and describe the purpose of the method or class is “@” parameters can be added, each may generate different comments in the html output from the javadoc.exe utility. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 /** 
                 ReTA Component Architecture Java Method 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * METHOD 
                 : generateJavaSrc 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * DESCRIPTION 
                 : This function generates the necessary html to include 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 the script 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * 
                 tag that specifies the .js file for client side validation. 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * INPUTS 
                 : 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * OUTPUTS 
                 : outputVal; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * 
                 - this returns the formatted html string. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 * CALLED FUNCTIONS: 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * AUTHOR 
                 : DZIMMER 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * DATE CREATED 
                 : 01/19/99 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 * REVISION HISTORY: 
               
               
                 * 
               
               
                 * DATE REVISED BY SIR # DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE 
               
               
                 * -------- ----------- ------- ------------------------------------- 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * 01/19/99 DZIMMER 
                 Original code. 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 * @ author DZIMMER 
               
               
                 * @ return This method returns the string which may make up the html 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * 
                 code that contains the JavaScript source file. 
               
               
                 */ 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Java Class Comments 
     For comments use the javadoc commenting style. This style provides useful portion of the present description (in HTML format) that may be generated by the javadoc.exe utility. Comments begin with a slash and two asterisks. The first sentence should be concise and describe the purpose of the method or class is. “@” parameters can be added, each may generate different comments in the html output from the javadoc.exe utility. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 /** 
               
               
                 * RETA Distributed Component Architecture Java File 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * FILENAME 
                 : RETAHTMLConstants.java 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * DESCRIPTION 
                 : HTML Constants 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * AUTHOR 
                 : DZIMMER 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * DATE CREATED 
                 : 01/22/99 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 * REVISION HISTORY: 
               
               
                 * DATE REVISED BY SIR # DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE 
               
               
                 * -------- ----------- ------- ------------------------------------- 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 * 01/22/99 DZIMMER 
                 Added UI Validation constants. 
               
               
                 * 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 * @author DZIMMER 
               
               
                 * 
               
               
                 */ 
               
               
                 Error Handling 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Any statement that can throw an exception may use the try/catch block to handle errors. This is necessary in order to evaluate what has been thrown and to determine what to send back to the user. 
     IVCEEventCollection anEventCollection=null; 
     try 
     { 
     anEventCollection=(IAFEventCollection) inEventCollection; 
     outputBuffer=outputBuffer.append (m_alignment_start); 
     } 
     catch (Exception e) 
     { 
     // a AFEventException has been thrown. Add it to the collection 
     e.addToCollection((IAFEventCollection)anEventCollection); 
     } 
     Application Naming Conventions 
     Activities 
     The capital letter “A” to indicate and “activity” followed by a two-character activity name initial (in capital letters) “XX”, followed by the full activity name. 
     ACLCustomerLookup 
     This name may be the name of the Java file and the java Class name defined in the Java source file i.e. 
     public class ACLCustomerLookup—class definition in java file. 
     ACLCustomerLookup.java—java file name. 
     Sub-Activities 
     Sub-Activities should start with a two character prefix “SA”, followed by the sub-activity name initial, followed by the sub-activity name. 
     SASFSaveFeedback 
     This name may be the name of the Java file and the Class name defined in the Java source file, i.e. 
     public class SASFSaveFeedback—class definition in java file. 
     SASFSaveFeedback.java—java file name. 
     Business Objects 
     Business Objects naming should start with a prefix of two capital letter s “BO”, followed by the business object name, e.g. “BOCustomerLookup”. 
     This name may be the name of the Java file and the Class name defined in the Java source file, i.e. 
     public class BOCustomerLookup—class definition in java file. 
     BOCustomerLookup.java—java file name. 
     Business Object&#39;s Class Factory 
     Class Factories naming should start with a prefix of two capital letters “BO”, followed by the business object name, followed by the term “Factory”. 
     BOCustomerLookupFactory 
     This name may be the name of the Java file and the Class name defined in the Java source file i.e. 
     public class BOCustomerLookupFactory—class definition in java file. 
     BOCustomerLookupFactory—java file name. 
     Architecture Java Naming Conventions 
     ReTA architecture files should all be prefixed with the ‘AF’ standard, e.g.“AF&lt;filename&gt;.java”. 
     4.4.5 IDL 
     IDL (Interface definition Language) files define the interface of a COM component. 
     ReTA makes use of the following naming conventions. 
     Look with the Platform SDK or MIDL portion of the present description found within MSDN. 
     Application IDL Conventions 
     Business Object 
     All business objects should include the following statements in the #include section of the idl file. 
     #include &lt;Persistence\AFPersistable.idl&gt; 
     #include &lt;Activity\AFEditable.idl&gt; 
     Within the IDL for the Business Object the interface statement requires an “I” in front of the business object name. 
     . . . 
     //Description: Interface to the BORetaCustomer Component 
     #include &lt;MtxAttr.h&gt; 
     #include &lt;JavaAttr.h&gt; 
     #include &lt;Persistence\AFPersistable.idl&gt; 
     #include &lt;Activity\AFEditable.idl&gt; 
     [ 
     object, 
     uuid(8B59B041-99CF-11d2-8F88-00805F29842D), 
     dual, 
     helpstring(“IBORetaCustomer Interface”), 
     pointer_default(unique) 
     ] 
     interface IBORetaCustomer: IDispatch 
     { 
     import “oaidl.idl”; 
     HRESULT getSsn([out, retval]long*ssn); 
     . . . 
     }; 
     . . . 
     The business object IDL also defines the type library and the coclass. The type library may take on the name of the business object with “lib” appended to the end of the business object name. The coclass (Com class) may take on the name of the business object but may be prefixed with a “C”. The following IDL shows the changes to be made. 
     [ 
     uuid(8B59B042-99CF-11d2-8F88-00805F29842D), 
     version(1.0), 
     helpstring(“RetaCustomer component”) 
     ] 
     library BORetaCustomerLib 
     { 
     importlib(“stdole2.tlb”); 
     [ 
     uuid(8B59B043-99CF-11d2-8F88-00805F29842D), 
     helpstring(“BORetaCustomer Class”), 
     JAVACLASS(“BObjects.BORetaCustomer”), 
     PROGID(“BObjects.BORetaCustomer”), 
     TRANSACTION_SUPPORTED 
     ] 
     coclass CBORetaCustomer 
     { 
     [default] interface IBORetaCustomer; 
     interface IAFEditable; 
     interface IAFPersistable; 
     }; . . . 
     Activity 
     All activities should include the following statements in the #include section of the idl file. 
     #include &lt;Activity\IAFActivity.idl&gt; 
     #include &lt;Session\IAFEventListener.idl&gt; 
     Within the IDL file the type library should follow the name of the activity and the coclass should also follow the naming convention described in the preceding portion of the description. An example below shows one in bold the changes to be made. 
     #include &lt;MtxAttr.h&gt; 
     # include &lt;JavaAttr.h&gt; 
     #include &lt;Activity\IAFActivity.idl&gt; 
     #include &lt;Session\IAFEventListener.idl&gt; 
     [ 
     uuid(299AC8A0-A40C-11d2-8F8F-00805F29842D), 
     version(1.0), 
     helpstring(“ACLCustomerLookup component”) 
     ] 
     library ACLCustomerLookupLib 
     { 
     importlib(“stdole2.tlb”) 
     [ 
     uuid(299AC8A1-A40C-11d2-8F8F-00805F29842D), 
     helpstring(“ARETACustomerLookup Class”), 
     JAVACLAS S(“CustomerLookup.ARETACustomerLookup”), 
     PROGRID(“CustomerLookup.ARETACustomerLookup”), 
     TRANSACTION_SUPPORTED 
     ] 
     coclass CACLCustomerLookup 
     { 
     [default] interface IAFActivity; 
     interface IAFEventListener; 
     }; 
     }; 
     Sub-Activities 
     All sub-activities should include the following statement in the include section of the idl file. 
     # include &lt;Activity\IAFSubActivity.idl&gt; 
     In the IDL file for a sub-activity one must define the type library name and the coclass must also be provided. A code example that follows highlighted in bold shows the changes to be made to a sub-activity IDL. 
     #include &lt;MtxAttr.h&gt; 
     #include &lt;JavaAttr.h&gt; 
     #include &lt;Activity\IAFSubActivity.idl&gt; 
     [ 
     uuid(92E1A341-A64B-11d2-8F60-00805F53568F), 
     version(1.0), 
     helpstring(“SACLcustDetailsCommit component”) 
     ] 
     library SACLCustDetailsCommitLib 
     { 
     importlib(“stdole2.tlbn”); 
     [ 
     uuid(4910B881-A664-11d2-8F61-00805F53568F), 
     helpstring(“SACLCustDetailsCommit Class”), 
     JAVACLASS(“CustomerLookup.SACLCustDetailsCommit”), 
     PROGID(“CustomerLookup.SACLCustDetailsCommit”), 
     TRANSACTION_SUPPORTED 
     ] 
     coclass CSACLCustDetailsCommit 
     { 
     [default] interface IAFSubActivity; 
     }; 
     }; 
     Architecture IDL Conventions 
     Interfaces for architecture components that do not include any “coclass” statements may be prefixed with an “I”, e.g. “IAFSEEventListener.idl”. 
     All architecture components may use the component name as the filename for the IDL. For example, if the component name is AFSESystemPreferences the IDL filename may be, e.g. “AFSESystemPreferences.idl”. 
     All java packages may have a corresponding IDL file. For example EventHandler may have an IDL with this name, within this IDL may be all the associated coclass&#39;s that make up the package. 
     EventHandler.idl - &lt;EventHandler - name of java package &gt; 
     Example of - coclasses defined within “EventHandler.idl” 
     [ 
     uuid(F9205423-38B6-11d1-A328-0060080FBDF2), 
     helpstring(“XXEventHandler Class”), 
     JAVACLASS(“EventHandler.XXEventHandler”), 
     PROGID(“EventHandler.XXEventHandler”), 
     TRANSACTION_SUPPORTED 
     ] 
     coclass CXXEventHandler 
     { 
     [default] interface IXXEventHandler; 
     }; 
     [ 
     uuid(C82965A3-6A3B-11d1-A3A9-0060080FBDF2), 
     helpstring(“AFEventCollection Class”), 
     JAVACLASS(“EventHandler.AFEventCollection”), 
     PROGID(“EventHandler.AFEventCollection”), 
     TRANSACTION_SUPPORTED 
     ] 
     coclass CXXEventCollection 
     { 
     [default] interface IXXEventCollection; 
     }; 
     TESTING 
     FIG. 72A illustrates a method  7200  for testing a technical architecture. In operation  7202 , a plurality of software modules of a technical architecture are tested in a first pass. Next, a solution is implemented in operation  7204  for the software modules that are found to be defects when tested in the first pass. Subsequent to the first pass, in operation  7206 , the software modules are tested in a second pass to determine whether the solutions implemented in the first pass are defective and further determine whether the solutions caused additional defects in the software modules. In operation  7208 , a solution is generated for the software modules that are found to be defects when tested in the second pass. In operation  7210 , further tests are preformed on the software modules in a third pass to determine whether the solutions implemented in the second pass are defective. 
     The technical architecture may include execution architecture, development architecture, and operations architecture. Further, after the third pass, the generating of solutions for software modules found to be defective and the performance of subsequent tests on the implemented solutions may be repeated until no defects are detected. 
     Optionally, the tests may be regression tests. Additionally, testing may be performed only on those software modules of the most frequent paths. In yet another aspect, the software modules of all legal paths may be tested. Optionally, only the software modules related to error and exception handling logic may be tested. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     The purpose of the Assembly Test Approach Deliverable is to outline the detailed approach that may be used to plan and execute the Assembly Test for Phase 1 of the Resources eCommerce Technical Architecture (ReTA) initiative. 
     Test Objectives and Scope 
     Objectives 
     The Assembly Test Approach deliverable outlines the approach that may be used to execute the Assembly Test. The Assembly Test ensures related components (programs) function properly when assembled into dialogs or batch processes and to verify that the interfaces have appropriately implemented the system design. 
     The Assembly Test Approach outlines the following information: 
     Test Objectives and Scope 
     Regression Testing Approach 
     Test Environment (Includes test tools) 
     Metrics 
     The Assembly Test Approach may provide the overall guidelines that may be adhered to when planning and executing the Assembly Test. 
     Scope 
     The scope of this Assembly Test Approach portion of the present description is limited to the Phase 1 enhancements to the ReTA architecture. 
     Execution Architecture 
     The Execution Architecture comprises all the components required to support an application during run-time. The Netcentric Architecture Framework (NCAF) identifies those common, run-time services required when an application executes in a Netcentric environment. The services can be broken down into logical areas: Presentation Services, Information Services, Communication Services, Communication Fabric Services, Transaction Services, Environment Services, Base Services and Business Logic. 
     Execution architecture services typically provide either an interface between the application and some system component, or an interface connecting application components (for example a distribution service that allows client applications to execute server application transactions). The technology architecture assembly test focuses on testing the end-to-end function and quality of these execution architecture services. 
     The execution architecture components considered for Assembly test are: 
     Environment Services—Application Services 
     Codes Table services: static data code-decode implementation 
     Common services: creation of ASP header file to provide common architecture constants and functions within application Active Server Pages 
     Information Services—Database Services 
     Access: ADO Persistence layer 
     Presentation Services—Web Browser 
     Form: UI Controls 
     Client-side field validation (JavaScript) 
     Client architecture file to provide common JavaScript functions (field validation, date validation, message boxes, etc.). This may provide a single point of maintenance and functionality for client architecture services. Grouping attributes into single method call 
     Dropdown listbox UI Control integration with CodesTable service. 
     Development Architecture 
     The development architecture is built upon an integrated set of tools and components, each supporting a specific task or set of tasks in the development process. The purpose of the development architecture is to support the tasks involved in the analysis, design, construction, and maintenance of business systems, as well as the associated management processes. 
     The development architecture components considered for Assembly test are: 
     System Building Services—Construction 
     Application developer coding templates for Active Server Pages, Activity, Sub-Activity, View, Mapping, Factory and Business Object. 
     Standards and Procedures 
     Operations Architecture 
     The Operations Architecture is a combination of tools, support services, procedures, and controls required to maintain a production system and keep it running efficiently. Unlike the Execution and Development Architectures, its primary users are the system administrators and the production support personnel. 
     The operations architecture components considered for Assembly test are: 
     Physical Environment Services—Implementing 
     Initial server installation (core soft ware only) 
     Web server 
     Application server 
     Database server 
     Initial workstation installation (core software only) 
     Architecture installation process 
     Workstation 
     Architecture required java files 
     Architecture frameworks 
     Build tools 
     Architecture make file 
     Visual Studio 95 build tools 
     Server 
     Architecture required database tables 
     Other 
     The components considered for Assembly test are: 
     Code cleanup 
     Component name changes (prefix): Removal of all application references within the architecture 
     Application of naming and coding standards. 
     Consolidation of UI control attributes into single method calls. 
     Renaming and cleanup of framework constants. 
     Test Cycles 
     The assembly test conditions may be defined as follows: 
     Reuse the component test conditions. 
     Add test conditions as necessary to obtain 100% message path coverage. 
     The test cycles may be organized as follows, for each assembly: 
     Cycle 1: test conditions that exercise the most frequent paths 
     Cycle 2: test conditions that exercise all other legal paths 
     Cycle 3: test conditions that exercise the error and exception handling logic 
     All cycles may be independent to minimize the overall calendar time required to test. In addition, each cycle may be run three times (i.e., three passes): 
     The objective of pass 1 is to get through the test as quickly as possible, finding as many defects as possible and implementing workarounds where needed. 
     The objective of pass 2 is to regression test the defects fixed from pass 1, and determine if the pass 1 workarounds caused any more defects. 
     The objective of pass 3 is to regression test defects fixed from pass 2; no defects should be found. 
     By planning three passes, regression tests can be built in to ensure that defects are completely fixed and the fixes did not break anything else. 
     It is important to note that the Technology Architecture Assembly Test Approach applies to both testing after normal construction and testing during “fix-it” or “debug” mode. Technology architecture assembly testing for normal development may cover all interactions between the technology architecture components, while an assembly test in “fix-it” mode may cover only the interactions which apply to the fix [fixes] being implemented. 
     Risks 
     The risks and risk management approach for the Assembly Test stage are outlined below: 
     Concurrent Development and Configuration Management 
     During the phase 1, there may be several simultaneous enhancement efforts. It may be essential to follow strict configuration management procedures in order to prevent version overwriting. 
     Mitigation Plan 
     All components to be modified should be checked out of the version control tool (Visual Source Safe) with a detailed label stating the change description and the developer&#39;s name. If separate enhancement efforts require the same file, developers should coordinate file control so not to overwrite the other&#39;s work. 
     Contingency Plan 
     Defects may be tracked during the Assembly Test. If a large number of defects are attributed to version mismatch or overwriting, the configuration management approach for development may be reevaluated. Additional resources may need to be added to the build and Assembly Test effort. 
     Scope of Test Effort 
     Since almost every module may be modified (due to name changes), there may need to be extensive assembly testing to ensure no functionality is broken. 
     Mitigation Plan 
     This Assembly Test approach relies on automation and reuse. There may be an effort to automate all Assembly Testing, so that it is easy to both execute the test and verify the expected results. 
     Contingency Plan 
     Defects may be tracked during the Assembly Test. If a large number of defects are found for modules, the approach to coding and component testing the modules may be reevaluated. 
     Regression Testing Approach 
     After a fix is put into the system, the fix is tested to ensure that it is correct. Other functions are “regression” tested in order to ensure that they were not adversely affected (broken) by the fix; this is regression testing. In general, the regression test should include all functions either directly or indirectly impacted by the fix and be executed during each pass. 
     At the end of each test stage, a clean test pass for that stage may be conducted. If non-critical errors do remain at the end of a test stage, the team leader for that stage must sign-off on their portion of the present description. The time required to execute the last test pass ought to be minimal, since the cycles should execute correctly. 
     The three pass approach for technology architecture assembly test may facilitate regression testing of defects found in the current test. In addition, the entire technology architecture assembly test model may be portion of the present descriptioned, repeatable and automated (where possible) in order to be easily re-executed for each pass. 
     For each code fix, a complete Assembly Test may be re-executed. Any new conditions created as result of fix implementation may be added to the existing test plan (conditions, scripts, etc.). 
     Test Environment Requirements 
     Technical Configuration 
     The technology architecture assembly test may occur in the technology architecture development environment. It is separated from the technology architecture, assembly test environment. 
     FIG. 72B illustrates the application &amp; architecture configuration for a typical ReTA Build environment  7230 . In this model, the testing workstation is configured to provide presentation services by way of an HTML 3.2 &amp; JavaScript 1.2 compatible web browser. The web/application server  7232  is configured with the current assembly test versions of ReTA application and architecture components and is connected to a test workstation  7234 , a source code repository  7236 , and a database server  7238 . 
     The following table provides a complete listing of the hardware and software configuration of the assembly test environment. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Operating 
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 CPU 
                 RAM 
                 System 
                 Software 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 RETADEV 
                 P- 
                 128 
                 Windows 
                 Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 
               
               
                 4 
                 300 
                 MB 
                 NT 4.0 
                 Client 6.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (SP4) 
                 Microsoft Visual J++ 6.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0 -Tools 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Only 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 ReTA Issues Tracker 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 ReTA SIR Workbench 
               
               
                 RETASRV2 
                 P- 
                 60 
                 Windows 
                 Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 
               
               
                   
                 166 
                 MB 
                 NT 4.0 
                 Server 6.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (SP4) 
                 HP OmniBack II Client 
               
               
                 STPFS1011 
                 P- 
                 2 GB 
                 Windows 
                 Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 
               
               
                   
                 400 
                   
                 NT 
                 Microsoft IIS 4.0 
               
               
                   
                 (4x) 
                   
                 Enterprise 
                 Microsoft Transaction Server 2.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Server 4.0 
                 Microsoft Active Data Objects 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 2.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Oracle8 (Client only) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 HP OmniBack II Client 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     External Interfaces 
     None 
     Test Data Management 
     The common test data may be copied to the technology architecture assembly test environment and modified as needed by the development cell to satisfy all the technology architecture assembly test conditions. 
     After each successful execution of a cycle, the test executor may make a database backup. This backup may serve two purposes. It can be used as evidence of a successful execution of the cycle. It can also be used to restart a test execution after a certain sequence of upstream cycles. The details of backup procedures in using the backup utility may be provided by the Database Architecture Team prior to the start of the technology architecture assembly test execution. 
     Source Environment 
     During the Assembly Test phase of a ReTA engagement, the Source Control Administrator may be responsible for the mass checkout and build of the entire application or architecture. FIG. 73 illustrates that the code for technology architecture assembly test may be migrated from the technology architecture component test environment as defined in the migration procedures. As shown, the test workstation  7300  is only connected to the web and application server  7302 . The web and application server is connected to the source code repository  7304  and the database server  7306 . 
     Automation 
     Test Execution—Custom scripts may be created and used by the developer to automate the execution of individual Assembly Tests. 
     Debugging—Visual Studio Source Code Debugger may be used. 
     Problem Management—a System Investigation Requests (SIR) Database for entering and managing the problem resolution process may be used to track all issues detected during assembly test. 
     Environment Cleanup 
     The developer is responsible for cleaning up the databases and other environment information after each pass of the test execution. 
     Security 
     As part of Assembly test, the following security roles may be created: 
     Source Control administrator—responsible for monitoring code migration 
     Web/Application server administrator—responsible for installation, configuration, maintenance and tuning on the server 
     Database administrator—responsible for test database installation, maintenance and tuning 
     Metrics 
     The following metrics may be collected and evaluated throughout technology architecture component test: 
     Metric Name 
     Definition 
     Target 
     Frequency of collection and evaluation 
     Refer to the Testing Metrics Job Aid in the Business Integration Methodology for more information. 
     Entry and Exit Criteria 
     The entry and exit criteria for the different activities in Assembly Testing may ensure the quality of each deliverable from the testing process. Below are the entry and exit criteria for assembly test. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Stage: 
                 Assembly Test 
                 Exit Sign-off Details 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Name 
                 :          
               
               
                   
                   
                 Date 
                 :          
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cell Leader 
                 :          
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Test 
                 Entry/Exit Criteria 
                 Signed off 
                 Date 
               
               
                 Activity 
                   
                 by . . . 
               
               
                 Develop 
                 Entry Criteria: 
               
               
                 Assembly 
                 Capability Release Evaluation Approach 
               
               
                 Test 
                 Completed 
               
               
                 Approach 
                 At least 50% of the code completed before 
               
               
                   
                 any Assembly Testing started. 
               
               
                   
                 Exit Criteria: 
               
               
                   
                 A configuration audit must have been 
               
               
                   
                 completed on the source code and 
               
               
                   
                 Assembly Test information after all test 
               
               
                   
                 cycles run successfully. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Test Resources and Workplan 
     Resources 
     The assembly test team may be responsible for creating the technology architecture Assembly Test conditions. The component test conditions developed during the design phase may be leveraged in assembly test as well. The Work Cell Leads may approve all test conditions and expected results. 
     The Assembly Test scripts may be developed and executed by Assembly test team. The Work Cell Leads may supervise the effort. The Test Manager may sign off on the deliverables. The Project Manager may approve the final report. 
     Workplan 
     See the activities Architecture Design—Assembly Test: Prepare Assembly Test Approach and Prepare Assembly Test Plan within the ReTA workplan. 
     Technology Architecture Component Test Approach 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 ReTA 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Revision 
                 Date 
                 Prepared By 
               
               
                   
                 Number 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Overview 
     The purpose of the Component Test Approach Deliverable is to outline the detailed approach that may be used to plan and execute the Component Test for Phase 1 of the Resources eCommerce Technical Architecture (ReTA) initiative. 
     Test Objectives and Scope 
     Objectives 
     The objective of the Component Test is to ensure that each program in the application or architecture has implemented the functional, quality and technical specifications and should test all lines of code and branches of logic. At the end of component test, all lines of code should have been exercised and proven to meet the specified functional and quality requirements. 
     This objective is met through the following steps: 
     Develop the Component Test Approach 
     Plan Component Test 
     Prepare Component Test 
     Establish Component Test Environment 
     Execute Component Test 
     Component testing addresses the initial stages of testing. Generally, testing at the component stage tests code. The test data prepared by the programmer tests how the component or module handles both valid and exception conditions. All logic paths are tested. Utility modules or any modules with complex logic should be tested in isolation before being integrated with other components. 
     Successful completion of the component test for the technology architecture components ensures that they meet their specifications. Interactions with other Technology architecture components are not part of this test. The operations required of other components (e.g., data access) by the components under test are replaced by stubs. 
     Scope 
     The scope of this Component Test Approach portion of the present description is limited to the Phase 1 enhancements to the ReTA architecture. These enhancements include: 
     Execution Architecture 
     Environment Services—Application Services 
     Codes Table services: static data code-decode implementation 
     Common services: creation of ASP header file to provide common architecture constants and functions within application Active Server Pages 
     Information Services—Database Services 
     Access: ADO Persistence layer 
     Presentation Services—Web Browser 
     Form: UI Controls 
     Client-side field validation (JavaScript) 
     Client architecture file to provide common JavaScript functions (field validation, date validation, message boxes, etc.). This may provide a single point of maintenance and functionality for client architecture services. Grouping attributes into single method call 
     Dropdown listbox UI Control integration with CodesTable service. 
     Development Architecture 
     System Building Services—Construction 
     Application developer coding templates for Active Server Pages, Activity, Sub-Activity, View, Mapping, Factory and Business Object. 
     Other 
     Code cleanup 
     Component name changes (prefix): Removal of all application references within the architecture 
     Application of naming and coding standards. 
     Consolidation of UI control attributes into single method calls. 
     Renaming and cleanup of framework constants. 
     Test Cycles 
     The test cycles, for each technology architecture component, may be organized as follows: 
     Cycle 1: test conditions that exercise the most frequent input, preconditions, and paths 
     Cycle 2: test conditions that exercise all other legal input, preconditions, and paths 
     Cycle 3: test conditions that exercise the error and exception handling logic 
     All cycles may be independent to minimize the overall calendar time required to test. 
     In addition, each cycle may be run three times (i.e., three passes) to meet the objectives outlined below: 
     The objective of pass 1 is to get through the test as quickly as possible, finding as many defects as possible and implementing workarounds where needed. 
     The objective of pass 2 is to regression test the defects fixed from pass 1, and determine if the pass 1 workarounds caused any more defects. 
     The objective of pass 3 is to regression test defects fixed from pass 2; no defects should be found. 
     By planning three passes, regression tests are built in to ensure defects are fixed and did not break anything else. 
     It is important to note, the Technology architecture Component Test Approach applies to both testing after normal construction and testing during “fix-it” or “debug” mode. 
     Risks 
     The risks and risk management approach for the component test stage are outlined below: 
     Concurrent Development and Configuration Management 
     During the phase 1, there may be several simultaneous enhancement efforts. It may be essential to follow strict configuration management procedures in order to prevent version overwriting. 
     Mitigation Plan 
     All components to be modified should be checked out of the version control tool (Visual Source Safe) with a detailed label stating the change description and the developer&#39;s name. If separate enhancement efforts require the same file, developers should coordinate file control so not to overwrite the other&#39;s work. 
     Contingency Plan 
     Defects may be tracked during the component test. If a large number of defects are attributed to version mismatch or overwriting, the configuration management approach for development may be reevaluated. Additional resources may need to be added to the build and component test effort. 
     Scope of Test Effort 
     Since almost every module may be modified (due to name changes), there may need to be extensive component and assembly testing to ensure no functionality is broken. 
     Mitigation Plan 
     This component test approach relies on automation and reuse. There may be an effort to automate all component testing, so that it is easy to both execute the test and verify the expected results. 
     Contingency Plan 
     Defects may be tracked during the component test. If a large number of defects are found for modules, the approach to coding and testing the modules may be reevaluated. 
     Regression Testing Approach 
     After a fix is put into the system, the fix is tested to ensure that it is correct. Other functions are “regression” tested in order to ensure that they were not adversely affected (broken) by the fix; this is regression testing. In general, the regression test should include all functions either directly or indirectly impacted by the fix and be executed during each pass. 
     At the end of each test stage, a clean test pass for that stage may be conducted. If non-critical errors do remain at the end of a test stage, the team leader for that stage must sign-off on their portion of the present description. The time required to execute the last test pass ought to be minimal, since the cycles should execute correctly. 
     The three pass approach for technology architecture component test may facilitate regression testing of defects found in the current test. In addition, the entire technology architecture component test model may be portion of the present descriptioned, repeatable and automated (where possible) in order to be easily re-executed for each pass. 
     For each code fix, a complete component test may be re-executed. Any new conditions created as result of fix implementation may be added to the existing test plan (conditions, scripts, etc.). 
     Test Environment Requirements 
     Technical Configuration 
     The technology architecture component test may occur in the technology architecture development environment. It is separated from the technology architecture, assembly test environment. 
     FIG. 74 illustrates the application &amp; architecture configuration for a typical ReTA Build environment. In this model, the testing workstation  7400  is configured to provide presentation services by way of a HTML 3.2 and JavaScript 1.2 compatible web browser. The web/application server  7402  is configured with the current assembly test versions of ReTA application and architecture components. 
     External Interfaces 
     None 
     Test Data Management 
     The master set of common test data may reside in the central database. Each developer may access the data from their local workstation. When necessary, the data may be modified to satisfy all the test conditions for the tested components. The master test data should be exported so that the database tables can be restored to their original state once the test cycle is complete. 
     Source Environment 
     The components under test and their technology architecture modules/classes are managed within the Source Control tool, Visual Source Safe. They are to be locked for the duration of the test; the developer receives exclusive access. 
     Automation 
     Test Execution—Custom scripts may be created and used by the developer to automate the execution of individual component tests. 
     Debugging—Visual Studio Source Code Debugger may be used. 
     Problem Management—a System Investigation Requests (SIR) Database for entering and managing the problem resolution process may be used to track all issues detected during assembly test. 
     Environment Cleanup 
     The developer is responsible for cleaning up the databases and other environment information after each pass of the test execution. 
     Security 
     The developer is in charge of configuration management (version control and migration control) of the components under their responsibility. When the component has successfully completed component test and code review, the developer should promote the code to the appropriate, staged location in the version control repository. 
     Metrics 
     The following metrics may be collected and evaluated throughout technology architecture component test: 
     Metric Name 
     Definition 
     Target 
     Frequency of collection and evaluation 
     Refer to the Testing Metrics Job Aid in the Business Integration Methodology for more information. 
     Entry and Exit Criteria 
     The entry and exit criteria for the different activities in component testing may ensure the quality of each deliverable from the testing process. Below are the entry and exit criteria for assembly test. 
     Test Resources and Workplan 
     Resources 
     The developer responsible for the component build may create the technology architecture component test conditions. The creation of the test conditions may happen concurrently with the detail design of the component. The Work Cell Leads may approve all test conditions and expected results. 
     The component test scripts may be developed and executed by dedicated developers within the work cells. In addition, test drivers and stubs to simulate other components may be the responsibility of the developer. The Work Cell Leads may supervise the effort. The Test Manager may sign off on the deliverables. The Project Manager may approve the final report. 
     Workplan 
     See the activities Architecture Design—Component Test: Prepare Component Test Approach and Prepare Component Test Plan within the ReTA workplan. 
     Performance Test Approach 
     Overview 
     The purpose of the Performance Test Approach Deliverable is to outline the detailed approach that may be used to plan and execute the Performance Test for the Resources eCommerce Technical Architecture (ReTA) initiative. 
     Performance and Stress Test simulates high production data volumes and ensures that system response time and communication links are adequate. Potential bottlenecks are identified and analysis of how the system can perform internally and with other systems at maximum processing loads is performed. Various members from the ReTA Technical Architecture team may perform this test. 
     Test Objectives &amp; Scope 
     Objectives 
     Performance testing closely emulates the actual workload that an application generates and utilizes all environmental components for its test: network, server, clients, databases. Performance testing may also allow one to determine how effectively the application may function in the current environment and to gauge how scaleable it may be should the usage increase. 
     The ReTA Phase 2 Performance Tests may focus on five primary objectives: 
     To measure the response time performance of ReTA framework services in an environment that reasonably simulates an expected production environment. 
     To identify potential performance risks that need to be addressed in order to meet the foreseeable application response time requirements. 
     To work together with the development teams to analyse issues, identify root causes, and develop alternatives for performance enhancement. 
     To portion of the present description performance improvement ideas and suggestions that should be considered for the medium- to long-term. 
     To determine baseline hardware and network recommendations for use during requirement analysis phases of an engagement. 
     Scope 
     The Performance Test Team may: 
     Develop a simulated production-like environment for the purpose of performance testing; 
     Measure online user response times of the reference application under variable user load scenarios; 
     Recommend possible alternatives for performance enhancement; and, 
     Publish final reports describing the results of the Performance Test. 
     Risks 
     The following table identifies external risks to be managed by the Performance Testing Team. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Risks 
                 Actions 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Performance Testing environment negatively 
                 Test cycle execution should be done during 
               
               
                 impacted by SolutionWorks network traffic 
                 periods of low network usage (lunch periods, 
               
               
                 usage. 
                 after normal business hours, etc.) 
               
               
                 Tuning measures recommended by the 
                 ReTA Architecture team to notify 
               
               
                 Performance Testing Team must be 
                 Performance Testing Team in the case that 
               
               
                 implemented prior to the beginning of the 
                 tuning measures cannot be implemented 
               
               
                 next testing cycle. 
                 within an agreed-upon time window. 
               
               
                 Other risks being determined . . . 
                 Performance Team to regularly and 
               
               
                   
                 proactively keep project management 
               
               
                   
                 appraised of new risks and issues. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Performance Testing Approach 
     Approach Description 
     The performance testing approach centers on using an automated performance/load testing application to assist in the test script creation and execution. Three different tests (load, stress, and performance) may be executed to accurately determine the performance picture of the ReTA Phase 2 architecture. Each test and its accompanying test cycles may be designed to simulate varying user volumes. 
     Key Differences between Load, Stress and Performance Testing 
     For the purpose of this portion of the present description, Load, Stress and Performance Testing may be distinguished. It is important to understand the subtle differences amongst the three types of testing. 
     Load Testing 
     Load testing is used to subject a server to the load conditions that may be realized in a live production environment. This should enable the tester to make a more predictable assessment of the performance of a production system and thus eliminate much of the uncertainty. Load testing focuses on the number of users accessing the server, the combination of business transactions that are executed on the server, and the impact of the combination of users and transactions on different environment components. 
     Stress Testing 
     Stress testing extends the focus of the load test. Whereas load testing stresses the server to normal production levels to determine performance, stress testing focuses on locating the point at which server performance breaks down. This is achieved by steadily increasing the number of simulated users that execute a given transaction until a breaking point is reached. In addition, a variation of this test would be to execute a single transaction repeatedly for an extended period of time. 
     Performance Testing 
     Performance testing focuses on measuring performance for a specific transaction. The performance of a server should be measured under different user load conditions. For ReTA Phase 3 testing, cycles may be executed against both Oracle 8 Enterprise and Microsoft SQL Server 7.0 databases. 
     Testing Process 
     For each of the performance tests, the following process may be used to plan, execute, and evaluate the results of the tests: 
     Plan the Scenario 
     Determine the goal of the test such as the number of simulated users, the transactions to be performed and the transactions to be timed. 
     Record Web Scripts 
     Record the steps a user may take to complete a transaction with the application. The majority of automated testing tools available on the market offer recording capabilities for the tester to capture the various actions that make up a single transaction as the tester navigates through the application. 
     Define the Scenario 
     A list of virtual users has to be defined in each workstation that is used for testing. The number of virtual users and the scripts to be used by each virtual user have to be set up before the scenario can be run. 
     Run the Scenario 
     Since the execution script is pre-recorded, simply clicking a button can run it. The testing tool may automatically launch all the virtual users and keep track of their test status. It should also record and measure the server response time as well as other statistics. 
     Analysis of Performance Graphs and Reports 
     After the scenario has completed its run, the performance graphs may be generated and shown to the tester automatically. The tester can then analyze the graphs and reports available. Graphs should be available that provide individual page averages, complete scenario execution times, and high/low response times. 
     Testing Application 
     The application to be used during the ReTA Phase 2 Performance Tests provides three simple business and operational function. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Functional Area 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Review/Submit 
                 This set of dialogs provides functionality for 
               
               
                 Feedback 
                 inputting and reviewing feedback. From a testing 
               
               
                   
                 perspective, this provides database insert and 
               
               
                   
                 volume retrieval functionality. 
               
               
                 Review Events 
                 This operational dialog provides custom queries 
               
               
                   
                 and retrieval against the architecture event log. 
               
               
                   
                 For testing purposes, this dialog provides volume 
               
               
                   
                 data retrieval. 
               
               
                 Customer Maintenance 
                 This simulated business activity provides 
               
               
                   
                 customer retrieval, update and deletion 
               
               
                   
                 functionality. For testing purposes, these 
               
               
                   
                 dialogs provide multi-window, transactional 
               
               
                   
                 functionality. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The testing script for both the Load and Stress tests consists of the following activities: 
     Application login 
     Customer Maintenance (create new) 
     Customer Maintenance (modify customer created in step 2) 
     Customer Maintenance (lookup existing customer) 
     Customer Maintenance (delete customer created in step 2) 
     Submit feedback 
     Review feedback 
     Review events 
     Application logout 
     During the database performance test cycles, the following script may be followed: 
     Application login 
     Customer Maintenance (create new) 
     Customer Maintenance (modify customer created in step 2) 
     Customer Maintenance (lookup existing customer) 
     Customer Maintenance (delete customer created in step 2) 
     Application logout 
     Performance Test Cycles 
     The performance tests may be organized to reuse the component and assembly test conditions and scripts. In addition, testing functionality may leverage the reference application components developed in early phases of the ReTA initiative. A mix of various transactions may be used to ensure that the testing clients, web/application server, and database server are sufficiently stressed. 
     Load Test 
     The ReTA Phase 2 Load Test is comprised of the following cycles: 
     Cycle 1: 25 concurrent users (various transactions) 
     Cycle 2: 50 concurrent users (various transactions) 
     Cycle 3: 75 concurrent users (various transactions) 
     Cycle 4: 100 concurrent users (various transactions) 
     Stress Test 
     The ReTA Phase 2 Stress Test may be comprised of the following test cycles: 
     Cycle 1: 50 concurrent users (various transactions for 2 hours) 
     Cycle 2: 100 concurrent users (various transactions for 2 hours) 
     Cycle 3: 200 concurrent users (various transactions for 2 hours) 
     Performance Test 
     The ReTA Phase 2 Performance Test may be comprised of the following test cycles: 
     Cycle 1: 50 concurrent users (Customer Lookup/Update, Oracle 8.04 Database) 
     Cycle 2: 100 concurrent users (Customer Lookup/Update, Oracle 8.04 Database) 
     Cycle 3: 50 concurrent users (Customer Lookup/Update, SQL Server 7.0 Database) 
     Cycle 4: 100 concurrent users (Customer Lookup/Update, SQL Server 7.0 Database) 
     Test Environment Requirements 
     Physical Configuration 
     FIG. 75 illustrates the physical characteristics of the testing environment to be utilized during the Performance Testing Phases. In particular, a web and application server  7500  is connected to a testing client  7502  and a database server  7504 . 
     Hardware/Software Configuration 
     The following table provides a complete listing of the hardware and software configuration of the performance test environment. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 CPU 
                 RAM 
                 Operating System 
                 Software 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 RETADEV4 
                 P-300 
                 128 
                 Windows NT 
                 RSW eTest &amp; eLoad 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MB 
                 Workstation 4.0 
                 Microsoft Internet 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (SP4) 
                 Explorer 4.01 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 ReTA Issues Tracker 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 ReTA SIR Workbench 
               
               
                 STPFS1011 
                 P-400 
                 2 GB 
                 Windows NT 
                 Microsoft Internet 
               
               
                   
                 (4×) 
                   
                 Enterprise Server 
                 Explorer 4.01 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 4.0 
                 Microsoft IIS 4.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Transaction 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Server 2.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Active Data 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Objects 2.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Oracle8 (Client only) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 HP OmniBack II Client 
               
               
                 RETADB2 
                 P-300 
                 128 
                 Windows NT 
                 Microsoft Internet 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MB 
                 Server 4.0 
                 Explorer 4.01 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (SP4) 
                 Microsoft SQL Server 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 7.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 HP OmniBack II Client 
               
               
                 AS88232 
                 HP 
                 3.75 
                 HP-UX v10.20 
                 Oracle Enterprise Edition 
               
               
                   
                 K57 
                 GB 
                   
                 8.04 
               
               
                   
                 0 
                   
                   
                 HP OmniBack II Client 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     External Interfaces 
     None 
     Test Data Management 
     The performance test data may be created using an Active Server Page created during Phase 2 for the purposes of populating and restoring test data. 
     After each successful execution of a cycle, the test executor may refresh the database by re-executing the data population Active Server Page. 
     Automation 
     An automated web-based testing application may be utilized for test script recording and playback. The testing application should have the ability to simulate multiple web clients. 
     Debugging—Visual Studio Source Code Debugger may be used. 
     Problem Management—a System Investigation Requests (SIR) Database for entering and managing the problem resolution process may be used to track all issues detected during performance tests. 
     Environment Cleanup 
     The developer is responsible for cleaning up the databases and other environment information after each pass of the test execution. 
     Security 
     As part of performance test, the following security roles may be created: 
     Source Control administrator—responsible for monitoring code migration 
     Web/Application server administrator—responsible for installation, configuration, maintenance and tuning on the server 
     Database administrator—responsible for test database installation, maintenance and tuning 
     SIRs/Change Requests 
     The Performance Testing Team may, as a result of Performance Tuning analysis, create SIRs and/or Change Requests, as appropriate. These portion of the present descriptions may describe recommendations for performance enhancements to be undertaken by the architecture development team. Project management may hold responsibility for prioritizing and scheduling SIRs and/or Change Requests for the immediate-, medium-, and long-term. 
     Metrics 
     The following metrics may be collected and the ReTA Phase 2 performance tests: 
     End-to-end response times for individual transactions. 
     Measurement summary of transaction performance 
     Performance summary of all transactions 
     Detailed measurement of transaction performance 
     Simulated user statistical report 
     CPU utilization of Web/Application and database servers. 
     Database connection pooling statistics 
     Test Resources and Workplan 
     Resources 
     The performance test team may be responsible for creating the technology architecture Performance Test data and scripts. The component test conditions developed during the design phase may be leveraged in performance test as well. The Work Cell Leads may approve all test conditions and expected results. 
     The Performance Test scripts may be developed and executed by Performance testing team. The Work Cell Leads may supervise the effort. The Test Manager may sign off on the deliverables. The Project Manager may approve the final report. 
     Workplan 
     The workplan for the ReTA Phase 2 Performance Tests can be found within ReTA Performance Test Workplan. 
     The high level tasks within the workplan are as follows: 
     Develop testing scenarios (transactional mix) 
     Establish testing environment 
     Develop data generation, population, and refresh approach 
     Develop load generation approach 
     Get first cut of architecture/application code 
     Record and modify automated testing scripts 
     Execute test cycles 
     Analyze, report, SIRs, change recommendations, etc. 
     Code changes per performance management review 
     Re-execute or get second cut of code. 
     CHANGE TRACKER DATABASE USAGE 
     FIG. 76A illustrates a method  7600  for managing change requests in an e-commerce environment. A plurality of change requests are received from a plurality of users in operation  7602 . In operation  7604 , the change requests are assigned to developers for implementation. The change requests are displayed in operation  7606 . The displayed change requests are filtered in operation  7608  based on criterion. Indication is provided in operation  7610  for those change requests which have been implemented by the developers. 
     As an option, an indication from one of the developers may be received indicating that one of the change requests has been implemented while additionally displaying a time when the indication was received. 
     The criterion may be a predetermined group of criterion for reporting purposes. Optionally, the user may select the criterion. 
     The users may further be allowed to edit the change requests. In such an embodiment, the users may be allowed to edit the change requests via a display having fields such as a date each change request was entered, the user that requested each change request, an application affected by each change request, a status of each change request, and a priority of each change request, a description of each change request, the developer responsible for implementing each change request, a category of each change request, and a target date for implementation of each change request. Additionally, the fields may also include the target date so that a time may be indicated when the target date was last edited. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     The following discussion provides an overview of the Change Tracker Database (CTD) for use on a ReTA engagement. The CTD tracks a change request from the time the request is entered to the time the request is closed, after completing an evaluation of the change in production. In addition, the CTD has been designed to communicate important information regarding the existence, status, and resolution of the change request. 
     During the lifecycle of a change request, inquiries may arise. Due to the large number of people involved in the change control process, there needs to be a mechanism to centralize important information regarding the requests. The CTD allows the various people involved in the change control process to be fully informed of the status of the requests at any time. The process may lead to efficiency gains and better communication between process participants. 
     To install the tool, refer to the instructions that are provided within the Change Tracker Setup portion of the present description. 
     Change Lifecycle 
     A change request is submitted by a business user or IT personnel 
     The Change Control Committee may review the change request. 
     The change may be assigned to a developer and the status in the CTD may reflect the current status of the request. 
     Once the change request is code/tested, it may be migrated into production. 
     If it passes the monitor period its status may be closed. Otherwise, the change is re-opened and submitted through the process again. 
     Tracker Overview 
     FIG. 76B illustrates a framework  7630  associated with the change tracker. See FIG. 23 for more detail. 
     Main Window 
     FIG. 77 illustrates the Change Tracker Main Window  7700 . This form serves two main purposes. First, it gives the user a quick summary of the change requests  7702 . Second, this form serves as the driver of the CTD. From this form the user can add and view change requests as well as view and print reports. The Current user field  7704  is populated using the users local Windows NT/95 login Id and the Change Tracker&#39;s User. 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Window Fields 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Field Name 
                 Field Description 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Unique numeric identifier of the Change Request 
               
               
                 Reported 
                 Date the change request was entered 
               
               
                 Requester 
                 The person who requested the change request 
               
               
                 Application 
                 The application area affected by the change request (i.e. 
               
               
                   
                 Marketing, LIS, Vision) 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The function which the change request affects 
               
               
                 Status 
                 The status of the change request. 
               
               
                 Priority 
                 The priority of a change request 
               
               
                   
                 1 (High) 
               
               
                   
                 2 (Medium) 
               
               
                   
                 3 (Low) 
               
               
                   
                 4 (Cosmetic) 
               
               
                 Short 
                 A short (75 chars max) and concise description of the 
               
               
                 Description 
                 change request. 
               
               
                 Assigned To 
                 The developer who is responsible to code &amp; test the change 
               
               
                   
                 request. 
               
               
                 Category 
                 The classification of the change request (Project, 
               
               
                   
                 Enhancement or Emergency) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Change Request Detail Window 
     From the Main Window of the Change Tracker Main Window  7700 , select the Add or Detail buttons  7706 , 7708 . The Change Request Detail window may be displayed. FIG. 78 illustrates the Change Request Detail Screen  7800 . To look at other requests, scroll through the record numbers  7802  (located in the bottom, left-hand corner). To exit without saving—Click on the Cancel button  7804 . Save change request and exit window—Click on the Exit button  7806 . To print the request—Click on Print button  7808 . 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Window Fields 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Field Name 
                 Field Description 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 CR# 
                 Automatically assigned when a new change request is 
               
               
                   
                 entered. 
               
               
                 Date 
                 Date the change request was entered. This date 
               
               
                   
                 defaults to the date of the change request entry. 
               
               
                 Logged By 
                 Portion of the present descriptions who entered the 
               
               
                   
                 change request into the CTT. 
               
               
                 Requester 
                 The person who requested the change request. 
               
               
                 Phone Number 
                 Phone number of the requester. 
               
               
                 Business Area 
                 Business area of the requester. 
               
               
                 Platform 
                 The hardware platform of the system affected by the 
               
               
                   
                 change request. 
               
               
                 Appl. 
                 The application affected by the change request. 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The function affected by the change request. 
               
               
                 Component 
                 The component affected by the change request. 
               
               
                 Source 
                 Source of the problem: 
               
               
                   
                 ABEND (Abnormal Program Termination) 
               
               
                   
                 Other 
               
               
                   
                 Performance 
               
               
                   
                 Prior Change 
               
               
                   
                 Regulatory 
               
               
                 Prior CR# 
                 Change request number of a previous request that 
               
               
                   
                 caused this current request or is related to the 
               
               
                   
                 current request. 
               
               
                 Status 
                 The status of the change request. A change request 
               
               
                   
                 can have a status of: 
               
               
                   
                 New 
               
               
                   
                 Assigned 
               
               
                   
                 Development 
               
               
                   
                 Testing 
               
               
                   
                 Migrate 
               
               
                   
                 Production 
               
               
                   
                 Closed 
               
               
                   
                 Rejected 
               
               
                   
                 Deferred 
               
               
                   
                 Re-Opened 
               
               
                 Priority 
                 The priority of a change request: 
               
               
                   
                 1 (High) - Change request is necessary for application 
               
               
                   
                 functionality and is an integral component that keeps 
               
               
                   
                 the system running properly. 
               
               
                   
                 2 (Medium) - Change request is severely needed 
               
               
                   
                 for proper application functionality. 
               
               
                   
                 3 (Low) - Change request can be circumvented but 
               
               
                   
                 needs to be resolved in the near future. 
               
               
                   
                 4 (Cosmetic) - Change Request does not affect 
               
               
                   
                 production but should be fixed. 
               
               
                 Completion 
                 Requester&#39;s estimated date for the change request to be 
               
               
                 Date 
                 completed. 
               
               
                 Risk 
                 The risk of the change request: High, Medium, Low 
               
               
                 Impact 
                 The impact of the change request: High, Medium, Low 
               
               
                 Complexity 
                 The complexity of the change request: High, Medium, 
               
               
                   
                 Low 
               
               
                 IT Area* 
                 Project or Area assigned to complete the change 
               
               
                   
                 request: 
               
               
                   
                 Account Management 
               
               
                   
                 Client Services 
               
               
                   
                 Delivery Systems 
               
               
                   
                 Insurance/Corporate Systems 
               
               
                   
                 Network Services 
               
               
                   
                 Production Services 
               
               
                   
                 Technical Services 
               
               
                 Category* 
                 The classification of the change request: 
               
               
                   
                 Project 
               
               
                   
                 A major change to the production environment, 
               
               
                   
                 including application code, system software, 
               
               
                   
                 hardware, and networks. 
               
               
                   
                 Generally requires more than 160 hours of work. 
               
               
                   
                 Generally tend to have high impact, risk, and 
               
               
                   
                 complexity. 
               
               
                   
                 Enhancement 
               
               
                   
                 A minor change to the production environment, 
               
               
                   
                 including application code, 
               
               
                   
                 system software, hardware, and networks. 
               
               
                   
                 Generally requires less than 160 hours of work. 
               
               
                   
                 Generally tend to have low impact, risk, and 
               
               
                   
                 complexity 
               
               
                   
                 Emergency 
               
               
                   
                 The application is out of service and there is no work 
               
               
                   
                 around 
               
               
                   
                 A security system can be or has been comprised 
               
               
                   
                 Data loss/corruption 
               
               
                   
                 Hardware failure that needs to be replaced immediately 
               
               
                 Site 
                 The site of the change request. 
               
               
                 Manager 
                 Manager responsible for change request. 
               
               
                 Assigned 1 
                 Primary person assigned to complete the change 
               
               
                   
                 request. 
               
               
                 Assigned 2 
                 Second person assigned to complete the change 
               
               
                   
                 request. 
               
               
                 Short 
                 A short (75 chars max) and concise description of 
               
               
                 Description 
                 the change request. 
               
               
                 Long 
                 A detailed description of the change request. 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Target Date 
                 Date by which change should be ready to be migrated. 
               
               
                 Staging Date 
                 Date by which change should be ready to be migrated. 
               
               
                 Actual Date 
                 Actual date change is moved into production. 
               
               
                 Actual Hours 
                 Actual number of hours it took to complete the change 
               
               
                   
                 request. 
               
               
                 Resolution 
                 The resolution to the change request. Developers 
               
               
                   
                 should include a brief description of the changes 
               
               
                   
                 made to the code. Explanations should be given for 
               
               
                   
                 changes that are rejected. 
               
               
                 Change 
                 The status of the change with a respect to the 
               
               
                 Control 
                 Change Control Committee: 
               
               
                 Committee 
                 Un-reviewed 
               
               
                 Status 
                 Reviewed 
               
               
                   
                 Follow-Up 
               
               
                 LOE (hrs) 
                 The estimated Level of Effort (LOE) to complete 
               
               
                   
                 the change request. 
               
               
                 Migrate Metric 
                 Success of migrating code to production: (Pass / Fail) 
               
               
                   
                 Associated with this checkbox is the Assignee&#39;s ID &amp; 
               
               
                   
                 Date fields. These may be filled automatically with the 
               
               
                   
                 ID of the current user and the current date when the 
               
               
                   
                 checkbox is checked or unchecked. 
               
               
                 Problem 
                 Explanation of the problems caused by the change 
               
               
                 Explanation 
                 request. 
               
               
                 Lessons 
                 Explanation of the successful and unsuccessful tactics  
               
               
                 Learned 
                 used during the lifecycle of the change request. 
               
               
                 Closed By 
                 Person who closed the change request. This field may be 
               
               
                   
                 filled automatically with the current user&#39;s ID when 
               
               
                   
                 the status is changed to “Closed”, “Rejected” 
               
               
                   
                 or “Duplicate”. 
               
               
                 Date Closed 
                 Date the change request is no longer being monitored 
               
               
                   
                 in production. This field may be filled automatically 
               
               
                   
                 with the current date when the status is changed to 
               
               
                   
                 “Closed”, “Rejected” or “Duplicate”. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     History Detail Window 
     From the main window, select the History button  7712  of the Change Tracker Main Window  7700 . This window allows the user to view the history of changes that have been made to the Target Implementation Date field. FIG. 79 illustrates a History of Changes Window  7900 . Whenever the Target Implementation Date  7902  is changed, the new value of the Target Implementation Date, the current user ID  7904  and the current date timestamp  7906  is logged. This form is for display only. 
     Note that when a new change request is added to the Change Tracking tool, a record may be created for the first Target Implementation Date addition. 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Window Fields 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Field Name 
                 Field Description 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 CR# 
                 Change Request # of the history displayed. 
               
               
                 Data Field 
                 The name of the field being tracked. In this case, may 
               
               
                   
                 be “Target Implementation Date”. 
               
               
                 Value 
                 The new Target Implementation Date the field was 
               
               
                   
                 changed to. 
               
               
                 User Name 
                 The person who changed the Target Implementation 
               
               
                   
                 Date. 
               
               
                 Date Timestamp 
                 The date and time the Target Implementation Date 
               
               
                   
                 was changed. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Ad-Hoc Reporting Window 
     FIG. 80 illustrates the Ad-Hoc Reporting Window  8000 . This form is where all filtering for reporting takes place. Filtering is the process of viewing change requests based on specified criteria. For instance, if developers wanted to see what new change request entries have been assigned to them, they can choose to filter the entire database with their name and a status of Assigned. All change request entries assigned to that developer may then appear on a report. A user can filter the database with one field or up to 17 fields depending on how specific they want to get. The fields shown include requester  8002 , platform  8004 , manager  8006 , etc. In addition, they can filter all change requests within the context of a date range. Thus, in the below example, the developer could see what new enhancement changes have been requested. 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Window Fields 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Field Name 
                 Field Description 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Date From 
                 The starting date of the date range. If this field is 
               
               
                   
                 entered, the To Date must be entered. 
               
               
                 To Date 
                 The ending date of the date range. 
               
               
                 Requester 
                 The person who requested the change request 
               
               
                 Appl. 
                 The application area affected by the change request (i.e. 
               
               
                   
                 Marketing, LIS, Vision) 
               
               
                 Logged By 
                 Portion of the present descriptions who entered the 
               
               
                   
                 change request into the system. 
               
               
                 Platform 
                 The hardware platform of the system affected by the 
               
               
                   
                 change request. 
               
               
                 Source 
                 Source of the problem (i.e. Regulatory, ABENDS, 
               
               
                   
                 Performance, etc.). 
               
               
                 Function 
                 The function affected by the change request. 
               
               
                 Component 
                 What component may the change request affect (i.e. 
               
               
                   
                 Application Code, Hardware, etc.). 
               
               
                 Priority 
                 The priority of a change request. 
               
               
                 Category 
                 The classification of the change request. 
               
               
                 Status 
                 The status of the change request. A change request can 
               
               
                   
                 have a status of: New, Assigned, Design, Testing, etc.) 
               
               
                 Manager 
                 Manager of assigned IT Area 
               
               
                 Assigned To 
                 Developer assigned to change request. Both the Assigned 
               
               
                   
                 1 and Assigned 2 fields may be queried. 
               
               
                 IT Area 
                 Area assigned to complete the change request (Prod. 
               
               
                   
                 App. Services, Tech. Services, Client Services, etc.). 
               
               
                 Target Date 
                 Date scheduled to move change into production. 
               
               
                 Site 
                 The site of the change request. 
               
               
                 Migrate Metric 
                 Success of migrating code to production. 
               
               
                 Prod. Metric 
                 Success of code in production. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Manager Reporting Window 
     FIG. 81 illustrates the Manager Reporting Window  8100 . This form allows the user to select a variety of summary reports, such as IT Area Priority  8102 , Manager Priority  8104 , etc. 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Window Fields 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Button Name 
                 Button Description 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 IT Area Priority 
                 Opens the IT Area by Priority Report. 
               
               
                 IT Area Status 
                 Opens the IT Area by Status Report. 
               
               
                 Application Priority 
                 Opens the Application by Priority Report. 
               
               
                 Application Status 
                 Opens the Application by Status Report. 
               
               
                 Status by Priority 
                 Opens the Status by Priority Report. 
               
               
                 Manager Priority 
                 Opens the Manager by Priority Report. 
               
               
                 Manager Status 
                 Opens the Manager by Status Report. 
               
               
                 Manager Migration 
                 Opens the Manager Migration Report. 
               
               
                 Manager Production 
                 Opens the Manager Production Report. 
               
               
                 Manager Category 
                 Opens the Manager by Category Report. 
               
               
                 Closed and Rejected 
                 Opens the Closed and Rejected Report. 
               
               
                 Implement 
                 Opens the Implementation Report. 
               
               
                 Recent Chg. Line 
                 Opens the Recent Change Line Report. 
               
               
                 Recent Chg. Detail 
                 Opens the Recent Change Detail Reports. 
               
               
                 Capacity Planning 
                 Opens the Capacity Planning Report. 
               
               
                 Exit 
                 Returns the user to the Change Request Log Form. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Migrating Window 
     FIG. 82 illustrates the Migration Checklist Window  8200 . This form allows the user to view general information  8202  about the change request and lists what sign-offs are needed in order for the change to be migrated to production. When a Migration Checklist item is checked or unchecked, the Sign-Off ID  8204  &amp; Sign-Off Date  8206  may be filled in automatically with the current user&#39;s ID and the current date. Only the Capacity Planner should check the Capacity Planning Sign-Off checkbox. 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Window Fields 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Field Name 
                 Field Description 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 CR# 
                 Automatically assigned when a new change request 
               
               
                   
                 is entered. 
               
               
                 Date 
                 Date the change request was entered. This date 
               
               
                   
                 defaults to the date of the change request entry. 
               
               
                 Logged By 
                 Portion of the present descriptions who entered 
               
               
                   
                 the change request into the CTT. 
               
               
                 Requester 
                 The person who requested the change request 
               
               
                 Platform 
                 The hardware platform of the system affected by the 
               
               
                   
                 change request. 
               
               
                 Appl. 
                 The application area affected by the change request. 
               
               
                 Component 
                 What components may the change request affect (i.e. 
               
               
                   
                 Application Code, Hardware, etc.). 
               
               
                 Status 
                 The status of the change request. A change request can 
               
               
                   
                 have a status of: New, Assigned, Design, Testing, etc.) 
               
               
                 Priority 
                 The priority of a change request. 
               
               
                 Category 
                 The classification of the change request. 
               
               
                 Manager 
                 Manager of assigned IT Area 
               
               
                 Assigned To 
                 Developer assigned to change request 
               
               
                 Target Date 
                 Date scheduled to move change into production. 
               
               
                 Actual Date 
                 Actual date change is moved into production. 
               
               
                 Short Description 
                 A short (75 chars max) and concise description of the 
               
               
                   
                 change request. 
               
               
                 Resolution 
                 The resolution to the change request. Developers 
               
               
                   
                 should include a brief description of the changes made 
               
               
                   
                 to the code. Explanations should be given for changes 
               
               
                   
                 that are rejected. 
               
               
                 Statement of 
                 Indicates whether the Statement of Work or Scope 
               
               
                 Work/Scope 
                 Definition has been signed off. 
               
               
                 Definition 
               
               
                 Checkbox 
               
               
                 User Acceptance 
                 Indicates whether the User Acceptance Testing has 
               
               
                 Testing Checkbox 
                 been signed off. 
               
               
                 Technical/Code 
                 Indicates whether the Technical/Code Review has 
               
               
                 Review Checkbox 
                 occurred. 
               
               
                 Complete Portion 
                 Indicates whether the Complete Portion of the present 
               
               
                 of the present 
                 description has been provided. 
               
               
                 description 
               
               
                 Checkbox 
               
               
                 Complete JCL/ 
                 Indicates whether the Complete JCL/DCL and 
               
               
                 DCL and 
                 Programs has been provided. 
               
               
                 Programs 
               
               
                 Checkbox 
               
               
                 Submit Turnover/ 
                 Indicates whether the Turnover/Software 
               
               
                 Software Install/ 
                 Install/Panapt Move has been submitted. 
               
               
                 Panapt Move 
               
               
                 Distribution List 
                 Indicates whether Distribution List Requirements 
               
               
                 Requirements 
                 has been provided. (i.e. TCPIP, Special Forms, 
               
               
                 Checkbox 
                 Microfiche, Electronic Files) 
               
               
                 Identify Impacted 
                 Indicates whether Impacted Systems has been 
               
               
                 Systems 
                 identified. 
               
               
                 Checkbox 
               
               
                 Capacity Planning 
                 Indicates whether Capacity Planning has signed off. 
               
               
                 Checkbox 
               
               
                 Ready to Migrate 
                 Indicates whether the change request is ready to be 
               
               
                 Checkbox 
                 migrated to production. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Use this job aid to assist in completing and maintaining the Project Configuration Management. It relates the portion of the descriptions in the Project Configuration Management Plan to the processes defined in the Software Configuration Management Policy. 
     Key: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 SCMP 
                 Software Configuration Management Policy 
               
               
                 SCMP 
                 Section numbers from the Software Configuration 
               
               
                   
                 Management 
               
               
                 Tasks 
                 Policy that give more detailed process information 
               
               
                 AT 
                 Assembly Test (a.k.a. String Test); where several modules 
               
               
                   
                 are tested in succession 
               
               
                 CM 
                 Configuration Management 
               
               
                 CMM 
                 Capability Maturity Model 
               
               
                 CT 
                 Component Test (a.k.a. Unit Test); where a single module 
               
               
                   
                 is tested 
               
               
                 ORT 
                 Operational Readiness Test; where the production 
               
               
                   
                 infrastructure is verified 
               
               
                 PM 
                 Project Manager 
               
               
                 PT 
                 Product Test; where the entire system is tested as a whole 
               
               
                 References 
                 Other sources of information that may give one more 
               
               
                   
                 information on the process 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Project Configuration Management Plan Walkthrough 
     Project Configuration Management Plan templates for each platform have been created, and sample Project Configuration Management Plans are also available. 
     The owner of the Configuration Management Plan (responsibilities include monitoring, reviewing, enforcing) is the Project Manager. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Project Information for Configuration 
               
               
                 Tab: CM PLAN - Proj 
                 Management Plan 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Definition 
                 Project information - lists key contacts on the 
               
               
                   
                 project, Project Configuration Management Board 
               
               
                   
                 members, and items to be placed under 
               
               
                   
                 Configuration Management and managed by this 
               
               
                   
                 plan 
               
               
                 Purpose 
                 Capture project-specific contact information, 
               
               
                   
                 configuration type information, and Project 
               
               
                   
                 Configuration Management Board information. It 
               
               
                   
                 is important to portion of the present description 
               
               
                   
                 the contacts and responsibilities early in the 
               
               
                   
                 project so there are no misunderstandings, and 
               
               
                   
                 everyone is in agreement on how Configuration 
               
               
                   
                 Management may be handled on the project. 
               
               
                 Required Fields 
                 All 
               
               
                 Project/Version 
                 Responsibility: Project Manager 
               
               
                 information 
                 Enter project-specific information for this 
               
               
                   
                 Configuration Management Plan: 
               
               
                   
                 Platform: the platform that the project may 
               
               
                   
                 run on. Should match a delivery vehicle, list as 
               
               
                   
                 “operating system - database system - language”. 
               
               
                   
                 (e.g. VMS - Oracle - C, Fortran) 
               
               
                   
                 Project: the project/application name. 
               
               
                   
                 Version: the version of the application. (e.g. 2.0) 
               
               
                   
                 Production Date: the date that the application is 
               
               
                   
                 due in production. (e.g. Jan 5, 1998) 
               
               
                   
                 Configuration Management Plan Owner: the 
               
               
                   
                 person who may manage and enforce the 
               
               
                   
                 responsibilities portion of the present 
               
               
                   
                 descriptioned in the Configuration Management 
               
               
                   
                 Plan. 
               
               
                 “Project Contacts” 
                 Responsibility: Project Manager 
               
               
                   
                 Enter names for the project contacts playing the 
               
               
                   
                 listed roles. These names may automatically 
               
               
                   
                 populate in subsequent worksheets in the 
               
               
                   
                 Configuration Management Plan according to the 
               
               
                   
                 Program Methodology and CMM requirements. If 
               
               
                   
                 a role does not apply for your project, enter 
               
               
                   
                 a space in place of the name. If more than one 
               
               
                   
                 person plays a primary role, one can enter both 
               
               
                   
                 names in the field. If a role is not listed, 
               
               
                   
                 then add it; however, it may not auto-populate 
               
               
                   
                 into the subsequent worksheets. These contacts 
               
               
                   
                 should be the people most involved in the project, 
               
               
                   
                 who one would consider “key contacts” 
               
               
                   
                 involved in the migration process. 
               
               
                 “To be placed under 
                 Primary Responsibility: Functional Lead 
               
               
                 Configuration 
                 For each category shown, list the configuration 
               
               
                 Management” 
                 types that may be covered in the Project 
               
               
                   
                 Configuration Management Plan. The types 
               
               
                   
                 already listed on the template cover most project 
               
               
                   
                 needs; verify that they cover the specifics of your 
               
               
                   
                 particular project. These are the types that may 
               
               
                   
                 be migrating through the different environments, 
               
               
                   
                 are subject to review, follow the same approval/ 
               
               
                   
                 migration process, etc.; and may populate on to 
               
               
                   
                 the subsequent Configuration Management work- 
               
               
                   
                 sheets. The types should cover the “normal” 
               
               
                   
                 situation (think of the 80% of the 80/20 rule); 
               
               
                   
                 “exception” situations should be noted separately. 
               
               
                   
                 Examples for the types: 
               
               
                   
                 Portion of the present description = design, test, 
               
               
                   
                 data, support, etc. 
               
               
                   
                 Database = tables, indices, views, aliases/ 
               
               
                   
                 synonyms, stored procedures, etc. 
               
               
                   
                 Architecture = application requested architecture 
               
               
                   
                 extensions 
               
               
                   
                 Application = code, reports, screens, menus, etc. 
               
               
                   
                 SCMP tasks: 1.6.1 Identify configuration types 
               
               
                 “Project Configuration 
                 Primary Responsibility: Project Manager 
               
               
                 Management Board” 
                 Confirm the names of the people who may act as 
               
               
                   
                 the Project Configuration Management Board (the 
               
               
                   
                 names automatically populate with contact 
               
               
                   
                 names listed on the same sheet: Configuration 
               
               
                   
                 Management Plan Owner, Development Lead, 
               
               
                   
                 Test Lead, Tech Lead, Development DBA, 
               
               
                   
                 Implementation Lead, Operations. The makeup of 
               
               
                   
                 the CM Board can change, if the project deems 
               
               
                   
                 necessary. 
               
               
                   
                 The CM Board is responsible for 
               
               
                   
                 portion of the present descriptioning the 
               
               
                   
                 detailed processes on the different tabs and for 
               
               
                   
                 signing off on the Project Configuration 
               
               
                   
                 Management Plan developed. They are also 
               
               
                   
                 responsible for enforcing processes on their 
               
               
                   
                 teams, and meeting with project management 
               
               
                   
                 after each major project phase to ensure that 
               
               
                   
                 changes are completed according to the portion 
               
               
                   
                 of the present descriptioned Plan. 
               
               
                   
                 SCMP tasks: 3.6.1 Define control groups; 3.6.2 
               
               
                   
                 Approve/disapprove change requests; 3.6.3 Track/ 
               
               
                   
                 implement change request; 4.6.2 Generate/ 
               
               
                   
                 distribute status reports 
               
               
                 “Meeting Dates” and 
                 Primary Responsibility: Project Manager 
               
               
                 “Meeting Minutes 
                 Once the Project Configuration Management Plan 
               
               
                 Location” 
                 has been established and signed off during 
               
               
                   
                 Design, Project Configuration Management Board 
               
               
                   
                 meetings may be held. They should be held at the 
               
               
                   
                 end of AT, PT, and Implementation phases - these 
               
               
                   
                 dates should be taken from the project plan. 
               
               
                   
                 These meeting dates should be listed in the 
               
               
                   
                 “Meeting Dates” column. The Project CM Board 
               
               
                   
                 may meet on the listed dates to review progress 
               
               
                   
                 made on implementing change requests according 
               
               
                   
                 to the CM Plan and on action items ensuring CM 
               
               
                   
                 compliance. The Project Configuration Manage- 
               
               
                   
                 ment Status Agenda (“Status Agenda” tab in the 
               
               
                   
                 Project Configuration Management Plan) can be 
               
               
                   
                 used to guide meeting discussions. Minutes from 
               
               
                   
                 these meetings may be portion of the present 
               
               
                   
                 descriptioned, and the location of these portion of 
               
               
                   
                 the present descriptions should be entered in the 
               
               
                   
                 “Meeting Minutes Location” column. The PS 
               
               
                   
                 should communicate the meeting dates early in 
               
               
                   
                 the project to ensure that the meetings may be 
               
               
                   
                 held on the date noted. 
               
               
                   
                 References: Project Configuration Management 
               
               
                   
                 Status Agenda (“Status Agenda” tab in the 
               
               
                   
                 CM Plan) 
               
               
                   
                 SCMP tasks: 4.6.1 Maintain records; 4.6.2 
               
               
                   
                 Generate/distribute status reports; 4.6.3 Schedule 
               
               
                   
                 CI reviews; 4.6.4 Perform audits; 5.6.1 
               
               
                   
                 Verify security practices 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Tab: CM * 
                 * = Emer, Doc, DB, Arch, Appl 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Definition 
                 Project Configuration Management Plan for the 
               
               
                   
                 Emer = emergency maintenance (responsibility 
               
               
                   
                 Development) 
               
               
                   
                 Doc = portion of the present description 
               
               
                   
                 (responsibility = Development, Test), 
               
               
                   
                 DB = database objects (responsibility = Tech 
               
               
                   
                 Support), 
               
               
                   
                 Arch = architecture extensions (responsibility = 
               
               
                   
                 Tech Support, Architecture), 
               
               
                   
                 Appl = application objects (responsibility = 
               
               
                   
                 Development, Test, Tech, Impl, Operations) 
               
               
                   
                 created for the project. 
               
               
                 Purpose 
                 Identify the objects to be placed under CM and 
               
               
                   
                 the stages which they may go through, identify 
               
               
                   
                 the repository and version control tool, identify 
               
               
                   
                 the change request tool that may be used, and 
               
               
                   
                 portion of the present description the roles/ 
               
               
                   
                 responsibilities for migrations to the different 
               
               
                   
                 environments. 
               
               
                   
                 It is important to portion of the present 
               
               
                   
                 description these responsibilities so that it 
               
               
                   
                 is known who needs to sign off on what 
               
               
                   
                 tests, who should have authority to write where, 
               
               
                   
                 and who is responsible for migrations. This may 
               
               
                   
                 help to ensure that object migrations are not 
               
               
                   
                 missed due to misunderstandings. The green 
               
               
                   
                 WHO columns may automatically populate from 
               
               
                   
                 the “Project Contacts” listed on the CM 
               
               
                   
                 PLAN-Proj tab according to the program 
               
               
                   
                 methodology and CMM requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 A new project team member should be able to tell 
               
               
                   
                 exactly what steps to take and who should be 
               
               
                   
                 involved/notified in order to migrate changes 
               
               
                   
                 from one environment to the next. 
               
               
                 Required Fields 
                 All 
               
               
                   
                 SCMP tasks: 2.6.2 Define promotion and 
               
               
                   
                 migration procedures. 
               
               
                 “Objects Included” 
                 Primary Responsibility: 
               
               
                   
                 Portion of the present description tab - 
               
               
                   
                 Development, 
               
               
                   
                 Database tab - Tech Support, 
               
               
                   
                 Architecture tab - Tech Support, 
               
               
                   
                 Application tab - Development 
               
               
                   
                 However, Test, Implementation, and Information 
               
               
                   
                 Delivery may input into each tab, also. 
               
               
                   
                 This field is pulled from the “Objects Included” 
               
               
                   
                 field on the CM PLAN-Proj tab. Verify that the 
               
               
                   
                 list includes all objects that may migrate through 
               
               
                   
                 the environments, follow the same naming 
               
               
                   
                 standard, use the same version control tool, 
               
               
                   
                 follow the same migration procedures, and use the 
               
               
                   
                 same change request tool. This should be the 80% 
               
               
                   
                 of the 80/20 rule. The exceptions should be listed 
               
               
                   
                 in the “Exceptions” filed later in the 
               
               
                   
                 sheet. Corrections to this field should be made 
               
               
                   
                 in the “Objects Included” field on the 
               
               
                   
                 CM PLAN-Proj tab. 
               
               
                   
                 Any other objects (the 20%) that do not follow 
               
               
                   
                 the Naming standard, use the Migration/version 
               
               
                   
                 control tool, or use the Change request tool listed 
               
               
                   
                 at the top, but do migrate through the 
               
               
                   
                 development environment should be listed 
               
               
                   
                 in the “Exceptions” section of the sheet. The 
               
               
                   
                 migration path and other information should be 
               
               
                   
                 filled out for the exceptions, also. 
               
               
                   
                 SCMP tasks: 1.6.2 Identify project baselines; 
               
               
                   
                 1.6.4 Identify configuration units. 
               
               
                 “Naming Standard” 
                 Primary Responsibility: (see “Objects Included”) 
               
               
                   
                 List the location(s) of the naming standard(s) 
               
               
                   
                 used for the objects listed. The default Alliance 
               
               
                   
                 Methodology naming standard is listed; any 
               
               
                   
                 project-specific naming standard should also be 
               
               
                   
                 listed. This should be the 80% of the 80/20 rule. 
               
               
                   
                 The exceptions (or 20%) should be listed in the 
               
               
                   
                 “Exceptions” portion of the description later 
               
               
                   
                 in the sheet, with that naming standard portion of 
               
               
                   
                 the present descriptioned. 
               
               
                   
                 SCMP tasks: 1.6.3 Define naming standards for 
               
               
                   
                 types 
               
               
                 “Migration/Version 
                 Primary Responsibility: (see “Objects Included”) 
               
               
                 Control Tool” 
                 List the migration and version control tool(s) 
               
               
                   
                 used. If the tool is only used for one of the 
               
               
                   
                 functions, indicate that as so. If multiple tools 
               
               
                   
                 are used to perform these tasks, indicate this, also. 
               
               
                   
                 Again, this is the 80% of the 80/20 rule. The 
               
               
                   
                 exceptions (or 20%) should be listed in 
               
               
                   
                 the “Exceptions” portion of the description later 
               
               
                   
                 in the sheet, with that migration/version control 
               
               
                   
                 tool portion of the present descriptioned. 
               
               
                   
                 SCMP tasks: 2.6.1 Establish platform 
               
               
                   
                 repositories; 2.6.2 Establish backup/recovery 
               
               
                   
                 scheme 
               
               
                 “Change Request 
                 Primary Responsibility: (see “Objects Included”) 
               
               
                 Tool” 
                 Enter the change request tool used for tracking 
               
               
                   
                 changes. If multiple tools are used, indicate this 
               
               
                   
                 and when each tool is used. Again, this is the 
               
               
                   
                 80% of the 80/20 rule. The exceptions (or 20%) 
               
               
                   
                 should be listed in the “Exceptions” portion of the 
               
               
                   
                 description later in the sheet, with that change 
               
               
                   
                 request tool portion of the present descriptioned. 
               
               
                   
                 SCMP tasks: 3.6.1 Define control groups 
               
               
                 “CM Unit/ 
                 The phases listed under the gray heading are the 
               
               
                 Environment” 
                 standard test phases; and the columns to the right 
               
               
                   
                 apply to the types listed in the “Objects 
               
               
                   
                 Included” field. Exceptions to that should 
               
               
                   
                 be listed separately in the “Exceptions” 
               
               
                   
                 portion of the description, with phases listed 
               
               
                   
                 below and processes listed to the right. These 
               
               
                   
                 headings can be changed to better fit the project&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 terminology (e.g. “Unit Test” instead of CT). 
               
               
                   
                 Each cell to the right of the listed phase has 
               
               
                   
                 guidelines for the process to be followed on the 
               
               
                   
                 project. Thc green WHO fields automatically 
               
               
                   
                 populate from the “Project Contacts” on the CM 
               
               
                   
                 Proj tab, according to program methodology and 
               
               
                   
                 CMM guidelines. However, these fields may be 
               
               
                   
                 modified to fit your particular project. 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Tab: CM Emer 
                 Emergency Fixes 
               
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Primary Responsibility: Development, Tech 
               
               
                   
                 Support 
               
               
                   
                 Emergency (EM) fixes are fixes that were 
               
               
                   
                 discovered in production, and need to be fixed 
               
               
                   
                 in production right away. Most of the time, EM 
               
               
                   
                 fixes go through brief testing (due to time 
               
               
                   
                 constraints), and are not migrated through all 
               
               
                   
                 environments. “Production Support” represents 
               
               
                   
                 the environment where these fixes are made and 
               
               
                   
                 tested - it is usually separate from the 
               
               
                   
                 development environment. 
               
               
                 Prod Support → 
                 Promotion/migration for all objects resulting from 
               
               
                 Production 
                 an emergency fix in production: 
               
               
                 Prod Support → CT 
                 Production Support (EM) to Production 
               
               
                 (manual move) 
                 Production Support (EM) to Component Test 
               
               
                   
                 (project should follow migration process defined 
               
               
                   
                 in “CM Appl” from this point) 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Tab: CM Doc 
                 Portion of the present description 
               
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Responsibility: Development, Test 
               
               
                   
                 Portion of the present description applies to 
               
               
                   
                 any/all portion of the present description 
               
               
                   
                 produced/updated for the project. For example, 
               
               
                   
                 designs, test conditions and scripts, test data, 
               
               
                   
                 support procedures, etc. 
               
               
                 WIP → Final 
                 Promotion/migration for all portion of the present 
               
               
                   
                 descriptions for the project: 
               
               
                   
                 Work in Progress → Final 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Tab. CM DB, Appl 
                 Database objects, Application objects 
               
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Responsibility: (Database objects) Tech Support; 
               
               
                   
                 (Application objects) Development, Test, 
               
               
                   
                 Operations 
               
               
                   
                 Database objects include anything related to the 
               
               
                   
                 storage of data and database objects and 
               
               
                   
                 functions: tables, views, roles, stored 
               
               
                   
                 procedures, etc. Application objects 
               
               
                   
                 include anything developed 
               
               
                   
                 specifically for the application: screens, windows, 
               
               
                   
                 programs (online, batch), libraries, etc. 
               
               
                 *indicates base 
                 Promotion/migration for database objects and 
               
               
                 migration level 
                 application objects to environments: 
               
               
                 CT → AT* 
                 Component Test to Assembly Test 
               
               
                 AT → PT* 
                 Assembly Test to Product Test 
               
               
                 PT → ORT 
                 Product Test to Operational Readiness Test 
               
               
                 PT → Training 
                 Product Test to Training 
               
               
                 ORT → Production* 
                 Operational Readiness Test to Production 
               
               
                 Production → Prod 
                 Production to Production Support 
               
               
                 Support 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Tab: CM Arch 
                 Architecture extensions 
               
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Architecture extensions are application-specific 
               
               
                   
                 additions to the existing application architecture 
               
               
                   
                 that are done by the Tech Support team. This does 
               
               
                   
                 not include common code developed by the 
               
               
                   
                 project team - that should be included in the CM 
               
               
                   
                 Appl tab. 
               
               
                   
                 Promotion/migration for architecture objects to 
               
               
                   
                 environments 
               
               
                 Architecture - owned 
                 (owned by Architecture Team) 
               
               
                 CT → AT/PT 
                 Component Test to Assembly/Product Test 
               
               
                 AT/PT → QA 
                 Assembly/Product Test to Quality Assurance 
               
               
                 AT/PT → Pilot 
                 Assembly/Product Test to Pilot 
               
               
                 AT/PT → Production 
                 Assembly/Product Test to Production 
               
               
                   
                 (platform development) 
               
               
                 Platform - owned 
                 (owned by platform development teams) 
               
               
                 CT → AT 
                 Component Test to Assembly Test 
               
               
                 AT → PT 
                 Assembly Test to Product Test 
               
               
                 PT → ORT 
                 Product Test to Operational Readiness Test 
               
               
                 PT → Training 
                 Product Test to Training 
               
               
                 ORT → Production 
                 Operational Readiness Test to Production 
               
               
                 Production → Prod 
                 Production to Production Support 
               
               
                 Support 
               
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Configuration Management Status Meeting 
               
               
                 Tab: Status Agenda: 
                 Agenda 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Definition 
                 Template agenda to guide discussion during a 
               
               
                   
                 Project Configuration Management status meeting 
               
               
                 Purpose 
                 A Project Configuration Management Status 
               
               
                   
                 Meeting should be held at the end of Assembly 
               
               
                   
                 Test, Product Test, and Implementation. The 
               
               
                   
                 primary goal is to ensure that the Project 
               
               
                   
                 Configuration Management Plan is being 
               
               
                   
                 followed for all changes, and also to give the 
               
               
                   
                 project a chance to identify areas for improvement 
               
               
                   
                 and act upon them during the project. 
               
               
                   
                 SCMP tasks: 3.6.1 Define control groups 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Tab: Compliance Chk 
                 Configuration Management Compliance Checklist 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Definition 
                 A checklist for projects to use to complete an 
               
               
                   
                 internal audit on their Configuration Management 
               
               
                   
                 tasks 
               
               
                 Purpose 
                 Responsibility: all project teams 
               
               
                   
                 Teams should perform internal audits periodically 
               
               
                   
                 during the project lifecycle to ensure that 
               
               
                   
                 processes are being followed, and that 
               
               
                   
                 Configuration Management tasks have been 
               
               
                   
                 completed according to SCM Policy. This may 
               
               
                   
                 also help the team to prepare for external 
               
               
                   
                 audits. Recommended checkpoints: after 
               
               
                   
                 Assembly Test, after Product Test. 
               
               
                   
                 SCMP tasks: 3.6.1 Define control groups 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Tab: Change Log 
                 Configuration Management Plan Change Log 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Definition 
                 Change log/audit trail for the Project 
               
               
                   
                 Configuration Management Plan itself. 
               
               
                 Purpose 
                 Responsibility: all project teams 
               
               
                   
                 Provide an audit trail for changes made to the 
               
               
                   
                 Project Configuration Management Plan after 
               
               
                   
                 it has been signed off. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     ISSUES TRACKER DATABASE 
     FIG. 83A illustrates a method  8300  for managing issues in an e-commerce environment. In operation  8302 , multiple types of information are received relating to a plurality of issues from a plurality of users. In operation  8304 , the types of information relating to the issues are displayed in a plurality of fields. Browsing of the information relating to each of the issues is allowed in operation  8306 . The displayed information is filtered in operation  8308  based on criterion which includes criterion selected by the users or a predetermined group of criterion for reporting purposes. 
     Optionally, the criterion may include the predetermined group of criterion for reporting purposes. Also, the fields may include a date each issue was created, the user that requested each issue, a status of each issue, a priority of each issue, a description of each issue, a person responsible for resolving each issue, a target date for resolving of each issue, and/or a date when each issue was resolved. 
     As an option, editing of the information relating to the issues may be allowed. As a further option, a first type of the information separate from a second type of the information may be displayed with editing of the second type of information only allowed upon authentication of an identity of an authorized user. As another option, the filtered, displayed material also may be printed. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     The following discussion provides an overview of the Issues Tracker Database for use on a ReTA engagement. The Issues Tracker is be used to report development, testing, architecture, and infrastructure problem and provide a means for team leaders and project managers to manage the issue resolution process. 
     Issue Lifecycle 
     1) New issues are created as they are encountered. 
     2) The project issue resolution administrator reviews issues and determines course of action. 
     3) Project management periodically review open issues and approve/reject additional investigation and resource requests. 
     4) Issues are either completed as either being closed or deferred for later action. 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Issue Responsibilities by Role 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Role 
                 Responsibilities 
                 Tool Section 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Team member 
                 Create a new Issue 
                 New Issue 
               
               
                 Project Lead 
                 Review new issues and assign 
                 Issue Maintenance 
               
               
                   
                 accordingly 
               
               
                   
                 Review status of opened issues 
               
               
                   
                 Issues that require change control 
               
               
                   
                 are forwarded into the Change 
               
               
                   
                 Control Process. 
               
               
                 Issue 
                 Tool Support 
                 Makes updates/ 
               
               
                 Tracker 
                   
                 changes to Issue 
               
               
                 Administrator 
                   
                 Tracker Database 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Tracker Overview 
     Main Window 
     FIG. 83B illustrates the Issue Tracker Main Screen  8330 . This screen provides navigation buttons such as a button  8332  for adding new SIRs, a button  8334  for viewing existing SIRs, a button  8336  for viewing/printing existing reports and a help button  8338 . 
     Creating a New Issue 
     From the Main Window  8330 , select the New button  8332 . The New Issue screen may be displayed. FIG. 84 illustrates the New Issue Screen  8400 . All issue requests with status of New can be reviewed. The status is shown in the Issue Status field  8402 . To look at other newly submitted issues, scroll through the record numbers  8404  (located in the bottom, left-hand corner). 
     To complete the form, do the following: 
     Select the appropriate Priority  8406 , Phase  8408 , Type  8410  and Originator  8412  from the list boxes. 
     Enter a title for the issue within the Summary entry field  8414 . 
     Enter a detailed description of the problem within the Description entry field  8416 . 
     Select the Close button  8418  to return to the main window. 
     Reviewing and Modifying Existing Issues 
     From the main window, select the View button  8334  of the Main Window  8330  shown in FIG.  83 B. This may display a window similar to the New Issue screen, however it is possible to scroll through all existing Issues using the Record control  8500  located in the lower left portion of the window. FIG. 85 illustrates this Modify Issue Screen  8502 . 
     To search for a specific Issue, click on the field containing the data to search by and then click on the Find Issue button  8504 . Enter your search criteria when the prompted. The resulting Issues should comply with the search criteria. Advance through the retrieved records using the Record control. 
     Team &amp; Project Lead Administration 
     Typically it may be the Team Lead&#39;s responsibility to review and assign Issues to individual developers. To do this, simply type within the desired fields or select the appropriate options from the list boxes. Pressing the Close button or advancing to another Issue may commit the changes. Pressing the Escape button may cancel changes. 
     Printing Reports 
     From the main window, select the Report button  8336  of the Main Window  8330  shown in FIG.  83 B. This may display the Report Selection Screen. FIG. 86 illustrates the Report Selection Screen  8600 . 
     Select the appropriate criteria for the desired reports and select the Display button  8602 . This may provide a view of the report from which it is possible to create printed copies of. To print a report, select the Print button  8604 . To return to the main window select the Close button  8606 . 
     PERFORMANCE MODELING 
     FIG. 87A illustrates a method  8700  for network performance modeling. Factors that influence a performance of a network are first identified in operation  8702 . In operation  8704 , a model is developed to simulate the performance of the network based on the identified factors. Operation of the network is simulated with the model in operation  8706  with the simulation being carried out using expected future loads. The network is then designed in operation  8708  based on results of the simulation in order to accommodate the expected future loads on the network. 
     The factors may include such things as transaction load, network load, network utilization, error rate, network usage profile, maximum utilization, peak transmission rate, peak transmission time, quantum, utilization spike, and/or benchmark. The factors may also include bottlenecking. Optionally, applications of the network may be designed to accommodate the expected future loads. Similarly, the simulation of the operation of the network with the model may include identifying initial response time estimates based on the expected future loads. 
     Further, the network may be a local area network (LAN). Network drivers, a network interface card, an Ethernet hub, an Ethernet bridge, a switching hub, a router, and a token ring hub of the network would be designed to accommodate the expected future loads. Alternatively, the network may be a wide area network (WAN) in which a router, a frame relay public data network, a gateway, and a front end processor of the network are designed to accommodate the expected future loads. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     The ReTA Performance Modeling portion of the present description outlines the evaluation process and Analysis of a performance modeling infrastructure. It may discuss the selection approach, the product requirements, and the evaluation of the products, in order to obtain a final recommendation. FIG. 87B illustrates the end to end process associated with Performance Modeling. Components include Performance Modeling Analysis  8730 , Product Evaluation  8732 , and Tool Recommendation  8734 . 
     Net-Centric and other advanced computing paradigms have brought about an entirely new generation of advanced business applications. These distributed applications place tremendous demands on the network. Corporate computing networks must endure the effects of increased usage, multiple protocols, heterogeneous networking hardware and software, a variety of application performance profiles, and a distributed user base. Designing and implementing high performance applications on distributed networks today can be challenging. This is especially true in regions that are characterised by limited WAN bandwidth, generally poor communication infrastructures, and distributed environments, such as EMEAI. 
     Moreover, end-user performance expectations are becoming increasingly more demanding, requiring the network to be designed, sized, and managed with performance in mind. New networking technologies are claiming confusing performance characteristics. Technology industry benchmarks provide only minimal insight into true effective performance. Performance measurement standards are currently in a state of flux. And performance management tools themselves may provide only limited assistance in predicting and monitoring network performance. 
     The result is a complicated situation for approaching, understanding, predicting, and analysing network performance in network intensive applications and computing infrastructures. This portion of the present description may identify the elements of network performance management, presents a network performance product evaluation, and outlines necessary network performance activities, strategies, and design considerations in order to produce a high level recommendation and implementation strategy. 
     Performance Management Principles 
     Basic Concepts 
     The term network performance management broadly covers many different concepts that are used to evaluate and improve the capabilities and utilization of network resources. This portion of the description provides a foundation for understanding network performance management concepts. Understanding and implementing these concepts promotes effective network performance management. Benefits of effective network performance management include: 
     Response time improvement 
     Reduction of telecommunications costs due to optimized line utilization 
     More flexibility in the application architecture 
     In order to achieve these benefits, effective network performance management requires the right application performance design, the right resources and technologies, and the right plans and approaches. 
     Network Performance Management involves several activities. These activities cover stages in the planning, designing, monitoring, analyzing, and tuning of networks. FIG. 88 illustrates the area  8800  of Effective Network Performance Management that occurs where the right application performance design  8802 , the right resources and technologies  8804 , and the right plans and approaches  8806  overlap. Effective network performance management requires people, processes, tools and knowledge. Effective network performance management yields the optimal performance of network resources in order to meet the business needs. 
     Network Performance Management Tools are designed to simulate, test, monitor, and analyze the different elements of network performance. Tool functions, categories, limitations, and numerous products are discussed in detail later in this portion of the present description. Note that tools at best provide only a component to successful network performance management. 
     Performance Measurement involves the determination of network performance based on metrics, such as those defined later in this portion of the description. Performance measurements are often needed to verify performance level agreements are met and to analyze bottlenecks in the network operation. Note that no single tool today can provide comprehensive end-to-end measurement of all components in distributed client/server networks. As there are a large number of components involved in today&#39;s corporate networks, detailed performance measurement can be both complicated as well as time consuming. This should be considered when defining performance agreements. Aids to performance measurement include software and hardware monitors. 
     A generic network performance analysis is presented towards the end of this portion of the description. This highlights the complexity involved in performance measuring. 
     Terms and Definitions 
     These terms describe network performance from a user perspective. A Bottleneck is the point in a system where capacity is lower than at surrounding points. In data communications networks there are normally multiple bottlenecks. A system or network is limited by the performance of the slowest bottleneck. 
     Price/Performance Index is a general term used to define the performance characteristics of a component relative to the cost. Generally, performance is considered directly proportional to price, the better the performance the higher the price. With the range of WAN service alternatives and advanced technologies today, it could be beneficial to investigate this index in detail. When analyzing price/performance indexes, it is important to have a clear definition of what performance is required. Often, performance increases more rapidly than price, thus a high performance ATM network may cost much less per megabit than a 64 Kbps X.25 connection. However, if only 64 Kbps of bandwidth is required, then the X.25 option may be much less expensive. For a given set of requirements there may normally be numerous options. The price of these options often varies widely depending on such factors as region and carrier strategy. 
     Response Time is the time from when the user presses a key to perform a function until the response appears on the screen. It is the cumulative result of all the individual response times of each of the network components, as well as the application and other components. Several network components are involved in aggregate response times. A response time analysis example below reveals the various factors of influence in a large client/server banking application. 
     The following table illustrates an Engagement Response Time Analysis. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 APPC 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 APPC 
                   
                 ACK 
                 Processing 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ACK 
                 Service 
                 delay 
                 of the 
               
               
                 Start- 
                   
                 delay 
                 execution 
                 (from 
                 response 
               
               
                 up of 
                 Load 
                 (from 
                 and 
                 gate- 
                 at the LAN 
               
               
                 an 
                 program 
                 CICS to 
                 message 
                 way 
                 and 
               
               
                 OS/2 
                 from 
                 gate- 
                 transport 
                 to  
                 workstation 
                 GUI 
               
               
                 Session 
                 disk 
                 way) 
                 time 
                 CICS) 
                 Level 
                 display 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 9% 
                 26% 
                 7% 
                 30% 
                 7% 
                 12% 
                 9% 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Reliability refers to the probability that a system may not fail during a given time. It is often expressed as Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF). 
     Serviceability is the length of time that is required to repair a network component. It is often expressed as Mean Time To Repair (MTTR). 
     Availability is the percentage of time that the system is available to users. It can be expressed in terms of the reliability and serviceability:        Availability   =     MTBF     MTBF   +   MTTR                       
     However, this formula does not account for two important aspects of availability: 
     Scheduled unavailability 
     Number of users affected 
     The impact of unscheduled outages can be significant. Likewise scheduled outages of shared network resources can also be significant. On any network, it is difficult to notify all users of all scheduled outages. Thus, for these users scheduled downtime is effectively unscheduled downtime. Also, many users or applications may not be willing or able to alter their schedules to that of the network. Therefore, availability should be analyzed in terms of both the unscheduled unavailability as well as the scheduled unavailability. 
     The number of users affected and the business impact of affecting those users should also be considered. If the area of impact is limited to a single workgroup, then outages may be more acceptable than for an entire office. 
     Network Terms 
     These terms describe the performance qualities of various network components. 
     Bandwidth is the rated speed of communications lines or links, normally expressed in bits per second (bps). This is typically the first factor that is considered in network performance management. A lack of adequate bandwidth decreases response times. Bandwidth is also referred to as line speed or, as a general term, the capacity of the system. 
     The following table outlines the bandwidth of common WAN links: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Bandwidth in 
               
               
                   
                 Bandwidth in Bits 
                 Bytes per Second 
               
               
                 Class 
                 per Second (bps) 
                 (Bps) 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 T1 
                 1.544 M 
                 193 K 
               
               
                 E1 
                 2.048 M 
                 256 K 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     In the table Mbps refers to one million bits per second and KBps refers to one thousand bytes per second. Performance analysis generally first requires converting bandwidths between bits and bytes to analyze application data throughput. 
     Latency is typically the second most important quality considered after bandwidth in performance analysis. Latency is the time delay from delivery of the first bit of the packet to the network until the receipt of the last bit of the packet at the destination. A satellite link may have a line speed of 512 Kbps, but a latency of half a second. This means that it takes half a second for a signal to travel from the sender to the satellite and then to the receiver. From a performance standpoint, latency may add a delay in the response time of all applications. Latency is particularly important to consider in interactive applications. In batch applications the latency may not be as critical. If a packet crosses the network in a relatively short period of time, it is said to have low latency. High latency occurs when packets take long periods to cross a network. Latency is also referred to as propagation delay and network response. Latency is often dependent on the type of data that is being transmitted. Data can be broken up into two types: isochronous and plesiochronous. Isochronous data has a Constant Bit Rate (CBR) and must be transmitted through regular discreet intervals such as voice and video. Plesiochronous data is not constant; it has a Variable Bit Rate (VBR). Examples of this type include file transfers and most types of LAN traffic. Note that although a voice transmission requires minimal bandwidth, it has a constant bit rate requiring low latency. 
     Serialization is a network quality that reveals the degree to which low bandwidth can cause high latency. When a network device, such as a switch or a router receives a packet, it reads in the whole packet then processes and forwards it. Low speed links may cause a delay, as the network device has to read in the packet in serial, process it, and then send it out in serial. In higher speed links, devices may be able to process packets faster, with less of a delay. Small packet sizes may also decrease the time it takes to read in a packet. This serialization is the delay that is caused while reading and sending the packet. 
     The following equation outlines the serialization time for a single link        ST   =       8                   bits   /   Byte     ×   Number                 of                   Bytes   /   Packet       BW                   ST   =     Serialization                 Time                 BW   =     Bandwidth                 in                 bits                 per                 second                           
     For example, the serialization time for a 512 byte packet is: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Bandwidth 
                 Serialization Time (ST) 
                 ST in seconds 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 9600 
                 bps 
                 427 
                 milliseconds 
                 .4 
                 seconds 
               
               
                 64 
                 Kbps 
                 62.5 
                 milliseconds 
                 .06 
                 seconds 
               
               
                 1.544 
                 Mbps 
                 2.65 
                 milliseconds 
                 .003 
                 seconds 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Serialization delay is more notable when a packet travels through multiple network devices (routers) to reach its destination. Each “hop” may have a serialization delay associated with it. The equation below represents the total serialization delay for a network:          Total                 serialisation                 delay     =       [       (     p   b     )          (     n   +   1     )       ]     +     (     r   b     )                     p   =     packet                 size                 n   =     number                 of                 nodes                 b   =     bandwidth                 of                 the                 line                 r   =     remaining                 number                 of                 bits                 to                 be                 delivered                 in                 mesage                           
     For example, if a 200 Kbit (25 KByte) file is transmitted through four nodes of an X.25 network composed of 56 Kbps trunks, using 1024 bit (128 Byte) packet sizes, the serialization delay would be:          3.64                 seconds     =       [       (     1024   56000     )          (     4   +   1     )       ]     +     (     198976   56000     )                     p   =     1024                 bits                   (     128                 bytes     )                   n   =     4                 nodes                 b   =     56000                 bits                 per                 second                 r   =       198976                 bits     =     200000   -   1024                             
     However, if a packet size of 200 Kbit (25 KByte) is used, the packet must be processed in entirely by each switch before it can be sent to the next switch, this causes a delay of:          17.86                 seconds     =       [       (     200000   56000     )          (     4   +   1     )       ]     +     (     0   56000     )                     p   =     200000                 bits                   (     25                 bytes     )                   n   =     4                 nodes                 b   =     56000                 bits                 per                 second                 r   =       0                 bits     =     200000   -   200000                             
     Since line speeds are generally much slower than processor speeds, the serialization delay at each node is a major component of network latency. Fragmenting user data into small packets introduces pipelining if packets pass through several nodes. 
     Pipelining is when multiple devices are each working on a part of the transfer. For example, multiple switches are simultaneously working on a different packet in the file transfer. This improves end-to-end response time, because the switches are working in parallel. 
     The calculations above assume that the time for the switch to process the packet is effectively zero. Although the line speeds are typically much less than the processing speeds, this assumption may not be valid for some environments. The processing time is normally different for different packet sizes. It takes longer to process larger packets. 
     Serialization delay can be a significant factor in designing large internetworks. There are different ways of decreasing serialization delays: 
     Decrease packet size 
     Increase bandwidth between switches 
     Increase bandwidth between customer equipment and switch 
     Decrease number of “hops” 
     Note that serialization can occur in switches as well as in any other devices that processes packets, such as routers or gateways. Serialization delays should be considered early in the network design phase. 
     Packet, Frame, Cell, Message, and Protocol Data Unit (PDU) all define a “fragment” of data. When applications send data across the network, the data is broken up into manageable pieces. Each of these terms describe these fragments. Technically, each term has a slightly different meaning, depending on its context. Unless otherwise noted, the term packet may be used generically to mean a “fragment” of data. 
     Overhead. Each of the data packets must contain addressing and other control information. From a performance perspective, this additional information is generally referred to as overhead. Overhead is generated at each of the different protocol layers that a packet passes through. Some of these layers correspond to the OSI Model. There may be other overhead associated with middleware that does not occupy a discreet OSI layer. 
     For example, a synchronous data connection uses 8 bits for each byte. An asynchronous connection also uses 8 bits for each byte as well as a start and a stop bit. An asynchronous connection therefore has 20% overhead before analyzing any of the upper layer protocols:            8                 bits                 of                 data         8                 bits                 of                 data     +     2                 bits                 overhead         =     80      %                 Throughput                 2                 bits                 of                 overhead         8                 bits                 of                 data     +     2                 bits                 overhead         =     20      %                 Overhead                     
     Each of the layers through which a packet passes adds another component of overhead to the packet. As shown below this can result in a significant amount of overhead. Each layer adds a header and possibly a trailer that contains information for the corresponding layer at the destination. FIG. 89 illustrates an example of overhead introduced at lower layers. Such layers include an application layer  8900 , a presentation layer  8902 , a session layer  8904 , a transport layer  8906 , a network layer  8908 , a data link layer  8910 , and a physical layer  8912 . 
     Inter-packet Gap is the time lapse between the sending of packets on the network. When data is packaged and overhead addressing and control data added, it is possible to send packets independently of other packets. The delay between sending packets is referred to as the inter-packet gap. Some protocols mandate delays between packets. From a performance perspective, this delay is considered negative. 
     For example, Ethernet requires that after a packet is transmitted by any station on the network, every station must wait a random amount of time before it can transmit. If there are many stations on the network and two stations wait the same amount of time, a collision may occur when they both try to transmit. The collision may force all stations to wait again, thus degrading performance. The effective throughput of Ethernet is therefore much less than its rated bandwidth of 10 Mbps. 
     Traffic Profile refers to the combination of protocols and applications that a network supports. The traffic profile has significant effects on network performance. For example, batch file transfers typically do not perform well when mixed with voice over the network. Large batch file transfers tend to require much of the available bandwidth. Voice communication only requires a small portion of the bandwidth, but continuously. If a file transfer is delayed by a second, the effect is negligible. However, if a voice communication has even short delays, it is disconcerting to the users. Traffic profile is also referred to as traffic mix. 
     Packet Size is the length of each packet. Generally, it is a configurable parameter. This includes both a data portion and an overhead portion. Overhead is generally a fixed size for each packet, thus larger packets have a lower proportion of overhead. Packet size also has other performance effects. To lower the overhead proportion, the largest packet size should be used. However, there are several reasons for using a smaller packet size, such as to decrease the serialization delay. There are many other factors influencing the optimal packet size. 
     Message Size is the length of messages sent by the applications. For example, an interactive terminal application normally sends relatively short messages, each consisting of a single keystroke, whereas a client/server file transfer application might send larger messages each consisting of a portion of the file. Ideally, from a performance perspective, message size should be configured to fit within the data area of the packet size or integer multiples of the size of the data area. 
     The message size has a direct affect on performance and response time. It is normally a configurable parameter within the application accessing the network. Identifying the optimal message size for an application and network is a key activity in performance management. The example below illustrates the effect message size and number of users has on response time. 
     Effective Throughput is the “true” bandwidth that is available to an application after all the overhead, inter-packet gaps, and other factors are considered. The effective throughput can be used to identify the performance of different components. For example, the effective throughput of an Ethernet LAN is different from the effective throughput of a file transfer over an Ethernet LAN. Effective throughput is always much lower than the rated bandwidth. The effective throughput of Ethernet and FDDI are much lower than their rated bandwidth as illustrated in the table below. Note that the effective throughput is dependent on the network configuration, however, these numbers represent an average. The following table illustrates Effective Throughput. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Transmission Media 
                 Effective Throughput 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Ethernet 
                 300 
                 KBps 
               
               
                   
                 FDDI 
                 2 
                 MBps 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     These are the effective throughputs of the lower level media services, the effective throughput of the applications using these services may be much less, because of additional higher layer overhead, inter-packet gaps, and other delays discussed above. For example, one test of an FTP file transfer over a shared Ethernet provided only 15% effective throughput versus rated bandwidth. 
     When discussing bandwidth and other performance related terms it is important to clearly define them and obtain agreement between project members and client. For example, it should be determined if the client is referring to absolute bandwidth, the effective throughput of the media service, the effective throughput of the application, or something else. 
     The “absolute” bandwidth of FDDI is 250 Mbps. Theoretically, this is accurate, because the actual clock speed of FDDI is 125 MHz. Each of the two FDDI rings can be used simultaneously, making it possible to send 250 Mbps. However, FDDI is commonly said to have a bandwidth of 100 Mbps. This is because only one ring is used in practice to transfer data and 25% of that is overhead. FDDI uses a 4/5 signaling scheme, it takes five bits to represent four bits of data, a 25% signaling overhead. 
     Network Metrics 
     These are common terms used when measuring the network performance. 
     Transaction Load is the number of bytes of data that are required to process a business transaction, including all associated overhead. The load includes both the number of bytes sent in a request as well as the number of bytes sent in response. In order to determine the transaction load, the request frequency must be determined over several time periods. The transaction load is a function of the number of bits per time period. The following equation offers a mathematical representation of a transaction load.        TL   =       ∑     n   =   1     x                       S   n          f     n        (   t   )                           x   =     Total                 number                 transactions                   S   n     =     Size                 of                   transaction        (   n   )                       f   n     =     Number                 of                 transactions                 of                   type        (   n   )                     at                   time        (   t   )                               
     For example, the transaction load generated by transaction T during time period P is: 
     
       
           TL =Sizeof( T )*Number of  T&#39;s  during  P   
       
     
     The sum of all the transaction loads for a given period is the total transaction load. Each transaction for each application must be analyzed to determine its size and the number of times it occurs during each period. This estimate is a valuable input into the capacity planning and performance planning activities. 
     Network Load is a function of the total transaction load. It can be expressed with the following equation. 
     
       
           NL=TL /Period 
       
     
     The network load is a function directly proportional to transaction load for a specific period. The following example considers loads during the time period between 8:00 am and 9:00 pm: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Size in 
                 No. Of 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Transaction 
                 bits 
                 Transactions 
                 TL 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Login 
                 100000 
                 100 
                 10,000,000 
               
               
                   
                 Query 
                 100000 
                 100 
                 10,000,000 
               
               
                   
                 Response 
                 400000 
                 100 
                 40,000,000 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Total Transaction Load (in bits) 
                 60,000,000 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Based on the above data, network load would then be: 
     16,667 bps=60,000,000 bits/3600 seconds per hour 
     Network Utilization is a function of network load. It represents the percent utilization of the network. It is expressed mathematically as: 
     
       
           NU=NL /Bandwidth 
       
     
     Using the example above for a 64 Kbps link, the network utilization would be: 
     26%=16,667 bps/64,000 bps 
     Error Rate measures the effective accuracy of the network transmission. This rate is directly dependent on the WAN service and LAN infrastructure. In addition, each country&#39;s telecommunications infrastructure influences error rates. Error rates normally vary with time of day. 
     A Network Usage Profile can be represented graphically by network utilization versus time. FIG. 90 is a graph depicting a Network Usage Profile showing a percent utilization at times of the day. Developing and analyzing a network utilization graph can help assess network performance. Comparing network utilization graphs over time highlights the traffic growth. This can be used to predict future network performance and identify problem areas. 
     Maximum Utilization is the maximum network utilization that a network can effectively provide. Network services provide a maximum utilization that is less than the rated bandwidth. For example, the maximum utilization of Ethernet may be 30% for some network configurations. 
     Peak Transmission Rate is the highest network utilization level. 
     Peak Transmission Time is the time that has the highest network utilization. The network peak transmission time and the peak network utilization must be considered when sizing the network. 
     Quantum is the length of the peak transmission time. It is commonly referred to as “peak periods”. It is also valuable to determine these periods for network sizing. In applications where there are “bursts” of traffic it may be necessary to consider a smaller quantum to reflect true network requirements. 
     A Utilization Spike can occur when network usage increases dramatically within a short period of time. For example, one cause of this occurs when multiple batch jobs are all set to run at midnight. This may cause a spike when all the jobs attempt to begin operation and transmit data across the network. LANs can experience spikes in the morning hours when users typically log on. Applications such as NFS also are common causes of network spikes, specifically referred to as NFS spikes. 
     Benchmark refers to an actual performance level experienced in a business environment. Benchmarking is a common activity in the design, analysis, and installation phases. It assists in understanding the anticipated performance levels before production rollout. 
     Performance Analysis 
     FIG. 91 illustrates a Network Layout with several network components labeled (a, b, c, etc. and corresponding to the example below). The following example illustrates the first step in network performance analysis, identifying the factors influencing performance. A full network performance analysis requires the following procedures: 
     Identifying factors that may influence the performance of a system 
     Developing a model to simulate a network&#39;s performance characteristics 
     Modeling the network based on expected loads 
     Extracting model results in order to plan and design network and applications 
     This example identifies only some network components and performance elements. However, it is intended to highlight the complexity involved in network performance analysis. 
     LAN Components 
     A. Network drivers—This is software within the workstation that controls network access. 
     B. Network Interface Card (NIC)—This provides physical access to the network. It consists of a hardware card and software drivers. 
     C. Ethernet hub—This is a central point or concentrator of network connections. This Ethernet LAN is physically configured in a star topology and logically configured as a bus topology. 
     D. Ethernet bridge—This segments traffic based on the Ethernet address. 
     E. Switching hub—This is configured in a star topology. 
     G. Router—Ethernet interface. 
     K. Router—Token Ring interface. 
     L. Token Ring hub—This is also known as a Media Access Unit (MAU). The Token Ring is physically configured in a star topology, but logically configured as a ring. 
     O. Ethernet—This is configured physically and logically in a bus topology. 
     WAN Components 
     H. Router—CPU. 
     I. Router—Frame Relay interface. 
     J. A Frame Relay Public Data Network (PDN)—This provides the WAN service to connect one location to another. A service provider supplies the PDN. Examples of service providers are: the national PTT (for example, France Telecom), British Telecom, AT&amp;T, Sprint, or the local RBOC. In this network the Frame Relay PDN forms the backbone and the WAN link (n) is a link to a branch office. 
     N. Another form of wide area link—This is a dedicated circuit. 
     Other Components 
     F. This is a gateway that connects the routed internetwork to the SNA-based mainframe. 
     M. This is the Front End Processor (FEP)—This handles communications for the network. 
     Performance Example 
     Measuring network performance can be difficult even in the simple network described here. For example, consider a user in Atlanta entering an order request from their workstation to the Chicago mainframe order fulfillment database. 
     The actions described here are meant to be representative user actions. For the sake of simplicity, some actions have been omitted. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Performance 
               
               
                 Action 
                 Component 
                 Implication 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 User A presses &lt;enter&gt; on their 3270 terminal 
                 User 
                   
               
               
                 emulation program to send the order request to the 
               
               
                 mainframe. 
               
               
                 The terminal emulation program sends a message 
                 Network 
                 Latency 
               
               
                 with the screen data to the network software 
                 drivers (a) 
               
               
                 running on the workstation. 
               
               
                 Message is inserted into a packet with header and 
                 Network 
                 Latency, Overhead 
               
               
                 control information addressed to the SNA 
                 Drivers (a) 
               
               
                 Gateway. 
               
               
                 This packet is then placed into a packet with an 
                 Network 
                 Latency 
               
               
                 Ethernet header. 
                 Drivers, NIC 
               
               
                   
                 (a, b) 
               
               
                 This Ethernet packet is then sent over the 10 
                 NIC, LAN (b, 
                 Latency, Bandwidth 
               
               
                 Mbps Ethernet LAN to the SNA Gateway. 
                 c) 
               
               
                 The Ethernet bridge receives the packet, 
                 Bridge (d) 
                 Latency 
               
               
                 determines that it needs to be forwarded on and 
               
               
                 sends it to the Ethernet switch. 
               
               
                 The Ethernet switch receives the packet, 
                 Ethernet 
                 Latency, Bandwidth 
               
               
                 determines which device it is destined for and 
                 Switch (e) 
               
               
                 sends the packet directly to the SNA Gateway. 
               
               
                 The SNA Gateway receives the Ethernet packet 
                 Gateway (f) 
                 Latency 
               
               
                 and strips the Ethernet headers. 
               
               
                 The SNA Gateway determines the message is 
                 Gateway (f) 
                 Latency 
               
               
                 destined for the mainframe and places the 
               
               
                 message in a TCP/IP packet directed to the 
               
               
                 Mainframe. 
               
               
                 SNA Gateway network software sends packet to 
                 Gateway NIC, 
                 Latency, Bandwidth 
               
               
                 Atlanta router via the Ethernet switch. 
                 LAN (f, e) 
               
               
                 Router Ethernet interface receives packet, strips 
                 Router 
                 Latency, Bandwidth 
               
               
                 Ethernet header, and sends to router CPU for 
                 Ethernet 
               
               
                 processing. 
                 Interface (g) 
               
               
                 The packet&#39;s TCP/IP address is compared to a 
                 Router CPU 
                 Latency, Bandwidth 
               
               
                 routing table that the router maintains. Router 
                 (h) 
               
               
                 CPU decides to send the packet out via Frame 
               
               
                 Relay interface. 
               
               
                 The TCP/IP packet is packaged into a Frame 
                 Router Frame 
                 Latency, Bandwidth 
               
               
                 Relay packet with the appropriate Frame Relay 
                 Relay 
               
               
                 address. 
                 Interface (i) 
               
               
                 The packet is then switched through the Frame 
                 Frame Relay 
                 Latency, Bandwidth 
               
               
                 Relay network and delivered to the Chicago 
                 Network (j) 
               
               
                 router. 
               
               
                 The Chicago router Frame Relay interface strips 
                 Router Frame 
                 Latency, Bandwidth 
               
               
                 the Frame Relay header information and sends 
                 Relay 
               
               
                 TCP/IP packet to the router CPU. 
                 Interface (i) 
               
               
                 Chicago router CPU refers to its routing tables 
                 Router CPU 
                 Latency, Bandwidth 
               
               
                 and determines that the packet is destined for its 
                 (h) 
               
               
                 Token Ring interface. 
               
               
                 Chicago router&#39;s Token Ring interface adds a 
                 Router Token 
                 Latency, Bandwidth 
               
               
                 Token Ring header and sends the packet to the 
                 Ring interface 
               
               
                 FEP. 
                 (k) 
               
               
                 Packet crosses the Token Ring MAU to get to the 
                 MAU/LAN (l) 
                 Latency, Bandwidth 
               
               
                 FEP. 
               
               
                 The FEP receives the packet, strips the TCP/IP or 
                 FEP (m) 
                 Latency, Bandwidth 
               
               
                 LU6.2 header information and forwards the 
               
               
                 message to the mainframe. 
               
               
                 The mainframe processes the message and sends 
                 All 
                 All 
               
               
                 the response back to user A reversing all the steps 
               
               
                 above. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     This simple action of updating a screen illustrates that there are numerous network components that can affect performance. For example, if there is a collision on one of the Ethernets, the network driver software must pause and try again. The routers have to process the packet and may be slow to forward it. The Frame Relay network has much lower bandwidth than the Ethernets and it may take longer to send the packet. If the Frame Relay becomes congested it may drop the packet entirely and then it would have to be retransmitted. The gateway or the FEP may be slow and may be processing other packets. 
     The goal in a network performance analysis is to: 
     Identify factors of influence 
     Identify the bottlenecks 
     Develop initial response time estimates based on expected load 
     Applications 
     The business needs of the applications should drive the network performance level requirements. The applications should be considered when analyzing network performance requirements. Applications can be designed to make optimal use of the network. This chapter offers unique application considerations for several network intensive applications. 
     Effective throughput of the applications, user response time, and availability are key factors in analyzing network performance. These factors determine how the business user views the performance of the network. Most other performance characteristics may be attributes of these factors. 
     Observations 
     The following general observations should be considered about performance management. 
     Effective network performance management can be a complicated process. Networks using the same technologies, the same standards, and the same designs can have three different performance profiles. Each client therefore has a unique situation to address performance. 
     A key success criteria is to mutually understand the terms, concepts, and issues. Network performance is often defined by many different terms and benchmarks. These terms and benchmarks are often defined by vendors attempting to differentiate their products. Likewise, the performance issues can be complicated and it is valuable to have client awareness. 
     Network performance management is an iterative process. The optimal network configuration may change as the applications, network usage, technologies, and procedures change. Network performance management must be ongoing before, during, and after installation. Any change to network applications or usage can greatly influence network performance. 
     Identifying “bottlenecks” is a key to obtaining maximum network performance. 
     The OSI Reference Model can be used to understand how each of the layers adds another level of overhead. 
     Client awareness of potential performance issues early in the engagement is key to providing effective network performance management. 
     ReTA Product Evaluation 
     Network performance management tools provide various performance planning, designing and managing capabilities. These tools range from extremely complex to rudimentary in functions and operations. Tools from all network performance management categories and complexity levels are presented in this portion of the description. 
     State of the Market 
     Legacy systems performance management tools are relatively well developed and provide a robust set of tools that manage all aspects of mainframe systems and communication networks. However, these existing legacy tools do not provide the same capabilities today for distributed networks supporting client/server and multimedia applications. It is important to understand the tool market before selecting an NPM tool. The state of the tool market can be summarized as follows: 
     The client/server tools do not provide the mature and robust functionality of the legacy systems tools. 
     Distributed systems are generally based on multiple vendor products and thus require management tools from a variety of vendors for full network performance management. Over the next few years, this situation may change as vendors cooperate and standardize through such associations as the Universal Measurement Architecture (UMA). 
     The major legacy system management vendors are migrating their current products onto client/server platforms or developing new products to provide comprehensive tools that meet the different client/server and distributed environment needs. 
     A number of different tools must be used to perform the full suite of network performance management functions in modern corporate networks. These include measuring, testing, monitoring, and simulating tools. 
     Tools provide only limited and questionable information to network performance management personnel. 
     It is difficult to classify tools into categories, as features and categories overlap. 
     Tool Categories 
     There are several network performance management related tools on the market today. The top four tool categories are: network traffic analysis  9200 , drawing and documentation  9202 , baseline and discovery  9204 , and modeling and simulation  9206 . FIG. 92 illustrates how the four tool categories relate to each other. 
     Network Traffic Analysis 
     A traffic analysis tool provides insight into the traffic patterns on a data network. It collects data, analyzes it, decodes the information and summarizes information in graphical and/or report format. 
     Recommendation 
     A protocol analyzer is the most versatile type of network analysis tool. It is a key tool for network baselining, testing, troubleshooting, and monitoring. Every Network Solutions analyst and consultant should be familiar with and have access to this type of tool. Software based protocol analyzers do not require any specialized hardware and therefore are economical enough for a wide distribution within the global Network Solutions practice. 
     Sniffer Basic from Network Associates is the best software based protocol analyzer evaluated for this project. It provides a full range of features and had the most detailed decode and filtering features of the tools tested. Its user interface is both user friendly and elegant. The same user interface may be used for the next release of Network Associates&#39; high-end protocol analyzer Sniffer Pro, which is the most widely used protocol analyzer. Personnel may be able to build protocol analysis skills while using Sniffer Basic, which may be directly transferable to Sniffer Pro, the analyzer they are most likely to encounter at a client site. In addition Network Associates offers upgrade protection for Sniffer Basic so that in those situations where a higher-end tool is required, it can be upgraded to Sniffer Pro without sacrificing the investment in Sniffer Basic. Sniffer Basic should be purchased in quantities so that a copy can be loaned to Network Solutions projects that request a copy. 
     Tivoli from IBM is the first real enterprise security solution allowing the consistent definition, implementation and enforcement of security policy across the entire network computing environment—from data center to the desktop. In all the tools tested, Tivoli takes the most hands-off approach to native operating system security however, customization is required based on the size of one&#39;s infrastructure. Tivoli from IBM offers a full range of product that gather control over system resources (files, directories and system processes) in adds them into a common database, which is abstracted from the host operating system. 
     Optimal&#39;s Application Expert is a unique product that can significantly increase the speed at which application benchmark and performance testing can be accomplished. It can be used to quickly capture all of the application data needed for network capacity and performance analysis. It also provides a simple analytical response time prediction and “what-if” features. Application Expert is a focused tool that would only be used during the testing phase of a project. 
     Baselining and Discovery 
     Baselining and discovery tools are used to get information about the current state of an existing network for a network baseline. Baseline analysis is starting point for all types of network analysis. It can be used to determine the “normal” state of the network, as a benchmark to analyze troubleshooting data against, a reference point for historical trend analysis and a source of network portion of the present description. Baselining tools generally collect network traffic statistics and produce reports which can be used for network portion of the present description, troubleshooting, simulation and management. Discovery tools generally collect network topology and inventory information in the form of graphical, textual, or mathematical representations of the network. They are used to populate network drawings, create network models for simulation and generate inventory data. Baselining and discovery tools collect data about the status of network from varying sources including remote monitoring agents, traffic analysis tools, network management platforms, inventory tools and directly from the network. 
     Recommendation 
     Because most of these tools are tied to specific tools in other tool categories, the recommendation in this category is driven by the recommendations in the other categories. Comnet Baseliner and Optimal Surveyor are both associated with simulation tools. They promise help to create more accurate network models in less time, which would justify their purchase with the associated simulation tool. However, since a simulation tool has not been recommended for the networking tool kit these tools can not be recommended at this time either. NetSuite Professional Audit is a very competent discovery tool but due to its price and the lack of versatility of its associated drawing tool it is not recommended for the networking tool kit. 
     Modeling and Simulation 
     Modeling and simulation tools create a mathematical model of a network from models of network components. A simulation engine then uses statistical representations of workload as inputs to the model and performs calculations to simulate the network over a period of time. These tools are used to test the viability of new network designs, troubleshoot existing networks and predict the effects of changes to existing networks. 
     Network modeling and simulation is a very important function that allows network designers to analyze the performance of applications running on a network before networking hardware or application software is purchased or implemented. It decreases the risk for implementation of new network applications by giving designers and decision makers accurate information about how new applications or design changes may effect the performance of the network. As the demand for business critical client/server and intranet applications grows, so may the demand for network simulation. It is important to develop the skills and processes needed for cost effective network simulation so that it is ready to meet the demand of clients as they grow. 
     Consulting firms are in a unique position to leverage these expensive network simulation tools and the skilled employees required to use them across many client IT projects thus driving the cost of these services down to a level that allows simulation to become viable for a wide range of IT projects. 
     The recommendation in this tool category is dependent on how the tool is used and what type of distribution is planned for it. The first alternative is to use the tool to supplement and speed the capacity analysis that is already being done on most projects. This type of use would dictate a wide distribution to a large number of analysts and consultants. The key characteristics of a tool for this use would be versatility, ease of use, laptop compatibility and economical price. Analytical modeling tools come close to this description but none of the tools evaluated would be well suited to this type of distribution due to high price and limited network and traffic modeling functionality. A second alternative is to use the tool to build deep simulation skills within the practice and provide new simulation and modeling services to our client services profile. This type of usage would dictate the use of a robust discrete events simulation tool for accuracy and detailed results. Due to the complexity of the discrete events simulation tool distribution, a core group of skilled users would be required to provide these services. The most important characteristics for a tool under this scenario would be accuracy, size of the component model library and capability to import network data from other tools. 
     The most benefit can be derived from the second alternative expanding the service offerings of Network Solutions to include Network Simulation. This approach would lend it self to the selection of a discrete events simulation tool that is accurate and capable of modeling a wide range of networks like Comnet III or Opnet Planner. However to successfully leverage this type of tool, deep skills in simulation, which take time to grow, would be necessary. It is not cost effective to buy an expensive tool of this type up front. To bridge the knowledge gap, relationships should be built and leveraged with one or more tool vendors to provide simulation services and experience for project teams while the deep skills necessary for effective use of these tools are developed internally. These tools can then be reevaluated from a skilled user&#39;s perspective within the framework of client services offerings. 
     Development of a core skills group to develop deep simulation skills, processes and client services would be an appropriate step. Group members would be responsible for the selection and maintenance of tools to provide simulation services. As well as developing modeling and simulation processes and methodologies. Formalization of a simulation skill group would enable greater communication between team members for sharing of experience and techniques which would lead to the development of deeper skills. It would also provide a formal channel for assessment of simulation skills. The focus of the skills team would diminish the need for ease of use and hardware compatibility allowing the team to choose an industrial strength simulation tool. 
     ReTA Tool Summary 
     For performance-modeling and network management purposes, one wants to be able to produce meaningful reports that describe how a metric is trending relative to a baseline, as discussed earlier on in this portion of the present description. For the most critical services elements one may examine such report every day or once a week. Time may not allow one to verify every measured element with such frequency, so one needs some mechanism by which one is alerted when a particular metric has changed in a significant manner. This is achieved by means of thresholds and alarms. A threshold is a baseline set to a level of the metrics at which one wants to become aware of trends in the metric. 
     When a threshold is exceeded, one wants to be notified by means of an alarm, e-mail, page or other “pushed” indicators. SNMP has the capability to send traps from devices in a network to a network management system. This is normally used to notify when a line is down or a specific device is not responding, however is can also send alerts when a certain device is not responding. 
     Other mission critical functions when selecting proper performance tools for any given infrastructure are: 
     Easy to use/easy to deploy 
     Report Generating 
     Proactive Management 
     Remote Management 
     Traffic Monitoring 
     Node Monitoring 
     Server Management 
     Scalability 
     Focus was given to the top two performance modeling products. 
     The products selected above are recognized as the best currently available. While there are some sixty performance products on the market, only a small handful has been reviewed by the major technical journals. Russell Schnurr of the Gartner Groups recognizes the aforementioned products as being best of bread based on market share and interoperability. 
     PVCS DESCRIPTION &amp; USAGE 
     FIG. 93A illustrates a method  9300  for managing software modules during development. A software module is stored in a development folder in operation  9302 . A copy of the software module is checked out in operation  9304  by recording a name of a user and preventing any other user from altering the software module while the software is checked out. The copy of the software module is then checked in operation  9306  after work is complete on the software module. In operation  9308 , the software module is stored in a testing folder upon the software module being checked in and work on the software module being complete. The software module is tested in operation  9310  and stored in a production folder in operation  9312  if the software module succeeds during testing. 
     A copy of the software module may be archived prior to storing the software module in the testing folder. Also, the software module may be locked prior to testing. 
     Optionally, the software module may be stored in the development folder if the software module fails during testing. Also, the present invention may ensure that the testing folder and the production folder include a latest version of the software module. Further, user actions relating to the software module may be tracked so that a history of the user actions may be reported. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     Description 
     This portion of the present description details the use of PVCS for migration control within a project environment. The main objective of migration control is to manage the modules developed for a project. The migration process manages the development effort of multiple PVCS Users, by controlling the versions of source code as it moves from development to production. 
     The purpose of this portion of the present description is to satisfy the following criteria: 
     Describe the migration control process for the development effort 
     Define PVCS roles and responsibilities 
     Portion of the present description the PVCS configurations for the UNIX and NT environments 
     Explain the promotion model for the UNIX and NT environments 
     Highlight the features and functionality of the PVCS migration control tool 
     Detailed Migration Control Process 
     Migration Control Environment 
     The Development Architecture team designs the PVCS environment to manage the development effort. All modules under development (including database schema and object scripts; static HTML and images; Active Server Pages; JavaScript and style sheets; Interface Definition Language; Java source code; Rose Models; designs and supporting portion of the present description) should be version controlled and migrated using the PVCS migration process. 
     The PVCS repository can be located on any UNIX server available to the development effort. This repository may contain the latest embodiments of all developed code for both applications and architecture. 
     Detailed Migration Control Process Flow 
     FIG. 93B illustrates the PVCS Migration Flow, i.e., depicts the Migration Control process flow for the development environment. This diagram also shows a typical promotion model for the process. The three levels in the promotion model are development (DEV)  9330 , test (TEST)  9332 , and production (PROD)  9334 . The following discussion is organized by promotion level. 
     Development Level—DEV 
     When a PVCS User creates or modifies a module, he/she uses the PVCS client application to check out the module from the repository. The PVCS User works on the module in the specified working directory on the UNIX server. 
     During the development cycle, the PVCS User has privileges to check the code in and out of the repository as necessary. It is the responsibility of the PVCS Lead to ensure that the PVCS tool is used properly by the PVCS Users. 
     The first step in making a module update is to use PVCS and check out a “writable with a lock” copy of the module. This option ensures that only the user who checked out the module can make modifications. When the file is checked out, PVCS moves a copy of the file into the development, working directory. 
     When the development work is completed and the module passes unit tests, the PVCS User checks the modified code back into the repository. The PVCS User asks the PVCS lead to promote the module to the test environment (TEST). The promotion process archives the latest version of the file and places the module in the test-working directory. A promotion from a development level is not allowed until the module is checked into the repository. 
     The PVCS Lead tracks modules ready for promotion. The PVCS Lead checks out and locks the modules that need to be migrated. A trial migration is performed to ensure that everything works as expected. Once this is complete, the modules are promoted from Development (DEV) to the Test (TEST) promotion level. 
     In summary, the roles within the DEV promotion level are: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Role 
                 Actions 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 PVCS User 
                 Checks out module into DEV 
               
               
                   
                 Checks in module to the repository when work 
               
               
                   
                 is completed 
               
               
                   
                 Conducts unit testing on modules 
               
               
                   
                 If passed, requests PVCS Lead to promote 
               
               
                 PVCS Lead 
                 Promotes DEV modules to TEST 
               
               
                 PVCS Administrator 
                 None 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Testing Level—TEST 
     During the string and beyond testing, the tester or the PVCS User uses PVCS to check out the modules. The PVCS User works on the module either on their local workstation or in a designated location on a shared network server. 
     To execute a successful test, the latest versions of the modules must be located in the test directory. It is the responsibility of the PVCS Lead to ensure that the test directory contains the latest versions of the modules. 
     If the tests are successful, the PVCS Lead is notified to promote the module to the PROD promotion level. The PVCS Lead checks out and locks the modules that need to be migrated. A trial migration is performed to ensure that everything works as expected. Once this is complete, the modules are promoted from the test directory to the production directory. 
     If the test is not successful, the modules requiring additional modifications must be demoted to the DEV level. A demotion of the module places it into directory. The PVCS User checks out the module in order to make the required changes. Once the developer completes the modifications, it is checked back in and the PVCS Lead is notified that the module is ready for promotion. The PVCS Lead can then promote the module to the TEST promotion level. 
     In summary, the roles within the TEST promotion level are: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Role 
                 Actions 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 PVCS User 
                 Performs tests 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Notifies the PVCS Lead for promote 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Notifies the PVCS Lead for demote 
               
               
                   
                 PVCS Lead 
                 Ensures the latest versions are in TEST 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Notifies all PVCS Users to perform tests 
               
               
                   
                   
                 if passed, promote to PROD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 if failed, demote to DEV 
               
               
                   
                 PVCS Administrator 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Production Level—PROD 
     The production promotion level (PROD) is the highest promotional level. This level contains modules that are thoroughly tested and ready to be moved into the production environment. When files are migrated to the PROD level, they are placed in the specified working directory a network server. 
     When a module gets promoted to this level, it is the responsibility of the PVCS Lead to ensure that the production directory contains the latest versions of the modules. If a change is required to a module in PROD, this module must be demoted to the DEV level for further modifications. 
     In summary, the roles within the PROD promotion level are: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Role 
                 Actions 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 PVCS User 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 PVCS Lead 
                 If change required, demote to DEV 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Ensures the latest versions in PROD 
               
               
                   
                 PVCS Administrator 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Migration Control Process Roles and Responsibilities 
     The Development Architecture team identified the three roles for the Migration Control process. These roles are PVCS User, PVCS Lead, and PVCS Administrator. This portion of the description defines each of the roles in relation to the Migration Control process. 
     PVCS User 
     Description: 
     The PVCS Users are all of the developers currently assigned to the project. In addition, persons involved in the application design effort should also be considered users as they may be potentially modifying design deliverables and related portion of the present description. 
     Responsibilities: 
     Understand the working directories for the Build environment 
     Inform PVCS Lead when modules need to be checked in, checked out or promoted 
     Communicate issues with the PVCS Lead and PVCS Administrator to ensure that all problems are promptly addressed 
     Understand how PVCS controls the development lifecycle. 
     PVCS Lead 
     Description: 
     The PVCS Lead is a designated developer who coordinates the migration of modules from development to test and from test to production. The PVCS Lead works with each Cell Lead (lead developer) to determine when the modules are ready to be promoted. 
     Responsibilities: 
     Understand the working directories for the Build environment 
     Communicate issues with the PVCS Users and PVCS Administrators to ensure that all problems are promptly addressed 
     Ensure all modules are controlled by PVCS 
     Portion of the present description all unsuccessful migration attempts 
     Perform check in, check out, promote and demote functions 
     Describe changes with version labels 
     Ensure modules are compiled as expected 
     PVCS Administrator 
     Description: 
     The PVCS Administrator works with the PVCS Lead to ensure that the migration process works as designed. This person is responsible for the installation, configuration, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the PVCS application. The PVCS Administrator portion of the present descriptions the above activities. 
     Responsibilities: 
     Train PVCS Users and PVCS Leads on the tool 
     Communicate with the PVCS Users and PVCS Leads to ensure that all problems are promptly addressed 
     Authorize, supervise, coordinate, and implement the actual migration design 
     Test the configuration of the tool 
     Work with the PVCS Leads to portion of the present description all unsuccessful migrations 
     Portion of the present description all practices/lessons learned from the process 
     Be aware of time schedules for critical times (e.g. server maintenance) 
     Grant appropriate access to PVCS Users and PVCS Leads 
     PVCS Migration Control Tool Description 
     PVCS Overview 
     Intersolv&#39;s PVCS Version Manager can be used to implement the migration control process. This product may be referred to as PVCS throughout this portion of the present description. PVCS structures the development environment by providing the ability to access previous versions of the modules, create different releases of development code, and produce reports to track development effort. This portion of the description may highlight key features of the software and specify the software configuration for the UNIX and NT environments. 
     PVCS Key Features 
     The main features of PVCS are: 
     Project Organization: PVCS allows project teams to organize files by project. 
     Logical Views: PVCS provides a facility to create different views of project files without having multiple copies of physical files. 
     Reverse Delta Management: PVCS keeps one copy of the current file and then stores changes to the files in previous revisions. If an older revision is needed, PVCS backs out changes starting with the current one. 
     Version Reconstruction: PVCS allows users to assign version labels so that one can identify which revision was used in which release. 
     Multilevel Security: PVCS allows security by user, group and archive. 
     Flexible Promotion Models: PVCS enables projects to specify the state that a revision is in within the system lifecycle. 
     Automatic Audit Trail: PVCS keeps track of the actions that a user performs, and there are numerous reports that can be generated to review this information. 
     Migration Control Procedures 
     User Procedures 
     This portion of the description details the procedures for using the PVCS software. This portion of the description may be used as a reference guide for PVCS Users on the development team. 
     Definitions 
     Archive: An archive is the baseline copy of a module. The archive contains all revisions to the module, the names of the authors, the dates of the changes, and the description of the changes. 
     Project: A project is a logically related set of files under version control. The files all relate to a given system or subsystem. 
     Workfile: A checked out version of an archive file is a workfile. All modifications are made to workfiles. 
     Creating Archive Files 
     An archive file is created in order to track changes to a module or source file. 
     To Create a New Archive: 
     1) Select Project|Open Project 
     2) Select the files for which one wants to create archives from the files list 
     3) Choose Actions|Create Archive 
     4) Choose Options, and select Check In After Creation and Update Project Folder 
     5) Choose OK 
     To Create a New Archive File Upon Check In: 
     1) Select the files one wants to check in from the Folders or Files list. 
     2) Select Actions|Check In and click OK 
     3) When the Create New Archive window appears, select OK to ALL 
     Making Changes to Archive Files 
     Checking a file out of an archive gives the developer access to the file for browsing, editing or testing. If the file is checked out with a lock, PVCS VM may create a new version of the file when it is checked back in. This prevents users from overwriting each other&#39;s changes. 
     To Check Out a File: 
     1) Select the folders, files or revisions to be checked out 
     2) Select Actions|Check Out 
     3) Select one of the following options, Read only, Writable with Lock, or Writable (recommend Writable with Lock) 
     4) Choose Options to set additional options for checking out files 
     5) Choose OK 
     Files are checked in after they have been changed. The file checked out of an archive is called a workfile. Each time it is checked in, it becomes a new revision. When a file is checked in, the user can also create a version label. 
     To Check in a File: 
     1) Select the files to be checked in 
     2) Select Actions|Check In 
     3) Enter a description of the changes made in the Change Description field 
     4) Choose Options to set other options for checking in files 
     5) Choose OK 
     Complete lists of archive and PVCS menu privileges are listed in this portion of the specification. This portion of the specification also describes the archive privileges for PVCS Users and PVCS leads. The archive privilege list shows which users have been granted access to each of the possible activities (e.g. delete revisions, change owners, assign version labels, etc.) The ALL column refers to both PVCS Users and PVCS Leads. If this column contains a “Y”, both PVCS Users and PVCS Leads are granted this privilege. If this column contains a “N”, both PVCS Users and PVCS Leads are denied this privilege. If the ALL column is blank, then the explicit privileges are noted in the PVCS User or PVCS Lead column. 
     This portion of the description also describes the menu privileges for the PVCS Users and PVCS Leads. The menu privilege list is similar to the archive privilege list, except that setting up this table in the PVCS configuration controls the actual menu options that are available to all of the PVCS Users. The ALL column refers to PVCS Users, PVCS Leads and guest users. If there is an “N” in the ALL column, none of the listed users have the menu privilege. If there is a “Y” in the ALL column, all listed users have the privilege. An “N” in either the PVCS User, PVCS Lead or guest column indicates the menu privilege is denied (the menu option may not even show up in the list). This portion of the specification summarizes all archive (#A) and menu (#M) privileges for all PVCS Users. 
     PVCS Privileges 
     Archive Privileges 
     Note: default state of all archive privileges is disabled; PVCS Administrator must select a privilege to enable it. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 PVCS 
                 PVCS 
               
               
                 Base Privilege 
                 Description 
                 All 
                 User 
                 Lead 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 AddGroup 
                 Define promotion groups 
                 DO NOT ALLOW/SELECT 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 AddVersion 
                 Assign version labels 
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 BreakLock 
                 Unlock someone else&#39;s revisions 
                   
                   
                 Y 
               
               
                 ChangeAccessList 
                 Change archive access list 
                   
                   
                 Y 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 ChangeComment 
                 Change comment prefixes for 
                 DO NOT ALLOW/SELECT 
               
               
                 Delimiter 
                 keywords 
               
               
                 ChangeOwner 
                 Change archive owners 
                 DO NOT ALLOW/SELECT 
               
               
                 ChangeProtection 
                 Change archive attributes 
                 DO NOT ALLOW/SELECT 
               
               
                 ChangeWorkfileName 
                 Change workfile names 
                 DO NOT ALLOW/SELECT 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 DeleteGroup 
                 Delete promotion groups 
                   
                   
                 Y 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 DeleteRevNonTip 
                 Delete revisions 
                 DO NOT ALLOW/SELECT 
               
               
                 DeleteRevTip 
                 Delete tip revisions 
                 DO NOT ALLOW/SELECT 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 DeleteVersion 
                 Delete version labels 
                   
                   
                 Y 
               
               
                 GetNonTip 
                 Check out non-tip revisions 
                 Y 
                   
                   
               
               
                 GetTip 
                 Check out tip revisions 
                 Y 
                   
                   
               
               
                 InitArchive 
                 Create archives 
                   
                   
                 Y 
               
               
                 LockNonTip 
                 Lock non-tip revisions 
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 LockProject 
                 Lock projects 
                 DO NOT ALLOW/SELECT 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 LockTip 
                 Lock tip revisions 
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 ModifyChangeDescription 
                 Modify change descriptions 
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 ModifyGroup 
                 Modify promotion groups 
                 DO NOT ALLOW/SELECT 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 ModifyVersion 
                 Modify version labels 
                 Y 
                   
                   
               
               
                 ModifyWorkfileDescription 
                 Modify workfile descriptions 
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 Promote 
                 Promote revision 
                   
                   
                 Y 
               
               
                 PutBranch 
                 Check in branch revisions 
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 PutTrunk 
                 Check in trunk revisions 
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 StartBranch 
                 Start branches 
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 Unlock 
                 Remove locks 
                   
                   
                 Y 
               
               
                 ViewAccessDB 
                 View the access control database 
                 Y 
                   
               
               
                 ViewArchiveHeader 
                 View archive header information 
                 Y 
                   
               
               
                 ViewArchiveRev 
                 View delta information 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Menu Privileges 
     Note: default state of all menu privileges is enabled; PVCS Administrator must select a privilege to disable it. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 PVCS 
                 PVCS 
               
               
                   
                 Menu Item Privileges 
                 All 
                 User 
                 Lead 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 NoActionsArchiveReport 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsChangeAttributes 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsCheckIn 
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsCheckOut 
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsCreateArchive 
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsDeleteRevision 
                   
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsDifferenceReport 
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsEdit 
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsJournalReport 
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsLock 
                   
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsMerge 
                   
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsPromotionGroup 
                   
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsSQLExport 
                 X 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsUnlock 
                   
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoActionsVersionLabel 
               
               
                   
                 NoFileCopy 
               
               
                   
                 NoFileCreateDirectory 
               
               
                   
                 NoFileDelete 
               
               
                   
                 NoFileExit 
               
               
                   
                 NoFileMoveRename 
               
               
                   
                 NoFolderChangeFolder 
                 X 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoFolderChangeFolderMembers 
               
               
                   
                 NoFoldeerChangeWorkfileDir 
                 X 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoFolderCopyFolderMembers 
               
               
                   
                 NoFolderDeleteFolder 
                 X 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoFolderNewFolder 
                 X 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoFolderUpdateProjectFolder 
               
               
                   
                 NoHelpAboutVersionManager 
               
               
                   
                 NoHelpContents 
               
               
                   
                 NoHelpGuidedTour 
               
               
                   
                 NoHelpNew 
               
               
                   
                 NoHelpSampleProject 
               
               
                   
                 NoHelpSearch 
               
               
                   
                 NoHelpUsingHelp 
               
               
                   
                 NoOptionsAssignPrivileges 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoOptionsDataFileLocations 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoOptionsDefinePrivileges 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoOptionsDifferenceDisplay 
               
               
                   
                 NoOptionsEditor 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoOptionsGroups 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoOptionsLogin 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoOptionsPreferences 
               
               
                   
                 NoOptionsSecurity 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoOptionsToolbar 
               
               
                   
                 NoOptionsUsers 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoProjectCloseProject 
               
               
                   
                 NoProjectConfigureProject 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoProjectCopyProject 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoProjectDeleteProject 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoProjectLockProject 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoProjectNewProject 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoProjectOpenProject 
               
               
                   
                 NoProjectUnlockProject 
                 X 
                   
               
               
                   
                 NoViewFileDetails 
               
               
                   
                 NoViewFolderDetails 
               
               
                   
                 NoViewLockedFiles 
               
               
                   
                 NoViewModifiedFiles 
               
               
                   
                 NoViewRefresh 
               
               
                   
                 NoViewSortFilesBy 
               
               
                   
                 NoWindowNewWindow 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 User Privileges 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 User Name 
                 Privileges 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 PVCS User 
                 #A_ALL,#A_DEV,#M_ALL,#M_DEV 
               
               
                   
                 PVCS Lead 
                 #A_ALL,#A_LEAD,#M_ALL,#M_LEAD 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Summary 
     Software Configuration Management (SCM) is the process of identifying and maintaining work products throughout the entire life cycle of a project. SCM key objectives are to coordinate and record decisions, actions, and approvals to ensure the following: 
     Changes to software products are controlled and traceable 
     Changes to software products are communicated to the affected groups 
     Current status of any given software product or unit is readily available 
     Configuration management is achieved through the identification, control, and audit of all project work products. The Program direction is for all projects to create and implement Software Configuration Management plans early in the project life cycle (e.g. during Project Study) and revisit them periodically during the development effort. At a minimum, the following work products should be under SCM control on every project: 
     design and test portion of the present description 
     standards and procedures 
     database components 
     architecture components 
     application components 
     The value of establishing a solid configuration management plan may be visible in the many areas it may impact. These areas include: increased accuracy of project delivery dates, improved product quality, reduced time to market, project performance visibility, and increased ease of project transitions. 
     This portion of the present description may detail the steps required to implement an effective, best practice approach for managing the configuration of a project. 
     Configuration Management Purpose and Objectives 
     The purpose of Configuration Management (CM) is to establish and maintain the integrity of the components of an application throughout the project&#39;s life cycle. This includes: 
     Comprehensively assessing and evaluating changes to a system after requirements have been agreed upon and commitments established. 
     Ensuring that approved changes are communicated, updated, verified and implemented properly. 
     Coordinate the project&#39;s day-to-day activities and avoid conflicting actions by controlling access to code and repositories. 
     Who is Involved With Configuration Management 
     Configuration Management process interfaces extensively with all phases of the project life cycle, and as a result, project teams may participate in CM activities. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 CM Responsibilities 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Support Center/ 
                 maintain system baselines 
               
               
                 Operations 
                 approve and implement changes to that baseline 
               
               
                 Technical 
                 establish the version repositories 
               
               
                 Support 
                 define packaging and installation procedures 
               
               
                   
                 assist in migration activities 
               
               
                   
                 maintain inventory lists 
               
               
                 Architecture 
                 maintain architecture baselines 
               
               
                   
                 approve and implement changes to that baseline 
               
               
                 Development 
                 migrate components on all platforms 
               
               
                   
                 maintain inventory lists 
               
               
                 Test 
                 migrate components on all platforms 
               
               
                   
                 maintain inventory lists 
               
               
                 Implementation 
                 migrate components on all platforms 
               
               
                   
                 maintain inventory lists 
               
               
                 Program 
                 periodically review CM activities and identify CM 
               
               
                 Management 
                 improvements 
               
               
                   
                 periodically review individual projects for compliance 
               
               
                   
                 with program CM process 
               
               
                   
                 periodically review and recommend improvements to the 
               
               
                   
                 program CM process 
               
               
                 Team Leads 
                 ensure that CM activities are being performed 
               
               
                   
                 adhere to CM guidelines 
               
               
                 Functional 
                 move deliverables to the final folder 
               
               
                 Lead 
                 adhere to CM guidelines 
               
               
                 Project 
                 ensure that CM Plans are created for each project 
               
               
                 Manager 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Linking CM to a Software Life Cycle 
     How and when CM is performed may vary depending on the development life cycle and methodology selected for the project. During the Design Phase of the life cycle, a Project (CM) plan is created. This plan may be revisited and renewed at each subsequent phase of the life cycle. This Project CM plan may also include support activities detailing procedures for maintenance of the system until the next release. 
     Project Configuration Management (SCM) Plan 
     Once requirements and commitments are established for a project, all changes need to be formally processed and controlled. Upon turnover of the system to production, the support procedures defined in the Project CM plan may be followed. 
     A project&#39;s CM Plan formally portion of the present descriptions all sub processes of CM which include the following: 
     The baselines from which changes are controlled and communicated to all parties involved; and a listing of the units to be placed under configuration management. 
     A plan for establishing and controlling project repositories. 
     A change control process to track modifications to the baselines. 
     A security profile for each role on the project to control access. 
     Status reporting and continuous improvement activities. 
     Training plans to ensure all parties are prepared to perform their SCM tasks. 
     Process Flow 
     FIG. 94 illustrates SCM Planning. 
     Major Sub-Processes of Configuration Management 
     Identify CM Units &amp; Baselines  9400   
     The first step is to identify the CM units that may be put under CM and their baselines, then a project can determine the amount of control to be placed on the project environment. All identified units may be formally reviewed, utilized for enhancements, and changed only through the established CM process. 
     Establish CM Repositories &amp; Practices  9402   
     Establish version repositories and mechanisms for controlling development and production work products such as code and portion of the present description. 
     Identify Change Control  9404   
     Define the process for evaluating, approving, coordinating, and implementing change requests. 
     Collect Metrics &amp; Identify Continuous Improvement Activities  9406   
     Track and report the status of changes and versions. It also defines the internal project review processes for identifying continuous improvement efforts and for maintaining the integrity of the work products. 
     Review/Establish Project Security  9408   
     CM does not specify security requirements; however, it does require that portion of the present descriptioned practices exist for controlling changes. For more complex environments, security principles may need to be more rigorous than just portion of the present descriptioned procedures. 
     Determine Training Requirements  9410   
     Identify the training needs for individuals performing CM tasks, as well as individuals involved in defining the CM processes. 
     Create Project CM Plan  9412   
     The Project CM plan is a guide for performing Configuration Management activities throughout the life cycle of a project. 
     Identify CM Units &amp; Baselines 
     Purpose 
     “Identify Configuration Management (CM) Units and Baselines” defines the activities for turning functional requirements into individual components of the system. The output of “Identify CM Units &amp; Baselines” is to establish the baselines from which all new software products may be created and to identify all new software products along with its components or configuration units. These activities ensure that all project team members have the same perspective on the project starting point. 
     Process Flow 
     FIG. 95 illustrates an Identify CM Units &amp; Baselines Process Flow 
     Entry Criteria 
     “Identify CM Items and Baselines”  9400  (see FIG. 94) requires that: 
     System requirements have been defined (e.g. platform, technologies, etc.). The project life cycle has been defined (e.g. test phases: AT, PT, etc.). The project plan has been developed and project milestones established 
     A conceptual design that defines the system has been or is being developed. 
     Exit Criteria 
     Completion of “Identify CM Units &amp; Baselines” is accomplished when all CM types and units have been identified and signed off. 
     Roles and Responsibilities 
     The Development team has primary responsibility of identifying the CM units and baselines. The Technical Support and Architecture teams can be consulted to ensure the list is complete. 
     Task Description 
     Identifying Configuration Types  9500   
     “Identify CM Units &amp; Baselines” lists each component of the project that may be created, deleted, or otherwise modified. Along with identifying the configuration units, each unit type needs to have an associated promotion and migration procedure. At a minimum, the following types must be addressed on each project: design and test portion of the present description, database components, architecture components, and application components. 
     A configuration unit is any object that is subject to reviews, deadlines, and/or utilized by multiple teams. These u nits should be classified by “type”. For example, a set of batch programs could have 2 different “types”: C programs and header files. Configuration types need to be defined in detail allowing changes to be planned, recorded, and verified. The CM plan should detail the review and migration process for each configuration type. 
     Identify Baselines  9502   
     The baseline is the foundation for configuration management. It provides the official standard on which subsequent work is based and to which authorized changes are made. After an initial baseline is established and frozen, every subsequent change is recorded as a change until the next baseline is set. This program has defined its baselines to be the testing environments used on the project. 
     Procedure 
     The initial establishment of each baseline represents the first point where those units may be formally brought under CM. A baseline is an agreed upon point of departure usually established at the end of a major project phase (i.e., after design), after which all changes must be controlled. Formal baselines should be planned and subsequently established for the end of each major project phase. This point should be selected as appropriate for each project and its development life cycle. 
     For a development project, the following baselines should be established. Establishing each baseline is a progressive process that should not overlap. On occasion, a prior baseline may need to be updated, but not without updating the remaining baselines. 
     The definition baseline—the software requirements portion of the present description (“Scope”). 
     The tech and detailed design baseline—the completed software design. 
     The system software component baseline—the delivered system software 
     Software component baselines are established following each stage: 
     The code and component test baseline—the software components that have completed coding and component test on which assembly testing may be conducted. 
     The assembly test baseline—the software system that has been verified through assembly test and is ready for client acceptance test. 
     The implementation/production baseline—the delivered software to which modification, correction and enhancements are made. 
     *This program has defined baselines to be the different testing environments used in development projects: Component Test (CT), Assembly Test (AT), Product Test (PT), Training (TR), Production (PR), and Production Support (Supp). These stages also correspond with the program deliverables, and are portion of the present descriptioned in the project plan. 
     Baseline Portion of the Present Description 
     Each baseline established by a project may be formally portion of the present descriptioned. Additionally, all baseline portion of the present descriptions may be formally controlled at the point at which the baseline is implemented. 
     A baseline portion of the present description contains a listing of the CM units. The portion of the present description may be prepared as a written portion of the present description or as a byproduct of a tool. 
     Establish Configuration Type Naming standards  9504   
     All CM units should be uniquely identifiable. Individual projects may define a project identifier to be used for all project defined naming standards. Naming standards allow multiple development efforts to coexist in a shared development environment. Each project may use naming standards for each type of configuration unit to be placed in a repository. If the predefined naming standards are not applicable to a particular project, then specific naming standards need to be portion of the present descriptioned in the Project CM Plan. 
     Identifying Configuration Units  9506   
     Configuration units should be identified when creating the Project CM Plan. A conceptual design of the system that defines the major system elements (hardware, software, database, etc.) is used to determine what units may be identified. All units following the CM processes need to be added to the Installation Kit Inventory deliverable. Any object that is modified due to a change request is considered a configuration unit, and should be tracked in the Installation Kit Inventory. 
     The configuration unit&#39;s definition may allow adequate assessment and portion of the present description of impact prior to implementation or update of the baseline. Each configuration unit should have the following characteristics: 
     A Unique Name 
     Modification Log 
     Release Affiliation 
     Critical Success Factors 
     Appropriate baselines are identified and scheduled. 
     A complete list of CM types and units is produced 
     Deliverables 
     Defined Software Configuration Units 
     Installation Kit Inventory 
     CM Measures 
     CM Types per Platform 
     CM Units per Project 
     Establish CM Repositories &amp; Practices  9402  (FIG. 94) 
     Purpose 
     “Establish CM Repositories &amp; Practices” involves the creation and management of repositories used to store and control objects. The primary purpose for establishing and managing multiple CM repositories is to enable a project team to be at different stages of the life cycle. Controlling these repositories ensures that data, code and portion of the present description are not inadvertently changed or moved. 
     Process Flow 
     FIG. 96 illustrates a manner in which CM Repositories and Practices Process Flow are established. 
     Entry Criteria 
     “Establish CM Repositories &amp; Practices” begins after baselines have been established and before the first objects have been created or modified. This is done in accordance to the project plan and schedule. 
     Exit Criteria 
     “Establish CM Repositories &amp; Practices” is performed throughout the project&#39;s life-cycle. 
     Roles and Responsibilities 
     The Architecture team has primary responsibility of establishing the standard set of development tools for a given platform—which includes repository software and version control tools. 
     The Technical Support team ensures that the project teams&#39; development environment has been set up correctly, defines migration/promotion processes and resolves problems related to that, creates database environment for the project, and performs tests to ensure that the tools are functioning properly in the environment. 
     The Development team is responsible for making changes to the repository using the version control tools provided and processes defined by the Tech Support team. 
     The Test and Implementation teams are responsible for understanding the repository structure and migration processes defined by Tech Support. In addition, the Implementation team is responsible for creating the release notice. 
     All teams are responsible for ensuring that team members are trained on the processes and tools used for version control. 
     Task Description 
     Establish Repository Structure  9600  (FIG. 96) 
     A repository is used to store and control the access to units while maintaining their integrity. A project should be able to retrieve any configuration unit upon demand in order to verify its contents. Additionally, repository security mechanisms should be enacted to avoid unauthorized changes. 
     Procedure 
     Repositories must be established for each project to control all baseline configuration units. The repository structure for a project shall be portion of the present descriptioned in its respective Project CM Plan. At a minimum, the repositories shall have these features: 
     The system chosen for the repository should have a security mechanism to control access to objects. 
     The system must permit each configuration unit to be individually identified, and controlled. 
     The system should control and track changes made to individual units. 
     The system should retain information allowing historical reports to be generated 
     The system should be able to produce a listing of all units contained in the repository 
     CM Repository Backups  9602   
     Repository backups provide safeguards against hardware failures and provides an option of last resort for the retrevial of lost or corrupted objects. The frequency of backups should be determined during SCM Planning. 
     Defects or faults found in the production environment need to be corrected as quickly as possible. In some cases the problem found in production requires production to be reverted back to a prior release(wholly or in part). When determining which scheme is best for your project, the following characteristics should be considered: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 size of the application 
                 platform technical capabilities 
               
               
                   
                 cost of space 
                 existing backup schedule 
               
               
                   
                 criticality of application 
                 release schedule 
               
               
                   
                 complexity of application 
                 number of interfaces 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Define Promotion and Migration Procedures  9604   
     Procedure 
     Since most projects may contain multiple environments, it is important to understand how software products are moved from one environment to another within that project. It is critical for the Project CM Plan to portion of the present description the standard flow of configuration units through the project environments. The procedures need to be specifically defined and roles and responsibilities need to be clearly stated. The following terms may define the different steps involved in moving objects from one environment to the next: 
     Promotion—A promotion is defined as the movement of objects from one phase to the next, it may only signify movement within the repository 
     Migration—The physical movement of a kit/package from one environment to another 
     Kit Build—The process of packaging the CM units so that they can be migrated to another environment. 
     Kit Installation—The process of unpackaging the CM units and establishing required environment settings. 
     Versioning of Configuration Units 
     Through out the development life cycle, multiple versions of each Configuration unit may be created. Taking this into consideration, it is necessary to portion of the present description in the Project CM Plan, the version control used for the project. Multiple versions of CM Units can result from: 
     Multiple Projects modifying code. 
     Shared Services supported across all projects. 
     Different testing and production environments. 
     Standard Migration Paths 
     The V-Model testing approach defines several testing environments. Based on this testing model, the program has defined the following standard migration paths. 
     Component Test→Assembly Test* 
     Assembly Test→Product Test* 
     Product Test→Operational Readiness Test 
     Product Test or ORT→Production* 
     Production→Production Support 
     Less complex systems, as well as extremely large systems, may not utilize all levels of testing. Projects should utilize at least the three base migration levels: Assembly Test, Product Test, and Production. 
     Notification 
     When software products are moved from one environment to another it is important that the impacted parties receive sufficient notification. The vehicle used to deliver notification may vary across projects so it is necessary to portion of the present description in the Project CM plan how notification may occur. A release represents a move to another phase, such as a group of changes migrating to production. A release notice should be used for any modifications to configuration units or for the creation of new configuration units. The release notice should include a list of all identified problems and change requests that are being closed (i.e. changes being delivered) as part of this release; and should be created prior to migration to production. 
     Critical Success Factors 
     Appropriate repositories defined for size of project. 
     CM units can be versioned and adequately controlled. 
     Standard Control Process is used on the project. 
     Access is controlled to appropriate repositories. 
     Authorizer for creating a baseline is identified. 
     The process for packaging, migrating, and installing is defined and portion of the present descriptioned. 
     Deliverables 
     Repository Structure, Migration and Promotion Procedures, Packaging Procedures. 
     Measures 
     Repeat promotions per environment 
     Versions per Configuration Unit 
     Establish Change Control Process  9404  (FIG. 94) 
     Purpose 
     “Establish Change Control Process” is the activity for reaching decisions on requested changes, and implementing the changes in production. The purpose of this sub process is to create a group of representatives from within the project to review and accept changes. This ensures that all views are considered in making decisions that may impact many areas. 
     Process Flow 
     FIG. 97 illustrates the Establish Change Control Process. 
     Entry Criteria 
     “Establish Change Control Process” begins when the CM Unit portion of the Project Plan has been created and approved, the first formal baseline is established, and the configuration units and components have been identified. 
     Exit Criteria 
     “Establish Change Control Process” is performed throughout the life cycle of a project. 
     Roles and Responsibilities 
     Incidents defined as change requests can be reported from any environment and require the review and approval of project and business partners. Changes include specifications/design errors, enhancement requests, change baseline and schedule, etc. 
     The established control group may be responsible for recovery and authorizing change request, monitoring and reporting progress, and ensuring the change is implemented in all affected environment. 
     Task Description 
     Define Control Groups  9700  (FIG. 97) 
     Procedure 
     A Control Group has the authority to approve/disapprove all change actions. The Control Group meets to discuss and decide upon changes affecting system capability, cost, schedule, resources, and interfaces. This group should be involved in scheduling installation dates. 
     Participants 
     The members of the Control Group could include representatives from each group, organization, or function affected by the project. The membership may vary depending on the project and the configuration units. 
     Control Configuration Group&#39;s members can include membership representatives from: 
     Program Management 
     Team Leads 
     Functional Leads 
     Users 
     SME&#39;s(Subject Matter Experts) 
     Participant Duties 
     Members shall attend meetings, review change request, and perform follow-up activities as necessary. The members shall review and approve changes including specification/design errors, enhancement requests, change baseline and schedule, etc. 
     Meetings and Agendas  9702   
     During a Change Request evaluation meeting the following topics should be addressed by the Change Control group: 
     Reason for the change 
     Impact Analysis of Change Request. 
     Alternative Solutions. 
     Estimated cost 
     Perceived value 
     Approve/Disapprove Change Requests  9704   
     Procedure 
     Once the change request has been analyzed, a decision must be reached by the Control Group to approve, defer, or disapprove the work involved. All decisions shall be reached by consensus. 
     Track and Implement Change Request 
     Track Change Request  9706   
     Change requests should be recorded and tracked from initiation through closure. Change requests may remain “active” until it is closed by being implemented in all environments or due to being disapproved and withdrawn. Recording the change request along with key information may enable the project team to keep track of the request, and help the project team to determine improvement areas to the overall change request process. 
     For each change request, the following information should be maintained: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 unique change request number 
                 request open date 
               
               
                   
                 change request initiator 
                 change request description 
               
               
                   
                 change request responsible person 
                 request closed date 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Implement Change Request  9708   
     Once a change request has been approved, the project team may develop a plan for implementation. Depending on the scope and current phase of the project, the change may be integrated into current development activities or be added to the project schedule of upcoming enhancements. 
     Approved changes, whether to a development or production system, should undergo the following: 
     The change implementation must be planned, scheduled/rescheduled, and the workplan updated. 
     The change is assigned to one ore more individuals. 
     New requirements are updated in existing requirements portion of the present description. 
     Design modifications are portion of the present descriptioned. 
     Inventory lists are updated. 
     Critical Success Factors 
     The necessary information to make decision is available during the change request&#39;s evaluation. 
     Control Groups are formally established for each project. 
     The Control Group assigns actionable items with due dates. 
     Communication channels to other Control Groups are established. 
     Control Groups are trained in the process and their roles. 
     Meetings are held frequently during the development phase of the project. 
     Deliverables 
     Define Control Group, Define frequency of review meetings 
     Measures 
     Numbers of change request opened, closed, rejected 
     Time to close each change request 
     Collect Metrics &amp; Identify Continuous Improvement Activities 
     Purpose 
     “Collect Metrics &amp; Identify Continuous Improvement (CI) Activities” are the activities for tracking and reporting CM status. The purpose is to communicate to all project management the timely status of CM activities and change requests, and to ensure the integrity of the configuration. 
     Process Flow 
     FIG. 98 illustrates Collect Metrics and Identify CI Activities  9406   
     Entry Criteria 
     “Collect Metrics &amp; Identify CI Activities” begins when the initial baseline configuration is established -which is usually at the completion of the requirements definition. 
     Exit Criteria 
     “Collect Metrics &amp; Identify CI Activities” is performed throughout the system&#39;s life cycle. 
     Role and Responsibilities 
     Project Management may work with the other projects&#39; teams to gather statistics in order to create and provide status reports. The reports should supply statistical information in order to identify potential areas for improvement. 
     Task Description 
     Maintain Records  9800   
     Procedure 
     The project teams may collect metrics on the activities of each project. These metrics may be available to process leaders to track status on each project, and to ensure compliance with Configuration Management processes. Compliance may be ensured through independent or self directed audits. 
     Generate and Distribute Status Reports  9802   
     Procedure 
     CI Review may be scheduled on a regular basis as part of the Project CM Plan. The Program Manager may lead and facilitate the review meetings to assist the project team in gathering historical data to help assess the rate, causes and impact of changes. The content and format should be outlined in the Project CM Plan for the project. At a minimum, reports should be generated at the completion of each base migration level. 
     Reports should contain the following types of information: 
     Summary report of Change Requests by status and description. 
     Specific Change Requests contained in each software version. 
     Change history review of each configuration unit. 
     A description of each configuration unit defined by its current release version. 
     Change logs that show the history of releases and changes made to source files. 
     Number of defects due to migration errors 
     Continuous Improvement Review  9804   
     Procedure 
     A Continuous Improvement Review is an inspection conducted by the project team to verify the completeness, consistency and interdependencies of products. The reviews are a means by which the organization can ensure that the development has been completed in ways that satisfies all client expectations, and should be performed after a final release has been delivered to identify improvement areas prior to beginning work on the next release. The reviews can vary in form and formality. 
     The review should include the following: 
     All closed change requests have been incorporated in portion of the present description and objects. 
     Change requests or problem reports that remain open are clearly identified so they can be closed during the next phase. 
     Metrics reviews in order to identify other areas for improvement. 
     General conversation about the flow of the project (e.g. procedures and problems encountered) 
     Critical Success Factors 
     Change Request log is current. 
     Frequency of status reports is established. 
     Appropriate individuals receive status reports. 
     Status reports are current and accurate. 
     Periodic Continuous Improvement Reviews are scheduled 
     Deliverables 
     Status Reports, Metrics, CI Review Results, Scheduled CI Reviews 
     Measures 
     Number of defects for project 
     Number of defects for project due to migration errors 
     Number open, closed, deferred, rejected change request 
     Review/Establish Project Security  9408  (FIG. 94) 
     Purpose 
     “Review/Establish Project Security” is an activity to ensure that CM progress does not interfere or counteract established security and audit policies. CM requires control of configuration units. This does not require security controls to be placed on all configuration units, but does require the existence of procedures to govern the access to these units. 
     Process Flow 
     FIG. 99 illustrates the Review/Establish Project Security. 
     Entry Criteria 
     “Review/Establish Project Security” begins when the initial baseline configuration is established, which is usually at the completion of the requirements definition. 
     Exit Criteria 
     “Review/Establish Project Security” is performed throughout the system&#39;s life. 
     Role and Responsibilities 
     The primary responsibility for establishing configuration unit security may be the responsibility of the Security and Technical Support teams. During the initial set up of a technical platform  9900 , the Architecture team should establish the initial security and access procedures and practices. Once the base platform is established, the Security and Technical Support teams may further define the security rules  9902  in conjunction with the individual project/application requirements and company policies. 
     Task Description 
     Verify Security Practices 
     Procedure 
     Each application team should maintain security portion of the present description listing access required per each team role. This portion of the present description should be reviewed  9904  periodically with the Security team to ensure security policies are consistent with the current business practices. This security portion of the present description should be utilized for establishing all new accounts. As part of this review, project applications and systems should be checked to verify that current security access is granted only for team members whose business functions require it. 
     Critical Success Factors 
     Business rules governing security access are portion of the present description. Company policies are followed. 
     Deliverables 
     Role Access Requirements, Scheduled security reviews, Project CM Plan 
     Measures 
     Unauthorized changes due to inadequate policies or security 
     Lost time due to access problems 
     Number of defects due to access problems 
     Security change requests per project 
     Determine Training Requirements  9410  (FIG. 94) 
     Purpose 
     “Determine Training Requirements” is the activity to determine the skills that may be required by project team members throughout the project. Once the skills have been identified, training needs can be addressed. By identifying training needs ahead of time, the project team can schedule required training at the optimal time for the project. 
     Process Flow 
     FIG. 100 illustrates the Determine Training Requirements. 
     Entry Criteria 
     “Determine Training Requirements” should initially be performed in conjunction with the project plan. 
     Exit Criteria 
     “Determine Training Requirements” may be an activity that is performed throughout the project life-cycle. 
     Roles and Responsibilities 
     The project team leads may be responsible for defining required skill sets  10000 , 10002  as well as project training needs  10004  and making sure that team members are scheduled for training appropriately  10006 . 
     Task Description 
     The task of“Determine Training Requirements” is an activity performed by each of the project team leaders. They may be responsible for defining the gaps between current team skills and the skills required given the upcoming project. 
     Critical Success Factors 
     Training needs are consistent with project tasks 
     Training needs are identified 
     Deliverables 
     Project Team Training Plan 
     CM Measures 
     Total Training Hours 
     Create Project CM Plan  9412  (FIG. 94) 
     Purpose 
     “Create Project CM Plan” is the activity that ties all of the CM activities together. The Project CM plan is a procedure guideline for performing CM activities throughout the life-cycle of a project. 
     Process Flow 
     FIG. 101 illustrates the Create Project CM Plan. 
     Entry Criteria 
     “Create Project CM Plan” can not be performed until the previous six steps have been completed. 
     Exit Criteria 
     Completion of“Create Project CM Plan” is accomplished when the Project CM plan is delivered to the project management personnel, and signed off by all affected teams. 
     Roles and Responsibilities 
     All project teams should actively participate in creating the Project CM Plan. Each team should review and approve the Project CM Plan prior to beginning the next methodology phase. 
     Task Description 
     The task of “Create Project CM Plan” is an activity of utilizing the Project CM Plan template in the Program Methodology and tailoring to produce a CM Plan for that project&#39;s application. A Project CM Plan contains the details on how CM activities may be performed for the duration of the project. The creation of the Project CM Plan is a joint effort between all project teams, with management responsibilities falling to the Project Manager. 
     Generate Project CM Plan 
     Procedure 
     Generating the Project CM Plan involves performing the activities defined in the following sub-processes: 
     Identify CM Units &amp; Baselines  10100   
     Establish CM Repositories &amp; Practices  10102   
     Establish Change Control Processes  10104   
     Collect Metrics &amp; Identify CI Activities  10106   
     Review/Establish Project Security  10108   
     Determine Training Requirements  10110   
     These activities may assist in formally portion of the present descriptioning the project&#39;s CM practices. The Project CM Plan is then reviewed by the Project Management team. Once the Project CM Plan has been signed off, it becomes a part of the overall project plan. 
     At a minimum, a Project CM Plan should contain information on the following: 
     Definition of Configuration Units Types 
     Baselines that may be established 
     Unit unique naming standards 
     Method for processing Change Requests 
     Both System and Application repositories to be established and how they may be controlled 
     CM related roles, responsibilities, and resources 
     Definition of how objects are promoted/migrated between different environments 
     Checkpoint meetings for project status and continuous improvement 
     Critical Success Factors 
     The Project CM Plan should be written in terms familiar with its users. All roles and responsibilities defined in the Project CM Plan shall be assigned. All activities defined shall have resources identified to accomplish the activities. Project members understand and are trained to perform their CM role. 
     Deliverables 
     Project Configuration Management (CM) Plan 
     CM Measures 
     Actual vs. Estimated time to create the Project CM Plan Number of CM Plans created vs. Number of projects 
     Naming Standard Requirement 
     Each Unit should follow a portion of the present descriptioned naming standard. This standard should maintain a unique name for each configuration unit and should enable operations personnel to determine the project the unit is associated with as well as the responsible personnel for production problems. 
     Modification Log 
     Each unit must have a modification log. The log must contain at a minimum the last change description, who made the change and when the change was made. 
     *Note—this does apply to all deliverables defined by the program and includes portion of the present description. 
     Release Affiliation 
     Each unit should identify the release under which it was created. As modifications are made for new releases, the release should be changed and noted in the modification log. 
     A repository is a physical or logical space that contains a group of objects. These object may be referred to as units, a units is any portion of the present description, program, report, or deliverable that follows the Project Configuration Management Plan. Repositories in general have similar characteristics. This portion of the present descriptions details the program requirements for all software repositories. 
     Unit Controls 
     Unit History 
     Reporting 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Unit Control 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Unit Control 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Unit Security 
                 A software repository should have some level of security to 
               
               
                   
                 prevent non-authorized users from changing units. 
               
               
                 Check-Out 
                 A software repository should allow units to be checked-out, 
               
               
                   
                 once a unit is checked-out, the unit should be flagged so 
               
               
                   
                 that other users may know who is currently working on 
               
               
                   
                 the unit. 
               
               
                 Check-In 
                 A software repository should allow units to be entered into 
               
               
                   
                 the library, either for the first time, or as updates are made 
               
               
                   
                 to the unit. For each “check-in” the repository should 
               
               
                   
                 maintain information on who checked the unit in, when 
               
               
                   
                 they checked it in, and allow for a description identifying 
               
               
                   
                 the reason for updating or inserting into the library. 
               
               
                 Repository 
                 A software repository should have security to prevent 
               
               
                 Security 
                 anyone from changing units without following the 
               
               
                   
                 “check-out” and “check-in” procedures. 
               
               
                 Versioning 
                 A software repository should maintain the last three 
               
               
                   
                 versions of any unit. 
               
               
                 History 
                 A software repository should maintain the change history 
               
               
                   
                 for the last ?? months. This history needs to minimally 
               
               
                   
                 contain the description of the change, who made the change 
               
               
                   
                 and when the change was made. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Reporting 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Reporting 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Unit 
                 A software repository should be able to create a report listing 
               
               
                 Report 
                 the unit history for given period of time. The report should 
               
               
                   
                 contain the description of the change, who made the change 
               
               
                   
                 and when the change was made. 
               
               
                 Repository 
                 A software repository should be able to create a report listing 
               
               
                 Report 
                 all units contained in the repository and their current status. 
               
               
                   
                 The status of an element would include, the latest version, 
               
               
                   
                 either by number and/or date, and a description of the 
               
               
                   
                 last change. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Option 1 - Mirrored Production Environment 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Permanent Staging/Backout Environment 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Description 
                 FIG. 102 shows the Manage CM Repository Process Flow. 
               
               
                   
                 Option 1 requires 2 production environments. One 
               
               
                   
                 environment 10200 would be set to production while the 
               
               
                   
                 other 10202 would be the previous production environment. 
               
               
                   
                 When backout is required, the previous production is set 
               
               
                   
                 to current production and the other environment is then 
               
               
                   
                 available for the next release to stage. 
               
               
                 Where 
                 Option 1 makes performing a backout very quick and easy. 
               
               
                 Applicable 
                 However, it is also costly from a space and time 
               
               
                   
                 perspective. Double the space is required since virtually 
               
               
                   
                 two production environments are maintained. Option 1 
               
               
                   
                 requires more organization so that the status of each 
               
               
                   
                 environment is known. This solution is encouraged for 
               
               
                   
                 project with the following characteristics. 
               
               
                   
                 24 x 7 supported applications 
               
               
                   
                 large/complex applications 
               
               
                   
                 applications with a frequent release schedule 
               
               
                   
                 applications with numerous interfaces 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Option 2 - Copy of the Production Environment 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Maintain Temporary Copy of Previous Production Environment 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Description 
                 Option 2 maintains a copy of the previous production 
               
               
                   
                 environment for a specified period of time. This solution 
               
               
                   
                 is similar to Option 1, with the exception that the copy does 
               
               
                   
                 not have to be physically located on the production server 
               
               
                   
                 and can be compressed or formatted differently to minimize 
               
               
                   
                 space requirements as long as it can be restored back into 
               
               
                   
                 the production environment. Prior to installing a release 
               
               
                   
                 into production, a backup of the production environment is 
               
               
                   
                 created. The backup may or may not be stored on the 
               
               
                   
                 production machine. When a backout is required, the 
               
               
                   
                 current copy of production is replaced with the 
               
               
                   
                 backup copy. 
               
               
                 Where 
                 Option 2 is a less costly solution in comparison to Option 1. 
               
               
                 Applicable 
                 It may require more time to recover from the backup. This 
               
               
                   
                 solution would be sufficient for applications with the 
               
               
                   
                 following characteristics: 
               
               
                   
                 non 24 x 7 supported applications 
               
               
                   
                 systems with few interfaces 
               
               
                   
                 systems with an infrequent release schedule 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Option 3 - Maintain Prior Release Copies 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Maintaining Old Releases 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Description 
                 Option 3 requires the system to keep copies of prior 
               
               
                   
                 releases. More complex systems with more frequent 
               
               
                   
                 releases should keep copies of multiple releases, simple 
               
               
                   
                 systems may only require one. When a backout is required, 
               
               
                   
                 the prior version is installed into production, thus 
               
               
                   
                 overwriting the corrupted release&#39;s changes. 
               
               
                   
                 Caution must be taken for new additions to the 
               
               
                   
                 environment, if the environment is not cleaned prior to 
               
               
                   
                 “reinstalling” new modules may need to be deleted. 
               
               
                 Where 
                 Option 3 is the very time intensive. This solution is a less 
               
               
                 Applicable 
                 costly solution in comparison to Option 1. It may require 
               
               
                   
                 more time to recover from the backup. This solution would 
               
               
                   
                 be sufficient for applications with the following 
               
               
                   
                 characteristics: 
               
               
                   
                 non 24 x 7 supported applications 
               
               
                   
                 simple systems 
               
               
                   
                 complex systems with Simple and discrete subsystems 
               
               
                   
                 systems where release are a complete subsystem 
               
               
                   
                 replacement 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Platform Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Platform Type 
                 All 
               
               
                 Description 
                 Migration from Component Test to Assembly 
               
               
                   
                 Test occurs when the Development team success- 
               
               
                   
                 fully completes the Component Test exit criteria. 
               
               
                   
                 The timing of the migration should be coordinated 
               
               
                   
                 between all members of the Development project 
               
               
                   
                 group. If the project involves more than one 
               
               
                   
                 platform, the cross platform migration should 
               
               
                   
                 also be coordinated to be sure that units reach 
               
               
                   
                 the next phase at the appropriate time. For each 
               
               
                   
                 platform the migration “kit” should include 
               
               
                   
                 all units required for the project along with any 
               
               
                   
                 instructional units. The kit should be created and 
               
               
                   
                 sent to a staging area until approval for 
               
               
                   
                 installation in the Assembly Test environment is 
               
               
                   
                 given. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Migration to Stage Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Approval to Stage 
                 Development Team Member (the approval must 
               
               
                 (1) 
                 be tracked) 
               
               
                 Exit/Approval 
                 CT Exit Criteria 
               
               
                 Criteria 
               
               
                 Kit Creation/Trigger 
                 If the Kit creation is automated the trigger should 
               
               
                 Performed by (2) 
                 come from the approver to stage as listed above. 
               
               
                 &amp; (3) 
                 If the Kit creation is not automated, then the 
               
               
                   
                 Development or TS team should create the kit 
               
               
                   
                 based upon a portion of the present descriptioned 
               
               
                   
                 set of procedures. 
               
               
                 Pre-Migration 
                 The pre-migration location for each unit of the 
               
               
                 Location 
                 migration kit should be in an approved library/ 
               
               
                   
                 repository that conforms to the CM repository 
               
               
                   
                 requirements 
               
               
                 Post-Migration 
                 The post-migration location can be a physically 
               
               
                 Location 
                 separate directory with the appropriate level or 
               
               
                   
                 security, allowing write access for the kit 
               
               
                   
                 creation process and read access for the moving 
               
               
                   
                 of the kits.. The post migration location can also 
               
               
                   
                 be a logical location, where units are tagged with 
               
               
                   
                 the AT level. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Packaging Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Manual/Automated 
                 Migration can either be manual or automated. In 
               
               
                 Package? Tool? 
                 either case the process needs to be portion of 
               
               
                   
                 the present descriptioned and must meet the CM 
               
               
                   
                 requirements for tracking and recovery. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Migration to Stage Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Brief Package 
                 Packaging of the CM units should involve a 
               
               
                 Description 
                 grouping of all required units; this grouping 
               
               
                   
                 should be maintained throughout the entire 
               
               
                   
                 migration process. This may prevent units from 
               
               
                   
                 being lost or added during migrations. If 
               
               
                   
                 multiple units are combined to create a derived 
               
               
                   
                 product, the creation of the product should be 
               
               
                   
                 automated by combining like tagged units within 
               
               
                   
                 the repository (example: a.h, a_sub.pc, 
               
               
                   
                 a_main.pc, should all be tagged at the 
               
               
                   
                 CT level). This may prevent the derived product 
               
               
                   
                 from becoming out of sync with its sub- 
               
               
                   
                 components in the repository. Only the 
               
               
                   
                 final product needs to be migrated. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Package Verification 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Verification Check 
                 A simple procedure should be defined to allow for 
               
               
                   
                 verification of a successful migration. 
               
               
                 Verified by 
                 The verification should be performed by a 
               
               
                   
                 Development Project team member, prior to the 
               
               
                   
                 beginning of Assembly Test, this verification 
               
               
                   
                 can be tracked. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Internal/External Notification 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Internal 
                 The following teams should be notified upon 
               
               
                   
                 successful completion of a migration: 
               
               
                   
                 Development Project Team 
               
               
                 External 
                 At this stage no outside communication is 
               
               
                   
                 required except for project status purposes. This 
               
               
                   
                 task should be incorporated into the project status 
               
               
                   
                 meeting in order to notify business partners 
               
               
                   
                 and other project teams. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Migration from Stage Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Approval from Stage 
                 Development Member (the approval must be 
               
               
                 (4) 
                 tracked) 
               
               
                 Entrance/Approval 
                 AT Entrance Criteria 
               
               
                 Criteria 
               
               
                 Kit Move Perf by 
                 Moving the kit from the staging environment to 
               
               
                 (5) 
                 the installation area can be performed by any 
               
               
                   
                 person from one of the following teams: 
               
               
                   
                 Development, Operations, or TS. Movers need to 
               
               
                   
                 be certain that the appropriate approval has been 
               
               
                   
                 given prior to moving the kit. 
               
               
                 Kit Install Perf by 
                 Installation of the kit into the new environment 
               
               
                 (6) 
                 can also be performed by multiple groups. 
               
               
                   
                 Consideration should be given to the level of 
               
               
                   
                 system security access required to perform the 
               
               
                   
                 installation. Whenever a significant level of 
               
               
                   
                 access is required, the installation process 
               
               
                   
                 should be limited to either the TS 
               
               
                   
                 team or Operations. 
               
               
                 Pre-Migration 
                 The pre-migration location should match the 
               
               
                 Location 
                 post migration location listed above for the 
               
               
                   
                 Migration to Stage 
               
               
                 Post-Migration 
                 The post-migration location should be a 
               
               
                 Location 
                 physically separate environment from the 
               
               
                   
                 CT environment whenever feasible and 
               
               
                   
                 cost effective. This location should mirror 
               
               
                   
                 the production environment as closely as 
               
               
                   
                 possible. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Un-Packaging/Installation Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Manual/Automated 
                 For complex systems and installations requiring 
               
               
                 Package? Tool? 
                 a significant level of access the process should 
               
               
                   
                 be automated. Manual processes may require 
               
               
                   
                 explicit directions and a more rigorous 
               
               
                   
                 verification process. 
               
               
                 Brief Package 
                 Whether the installation process is manual or 
               
               
                 Description 
                 automated, the process should be clearly portion 
               
               
                   
                 of the present descriptioned. All units should 
               
               
                   
                 have a specific location on the destination server. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Migration from Stage Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 The installation process should take into account 
               
               
                   
                 factors such as space, currently running 
               
               
                   
                 executables overwriting existing units and?? 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Install Verification 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Verification Check 
                 A simple procedure should be defined to allow for 
               
               
                   
                 verification of a successful migration. 
               
               
                   
                 For manual process the verification should be 
               
               
                   
                 more extensive 
               
               
                 Verified by 
                 The verification should be performed by a 
               
               
                   
                 Development Project team member prior to the 
               
               
                   
                 beginning of Assembly Test. This verification 
               
               
                   
                 can be tracked. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Internal/External Notification 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Internal 
                 The following teams should be notified upon 
               
               
                   
                 successful completion of a migration: 
               
               
                   
                 Development Project Team 
               
               
                 External 
                 At this stage no outside communication is 
               
               
                   
                 required except for project status purposes. This 
               
               
                   
                 task should be incorporated into the project 
               
               
                   
                 status meeting in order to notify business partners 
               
               
                   
                 and other project teams. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Platform Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Platform Type 
                 All 
               
               
                 Description 
                 Migration from Assembly Test to Product Test 
               
               
                   
                 occurs when the Development team has success- 
               
               
                   
                 fully completed the Assembly Test exit criteria. 
               
               
                   
                 The timing of the migration should be coordinated 
               
               
                   
                 between Development and Test. If the project 
               
               
                   
                 involves more than one platform, the cross 
               
               
                   
                 platform migration should also be coordinated to 
               
               
                   
                 be sure that units reach the next phase at the 
               
               
                   
                 appropriate time. For each platform the migration 
               
               
                   
                 “kit” should include all units 
               
               
                   
                 required for the project along with any 
               
               
                   
                 instructional units. The kit should be created and 
               
               
                   
                 sent to a staging area until approval for 
               
               
                   
                 installation in the Product Test environment is 
               
               
                   
                 given. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Migration to Stage Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Approval to Stage 
                 Development Team Member (the approval must 
               
               
                 (1) 
                 be tracked) 
               
               
                 Exit/Approval 
                 AT Exit Criteria 
               
               
                 Criteria 
               
               
                 Kit Creation/Trigger 
                 If the Kit creation is automated the trigger should 
               
               
                 Performed by (2) 
                 come from the approver to stage as listed above. 
               
               
                 &amp; (3) 
                 If the Kit creation is not automated, then the 
               
               
                   
                 Development or TS team should created the kit 
               
               
                   
                 based upon a portion of the present descriptioned 
               
               
                   
                 set of procedures. 
               
               
                 Pre-Migration 
                 The pre-migration location can be a physically 
               
               
                 Location 
                 separate directory with the appropriate level 
               
               
                   
                 of security or it can be a logical environment in 
               
               
                   
                 which the units are tagged with the appropriate 
               
               
                   
                 migration level. 
               
               
                 Post-Migration 
                 The staging environment can be a physically 
               
               
                 Location 
                 separate directory with the appropriate level of 
               
               
                   
                 security or it can be a logically separate 
               
               
                   
                 environment in which the units are tagged with 
               
               
                   
                 the appropriate migration level. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Packaging Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Manual/Automated 
                 Migration can either be manual or automated. In 
               
               
                 Package? Tool? 
                 either case the process needs to be portion of the 
               
               
                   
                 present descriptioned and must meet the CM 
               
               
                   
                 requirements for tracking and recovery. 
               
               
                 Brief Package 
                 Packaging of the CM units should involve 
               
               
                 Description 
                 utilizing the same grouping as the migration 
               
               
                   
                 from CT to AT, this may prevent the introduction 
               
               
                   
                 of new units or the loss of required units. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Migration to Stage Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 If multiple units are combined to create a derived 
               
               
                   
                 product then only the derived product needs to be 
               
               
                   
                 migrated. Some environments may require the 
               
               
                   
                 product to be created differently for each 
               
               
                   
                 destination environment, in this case the 
               
               
                   
                 sub-components need to be migrated as well. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Package Verification 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Verification Check 
                 A simple procedure should be defined to allow for 
               
               
                   
                 verification of a successful migration. This 
               
               
                   
                 procedure may require an extra step during the 
               
               
                   
                 actual packaging to create an audit log 
               
               
                   
                 identifying the status of the migration. 
               
               
                 Verified by 
                 The verification should be performed by a 
               
               
                   
                 Development Project team member, prior to 
               
               
                   
                 notifying Test. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Internal/External Notification 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Internal 
                 The following teams should be notified upon 
               
               
                   
                 successful completion of a migration: Test Team 
               
               
                 External 
                 At this stage no outside communication is 
               
               
                   
                 required except for project status purposes. This 
               
               
                   
                 task should be incorporated into the project 
               
               
                   
                 status meeting in order to notify business partners 
               
               
                   
                 and other project teams. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Migration from Stage Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Approval from Stage 
                 Development Member (this approval must to be 
               
               
                 (4) 
                 tracked) 
               
               
                 Entrance/Approval 
                 PT Entrance Criteria 
               
               
                 Criteria 
               
               
                 Kit Move Perf by 
                 Moving the kit from the staging environment to 
               
               
                 (5) 
                 the installation area can be performed by any 
               
               
                   
                 person from one of the following teams: 
               
               
                   
                 Development, Operations, or TS. Movers need 
               
               
                   
                 to be certain that the appropriate approval has 
               
               
                   
                 been given prior to moving the kit. 
               
               
                 Kit Install Perf by 
                 Installation of the kit into the new environment 
               
               
                 (6) 
                 can also be performed by multiple groups. 
               
               
                   
                 Consideration should be given to the level of 
               
               
                   
                 system security access required to perform the 
               
               
                   
                 installation. Whenever a significant level of 
               
               
                   
                 access is required, the installation process 
               
               
                   
                 should be limited to either the TS team 
               
               
                   
                 or Operations. 
               
               
                 Pre-Migration 
                 The pre-migration location should match the post 
               
               
                 Location 
                 migration location listed above for the Migration 
               
               
                   
                 to Stage 
               
               
                 Post-Migration 
                 The post-migration location should be a 
               
               
                 Location 
                 physically separate environment from the 
               
               
                   
                 CT environment whenever feasible and cost 
               
               
                   
                 effective. This location should mirror the 
               
               
                   
                 production environment as closely as possible. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Un-Packaging/Installation Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Manual/Automated 
                 For complex systems and installations requiring 
               
               
                 Package? Tool? 
                 a significant level of access the process should 
               
               
                   
                 be automated. Manual process may require 
               
               
                   
                 explicit directions and a more rigorous 
               
               
                   
                 verification process. 
               
               
                 Brief Package 
                 Whether the installation process is manual or 
               
               
                 Description 
                 automated, the process should be clearly portion 
               
               
                   
                 of the present descriptioned. All units should 
               
               
                   
                 have a specific location on the destination 
               
               
                   
                 server. 
               
               
                   
                 The installation process should take into account 
               
               
                   
                 factors such as space, currently running 
               
               
                   
                 executables, overwriting existing units, 
               
               
                   
                 and?? 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Install Verification 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Verification Check 
                 A simple procedure should be defined to allow 
               
               
                   
                 for verification of a successful migration. 
               
               
                   
                 This procedure may require an extra step 
               
               
                   
                 during the actual packaging to create an audit 
               
               
                   
                 log identifying the status of the migration. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Migration from Stage Information 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 For manual processes the verification should be 
               
               
                   
                 more extensive 
               
               
                 Verified by 
                 The verification should be 
               
               
                   
                 performed by an Test member, prior to the 
               
               
                   
                 beginning of Product Test. 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Internal/External Notification 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Internal 
                 The following teams should be notified upon 
               
               
                   
                 successful completion of the migration: Test 
               
               
                 External 
                 At this stage no outside communication is 
               
               
                   
                 required except for project status purposes. 
               
               
                   
                 This task should be incorporated into 
               
               
                   
                 the project status meeting in order to notify 
               
               
                   
                 business partners and other project teams. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     SIR WORKBENCH USAGE 
     FIG. 103A illustrates a method  10300  for providing a system investigation report workbench. First, in operation  10302 , multiple types of information are received relating to a plurality of system investigation reports from a plurality of users. The types of information relating to the system investigation reports are displayed in a plurality of fields in operation  10304 . Browsing of the information relating to each of the system investigation reports is allowed in operation  10306 . Change requests relating to the system investigation reports are initiated upon a predetermined user action in operation  10308 . These the change requests are managed in operation  10310  by displaying the change requests, allowing the users to edit the change requests, and indicating which of the change requests have been implemented. 
     Optionally, the displayed information may be filtered based on criterion including criterion selected by the users or a predetermined group of criterion for reporting purposes. As a further option, the filtered, displayed material may also be printed. 
     Editing of the information relating to the system investigation reports may be allowed. In such an embodiment, a first type of the information may be displayed separate from a second type of the information with editing of the second type of information allowed only upon authentication of an identity of an authorized user. 
     As an option, the fields may include a date each system investigation report was created, the user that created each system investigation report, a status of each system investigation report, a priority of each system investigation report, a description of each system investigation report, a person responsible for resolving each system investigation report, a target date for resolving of each system investigation report, and/or a date when each system investigation report was resolved. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     The following description provides an overview of the System Investigation Report (SIR) Workbench for use on a ReTA engagement. The SIR Workbench is be used to report development, testing, architecture, and infrastructure problems and desired enhancements. It also provides a means for project managers to control the Change Management Process. 
     SIR Lifecycle 
     New SIRs are created during testing as errors are found. 
     After a SIR has been created, a team lead may assign the SIR to a developer. 
     The assigned developer may review and fix the SIR. 
     The project lead is responsible for closing, deferring, and rejecting SIRs. 
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 SIR Responsibilities by Role 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Role 
                 Responsibilities 
                 Tool Section 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Tester 
                 Create a new SIR 
                 New SIR 
               
               
                 Team lead 
                 Assign the SIR 
                 SIR Maintenance 
               
               
                   
                 Fill in SIR details (e.g. difficulty, est. 
               
               
                   
                 hours) 
               
               
                 Developer 
                 Fix the SIR 
                 SIR Maintenance 
               
               
                   
                 Update the SIR (e.g. actual hours, 
               
               
                   
                 comments) 
               
               
                 Project lead 
                 Close, Defer, or Reject the SIR 
                 SIR Maintenance 
               
               
                   
                 Change Control administration 
                 Print Reports 
               
               
                 SIR 
                 Tool Support 
                 Makes updates/ 
               
               
                 Workbench 
                   
                 changes to SIR 
               
               
                 Administrator 
                   
                 Workbench 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Workbench Overview 
     Main Window 
     As shown in FIG. 103B, the SIR Workbench Main Window screen  10330  provides navigation buttons for adding new SIRs  10332 , viewing existing SIRs  10334 , viewing/printing existing reports  10336  and help  10338 . 
     Creating a New SIR 
     From the Main Window, select the New button  10332 . The New SIR window  10400  may be displayed which is illustrated in FIG.  104 . All SIR requests with status of New (in the Status field  10402 ) can be reviewed. To look at other newly submitted SIRs, scroll through the record numbers  10334  (located in the bottom, left-hand corner). 
     To complete the form, do the following: 
     Select the appropriate Originator  10336 , Project Phase  10338  and Component  10310  from the list boxes. 
     Enter a short description of the problem within the SIR Title field  10312 . 
     Enter a detailed description of the problem within the Detailed Description field  10314 . 
     Select the Close button  10316  to return to the main window  10330  (FIG.  103 . 1 ). 
     Reviewing and Modifying Existing SIRs 
     From the main window  10330 , select the View button  10334 . As illustrated in FIG. 105, this may display a window  10500  similar to the New SIR window, however it is possible to scroll through existing SIRs using the Record control  10502  located in the lower left portion of the window. 
     To search for a specific SIRs, click on the field containing the data to search by and then click on the Find SIR button  10504 . Enter your search criteria when the prompted. The resulting SIRs should comply with the search criteria. Advance through the retrieved records using the Record control. 
     Team Lead Administration 
     Typically it may be the Team Lead&#39;s responsibility to review and assign SIRs to individual developers. To do this, simply type within the desired fields or select the appropriate options from the list boxes. Pressing the Close button or advancing to another SIR may commit the changes. Pressing the Escape button may cancel changes. 
     Change Control Administration 
     Using the Change Request Detail button  10506  (FIG. 105) located on this window, the Team Lead or the Project Manager has the ability to initiate and update the status of the current SIR within the Change Control process. See FIG. 106, which illustrates the Change Control Details Window  10600 . Various fields maybe updated and changed, such as the Investigation Description field  10602  and the Value Description field  10604 . 
     Printing Reports 
     From the main window, select the Report button  10336  (FIG.  103 B). This may display the Report Selection Screen  10700 , which is illustrated in FIG.  107 . 
     Select the appropriate criteria for the desired reports and select the Preview button  10702 . This may provide a view of the report from which it is possible to create printed copies. To return to the main window select the Close button  10704 . 
     SOURCE CONTROL 
     This paper provides an overview of the configuration and use of Microsoft&#39;s Visual SourceSafe™ (VSS) on the ReTA Phase 1 engagement. This portion of the present description may assume that a VSS installation has already been performed on a Windows NT workstation or server and is visible to the development network. It also assumes that developer workstations have performed the network installation and can access the shared SourceSafe folder. 
     SourceSafe Administration 
     User Administration 
     Using the VSS Administrator  10800 , create the user accounts  10802  for individual team members. See FIG.  108 . Ensure that appropriate access rights  10804  are given appropriately. Some team members may require full access, while others may only need to read from the repository. For assistance in this process refer to the SourceSafe online help. 
     Repository Administration 
     Project Hierarchy 
     Within the Visual SourceSafe Explorer, configure the project tree  10900  as shown in FIGS. 109A and 109B so as to logically separate source code  10902 , tools  10904 , and documentation  10906  for ease of use and administration. The structure should be designed to allow developers to quickly locate and retrieve desired projects and/or files while allowing for quick and easy administration. 
     Management 
     It is the job of the Source Control Administrator to manage the source code repository. This includes analyzing the repository for signs of database corruption, archiving the database when it becomes too large and cleaning the Temporary folders routinely. The online help within the VSS Administrator tool provides step-by-step descriptions of performing these and other administrative tasks. 
     Performance 
     VSS is not a true client/server system. All the VSS software runs on the client. No software component runs on the server, so in that respect, VSS can be treated as a file server. With that in mind, it may be useful to ask the local network and server administrators to provide assistance in tuning the server. 
     Additionally, the following steps should be done periodically to ensure better performance: 
     Run the supplied Analyze.exe utility to search for and fix any corruption or errors 
     Use a disk de-fragmentation application to maintain disk integrity 
     Export old versions of source code and store in another location (tape, CD-ROM, etc.) 
     SourceSafe Usage 
     Check Out 
     Application checkout can be performed at any project or file level using the VSS Explorer. It is possible to check out  11000  the entire application  11002 , individual packages, or individual files. FIG. 110 illustrates the user getting the latest of the server-side application code from VSS. During the build phase the developer would typically performing the following: 
     Get a latest version of the entire application by right clicking on the application and selecting Get Latest Version  11004 . Note that this operation does not ‘check out’ any code, it merely creates a local copy of the latest version of code. 
     Next, when the window  11100  in FIG. 111 appears, select the Recursive checkbox  11102  to copy any sub-projects. Also, check the Build Tree checkbox  11104  if one has not performed this operation before. Upon completion one should have a complete set of application folders and sub-folders within your local working directory. 
     At some times it may be desirable to get an earlier ‘Labeled’ version of the source code. An example would be if one wished to retrieve the last version of code that passed Assembly Test. Selecting the ‘Show History’ menu item  11006  (see FIG. 110) from the right-mouse popup window displays the History window  11200 , which is illustrated in FIG.  112 . Earlier versions may be selected from there based on the entry in the Date column  11202 . 
     After getting the desired version of the entire application, one may then check out the individual project or files that are going to be updated. The check out process may put a lock on the files within VSS as well as copy the latest version of the files to the local working directory. 
     Upon completion the VSS Explorer may reflect the status of the checked out files for other developers to see. At this point one can open the local project or files and make any desired changes. Referring to FIG. 113, select files  11300  and right click on the files to bring up the popup window  11302 . Select the Check Out menu option  11304 . Open the desired files and make changes. 
     If the developer decides that they are not going to make any changes or for some other reason, no longer wants to have the files checked out in their name, the developer can select the ‘Undo Check Out’ menu option  11306  from the right-mouse click popup window. This may reset the state of the files within VSS. 
     Check In 
     After successfully making modifications to the local copy of the source code, the developer should check the new version of the code into VSS. This is accomplished by the following tasks. 
     From within the VSS Explorer, select the files that one wishes to check back in to VSS. Right mouse click on the files and select the ‘Check In’ menu item  11400  as illustrated in FIG.  114 . 
     When prompted for the Check In details at the Check In Screen  11500 , which is illustrated in FIG. 115, make sure that each developer provides details of what modifications took place in the Comment field  11502 . This can be useful for reviewing the history of stored versions. 
     Version Labels 
     VSS uses version numbers to keep track of every change one makes to your files and projects. This gives one the ability to retrieve any version of a file or project. VSS keeps track of old versions in 3 ways—by internal version number, by date, and by user-defined labels. 
     Version Number 
     The internal version number is assigned and maintained by VSS. VSS gives every version of a file and project a version number, and displays it in the History of File or History of Project Details dialog box. This version number is always a whole number. 
     Version Label 
     Far more useful, however, are user-defined labels. See FIG. 116, which illustrates a label creation dialog box  11600 . The label is entered in the Label field  11602 . Comments may also be entered/updated in the Comment field  11604 . One can associate a label with any version of any file or project. A label can be a string of up to 31 characters. Any of the following are valid labels: “1.0”, “2.01b”, “Final Beta”, and “Approved for QA”. After one applies these labels, one can retrieve files associated with a particular state of your project from the History dialog box, which is accessed from the Show History command on the Tools menu. When one labels a project with a descriptive text string, all the files in that project and sub-project inherit the label. 
     Consider the following when one uses the Label command: 
     When one uses the Label command, one creates a new version in History of the selected project or file, however, the file or project itself remains the same. 
     If one assigns a label to a version that already has a label, one overwrites the old label. VSS issues a warning before removing the old label. 
     When one edits a label in the History Details dialog box, you do not create a new version of the file or project, you merely assign a new label to an existing version. 
     If you add a label to a version of a file or project in which the label already existed on another version, you may be prompted to remove the old label. 
     History Reporting 
     As illustrated in FIG. 117, the History of Project dialog box  11700  displays the history of a selected project in the Action column  11702 , including all significant events, such as the deletion of files or subprojects, addition of files or subprojects, labeling and renaming of items, and check ins. For each significant event, the dialog box shows the affected file or subproject in the Name column  11704 , the user who performed the action in the User column  11706 , the date and time of the event in the Date column  11708 , and the description of the event in the Action column. Events are listed with the most current event at the top of the display. 
     From this window it is possible to view the details of the change by selecting the Details button  11710 . This may bring up the History Details dialog box  11800 , which is depicted in FIG.  118 . This box includes both general Comment and Label comment fields  11802 , 11804 . It is also possible to print the history details using the Report button  11712  of FIG.  117 . 
     Impact Analysis 
     Use the Find In Files command to display a list of all occurrences of a character string in the VSS files you specify. You can use the command on a single file or on an entire project. This is useful when searching for files that make use of a particular component, interface or method. 
     FIREWALL RECOMMENDATION 
     The main purpose of deploying a firewall is to protect the confidentiality and integrity of the organization&#39;s data, detect any attempted intrusions, minimize the risk zone exposed to the public network, support secure connections to remote users and business partners, and manage the traffic to and from the public network. 
     This portion of the present description outlines the evaluation process and Analysis of an Internet firewall for ReTA. It may discuss the selection approach, the product requirements, and the evaluation of the products, in order to obtain a final recommendation. The end to end process is illustrated in FIG.  119 : 
     Approach 
     The first step in the firewall evaluation process was the development of a selection criteria matrix, and the specification of requirements by ReTA in a Firewall Analysis phase  11930 . During the Product Evaluation phase  11932 , a number of key technical and non-technical areas were evaluated, such as security model employed, interfaces supported, performance, reporting, monitoring, SNMP support, third party support, market position, cost, and vendor support. A high level evaluation was conducted to determine six vendor candidates. After an in-depth study, two remaining products were selected during the Final Recommendation phase  11934 . 
     What follows may illustrate the selection criteria and evaluation information obtained in order to eventually select one firewall vendor for the final recommendation. 
     Product Analysis 
     Many Internet Firewall products exist on the market to date, ensuring a secure enterprise wide solution from a variety of security threats. Jude O&#39;Reilly, an analyst at the Gardner Group Stamford Conn. Predicts that by the year 2000 there may be roughly five firewall suppliers from which to choose from: Check Point Software Inc., Redwood City Calif.; Cisco; Cyberguard, Fort Lauderdale, Fla.; Raptor Systems Inc., Waltham, Mass., and TIS. 
     Focus was given to the top six firewall products. A short list of the leading products on the market was developed based on industry expertise, technical reviews, and research group reports. These products include: 
     Check Point FireWall-1 for NT 
     Secure Computing BorderWare Ver. 5.0 
     Raptor Firewall 5.0 for NT 
     CyberGuard Firewall Version 3.0 
     Microsoft Proxy Server Ver. 2.0 
     Trusted Information Gauntlet Ver 3.2 
     The products selected above are recognized as the best currently available. While there are many firewall products on the market, only a small handful has been reviewed by the major technical journals in 1998. This short list includes the six products that were reviewed and highly rated by most of the journals. Specifically, the following articles were utilized: 
     ICSA, Information Computer Security Association, “Firewall Industry Guide, 1998 
     LanTimes, August, 1998, “Product Comparison: Firewalls” 
     Data Communications, April, 1998, “NT Firewalls: Tough Enough” 
     TechWeb, March 17, 1998, “Beef up External Security” 
     Network Computing, November, 1998, “Seven Firewalls fit for your Enterprise” 
     Federal Computer Week, Sep. 14, 1998, “FCW&#39;s Hacker Challenge” 
     The information for each product was normalized to facilitate product comparison. Each product was evaluated and rated against ReTA&#39;s requirements. 
     The provision of firewalls has become a commodity business. For most enterprises, any of the firewall software on the Firewall Products Chart  12000  illustrated in FIG. 120 may provide adequate security. Feature and ease-of-use differences have blurred between firewall vendors. As each vendor delivers new features, its competitors quickly match and raise the ante. 
     The next challenge was to determine what the best fit would be for ReTA. After careful consideration, two firewall vendors were selected for the product evaluation stage. FIG. 121 illustrates the selected products: Check Point Firewall for NT  12100  and Microsoft Proxy Server Version 2.0  12102 . 
     Check Point&#39;s Firewall for NT: Maintaining a high presents in the market place, Check Point is the leader in firewall security with it&#39;s 35 to 40% of the market share. Stateful inspection is the new generation of firewall technology, providing the highest possible level of security, invented and patented by Check Point Software Technologies. 
     Stateful Inspection packet inspection at all 7 layers of the OSI Model. 
     INSPECT maintaining a high level of performance. 
     Versatility of various OS platforms, Windows NT, Unix. 
     OPSEC (Open Platform for Secure Enterprise Connectivity) manages all aspects of network security. 
     Microsoft Proxy 2.0: Provides fast access to customer and partner business information on the Web, while at the same time providing a secure private infrastructure from the Internet. Microsoft Proxy 2.0 is relatively new to the market place, cost, dynamic packet filtering (DPF) and reverse proxy are some if its main features. Proxy 2.0 feature overview: 
     Socks 4.3 Proxy basic sockets support for non-Windows. 
     Winsock Proxy supports most Winsock 1.1 applet. 
     Web Proxy supports any CERN web browser. 
     Packet Filter/Firewall Static and Dynamic filtering. 
     Requirements 
     Firewall products have matured rapidly over the past few years. Most products today support a variety of firewall designs including packet filter, application proxy, and stateful inspection. Many also support most of the popular Internet protocols now in use. The majority also support network address translation in one form or another. Some of the newer products now support content screening—they can inspect files for viruses and ActiveX components or Java applets for potential problems. Reporting, ease of configuration, and performance are the real areas of differentiation between these products since they all offer excellent security. 
     Keeping this in mind, each product has been considered from a number of different perspectives. 
     Support network address translation 
     Traffic control by source/destination address, application, etc. 
     Alert generation for breaches 
     Encryption support 
     Authentication support 
     Centralized administration of multiple firewalls 
     Easy to use event logging 
     Content screening 
     MS Windows NT-based operating platform 
     Intuitive administration interface 
     Support a wide range of services 
     Excellent performance 
     Certified by Internet Security Assurances Services (ISCA Inc.) 
     Withstand various forms of denial of service attacks 
     Market acceptance and support 
     The ICSA Inc. is an independent industry organization that certifies commercial firewall products against a standard set of functional and security requirements. Functional requirements include services provided to internal and external users, and management capability. Security requirements include port scarning, penetration testing, as well as the use of ISS (Internet Security System) Security Scanner. The products reported here (either an earlier version or the current version) are certified by ICSA Inc. 
     ICSA&#39;s testing is quite thorough. Its certification program is devoted to ensuring that firewalls meet minimum requirements for reliable protection. The agency scans each firewall it considers to make sure the firewall performs as advertised. The agency also verifies that common Internet applications continue to function as expected. 
     Product Evaluation 
     The relative strengths and weaknesses between the products were considered. The main evaluation criteria were rated subjectively based on available information. A weighted summary was calculated for each product according to four categories: business (15%), technical (30%), application (30%), and management/operational (25%). The results of this analysis are presented in the following Table. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Secure 
                 Point 
                   
                 Rap- 
                 Micro- 
                 TIS 
               
               
                   
                 Comp- 
                 Fire- 
                 Cyber- 
                 tor 
                 soft 
                 Gaun- 
               
               
                   
                 uting 
                 Wall-1 
                 Guard 
                 Eagle 
                 Proxy 
                 tley 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Business 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Pricing 
                 4 
                 4 
                 3 
                 4 
                 4 
                 5 
               
               
                 Support 
                 4 
                 5 
                 4 
                 4 
                 4 
                 4 
               
               
                 Market 
                 3 
                 5 
                 2 
                 3 
                 2 
                 4 
               
               
                 Education 
                 4 
                 5 
                 4 
                 4 
                 4 
                 4 
               
               
                 Technical 
               
               
                 Firewall design 
                 3 
                 5 
                 5 
                 3 
                 3 
                 3 
               
               
                 Operating plat. 
                 4 
                 5 
                 3 
                 5 
                 3 
                 5 
               
               
                 Performance 
                 3 
                 5 
                 4 
                 3 
                 3 
                 3 
               
               
                 Network 
                 5 
                 5 
                 4 
                 5 
                 3 
                 5 
               
               
                 Content screen 
                 4 
                 4 
                 4 
                 2 
                 2 
                 3 
               
               
                 Auth./encryption 
                 4 
                 4 
                 4 
                 4 
                 4 
                 4 
               
               
                 Application 
               
               
                 Ftp 
                 5 
                 5 
                 5 
                 5 
                 5 
                 5 
               
               
                 http 
                 5 
                 5 
                 5 
                 5 
                 5 
                 5 
               
               
                 https 
                 3 
                 4 
                 2 
                 5 
                 2 
                 5 
               
               
                 Smtp 
                 2 
                 5 
                 5 
                 5 
                 2 
                 5 
               
               
                 Ssl 
                 5 
                 4 
                 5 
                 2 
                 2 
                 5 
               
               
                 SQL*Net 
                 2 
                 4 
                 2 
                 2 
                 2 
                 5 
               
               
                 Proxy service 
                 4 
                 4 
                 4 
                 4 
                 5 
                 4 
               
               
                 Mgmt/Op 
               
               
                 Console 
                 3 
                 5 
                 3 
                 5 
                 2 
                 4 
               
               
                 Logging/alerts 
                 3 
                 4 
                 5 
                 4 
                 3 
                 4 
               
               
                 Reporting 
                 4 
                 3 
                 4 
                 3 
                 5 
                 4 
               
               
                 Attacks handling 
                 4 
                 3 
                 5 
                 3 
                 5 
                 3 
               
               
                 Summary 
               
               
                 Business (15%) 
                 3.8 
                 4.8 
                 3.3 
                 3.8 
                 3.5 
                 4.3 
               
               
                 Technical (30%) 
                 4.0 
                 4.7 
                 4.0 
                 3.7 
                 3.0 
                 3.8 
               
               
                 Application 
                 4.0 
                 4.4 
                 4.0 
                 4.0 
                 3.3 
                 4.9 
               
               
                 (30%) 
               
               
                 Mgmt/Op (25%) 
                 4.0 
                 3.8 
                 4.3 
                 3.8 
                 3.8 
                 3.8 
               
               
                 Total (weighted) 
                 3.9 
                 4.4 
                 4.0 
                 3.8 
                 3.3 
                 4.2 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     As mentioned, all six of the products analyzed here are best of breed. They differ minimally in functioning as a basic firewall with good performance and solid security. As can be seen from the features summary table in the previous portion of the description, all six of these products have very similar features in general. However, there are important differences when the features are compared in detail. 
     A Gartner Group report on firewall vendors from October 1997 placed Check Point, Trusted Information Systems, and Raptor Systems in its upper right “quadrant”. Vendors in this quadrant have more complete vision and better ability to execute. Furthermore, Gartner stated that any firewalls on their positioning chart would provide adequate security. Feature differences across products are quickly copied and no longer offer competitive differentiation. 
     The technical press often did not compare all products consistently. They also may not have reviewed the same version of the product as currently available. These two factors, as well as the different evaluation criteria and weighting used, partially contributed to the differences among reviews. 
     While a rich feature set is important for a firewall, ease of use and configurability are equally important because most security breaches result from improper firewall configuration. All of these products also support configuration checking to ensure all the rules are consistent and that common mistakes are not made. They also support centrally managing multiple firewalls from one console. 
     In the Data Communications review, they rated the ease of performing certain tasks using each product. These tasks include configuring alert notification, remote shutdown, denying access from a given subnet, log blocked access attempts, and various common rules. All the firewalls were rated as easy to use by the review—although not all types of attacks were logged by every product. All of these products support notification of an attack by pager and/or e-mail. 
     The base-operating platform of each product is an important consideration for ReTA. All of the firewall products selected can run under MS Windows NT. In addition to running on standard commercial OS platforms, FireWall-1 also stands out with third party vendor support. All of the remaining products performed at the 10 to 20 Mbps range. There are a number of factors contributing to FireWall-1&#39;s strong showing, as packet filtering firewalls in general have better performance because they perform “less work.” 
     Industry support and market share is also in Check Point&#39;s favor. With some 40 percent of the firewall market in 1997, no other product approaches FireWall-1&#39;s dominance. It is no wonder that Check Point has such broad support in the security products industry through its OPSEC (Open Platform for Secure Enterprise Connectivity) Alliance. The goal of the Alliance (currently with some two dozen member companies) is to guarantee interoperability between various security applications that may be present in the enterprise. Check Point also has alliances with Bay Networks, Hewlett-Packard, Xylan and U.S. Robotics to build software directly into their routers. 
     Finally, most application gateway firewalls only provide proxy service for the most common Internet protocols—such as ftp, http, https, etc. Generic proxy service is offered to support other protocols. However, generic proxies do not provide the enhanced security that specific proxies provide, thus defeating the whole purpose of application gateways. For this reason, application gateway-only firewalls are rated lower than those that support both application gateway and packet filtering. 
     Due to ReTA&#39;s unknown protocol requirements for future generation of Internet applications, gateways may not be able to efficiently and securely support those applications. In addition to being a stateful packet filter that can support any protocol, FireWall-1 has a powerful scripting language. This capability allows an experienced administrator to add sophisticated support for custom services. 
     Detailed Comparison 
     Check Point Firewall-1 for NT 
     Pros: 
     excellent performance 
     rich and simple GUI 
     stateful inspection gives safe transport to virtually any application 
     highly scaleable 
     centralized management capable of supporting multiple installations 
     load balancing and fail over 
     high market acceptance 
     extensive third party support 
     Cons: 
     rule editor not so intuitive 
     less-than-perfect configuration tools 
     turns off logging on disk/log full error—bad for auditing and security 
     possible corruption of stateful inspection tables leaves network vulnerable (although there is no indication that such corruption is likely) 
     stateful inspection cannot make application-level decisions 
     packets are forwarded rather than reconstructed anew (makes it possible for out-of-band attack) 
     lack of information regarding the layer that each protocol is examined by default 
     Secure Computing BorderWare 
     Pros: 
     good tools for massaging of log data 
     17 standard predefined reports 
     warns managers about potentially disastrous configuration choices 
     very comprehensive filtering 
     separate TCP/IP stack for send and receive—to eliminate chance of a fault in the stack causing a security vulnerability 
     shuts-down on disk full error, and rotates logs on log full error—good for security and auditing 
     automatically gather information on possible intruders 
     up to four interfaces with separate TCP/IP stack—no access across interfaces 
     vendor supplies hardened OS 
     OS does not provide super-user capability to gain total system control 
     proxy runs in its own security domain—exposure in one proxy does not affect others 
     Cons: 
     application proxy only 
     runs on BSDI operating system only 
     does not have firewall load balancing/fault tolerance option 
     no default proxy for https 
     no default proxy for SQL*Net 
     central console cannot operate multiple firewalls does not support Token Ring interface 
     CyberGuard Firewall 
     Pros: 
     virtually flawless security 
     shuts down access when log files fill—good for security and auditing 
     centralized management 
     load balancing 
     good performance 
     large number of options 
     strong administration GUI 
     vendor supplies hardened OS 
     communication blocked between network and OS 
     log many different types of attacks 
     Cons: 
     requires experienced UNIX administrator 
     runs on SCO UnixWare 
     no default proxy for https 
     no default proxy for SQL*Net 
     currently does not support Token Ring 
     Raptor Eagle 
     Pros: 
     integration with Windows NT event viewer 
     integration with Windows NT performance monitor 
     integration with Windows NT domain 
     has default proxy for https 
     Cons: 
     application proxy only 
     does not support load balancing/fault tolerance setup of firewall 
     turns off logging on disk/log full error—bad for auditing and security 
     no default proxy for SQL*Net 
     poor performance 
     Trusted Information Systems Gauntlet 
     Pros: 
     extensive logging 
     source code can be inspected by customer 
     respectable market share 
     supports firewall load balancing/fail over 
     has default proxy for https 
     has default proxy for SQL*Net 
     Cons: 
     stops logging when disk full—bad for auditing purposes 
     application proxy with basic packet filtering 
     Firewall Design 
     Depending on who you ask, there are three or four types of common firewall designs—packet filter, circuit proxy, application gateway, and stateful packet filter. These may be briefly described in the portion of the descriptions below. The two most common firewall designs in use today—application gateways and stateful packet filters. 
     Packet Filters 
     Packet filtering is the most basic form of firewall protection and consists of selectively routing packets between internal and external hosts by either the type of packet, the originating host address, the target host address, or the services requested. In reality, this is no different from filtering provided by regular routers. In a firewall environment, though, the filtering rules are generally more stringent. And the firewall software may be optimized to perform route filtering. Packet filters are good because they are fast, but they lack the complete state and context of a conversation. Therefore, they are rather vulnerable to spoofing and other exploits. While OSI layers 2 and 3 information is important, information in high layers is significant as well in a security context. 
     Circuit Proxy 
     A circuit proxy regulates connections between clients on the internal network and servers on the public network (and, if security policy permits, vice versa) by forcing both client and server to address their packets only to the proxy running on the firewall bastion host. These connections are established in accordance with the same types of rules as those governing packet filters and are based on the IP addresses and port numbers of client and server. 
     Unlike a packet filter, circuit proxy funnels all traffic through a single IP port (usually 1080) instead of using a different port number for each application. If a client on the public network opens a session with a server on the internal network, the client has no way to learn the actual EP address of the server at the other end of the connection, since the circuit proxy intercepts all the packets. 
     Like packet filters, circuit proxies operate at OSI layers 2 and 3 and lack complete information about a network conversation. Furthermore, circuit proxies are not transparent and may require modifications to the usage of the client and server. For this reason, circuit proxies are typically not used today. 
     Application Gateway/Proxy 
     Unlike packet filters and circuit proxies, application gateways (AG) inspect the data portion of the packets and make security decisions based on the nature of the application. Operating at the top of the TCP/IP protocol stack, application gateways take users&#39; requests for Internet services (such as FTP and Telnet) and forward them, as appropriate, according to security policy, to the actual services. 
     Application gateways have the opposite problem of packet filters. These proxies operate at the upper layers of the OSI model. While there is important information in the data portion of the packet, lower layer information is still significant. The proxies typically track state information in the session layer. This is also the reason why application proxies do not work for stateless (or connectionless) protocols. 
     Application gateways typically rely on the underlying TCP/IP stack to securely handle packets. This is the reason why many application gateway-based firewalls (like Secure Computing&#39;s BoderWare and Sidewinder) are packaged with a hardened operating system. 
     An application gateway can, for example, restrict an internal user from accessing certain Web sites by name or by the time of day. Or for FTP service, the gateway can control whether files can be downloaded from the outside or be sent from the inside. In addition, the application gateway can be set up to log certain commands that packet filters simply have no knowledge of. Because these gateways have more knowledge of the protocol and examine more information, they are generally considered to be more secure. The consequence of this is that application gateways generally have lower performance. 
     Stateful Packet Filter 
     Stateful packet filtering (SPF) was invented and patented by Check Point (maker of FireWall-1). SPF maintains the state of all communications layer—OSI layers 2 through 7. Thus it has the necessary context data to determine whether to accept or reject a packet. This determination may rely on the packet information, but can also depend on previous packets that have been exchanged (the context) that the current packet is a part of. 
     For example, FireWall-1&#39;s stateful inspection starts at layer 2, and works all the way through layer 7, extracting key information from each layer, in order to determine the nature of the session. The inspection engine is capable of identifying information at any location in a packet (regardless of the OSI layer of that information) and using that information to decide the disposition of a packet, and/or store that information for future use in the security analysis process. 
     Stateful packet filters are less granular than application gateways because SPFs do not have application-level knowledge. They have no knowledge of the different commands in the application protocol, for example. On the other hand, SPFs generally have better performance. 
     Comparison 
     Most firewall products today are divided between application gateway (Raptor Eagle, TIS Gauntlet, CyberGuard) and stateful packet filtering (Check Point FireWall-1, Cisco PIX, Sun SunScreen). As such, the following table is generated to compare these two technologies. 
     In addition, while application gateways are generally considered to be more secure, that security results from the ability to filter commands and data at the session and application layer. Proxies have been primarily used to control outbound traffic. It is uncertain the kind of protection they offer for inbound traffic. For example, a HTTP proxy can control users from accessing certain Web sites at certain hours. However, these controls generally do not apply to inbound traffic. The following table details a Traffic Matrix. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Application Gateways 
                 Stateful Packet Filter 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Security - 
                 ✓ More - Finer 
                 χ Less - Less granular 
               
               
                 Outbound 
                 control over the application 
                 control over service 
               
               
                   
                 service; can filter on actual 
               
               
                   
                 commands within the 
               
               
                   
                 protocol 
               
               
                 Security - 
                 — Slightly more - 
                 — Slightly less - 
               
               
                 Inbound 
                 Constructs new packet; not 
                 Packets forwarded 
               
               
                   
                 susceptible to out of band 
                 instead of reconstructed; 
               
               
                   
                 attacks 
                 susceptible to out of band 
               
               
                   
                   
                 attacks 
               
               
                 Performance 
                 χ Lower - Examines 
                 ✓ Higher - Examines 
               
               
                   
                 more information 
                 each packet to varying 
               
               
                   
                 deep in the upper 
                 level of depth 
               
               
                   
                 layer of OSI 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Final Recommendation 
     Check Point Firewall-1 was selected as the firewall of choice. With security and a great management interface, Check Point&#39;s Firewall-1 breezed through all the test. The Stateful-inspection firewall sets up access rules for virtually any condition. From a performance standpoint, Check Point Firewall-1 matched most if it&#39;s competitors however, performance is far less important than security or management, and Firewall-1 excelled in both. 
     IMPLEMENTING VB WITHIN RETA 
     This portion of the description provides information on how to implement an eCommerce application based on the ReTA architecture using the Visual Basic programming language (VB). The ReTA architecture defines a set of COM (Microsoft&#39;s Component Object Model) Interface standards for creating application components. This portion of the description describes how an application can be created by writing Activity, SubActivity and Business Object components to the ReTA interfaces. It describes the VB implementation of COM objects, the process for creating each type of component and gives examples of a VB implementation of an Activity, SubActivity and Business Object component. 
     FIG. 122 is a diagram of the Activity Framework classes with the VBActivityWrapper  12200 . 
     VB Implementation of COM Objects 
     Implementing components based on existing COM Interfaces 
     The COM component model allows components to be created in any supported language. To implement a ReTA application in VB, one has to create Business Objects, SubActivities and Activity components that implement the ReTA COM Interfaces. The ReTA Interfaces are defined in Interface Definition Language (IDL) files which are then compiled into machine readable Type Libraries. To implement an interface in VB you must reference the Type Library in the Visual Basic project. You then create a VB Class module. The first line of the class module describes that the class implements a COM interface: 
     Implements Interface Name 
     Once this line is added, the VB compiler may force you to provide an implementation for every method defined in the interface. The method name must be prefixed by the interface name followed by an underscore. For example the IRETAEditable interface has a method setValue. You must provide an implementation for this interface using the method name IRETAEditable_setValue. 
     Tip: Use the class browser to view the methods required in the interface. The browser provides a VB description of the method signature. 
     In and Out Parameters in a Method Signature 
     The IDL for a method describes all the parameters for that method and the return type. For each parameter it defines whether the parameter is an In (input), Out (output) parameter, or a combination of both. For In parameters this corresponds to a ByVal parameter in Visual Basic. For In/Out parameters this corresponds to a ByRef parameter (the default). VB does not support Out only parameters. 
     You must ensure that the implementation exactly matches the interface specification, including the ByRef keyword if necessary, or the VB compiler may return the error: 
     Compile Error: Procedure declaration does not match description of event or procedure having the same name. 
     COM Object references in a method signature 
     If a method signature has a COM Interface then you must add a reference to the Type Library of that Interface to the VB Project. 
     COM IUnknown Interfaces in a method signature 
     You cannot implement an interface in VB id if that interface has an IUnknown reference. 
     Custom interfaces verses Automation interfaces 
     To implement the Automation interface that is used to late bind to the component it is necessary to provide Public methods for each interface method. These Public methods have exactly the same name as the Interface method. These public methods simply call the custom interface methods defined above. 
     Creating ReTA Business Objects, SubActivities and Activities 
     Business Objects 
     Business Objects must implement the IRETAEditable interface that allows the ReTA architecture to get and set attributes of the object using string labels. 
     SubActivities 
     SubActivities must implement the IRETASubActivity interface. The table describes what implementation must be provided for each method. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Method Name 
                 Required Implementation 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 initialize 
                 Implement any initialization code for the SubActivity 
               
               
                   
                 including storing a reference to the parent Activity 
               
               
                   
                 passed as a parameter 
               
               
                 abort 
                 This is called when the Activity is aborted. Implement 
               
               
                   
                 any code necessary to clean up, if any. 
               
               
                 commit 
                 This is called when the Activity or SubActivity is 
               
               
                   
                 committed. Call the Microsoft Transaction Set- 
               
               
                   
                 Complete method. See the example SubActivity 
               
               
                 getActivity 
                 This should return a reference to the parent Activity 
               
               
                   
                 stored in the initialize method. 
               
               
                 getName 
                 This should return the name of the SubActivity 
               
               
                 checkRequested- 
                 This should check that all the Business Objects 
               
               
                 Objects 
                 required for the execute method are available in the 
               
               
                   
                 Activity context and return 0 for success or - 1 for 
               
               
                   
                 error. 
               
               
                 precondition 
                 Implement any code necessary as a precondition for 
               
               
                   
                 the execute method, if any. 
               
               
                 execute 
                 This is where the business logic for the SubActivity 
               
               
                   
                 goes. 
               
               
                 postcondition 
                 Implement any code necessary to clean up after the 
               
               
                   
                 execute method. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Activities 
     This portion of the description is split into two sub-portions of the description, the first describing the design of the VB Activity wrapper mechanism and the second describing the steps required to implement an Activity in VB. 
     FIG. 123 illustrates interface relationships. Activity components  12300  are called by the Java VB Activity wrapper component  12302 . The Java VB Activity wrapper component provides the default implementation for an Activity. One has to implement a IVBActivity interface which defines a subset of the IAFActivity interface. 
     IRETAActivity, IRETAContext, IRETAEventListener—As Existing Interfaces 
     IVBActivity  12304 —Methods that developers needs to implement in their VB Activity components 
     IRETAVBActivityWrapper  12306 —Method to give a reference of the VB Activity component to the Wrapper 
     Views 
     The views map the UI widgets to attributes of business objects. The Java activities can build views from a set of predefined Java classes. The VB activities build views from a set of predefined VB Classes. 
     Example Customer Lookup Application 
     Business Object 
     &#39;ReTA demonstration VB Business Object 
     &#39;Lester Thomas January 1999 
     &#39;All ReTA business objects must implement the IRETAEditable COM interface 
     &#39;The IRETAEditable type library must be referenced by the VB Project 
     Implements IRETAEditable 
     Private ssn As Integer 
     Private name As String 
     Private Age As Integer 
     Private Level As String 
     Const retFalse=0 
     Const retTrue=1 
     Const retError=−1 
     Const s_SSN_LABEL=“ssnwidget” 
     Const s_NAME_LABEL=“namewidget” 
     Const s_AGE_LABEL=“agewidget” 
     Const s_LEVEL_LABEL_“levelwidget” 
     Private Sub Class_Initialize( ) 
     ssn=10 
     name=“default name” 
     Age=21 
     Level=“2” 
     End Sub 
     &#39;To implement a Interface method, the method name must be prefixed by the interface name. 
     &#39;All interface methods should be marked private so that they are not visible except through the interface 
     Private Function IRETAEditable_setValue(ByVal attrib As String, ByVal val As String) As Long 
     IRETAEditable_setValue=retError 
     If attrib=s_SSN_LABEL Then 
     ssn=val 
     IRETAEditable_setValue=retFalse 
     End If 
     If attrib=s_NAME_LABEL Then 
     name=val 
     IRETAEditable_setValue=retFalse 
     End If 
     If attrib=s_AGE_LABEL Then 
     Age=val 
     IRETAEditable_setValue=retFalse 
     End If 
     If attrib=s_LEVEL_LABEL Then 
     Level val 
     IRETAEditable_setValue=retFalse 
     End If 
     End Function 
     &#39;To implement an Interface method, the method name must be prefixed by the interface name. 
     &#39;All interface methods should be marked private so that they are not visible except through the interface 
     Private Function IRETAEditable_getValue(ByVal attrib As String, val As String) As Long 
     IRETAEditable_getValue=retError 
     If attrib=s_SSN_LABEL Then 
     val=ssn 
     IRETAEditable_getValue retFalse 
     End If 
     If attrib=s_NAME_LABEL Then 
     val=name 
     IRETAEditable_getValue=retFalse 
     End If 
     If attrib=s_AGE_LABEL Then 
     val=Age 
     IRETAEditable_getValue=retFalse 
     End If 
     If attrib=s_LEVEL_LABEL Then 
     val=Level 
     IRETAEditable_getValue=retFalse 
     End If 
     End Function 
     &#39;For the dispatch interface, VB just exposes the public functions. 
     &#39;Therefore we must provide the dispatch interface public methods manually 
     Public Function setValue(ByVal attrib As String, ByVal val As String) As Long 
     setValue=IRETAEditable_setValue(attrib, val) 
     End Function 
     Public Function getValue(ByVal attrib As String, val As String) As Long 
     getvalue=IRETAEditable_getValue(attrib, val) 
     End Function 
     SubActivity 
     &#39;ReTA demonstration VB SubActivity Object 
     &#39;Lester Thomas January 1999 
     &#39;All ReTA SubActivity objects must implement the IRETASubActivity COM interface 
     &#39;The IRETASubActivity type library must be referenced by the VB Project 
     Implements IRETASubActivity 
     Private m_name As String 
     Private m_IRETAActivity As IRETAActivity 
     Const retFalse=0 
     Const retTrue=1 
     Const retError=−1 
     &#39;The SubActivity abort transaction mechanism needs to be validated 
     Private Function IRETASubActivity_abort(ByVal eventCollectionIn As 
     IRETAEventCollection) As IRETAEventCollection 
     &#39;insert any additional code needed for the abort 
     Set IRETASubActivity_abort=eventCollectionIn 
     End Function 
     &#39;this method checks that all the objects required for the execute are present in the 
     &#39;Activity context. It returns retFalse or retError. 
     Private Function IRETASubActivity_checkRequestedObjects(ByVal eventCollectionIln As IRETAEventCollection) As Long 
     Dim ActivityContext As IRETAContext 
     Set ActivityContext=m_IRETAActivity 
     Dim label As String 
     label=“lurkingCustomerKey” 
     IRETASubActivity_checkRequestedObjects= 
     ActivityContext.containsKey(label) 
     End Function 
     &#39;The SubActivity commit transaction mechanism needs to be validated 
     Private Function IRETASubActivity_commit(ByVal eventCollectionIln As 
     IRETAEventCollection) As IRETAEventCollection 
     &#39;Get the object&#39;s ObjectContext. 
     Dim ctxObject As ObjectContext 
     Set ctxObject=GetObjectContext( ) 
     &#39;call SetComplete. 
     ctxObject.SetComplete 
     Set ctxObject=Nothing 
     End Function 
     Private Function IRETASubActivity_execute(ByVal resultln As IRETAResult, 
     ByVal eventCollectionIn As IRETAEventCollection) As IRETAResult 
     &#39;get the Customer Object from the Activity Context and add the default values 
     &#39;for this example we may not get the values from the database 
     &#39;We need to use the IRETAContext interface of the Activity component 
     Dim ActivityContext As IRETAContext 
     Set ActivityContext=m_IRETAActivity 
     &#39;this is the label for retrieving the Business Object from the Activity Context 
     Dim label As String 
     label=“lurkingCustomerKey” 
     &#39;We need the event collection as an IUnknown and so use the VB Automation (or dispatch) interface 
     Dim ecdispatch As Object 
     Set ecdispatch=eventCollectionIn 
     Dim customerObjectdisp As Object 
     Set customerObjectdisp=ActivityContext.GetObject(label, ecdispatch) 
     &#39;We want the IRETAEditable interface of the Customer Business Object 
     Dim customerObject As IRETAEditable 
     Set customerObject=customerObjectdisp 
     &#39;set some values for the names based on the ssn 
     &#39;This would normally be a database lookup 
     Dim ssn As String 
     Dim name As String 
     Dim Age As String 
     Dim Level As String 
     Dim Error As Long 
     Error=customerObject.getValue(“ssnwidget”, ssn) 
     If ssn=“10” Then 
     name=“Lester Thomas” 
     Age=“29” 
     Level=“2” 
     End If 
     If ssn=“20” Then 
     name=“Fred Bloggs” 
     Age=“23” 
     Level=“1” 
     End If 
     Error=customerObject.setValue(“namewidget”, name) 
     Error=customerObject.setValue(“agewidget”, Age) 
     Error=customerObject.setValue(“levelwidget”, Level) 
     label=“realCustomerKey” 
     Error=ActivityContext.addObject(label, customerObjectdisp) 
     Dim resultObject As Object 
     Set resultObject=resultIn 
     &#39;add the Customer Business Object to the Result 
     Error=resultObject.addResult(customerObject) 
     Set IRETASubActivity_execute=resultIn 
     End Function 
     &#39;This returns the reference to the Activity object 
     Private Function IRETASubActivity_getActivity( ) As IRETAActivity 
     Set IRETASubActivity_getActivity=m_IRETAActivity 
     End Function 
     &#39;This returns the name of the SubActivity 
     Private Function IRETASubActivity_getName( ) As String 
     IRETASubActivity_getName=m_name 
     End Function 
     &#39;This initializes the SubActivity and sets the reference to the parent Activity 
     Private Function IRETASubActivity_initialize(ByVal activity As IRETAActivity, 
     ByVal eventCollectionIn As IRETAEventCollection) As IRETAEventCollection 
     m_name=“CustomerLookup.SARETACustDetailsRetrieve” 
     Set m_IRETAActivity=activity 
     Set IRETASubActivity_initialize=eventCollectionIn 
     End Function 
     &#39;This executes any preconditions required to execute SubActivity 
     Private Function RETASubActivity_precondition(ByVal eventCollectionIn As 
     IRETAEventCollection) As IRETAEventCollection 
     Set IRETASubActivity_precondition=eventCollectionIn 
     End Function 
     &#39;This executes any postconditions required to clean up after SubActivity 
     Private Function IRETASubActivity_postcondition(ByVal eventCollectionIn As 
     IRETAEventCollection) As IRETAEventCollection 
     Set IRETASubActivity_postcondition=eventCollectionIn 
     End Function 
     &#39;Dispatch interface. These methods simply call the Custom interface methods above 
     Public Function abort(ByVal eventCollectionIn As IRETAEventCollection) As 
     IRETAEventCollection 
     Set abort=IRETASubActivity_abort(eventCollectionIn) 
     End Function 
     Public Function checkRequestedObjects(ByVal eventCollectionIn As 
     IRETAEventCollection) As Long 
     checkRequestedObjects= 
     IRETASubActivity_checkRequestedObjects(eventCollectionIn) 
     End Function 
     Public Function commit(ByVal eventCollectionIn As IRETAEventCollection) As 
     IRETAEventCollection 
     Set commit=IRETASubActivity_commit(eventCollectionIn) 
     End Function 
     Public Function execute(ByVal resultln As IRETAResult, ByVal eventCollectionIn 
     As IRETAEventCollection) As IRETAResult 
     Set execute=IRETASubActivity_execute(resultln, eventCollectionIn) 
     End Function 
     Public Function getActivity( ) As IRETAActivity 
     Set getActivity=IRETASubActivity_getActivity( ) 
     End Function 
     Public Function getName( ) As String 
     getName=IRETASubActivity_getName( ) 
     End Function 
     Public Function initialize(ByVal activity As IRETAActivity, ByVal 
     eventCollectionIn As IRETAEventCollection) As IRETAEventCollection 
     Set initialize=IRETASubActivity_initialize(activity, eventCollectionIn) 
     End Function 
     Public Function precondition(ByVal eventCollectionIn As IRETAEventCollection) 
     As IRETAEventCollection 
     Set precondition=IRETASubActivity_precondition(eventCollectionIn) 
     End Function 
     Public Function postcondition(ByVal eventCollectionIn As IRETAEventCollection) 
     As IRETAEventCollection 
     Set postcondition=IRETASubActivity_postcondition(eventCollectionIn) 
     End Function 
     Activity 
     Implements IAFVBActivity 
     Implements IAFEventListener 
     Const COMFalse=0 
     Const COMTrue=1 
     Const COMError=−1 
     “SubActivity and BO Labels 
     Const s_REAL_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_BONAME=“realCustomerKey” 
     Const s_SARETACUST_DETAILS_RETRIEVE= 
     “VBApp.SARETACustDetailsRetrieve” 
     Const s_SARETACUST_DETAILS_COMMIT= 
     “CustomerLookup.SARETACustDetailsCommit” 
     “Page information for View Mapping 
     Const s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_STARTPAGE= 
     “/ASP/EXAMPLEPAGES/ASP/VBCUSTOMERLOOKUP/INDEX.ASP” 
     Const s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_FORMNAME=“customerLookupForm” 
     Const s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_TEXTBOX=“ssnTextBox” 
     Const s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_BONAME=“lurkingCustomerKey” 
     Const s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_LOOKUPPAGE=“/ASP/EXAMPLEPAGES/ASP/VBCUSTOMERLOOKUP/LOOKUP.ASP” 
     Const s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_LOOKUPFORMNAME=“customerMaintForm” 
     Const s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_NAME_TEXTBOX=“nameTextBox” 
     Const s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_AGE_TEXTBOX=“ageTextBox” 
     Const s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_LEVEL_DROPDOWN=“levelDropDown” 
     Const s_SSN_LABEL=“ssnwidget” 
     Const s_NAME_LABEL=“namewidget” 
     Const s_AGE_LABEL=“agewidget” 
     Const s_LEVEL_LABEL=“levelwidget” 
     Dim m_id As String 
     Private Declare Function CoCreateGuid Lib “OLE32.DLL” (pGuid As GUID) As Long 
     Private Const S_OK=0&#39;Return value from CoCreateGuid 
     Private Type GUID 
     Data1 As Long 
     Data2 As Integer 
     Data3 As Integer 
     Data4(7) As Byte 
     End Type 
     Private Sub Class_Initialize( ) 
     Dim IResult As String 
     IResult=GetGUIDString 
     m_id=“AFVBACustomerLookup” &amp; IResult &#39;&amp; add the result of the 
     CoCreateGuid Function 
     End Sub 
     Public Function GetGUIDString( ) As Variant 
     Dim IResult As Long 
     Dim IGuid As GUID 
     Dim strGuid As String 
     Dim strTemp As String 
     Dim intCtr As Integer 
     IResult=CoCreateGuid(1Guid) 
     If IResult=S_OK Then 
     strTemp=Hex(1Guid.Data1) 
     strGuid=String(8−Len(strTemp), “0”) &amp; strTemp 
     strTemp=Hex(1Guid.Data2) 
     strGuid=strGuid &amp; “−” &amp; String(4−Len(strTemp), “0”) &amp; strTemp 
     strTemp=Hex(1Guid.Data3) 
     strGuid=strGuid &amp; “−” &amp; String(4−Len(strTemp), “0”) &amp; strTemp 
     strTemp=Hex(1Guid.Data4(0)) 
     strGuid=strGuid &amp; “−” &amp; String(2−Len(strTemp), “0”) &amp; strTemp 
     strTemp=Hex(1Guid.Data4(1)) 
     strGuid=strGuid &amp; String(2−Len(strTemp), “0”) &amp; strTemp &amp; “−” 
     For intCtr=2 To 7 
     strTemp=Hex(1Guid.Data4(intCtr)) 
     strGuid=strGuid &amp; String(2−Len(strTemp), “0”) &amp; strTemp 
     Next 
     GetGUIDString=strGuid 
     End If 
     End Function 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 ′************************************************************ 
               
               
                 ******************************** 
               
               
                 ′********** Members of the IAFVBActivity Interface 
               
               
                 *************************************** 
               
               
                 ′************************************************************ 
               
               
                 ******************************** 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     &#39;this procedure captures the value entered on this page of the activity 
     Function IAFVBActivity_capture(ByVal activity As IAFContext, ByVal 
     eventcollection As IAFEventCollection) As Long 
     Dim ecdispatch As Object 
     Set ecdispatch=eventcollection 
     Dim i As Integer 
     Dim page As String 
     Dim Customer As IAFEditable 
     Dim Error As Long 
     “Capture all the view changes for the previous page 
     &#39;Get the object&#39;s ObjectContext. 
     Dim ctxObject As ObjectContext 
     Set ctxObject=GetObjectContext( ) 
     Dim sessionObj As Session 
     Set sessionObj=ctxObject(“Session”) 
     Dim res As Request 
     Set res=ctxObject(“Request”) 
     &#39;Get the last page 
     Dim theSession As IAFSession 
     Set theSession=sessionObj.Contents(“AFSession”) 
     page=theSession.getLastPage( ) 
     “AFUtility theRequestUtility=new AFUtility( ); 
     If page=“ ” Then 
     “Can not retrieve the last page 
     IAFVBActivity_capture=COMError 
     Exit Function 
     End If 
     “Retrieve the views for the current page 
     ****THERE ARE NO VIEWS YET, SO ILL JUST MAP THE VALUES HERE ****** 
     Dim formValue As String 
     If UCase(page)=s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_STARTPAGE Then 
     “get the Business object to map the values too 
      Set Customer=activity.GetObject(s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_BONAME, ecdispatch) 
     “capture mapping to SSN textbox 
     formValue=res.QueryString(s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_TEXTBOX) 
     Error=Customer.setValue(s_SSN_LABEL, formValue) 
     End If 
     If UCase(page)=s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_LOOKUPPAGE Then 
     “get the Business object to map the values too 
     Set Customer= 
     activity.GetObject(s_REAL_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_BONAME, ecdispatch) 
     “capture mapping to name textbox 
     formValue=res.QueryString(s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_NAME_TEXTBOX) 
     Error=Customer.setValue(s_NAME_LABEL, formValue) 
     “capture mapping to age textbox 
     formValue=res.QueryString(s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_AGE_TEXTBOX) 
     Error=Customer.setValue(s_AGE_LABEL, formValue) 
     “capture mapping to level textbox 
     formValue= 
     res.QueryString(s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_LEVEL_DROPDOWN) 
     Error=Customer.setValue(s_LEVEL_LABEL, formValue) 
     End If 
     IAFVBActivity_capture=COMFalse 
     End Function 
     Function IAFVBActivity_createSubActivity(ByVal subActivityName As String, 
     ByVal eventCollection As IAFEventCollection) As IAFSubActivity 
     Dim subActivity As IAFSubActivity 
     Set subActivity=CreateObject(subActivityName) 
     Set IAFVBActivity createSubActivity subActivity 
     End Function 
     Function IAFVBActivity_getRequestedObjects(ByVal inSession As IAFContext, 
     ByVal inActivity As IAFContext) As Long 
     IAFVBActivity_getRequestedObjects=COMFalse 
     End Function 
     Function IAFVBActivity_getUIFieldValue(ByVal inActivity As IAFContext, ByVal 
     page As String, ByVal formName As String, ByVal fieldName As String, ByVal 
     eventCollection As IAFEventCollection) As String 
     “Use the View Mechanism to get the values from the BObjects 
     Dim ecdispatch As Object 
     Set ecdispatch=eventCollection 
     Dim AttributeValue As String 
     Dim Error As Long 
     Dim Customer As IAFEditable 
     Dim label As String 
     If page=“ ” Then 
     “Can not retrieve the last page 
     IAFVBActivity_getUIFieldValue=COMError 
     Exit Function 
     End If 
     “**** THERE ARE NO VIEWS YET, SO ILL JUST MAP THE VALUES HERE ****** 
     If UCase(page)=s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_STARTPAGE Then 
     “get the Business object to map the values too 
     Set Customer=inActivity.GetObject(s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_BONAME, ecdispatch) 
     label=s_SSN_LABEL 
     “capture mapping to SSN textbox 
     Error=Customer.getValue(s_SSN_LABEL, (AttributeValue)) 
     IAFVBActivity_getUIFieldValue=AttributeValue 
     End If 
     If UCase(page)=s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_LOOKUPPAGE Then 
     “get the Business object to map the values too 
     Set Customer= 
     inActivity.GetObject(s_REAL_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_BONAME, ecdispatch) 
     “capture mapping to name textbox 
     Error=Customer.getValue(s_NAME_LABEL, (AttributeValue)) 
     IAFVBActivity_getUIFieldValue=AttributeValue 
     “capture mapping to age textbox 
     Error=Customer.getValue(s_AGE_LABEL, (AttributeValue)) 
     IAFVBActivity_getUIFieldValue=AttributeValue 
     “capture mapping to level textbox 
     Error=Customer.getValue(s_LEVEL_LABEL, (AttributeValue)) 
     IAFVBActivity_getUIFieldValue=AttributeValue 
     End If 
     IAFVBActivity_getUIFieldValue=COMFalse 
     End Function 
     Function IAFVBActivity_postcondition(ByVal eventcollection As 
     IAFEventCollection) As Long 
     IAFVBActivity_postcondition=COMTrue 
     End Function 
     Function IAFVBActivity _recondition(ByVal eventcollection As 
     IAFEventCollection) As Long 
     IAFVBActivity_precondition=COMTrue 
     End Function 
     Function IAFVBActivity_getPageParameter( ) As String 
     &#39;this returns the UI fields we require for this page 
     Dim parameters As String 
     &#39;get the page we are on 
     Dim objcontext As ObjectContext 
     Set objcontext=GetObjectContext( ) 
     Dim page As String 
     Dim res As Request 
     Set res=objContext(“Request”) 
     page=res.ServerVariables(“SCRIPT_NAME”) 
     parameters=“ ” 
     If UCase(page)=s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_STARTPAGE Then 
     parameters=“+portion of the present description.customerLookupForm.ssnTextBox.name+‘=’+escape(portion of the present description.customerLookupFonn.ssnTextBox.value)” 
     End If 
     If UCase(page)=s_CUSTOMERLOOKUP_LOOKUPPAGE Then 
     parameters=“+portion of the present description.customerMaintForm.nameTextBox.name+‘=’+escape(portion of the present description.customerMaintForm.nameTextBox.value)+‘&amp;’+portion of the present description.customerMaintForm.ageTextBox.name+‘=’+escape(portion of the present description.customerMaintForrn.ageTextBox.value)+‘&amp;’+portion of the present description.customerMaintForm.levelDropDown.name+‘=’+escape(portion of the present description.customerMaintForm.levelDropDown.selectedlndex)” 
     End If 
     IAFVBActivity_getPageParameter=parameters 
     End Function 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 ′************************************************************ 
               
               
                 ******************************** 
               
               
                 ′********** Members of the IAFEventListener Interface 
               
               
                 *************************************** 
               
               
                 ′************************************************************ 
               
               
                 ******************************** 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     &#39;this method returns a unique string ID for this component 
     Function IAFEventListener_getId( ) As String 
     IAFEventListener_getId=m_id 
     End Function 
     Function IAFEventListener_receiveEvent(ByVal theEvent As Long, ByVal 
     eventCollection As IAFEventCollection) As Long 
     IAFEventListener_receiveEvent=COMFalse 
     End Function 
     INTERNETWORKING GATEWAYS 
     FIG. 124A illustrates a method  12400  for providing a global internetworking gateway architecture in an e-commerce environment. In operation  12402 , an Internet is provided. A plurality of gateways each situated in a distinct geographic location are coupled to the Internet in operation  12404 . A wide area network, separate from the Internet, is coupled to each of the gateways in operation  12406  for providing communication between the wide area network and the Internet. In operation  12408 , a central database is coupled to the wide area network for providing a central storage for data used in e-commerce carried out over the Internet. 
     Optionally, the gateways may be intercontinental. For providing fault and performance management, a central management station may also be coupled to the wide area network. 
     Preferably, one of the gateways includes a screening router coupled to the Internet via an Internet service provider, a firewall connected to the screening router, and a choke router coupled between the wide area network and the firewall. In one optional version of this embodiment, a pair of gateways may be provided along with a pair of screening routers, a pair of firewalls, and a pair of choke routers. In another optional version of this embodiment, a plurality of servers may be coupled to the firewall for storing the data. As a further option, a second wide area network may be connected to the firewall via a screening router. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     Summary 
     Today&#39;s INTERNETWORKING environment requires connections from the corporate network to a variety of resources. These include clients and partners, vendors and suppliers, the Internet and remote users, just to name a few. This interconnectivity leads to complex security issues that need to be addressed. 
     The problems associated with connecting the network to the vast Internet are widely published. Hackers abound, and new methods for compromising networks are published almost daily. However, what about connecting the network to a partner for project collaboration, or perhaps a supplier for automatic inventory control? One might trust their supplier, however, does one really know how well their network is secured? Contracts and Service Levels can and should deal with many of these issues, however, technology can also be used to enforce security policies. 
     This is what a flexible Internetworking Gateway is designed to do: interconnect resources while maintaining an acceptable level of security and functionality. 
     Introduction 
     The purpose of this portion of the description is to demonstrate a secure way to interconnect external resources and the corporate Wide Area Network (WAN). There is an underlying assumption that by the time one is reading this, several tasks have been accomplished, and one is ready to start architecting a solution. These tasks include a definition of security policy and philosophy, and a definition of requirements. While citing specific solutions, this paper provides a framework for architecting an Internetworking Gateway based on “middle of the road” assumptions on security levels and requirements. These assumptions are outlined below. 
     Requirements 
     The underlying requirements of the Internetworking Gateway are fairly simple: 
     Extranet: Fast, dedicated links to partners, clients, vendors, suppliers, and remote users via an Extranet. 
     Internet: Connect the WAN to the Internet for WAN users to access the Internet, all Internet users to access public company resources via a web server, and remote users on the Internet to access resources on the WAN. 
     Policy 
     The security policy states a company&#39;s acceptable level of risk, and what the gateway is protecting. This could range anywhere from proprietary information, customer records, personal reputation, and may depend on the company. The following “5 A&#39;s” are typical foundations defined in a security policy that are important to keep in mind: 
     Authentication: Identification and authentication that the user is who he says he is. Company X may solve and promote strong authentication by providing a global authentication service via mirrored and replicating authentication servers. 
     Access Control: Company X may require a baseline set of access control rules on all gateways, and may maintain and update the policy that drives this “generic ruleset”. In addition, access control rules specific to new sites, and changes to site requirements, may drive additional access controls on top of these baseline rules. 
     Alarming: Alarms may be sent to local and central administrators in the event of an Alarm condition. An example would be multiple failed attempts by an outside user to intrude through the gateway. 
     Auditing and Logging: Auditing and Logging may be provided by the gateways to record major events for security and management purposes. 
     Availability: Often referred to as Performance Management, certain processes and periodic jobs may run to log and transmit performance data to ensure availability of networking and systems capabilities. The Service Provider may also provide reports to local and central management. Administrators may work to compare performance metrics with baselines and provide proactive capacity planning. 
     Philosophy 
     The security philosophy includes the following concepts: 
     Least Privilege—Any entity should only have the access required to perform its tasks. 
     Defense in Depth—The use of multiple security measures to ensure that failure of one system or process does not result in total compromise. 
     Choke Point—Forcing attackers to use centralized and known attack points to allow Access Control and Monitoring. 
     Fail-Safe Stance—Security systems that do fail should close (like a circuit breaker) access points instead of leaving them open. The cost of this stance is that Fail-Safe may yield a temporary system outage to both illicit and legitimate users due to the failure. 
     Default Deny—By default, that which is not expressly permitted is denied. 
     Universal Participation—The idea that some users may not choose to circumvent security systems and mechanisms (e.g. by alternate paths) 
     Diversity of Defense—To the greatest extent possible, a variety of types of systems may be leveraged as security devices to protect the environment. 
     Simplicity—Security mechanisms should be as simple as possible to facilitate understanding of the mechanisms and to avoid errors in configuration due to unnecessary complexity. 
     Separation of Duties—Administration and Security functions should be separated at all times. It is unreasonable to expect effective security and effective systems administration when these functions are performed by a single organization or individual. 
     The Internetworking Gateway Architecture is the direct manifestation of the above requirements, the security policy standard and the security philosophy. 
     Simple Architecture High Level Internetworking Gateway Architecture 
     The typical components of a gateway may include routers, firewalls, hubs, switches and servers. Each one of these components may perform a different role to accomplish the goals described in the security policy, philosophy and requirements portion of the present descriptions. A simple high level internetworking gateway architecture is shown in FIG.  124 B. Each component of the architecture is described in detail below. 
     Firewall  12430   
     Until recently a typical discussion of firewalls would begin with: “there are three different types of firewalls: application gateways, circuit level gateways, and packet filters.” However, most commercial firewall products available today combine features from all three types to provide security, performance and manageability. Each product has evolved from one of these three, but the major vendors incorporate all three technologies in one firewall product. 
     So what is a firewall? A firewall is typically a computer with a variation of the UNIX derived operating system (or it could run on a Windows NT platform) that has several Network Interface Cards (NIC&#39;s). Some firewalls are software based, and are installed on a variety of hardware platforms, while others come preinstalled on the vendor&#39;s platform. The firewall situates itself in-between networks and enforce most of the security policy, as well as provide for several points of the security philosophy. The primary roles of the Firewall are Access Control, Authentication, Auditing and Logging, and Alarming. In addition, any good firewall also conforms to the security philosophy by adhering to the failsafe stance, providing default deny, and providing simple management. 
     In other words, the firewall controls what network traffic is allowed to pass through the gateway based on who the user is, where the user is, and what the user is trying to do. At the same time the firewall is logging all of the network traffic and actively monitoring the logs for suspicious activity. If anything suspicious is observed, the firewall may notify an operator of a problem and shut itself down if necessary. 
     Routers 
     An internetworking gateway architecture calls for a router on most interfaces of the firewall. These routers perform different roles depending on which interface of the firewall they are attached to. A “screening” router  12432 , 12434  is located on the Internet or Extranet side of the firewall, and a “choke” router  12436  is located on the corporate WAN side of the firewall. 
     The Internet screening router  12432 , owned either by the company or the ISP, is well situated to provide a variety of security tasks. The screening router denies typical attacks caused by malicious manipulation of EP options flags in the IP header, such as source routing and fragmentation attacks. A screening router should also prevent all attempts at IP spoofing, including both external users spoofing internal addresses as well as internal users spoofing external addresses. In addition, it should block all ICMP packets to prevent many well know attacks like the Ping of Death. Finally, a screening router should mirror the firewall rulesets to provide defense in depth. 
     The Extranet screening router  12434  may perform similar functions as the Internet screening router by providing the first layer of defense against the users on the Extranet. In addition, there may generally be more than one connection into the Extranet screening router. For instance, there may be a Frame Relay connection into the screening router with virtual interfaces to several different partners and suppliers, or there may be several physical interfaces with leased line connections to partners and suppliers. It is imperative that the router not bridge different partner networks together unless there is an intent to do so. This may dictate strict access control lists on this router to prevent any cross communication between client networks. Some partners may require complete separation, which could be provisioned with a dedicated router. 
     However, the Internetworking Gateway&#39;s primary responsibility is to protect resources on the WAN, not the partner&#39;s WAN. The partner may presumably have a similar architecture on their side of the connection for that purpose. It is important when connecting to a partner to spell out what security is provided to them, and what is not. 
     The main function of the choke router is to maintain a level of security even if the firewall is compromised. This requires that the access control lists on the router mirror the firewall rulesets. As a result, it prevents an intruder from retrieving any useful information on the WAN prior to the intrusion being detected. In addition, the choke router should perform the same roles as the screening router on internal users. This functionality may depend on the security policy, and how trusted the internal users are considered. 
     The Public Server Segment (“DMZ”) 
     The Public Server Segment, or “DMZ”  12438 , is another network segment off of the firewall reserved for servers that are meant to be publicly accessible. This may include web servers, ftp servers, DNS servers, and mail relays. Often this network segment is shown on the Internet side of the firewall between the screening router and the firewall, or in-between two firewalls. There are pros and cons to both configurations; however, the majority of the architectures portray the DMZ “leg” off of a firewall. 
     When a web server is placed outside of the firewall, it is only protected by the screening router and the web server application. It is difficult to account for remote management—content, fault and performance—of the device and one can only rely on router filtering for protection. However, there is generally a much higher level of performance and reliability if the web server is placed outside of the firewall. This could be an important consideration for high volume sites. 
     Two firewall configurations provide a slightly higher level of security, especially if two different vendor&#39;s firewalls are used. However, the functionality is basically the same but the price is significantly greater. 
     Regardless of how this network is architected, the idea of a DMZ is similar for all three scenarios. First, only communication relevant to the server is allowed into the network (e.g. http traffic allowed to a web server) from the outside world. Second, management communication is allowed into the network from management stations (or users) on the internal WAN. Third, transaction based communication is permitted from the public server to necessary places. For example, Cybercash transactions would be allowed to the Cybercash servers or database access to back end systems might be required. Any access to internal systems should be to mirror servers, if at all possible, in order to prevent permanent destruction of data. 
     The most important thing to realize is that the DMZ network, although behind a firewall, contains machines that are publicly accessible to the Internet. Therefore, these machines should be considered extremely suspect, and required to be secured, actively monitored, and backed up as frequently as possible. 
     Other Important Network Components 
     Specialized Proxy/Cache Servers 
     Proxy servers and cache servers may play an integral role in the design of a successful Internetworking Gateway. Often these specialized servers may perform roles such as authentication, access control, accounting and logging, and provide for high availability for typically high volume resources. For instance, if the WAN contains a large user base that accesses the web frequently, a Web Proxy server can authenticate a user, control what sites are accessible or not, keep logs of all web sites accessed, and even cache web sites to improve bandwidth performance. This proxy server  12500  would typically sit between the firewall  12502  and the choke router  12504 , as shown in FIG.  125 . The firewall would also allow traffic from the proxy server to access the Internet without authentication (since the proxy server performs this function), as a result reducing the load on the firewall. 
     Authentication Servers 
     Authentication servers, although not a necessary part of the internetworking gateway, are an integral part of a company&#39;s overall security policy enforcement. Most firewalls may contain their own user database that can be used to enforce user level restrictions. However, an authentication server provides for a centralized place to store user&#39;s names, passwords, and access levels. This leads to great benefits in terms of simplicity of management and design. 
     There are many types of authentication standards in the industry, as this aspect of the gateway is still developing. Some of standards being pushed include RADFUS and LDAP. There are also proprietary authentication schemes such as TACACS+(Cisco Systems), the Novell NDS Tree (based on LDAP), and the Lotus Notes Name &amp; Address Book (NAB). 
     Since not all Firewalls are compatible with a certain authentication standards, often-existing authentication schemes within a company may dictate which Firewall vendor to utilize. 
     DNS 
     Similar to Authentication Servers, additional internal DNS servers may not be required if name resolution and lookup is already available on the WAN. However, there is generally a good case to have an external DNS server on the DMZ. This DNS server may supply name resolution for Internet users attempting to access any public servers, as well as remote users accessing internal servers. Servers within the Internetworking Gateways generally require DNS ability as well, but in many cases the Service Provider may offer to either provide the service remotely, or install the service/component on behalf of the implementing site. 
     Case Studies 
     Now that the typical components of an Internetworking Gateway have been defined, some more detailed architectures, and the unique considerations that arise from each one, may be explored. The different examples include: 
     A high volume/high availability public web server 
     A remote dialup gateway 
     An Internet development gateway with partner connections 
     High Volume/High Availability Gateway 
     In order to provide a high volume web site to customers around the world, some requirements include: 
     The web servers need access to a central database containing pricing and availability information 
     The web servers need access to Cybercash to authenticate credit card transactions 
     Short response time 
     High Availability 
     These requirements lead immediately to several questions. 
     First, what is considered an acceptable level of up time? Is it 95% (down 72 minutes per day), or is it 99.9% (down one and a half minutes per day). The main difference between the two is cost. Although the high-level security architecture may be the same regardless, there may be more built in redundancy to achieve a 99.9% up time. 
     Second, what happens to the “user experience” if the gateway switches to a backup component. Does the user have to re-authenticate? Does the session hang? If not, is there a noticeable lag time or does it all happen seamlessly behind the scenes? “Seamlessly behind the scenes” is more difficult to architect and maintain. 
     Third, what happens if it&#39;s not a component that fails, but an entire facility? This could be the result of a natural disaster (Data Centers in earthquake country for instance), or a man made disaster such as the proverbial misguided backhoe. This may result in not only local fail-over, but remote or maybe even global fail-over as well. 
     Finally, what is going to be stored on the server? If transactions are being made, sensitive customer information may be on the web servers. Therefore, the web servers should be placed behind a firewall. 
     A possible global architecture  12600  is shown in FIG.  126 . This Internetworking Gateway Architecture shows four initial facilities, labeled East Coast  12602 , West Coast  12604 , Europe  12606  and Asia  12608 . Each gateway has a connection to the Internet  12610  and to the Corporate WAN  12612 . The WAN connection provides access to the centralized database  12614  and to centralized management stations  12616 . The management stations may provide fault and performance management via SNMP, as well as configuration management via machine specific protocols (e.g., telnet management of the routers, or ssh management of the firewall). 
     FIG. 127 shows the West Coast architecture  12700 . ACME is headquartered on the West Coast, therefore, this facility may be the primary location. This location may have complete architectural fail-over using OSPF, as well as ISP fail-over and load balancing using BGP. The servers  12702  are connected into a fully redundant switch  12704  containing both routing and switch modules that is running a product equivalent to the Cisco Local Director®. The Local Director may automatically distribute load to all available servers. 
     Since a specific web page access control level may be required, the web server application may have to perform the user authentication and encryption via HTTP authentication and SSL. Therefore, the application must perform some fail-over functionality to maintain specific log on sessions. 
     Remote Access Solution 
     ACME requirements: 
     ACME needs to connect the WAN to an ISP for WAN based Internet Access 
     Secure dialup access directly to the WAN for telecommuters 
     Access via the Internet for traveling employees to POP3 mail servers, internal web servers, and an internal news server 
     Dialup users may have Intranet and Internet access 
     There are several considerations to make when designing a solution. First, since Intranet resources may be accessible from the Internet to authorized users, an encryption solution may need to be in place. For the web server, the solution could be SSL, however, this may not work for the POP3 mail server, nor for the news server. Therefore, a third party encryption solution may be required. 
     Second, there may be several different machines performing authentication here, including the firewall for access to and from the Internet and the dialup server for authenticating dialup users. Therefore, it may be beneficial to use a central authentication server. This can be achieved via a RADIUS server, since most dialup servers and firewalls are compatible with the RADIUS protocol. 
     FIG. 128 shows a typical Remote Access Internetworking Gateway architecture  12800  that meets these requirements. Depending on the firewall  12802 , there are various different client encryption pieces (SecuRemote for Firewall-1, Eagle Remote for Eagle Raptor), as well as third party products (Alta Vista Tunnel). For this architecture, we have assumed that one of the former solutions was chosen. However, to use a third party product, one would only need to place a decrypting device inside of the firewall, next to the RADIUS server  12804 . A user on the Internet  12806  attempting to reach a server  12808  on the WAN  12810  would step through the following process during a typical session: 
     The client machine realizes that the user is trying to access predefined servers on the Intranet, and initiates an encrypted session with the firewall. 
     In addition to a successful key exchange, the firewall requests that the user supply a user name and one-time password. This one-time password is generated by a token compatible with the RADIUS server. 
     Upon receipt of the user name and password, the firewall asks the RADIUS server if this is a valid user. If the RADIUS server validates the user, then the traffic is allowed from the Internet client to the internal server. Otherwise, the traffic is blocked by the firewall. 
     A dial up user would have a slightly different experience. First, when dialing into the dialup server, the user would supply a username and one-time password. This username and password are validated via RADIUS with the RADIUS server. If validated, the User can then access either the Internet or the Intranet. For Intranet access, an encrypted session is set up between the client machine and the firewall without authentication for basic services. However, if specific user level access is required, then the user should authenticate with the firewall as well. 
     A WAN based user would authenticate with the firewall when accessing the Internet. The firewall may validate the user via RADIUS, and either allow or deny the traffic based on the RADIUS server response. 
     Internet Development With Partner Collaboration 
     FIG. 129 illustrates an Internetworking Gateway with Partner collaboration on Internet Development. The ACME company  12900  is developing an Internet application in conjunction with one of its business partners  12902 . Requirements: 
     The business partner is supplying several software and systems programmers on-site to assist with the development. 
     Developers may require unlimited access to the Internet, which is currently not allowed through the main Internet gateway. 
     ACME developers need access to WAN resources 
     Partner&#39;s developers may require access back to their own WAN via a direct leased line 
     The business partner has agreed to allow ACME to control access into their own network as long as they have audit access to the security devices (router ACL&#39;s and firewall rules). 
     The first consideration to make may depend on corporate policy. Since the ACME corporation does not allow unlimited access to the Internet  12904  from the WAN  12906 , the developers may have to be located on a development network that is separated from the WAN via a firewall  12908 . Resources in this area may be considered “semi-trusted,” in that it is expected that hackers on the Internet may be able to break into this network more easily than the WAN. Therefore, special consideration needs to be made in terms of backup and recovery schemes in the event of a security incident. 
     Access back to the respective WANs may be allowed after authentication. ACME users are authenticated via the central RADIUS infrastructure. Partner employee user names and ID&#39;s are stored on the firewall. 
     Management Issues 
     There are many issues with managing an Internetworking Gateway that should be decided up front. Who is in charge of fault management? Configuration and security management? Capacity and performance management? Are the gateways managed centrally or locally? Or is there some combination? 
     Fault Management 
     Fault management can often be grouped with existing management infrastructure, such as a network operations center. The addition of gateways, while possibly adding new types of hardware, may require many of the same skills in terms of monitoring and troubleshooting the network. In addition, this group should perform many of the following functions: 
     Ensure that network circuits are active and available 
     Configure routers 
     Ensure integrity of router configurations 
     Configure DNS systems 
     Collect and analyze capacity and utilization statistics 
     Maintain relationship and contacts with Internet Service Provider 
     Configuration Management 
     Configuration and security management should consist of the following responsibilities: 
     Manage user ID process 
     Administer the firewall policy database 
     Create, evaluate and distribute reports of firewall activities 
     Develop tools to collect and analyze firewall statistics for capacity planning 
     Interface with vendor to resolve firewall software issues 
     Install and test all software releases 
     Perform analysis of firewall and DNS server logs 
     Perform quality assurance and regression testing 
     Security Management 
     Confirm that firewall operations conform to security policy 
     Develop tools to collect and analyze firewall statistics for intrusion detection 
     Provide leadership in incident response situations 
     Provide security expertise in analysis of service requests 
     Perform analysis and approval for non-standard service requests 
     Server Security 
     This portion of the description lists recommended practices for a Windows NT server environment. The single most important element in ensuring a secure LAN server environment is the presence of a knowledgeable and conscientious LAN server security administrator. In recognition of the extremely important role of this administrator, this standard focuses on requirements for LAN server security administration. Key items include secure handling of accounts, file and directory protection, audit requirements, and physical and environmental security. 
     NT Security Standard 
     This standard is primarily oriented to Windows NT, It should also be noted that there are minimal security differences in a Windows NT workstation and a Windows NT server. The differences between the server and workstation are that the server can support a domain, contains domain accounts, contains the workstation listing for the domain, and has the ability to make global groups. The ability to set permissions on files, network shares, and create local accounts, local profiles, and local settings are exactly the same on the server as the workstation. This portion of the present description has attempted to acknowledge where certain standards apply just to servers or workstations. 
     File Systems 
     All Windows NT servers should run the NTFS filing system because it utilizes Window NT file and directory security features. NTFS also has a recoverability feature in case of disk fault or system failure. 
     If a Windows NT server does not completely run the NTFS filing system, the non-NTFS portion should not be shared over the network. 
     All workstations that can, may run the NTFS filing system. If a workstation cannot run NTFS, additional security measures should be taken according to the filing system Windows NT is running on. The standards set forth for that operating system should be used in addition to these standards. 
     Server Security 
     Passwords must expire once every sixty (60) days for all accounts except for the administrators&#39; accounts, which should expire every thirty (30) days. 
     A generic printing group is allowed for use by those traveling and visiting an office location. Original ID&#39;s should still be created for each print user and those ID&#39;s should only be placed in the printing group. The account is only to be used for printing. All other file and directory access must be prevented through controls on the printing group. The account may be used in conjunction with a print server. 
     The Password Uniqueness field should be set to remember the last five (5) passwords of a user. The Minimum Password Age field should be set to Allow Changes in seven (7) Days. This may prevent the user from resetting their password for a week and may require them to have varying passwords. 
     The default for Account Lockout must be set to six (6) bad logon attempts. The Reset Count for lockouts should be set to 7200 minutes. The Lockout Duration should be set to Forever (until admin unlocks). The above selections may allow five (5) consecutive incorrect login attempts within a five-day period, before locking up the account. When a valid password is entered at any time within the five days, the bad logon count may be reset to zero (0). Administrator equivalent accounts should be set in the same manner. The default administrator id is never locked out and can always be used to unlock administrator equivalent accounts. 
     The Users must be logged on to change password check box must be selected. 
     All LAN administrators should have two separate accounts. One account may have administrator privileges, and should not be the Administrator account or an account with a name easily identifiable as a administrator level account (i.e., JSMITHSUP). The other account should have access as a domain user and be used for normal day-to-day work that does not require administrator privileges. 
     All administrator level access passwords must be changed when a person with administrator level access either leaves, or no longer has responsibility for security administration. 
     If groupware ID&#39;s are stored on the server, they must be kept in a directory accessible only by that individual user (e.g. Home or Personal directory as long as no other users can access it). Beware that those with administrative access may be able to access the groupware ID&#39;s stored on NT servers. Therefore, distribution of groupware ID&#39;s and/or passwords must be the responsibility of someone other than the NT administrator. 
     Web Server Security 
     Since the web server is the primary interface to the client for all interactions with eCommerce applications, an improperly configured web server may leave a business susceptible to a variety of security problems, such as disclosure of confidential information. The following are recommended practices to mitigate security threats. 
     Securing a Web Site 
     Select server and host technologies that match business&#39;s security, functionality, and performance requirements and has the least vulnerabilities. 
     Review the recommended practices that address the configuration and operation of the server technology. If possible, also note the sample implementation of those practices (e.g. complex, simple, inexpensive, or costly). 
     Determine the likelihood of particular kinds of incidents and the vulnerabilities of specific servers. 
     Estimate the differences in operating costs of competing technologies, including the business costs of potential security incidents. 
     To prevent external traffic from gaining access to the private network, the web server should be place on a sub-network, separate from the main internal network. 
     Use filters or a firewall to restrict traffic from the web server host to the internal network. 
     Turn off source routing at the router so that the web server host cannot be used to forward packets to hosts in the internal network. 
     The authoritative copy of your web site content should be stored on a separate network inside the network firewall (e.g. internal subnet) rather than on the web server host. 
     By providing the essential network services and operating system services on the server host machine, we reduce the number of attacks on host from other services and inefficiencies due to compromising software and hardware configurations to satisfy the different services. After installing the server software, create cryptographic checksums or other integrity-checking baseline information for your critical system software. 
     Change default configurations to enhance the web server security 
     Use either the Common Log Format or the Extended Common Log Format 
     Disable network services such as ftp, and file uploads form web clients that are not necessary to run essential services. 
     If one has to remotely administer the web server, be sure to use strong encryption to authenticate and transmit data. Also configure server to only allow administration from one particular host. 
     Limit files access such that: 
     Public web content files and directories are read-only. Files can be written to only by the processes that allow for web server administration. 
     Web server log files can be written to by the server processes, but they cannot be read. They are only readable only by administration processes. 
     Any temporary files created by Web server processes (such as those that might be needed in the creation of dynamic Web pages) are limited to a particular subdirectory. 
     Disable the server from serving the following to the client: 
     File directory listings, even if you intend them to be readable. 
     Files that are outside the specified file directory tree. (Do not use links in file directory tree that point to files elsewhere in the file system.) 
     Own log files or configuration files. (Try to store files outside the public data directory tree.) 
     After all configuration choices have been made, create and record cryptographic checksums or other integrity-checking baseline information for your server software. 
     If you determine that an auxiliary executable program is necessary, then: 
     Verify that the copy of the program is an authentic copy. 
     Review all material on security vulnerabilities of program and make sure that the program does not include any unnecessary functions. 
     Install the program on a test machine and test it to your own satisfaction. 
     After installing the program, create new checksums or other integrity-checking baseline information for you server software and check the server behavior and log files. 
     Administer the web server in a secure manner. 
     Instead of transmitting web material using a network connection through the firewall where your server may be temporarily disabled, transfer web content from the authoritative copy to the public server using a writable CD-ROM or diskette. 
     Also do not use a transfer method that mounts a file system from a host inside the firewall using NFS. The NFS protocol may make the internal network vulnerable. 
     When inspecting the server log files from a host other than the server, use a CD-ROM and file encryption. 
     After making any changes in server configuration or site content, create new cryptographic checksums or other integrity-checking baseline information for your server. 
     Look for unexpected changes to directories and files. 
     Review the content of the files and determine the significance and frequency with which they should be checked. 
     Maintain authoritative reference data of critical files and directories which details its location in file system, shortcuts, contents, size, date of last modification and access permission settings to it. 
     Verify the integrity and identity any changes in directories and files (especially those associated with execution privilege settings) by comparing them with your authoritative data. Be sure to access the authoritative information from a secure, read-only media. 
     Inspect System and Network Logs. 
     Regularly inspect all log files. There are six types of logs—user activity, process activity, system activity, network connections, network traffic monitoring, and web server activity. 
     Portion of the present description and investigate any unusual entries that you discover (e.g. repeated failed login attempts, connections and processes that run at unexpected time, connections from unusual locations). 
     Report all confirmed evidences of intrusion to your organization&#39;s internal security point of contact. 
     Read security bulletins form trustworthy sources and other security publications regularly. 
     Additional Tips to Keep in Mind: 
     Network users should never be able to execute arbitrary programs or shell commands on your servers—e.g. do not configure your web browser to automatically run spreadsheets or word processors. Because most spreadsheets and word processors these days have the ability to embed executable code within their files. 
     Configure web server so that all CGI scripts or programs must be placed in a single directory. Allow limited access to this directory and it&#39;s contents—local users cannot install, change, remove, or edit without review, even prevents them from being read. 
     The practice of allowing any file on web server with cig extension to be run as CGI script is not recommended. 
     CGI scripts that run on your server must perform either the expected function or return an error message. Scripts should expect and be able to handle any maliciously tailored input. 
     Beware of suste( ), popen( ), pipes, backquotes, an perl&#39;s evalo function. Avoid spawning subprocesses in CGI scripts and programs. If you must spawn subprocesses, avoid any passing through any strings that are provided by the user. If you must pass strings from the user to the subprocess, be sure that it does not pass shell meta characters. 
     Use a program such as tripwire to monitor for unauthorized changes to the executables and configurations files on your system. 
     Remove the backup files that are automatically generated by your editor. 
     Do not NFS mount or export any web server directories. 
     Delete all compilers on your web server and any utility programs that are not used during boot or by the web server. 
     If possible, place your WWW server and all files in a separate directory structure. Then wrap the WWW server with a small program that does chroot( ) to the directory. Some WWW servers include this approach as an install-time option. 
     If one uses directory level access control files, give them a different name other than the standard .htaccess 
     It is important that the web server password file be inaccessible to normal users on the server and to users over the web. 
     Do not configure the “helper” applications that are automatically run when files of a particular type are downloaded from the net, e.g. provides a way from outsiders to run programs on your computer without your explicit permission, e.g. a program could be embedded in a HTML page as an “included” image. 
     Do not mix HTTP with anonymous FTP. 
     Do not trust the user&#39;s browser. HTML includes the ability to display selection lists, limit the length of fields to a certain number of characters, embed hidden data within forms, and specify variables that should be provided to cgi scripts. However, you cannot make your requesting the script&#39;s URL; attackers do not need to go through your form or use the interface that you provide. 
     Maintain a good relationship with hardware and software vendors. Monitor vendor communications frequently for discoveries of new bugs or security patches to their software or hardware configurations. 
     If users do not have experience in writing secure programs, it is likely that locally written system. Do not allow users to place scripts or programs on your server unless a qualified application security professional has personally read through the scripts and programs and assured you of their safety. 
     The server&#39;s SUID should never be specific as root. If it does, every script that our web server executes may be run as root. However, most servers are designed to be started by the root user, so that it can listen to requests on the standard http TCP/IP port. 
     Do not write SUID root shell scripts or programs on your web server. 
     Server log files record considerable information about each request. Be careful as to how large they grow and check that they automatically trimmed. If they are not monitored for size, log files can file computer&#39;s hard disk and result in loss of service. 
     You can learn a lot about the persons who are using the web server. From this information one can get a comprehensive picture of the people who are accessing the Web, the information that they are viewing, and where they have previously been. Use these logs to monitory the activity occurring on your system. 
     Performance Management 
     Each group may have a role in performance management. The Fault management group collects statistics, and generates reports on Key Performance Indicators (KPI&#39;s). Therefore, this group may be best situated to determine if existing levels are reaching a point when upgrades need to be made or traffic rerouted. The configuration management group manages the user ID process, so they have a good idea on the number of users, which may usually have a direct effect on the amount of use. Therefore, this group may have KPI&#39;s on the number of users and may be able to allow for changes to this number. Finally, since the security management group approves new services, this group may know if and when a new service is going to be allowed that may effect performance in the gateway. 
     Once it is known that a gateway needs to be upgraded, there are several possibilities. First, hardware upgrades are often the least-cost mechanism since rulesets, alarming, and other configurations can then effectively remain on one device and are unaffected by the change. If hardware upgrades are not possible (due to Operating System or application limitations), additional devices can be installed “in parallel”. Protocol, Interface, and Addresses, or combinations of these factors can split traffic. For example, a site exceeding capacity can direct all WWW traffic through one Firewall if analysis proves that this traffic is a degrading factor. Further to this example, a locally installed WWW Cache server can alleviate traffic through devices such as Firewalls, delaying or preventing the need for an upgrade. 
     In most cases, Firewall hardware and software capacity/capability may exceed the needs of most Distributed Firewall installations. The industry is also continually “raising the bar” of Firewall performance bottleneck points, and in many cases WAN links are more constraining than Firewall Input/Output performance ceilings. Coordination and open communications with network engineers and Firewall vendors may help ensure that Caching, Ruleset, and Load Distribution strategies are based on industry Best Practices, and are not counter-productive. For example, at some point over-installation of Caching servers&#39; limits effectiveness since large numbers of users “benefit” from each other&#39;s recently cached portion of the present descriptions and traffic. 
     Conclusions 
     Flexible Internetworking Gateways allow companies to securely connect their networks to the vast amounts of resources available today. They allow for rapidly changing business models and requirements by providing a modular approach to the security architecture. As seen in the above case studies, the Internetworking Gateway has the ability to scale from the smallest “simple” Internet connection, to a global web server with mission critical applications. These qualities may make the Internetworking Gateway Architecture a critical component of every company WAN. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Glossary 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ACME 
                 A fictitious company used for example 
               
               
                   
                 architectures 
               
               
                 BGP 
                 Border Gateway Protocol. A network routing 
               
               
                   
                 protocol typically used to exchange routes 
               
               
                   
                 between different networks 
               
               
                 Cybercash 
                 An Internet service for provided credit card 
               
               
                   
                 authorizations 
               
               
                 DMZ 
                 “Demilitarized Zone” A network segment 
               
               
                   
                 used to provide external users (Internet, 
               
               
                   
                 Extranet) access to specific resources, like web 
               
               
                   
                 pages and email 
               
               
                 DNS 
                 Domain Name System - Used for resolving 
               
               
                   
                 easy to remember names into IP addresses 
               
               
                   
                 (1.2.3.4) 
               
               
                 Firewall 
                 A server which controls access between 
               
               
                   
                 different networks 
               
               
                 HTTP 
                 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol. The primary 
               
               
                   
                 protocol for the World Wide Web 
               
               
                 ICMP 
                 Internet Control Messaging Protocol 
               
               
                 ID 
                 User ID, or identification used to uniquely 
               
               
                   
                 identify a user on a system 
               
               
                 IP 
                 Internet Protocol 
               
               
                 KPI 
                 Key Performance Indicator. A metric used to 
               
               
                   
                 evaluate the operation of a system 
               
               
                 LAN 
                 Local Area Network 
               
               
                 LDAP 
                 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol 
               
               
                 NAB 
                 Lotus Notes Name and Address Book 
               
               
                 NDS 
                 Novell Directory Services 
               
               
                 NIC 
                 Network Interface Card 
               
               
                 OSPF 
                 A common network routing protocol 
               
               
                 POP3 
                 A popular email protocol 
               
               
                 RADIUS 
                 An authentication protocol 
               
               
                 Security Policy 
                 A portion of the present description which 
               
               
                   
                 outlines high level security requirements for a 
               
               
                   
                 given company 
               
               
                 Security Philosophy 
                 A high level approach to security within a 
               
               
                   
                 company 
               
               
                 SNMP 
                 Simple Network Management Protocol. 
               
               
                   
                 Common protocol used to manage IP devices 
               
               
                 Ssh 
                 Secure shell. Provides encrypted session for 
               
               
                   
                 remote management of servers 
               
               
                 SSL 
                 Secure Sockets Layer - used for encrypted 
               
               
                   
                 transmission of data 
               
               
                 TACACS 
                 Terminal Access Control Access Controller 
               
               
                   
                 System. An authentication protocol 
               
               
                 Telnet 
                 Simple, insecure remote access to servers. 
               
               
                 UNIX 
                 Operating system developed originally by 
               
               
                   
                 AT&amp;T that has been pervasive on the Internet 
               
               
                   
                 to date 
               
               
                 WAN 
                 Wide Area Network 
               
               
                 Windows NT 
                 Operating system developed by Microsoft for 
               
               
                   
                 servers 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     LOW OVERHEAD PERSISTENCE USING ADO 
     This portion of the description provides specifics regarding the implementation of a low overhead Persistence model using ADO (ActiveX Data Object). This persistence framework is a similar in design to the Eagle Persistence model, but without implementing those features provided by Microsoft Transaction Server (Connection Pooling, Transaction Management). 
     The Persistence component is used to interact with databases to create, retrieve, update and delete a particular class of object. 
     Description 
     Architecture 
     In order to use ADO interacting with databases, the following two classes are provided under the Persistence package. 
     Persistence.RetaExtent 
     Persistence.RetaPersistableObj 
     Persistence.RetaExtent 
     This class replaces the Eagle current Persistence.JExtent class. It should cover all functionality in Persistence.JExtent class. The methods of this class may be referenced from business object factory classes to create, retrieve, update and delete a particular object using ADO. 
     Main Methods: public Vector select(String className, String criteria, String connstring, int locking) throws VCEEventException 
     This method selects and returns a vector of objects that meet the criteria supplied. 
     @param className: the name of the business class 
     @param criteria: this is an expression of the search criteria 
     @param connString: connection string to the database. 
     @param locking the level of object store locking desired—read-lock, update-lock, etc. 
     @return a vector of selected objects 
     public void update(RetaPersistableObj inObject, String connstring) throws VCEEventException 
     This method updates an object in the database 
     @param inObject: the object to be updated 
     @param connString: connection string to the database. 
     public void add(RetaPersistableObj inObject, String connString) throws VCEEventException 
     This method adds an object in the database 
     @param inObject: the object to be updated 
     @param connString: connection string to the database. 
     public void delete(RetaPersistableObj inObject, String connString) throws VCEEventException 
     This method deletes an object in the database 
     @param inObject: the object to be updated 
     @param connString: connection string to the database. 
     Sample Code: 
     public Vector select(String className, String a Value, String connString, int locking) throws VCEEventException 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Connection adoConn = null; 
               
               
                   
                 try 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 //Create business object 
               
               
                   
                 Class businessClass = Class.forName(className); 
               
               
                   
                 RetaPersistableObj theObj = (RetaPersistableObj) 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 businessClass.newInstance( ); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // create query statement 
               
               
                   
                 String query = 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 “SELECT” + 
               
               
                   
                 theObj.columnList( ) + 
               
               
                   
                 “ FROM ” + 
               
               
                   
                 theObj.getTableName( ) + 
               
               
                   
                 “ where ” + 
               
               
                   
                 aValue; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 //open ADO connection 
               
               
                   
                 adoConn = new Connection( ); 
               
               
                   
                 adoConn.open(connString); 
               
               
                   
                 //Execute select query 
               
               
                   
                 Recordset rs = new Recordset( ); 
               
               
                   
                 rs = adoConn.execeute(query); 
               
               
                   
                 // convert ADO record sets to business objects 
               
               
                   
                 Vector result = new Vector( ); 
               
               
                   
                 if (rs.getEOF( )) 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 rs.close( ); 
               
               
                   
                 adoConn.close( ); 
               
               
                   
                 result.addElement(null); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 else 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 while(!rs.getEOF( )) 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // fill business object attributes using record set values 
               
               
                   
                 RetaPersistableObj o = 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 ((RetaPersistableObj)businessClass.newInstance( )).newFrom(rs); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // add object to result vector 
               
               
                   
                 result.addElement(o); 
               
               
                   
                 //move to the next record 
               
               
                   
                 rs.moveNext( ); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 //close connection 
               
               
                   
                 rs.close( ); 
               
               
                   
                 adoConn.close( ); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 return result; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 catch (AdoException e) 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 try 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 adoConn.close( ); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 catch (Exception ex) 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 throw VCECreateEvent.handlePersistException(e); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 catch(Exception e) 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 try 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 adoConn.close( ); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 catch (Exception ex) 
               
               
                   
                 { 
               
               
                   
                 } 
               
               
                   
                 throw VCECreateEvent.handleUnknownException(e); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 } 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 } 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Persistence. RetaPersistableObj 
     This class may replaces Eagle&#39;s Persistence.JVCEPersistableObj class. It should cover all functionality in Persistence.JVCEPersistableObj class. All persistable business objects should extend this class. 
     Methods: 
     This class should include all methods in Persistence.JVCEPersistableObj and it&#39;s super class Persistence.JObjectModeler. For those methods related to database result sets, ADO record set should replace Java result set. 
     Application 
     Business Object 
     With reference to FIG. 130, each persistable business object  13000  should extend to a RetaPersistableObj  13002 . This abstract class defines a number of methods that need to be implemented in each business object. See the following sample code in RetaCustomer class. 
     Sample Code: 
     public RetaPersistableObj newFrom(Recordset adoRs) throws AdoException 
     { 
     try 
     { 
     RetaCustomer theObj=new RetaCustomer( ); 
     super.newFrom(theObj,adors); 
     theObj.ssn=new 
     Integer(adoRs.getField(ATTRIBUTE_SSN).getInt( )); 
     theObj.name= 
     adoRs.getField(ATTRIBUTE_NAME).getString( ); 
     theObj.age=new Integer(rs adoRs 
     getField(ATTRIBUTE_AGE).getInt( )); 
     theObj.level= 
     adoRs.getField(ATTRIBUTE_LEVEL).getString( ); 
     return theObj; 
     } 
     catch (AdoException e) 
     { 
     return null; 
     } 
     } 
     Factory Class 
     Each Business Object should have a factory class. This class provides all method to create new COM instances of Business Object and fetch and persist these ones in the databases. To use ADO instead of JDBC to interact with databases, the factory class should reference the methods in the Persistence.RetaExtent. The database connection string (s_CONNECT_STRING) should be added in the Session.VCELTConstants class. See the following sample code in RetaCustomerFactory class 
     Sample Code: 
     public static IUnknown getBySsn(Integer inSsn) throws VCEEventException 
     { 
     IRetaCustomer theRetaCustomer = null; 
     try 
     { 
     RetaCustomer theObj = new RetaCustomer( ); 
     String[ ] theColumnLabels = theObj.getColumnNames( ); 
     String theIdColunuLabel = theColumnLabels[theObj.ATTRIBUTE_SSN]; 
     Vector theObjects = RetaExtent.select(“BObjects.RetaCustomer”, 
     theIdColumnLabel + “=” + inSsn, 
     VCELTConstants.s_CONNECT_STRING, 1); 
     TheObj = (RetaCustomer)theObjects.elementAt(0); 
     if (theObj = null) 
     { 
     return null; 
     } 
     // create a COM component and fill using values 
     theRetaCustomer = (IRetaCustomer)MTx.GetObjectContext( ).CreateInstance( CRetaCustomer.clsid,IRetaCustomer.iid); 
     theRetaCustomer.setSsn(theObj.getSsn( ); 
     theRetaCustomer.setName(theObj.getName( )); 
     theRetaCustomer.setAge(theObj.getAgeo); 
     theRetaCustomer.setLevel(theObj.getLevel( )); 
     } 
     catch (AdoException e) 
     { 
     throw VCECreateEvent.handlePersistException(e); 
     } 
     catch(Exception e) 
     { 
     throw VCECreateEvent.handleUnknownException(e); 
     } 
     return theRetaCustomer; 
     } 
     MTS SHARED PROPERTY MANAGER 
     This portion of the description provides specifics regarding the MTS Shared Property Manager (SPM). 
     At its most basic level, the SPM can be thought of as a global storage container provided to objects registered in MTS. Using a series of methods, objects can create new properties and retrieve existing properties. 
     Description 
     SPM Layers: 
     FIG. 131 illustrates layers of a shared property group manager. MTS provides several layers to the storage container. At the highest (root) level, is the ‘Shared Property Group Manager’  13100 . You must create an instance of the group manager to gain access to the underlying shared properties. The group manager does not provide any useful method except for ‘CreatePropertyGroup’ and ‘getGroup’. These methods return a reference to the next layer—‘Shared Property Group’  13102 . 
     Shared Property Group(s) 
     The ‘Shared Property Group’ container is used to logically group and store the underlying shared properties. It is this interface that exposes the ‘CreateProperty’ and ‘getProperty’ methods used to manipulate shared properties. For example, there could be a ‘HardwareConfigGrp’ shared property group that would group together one or more ‘HardwareConfig’ properties. 
     Shared Property 
     A ‘Shared Property’  13104  is a variable that is available to all objects in the same server process. The value of the property can be any type that can be represented by a variant. Continuing the above example, the ‘HardwareConfig’ property could contain a string describing the hardware, or contain an array that lists out all of the hardware attributes. 
     Settings: 
     LockMode 
     ReleaseMode 
     SPM Notes: 
     It&#39;s also important for components sharing properties to have the same activation attribute. If two components in the same package have different activation attributes, they generally won&#39;t be able to share properties. For example, if one component is configured to run in a client&#39;s process and the other is configured to run in a server process, their objects may usually run in different processes, even though they&#39;re in the same package. 
     Only objects running in the same process can share shared properties. If one wants instances of different components to share properties, one has to install the components in the same MTS package. 
     You should always instantiate the SharedPropertyGroupManager, SharedPropertyGroup, and SharedProperty objects from MTS objects rather than from a base client. If a base client creates shared property groups and properties, the shared properties are inside the base client&#39;s process, not in a server process. 
     Java Packages: 
     com.ms.mtx.IsharedPropertyGroupManager 
     com.ms.mtx.ISharedPropertyGroup 
     com.ms.mtx.ISharedProperty 
     This portion of the description provides specifics regarding the implementation of the Shared Memory Manager (SMM). 
     Objects can gain access to the global memory area by using the SMM. The SMM itself does not implement or administer the memory area, but instead, leverages other interfaces that do. 
     Description 
     The SMM was designed to provide a simple interface into a global memory area. As stated above, this global memory area is not implemented by the SMM. Instead, the SMM relies on the ‘Shared Property Group Manager’ provided by MTS to implement the actual storage and maintenance of the global memory. 
     The ‘Shared Property Group Manager’ was chosen as the storage medium primarily because of its availability and ease of use. As new technologies are release, the SMM could be modified to leverage them without any additional impact. In fact, no native memory management routines should be called for this very reason. 
     Methods: 
     The SMM provides two methods, ‘getSharedMem’ and ‘setSharedMem’ to interface with ‘MTS Shared Property Manager’: 
     public void setSharedMem(String strMemNameGrp, String strMemName, Variant varMemItem) 
     The ‘setSharedMem’ method is used to update or add an item to the shared memory area. The strMemNameGrp corresponds to an MTS ‘Shared Group Name’, the strMemName corresponds to an MTS ‘Shared Property’, and varMemItem corresponds to the ‘Shared Property&#39;s value’. 
     public Variant getSharedMem(String strMemNameGrp, String strMemName) 
     The ‘getSharedMem’ method is used to retrieve a ‘Shared Property’ from the ‘MTS Shared Property Manager’. The strMemNameGrp corresponds to an MTS ‘Shared Group Name’, the strMemName corresponds to an MTS ‘Shared Property’, and return value corresponds to the ‘Shared Property&#39;s value’. 
     ISSUES TRACKER SETUP 
     FIG. 132A depicts a method  13200  for initializing a database used with an issue tracker. The issue tracker receives information relating to a plurality of issues from a plurality of users, displays the information relating to the issues, and allows the browsing of the information relating to each of the issues. To initialize the database, the information relating to the issues is stored in a first database in operation  13202 . A second database is provided in operation  13204 . The second database stores tables including a plurality of user interfaces and/or application logic for accessing the information in the first database. The tables of the second database are reconfigured in operation  13206  upon migrating the first database from a first folder to a second folder. 
     As an option, a copy of the tables may be stored after being reconfigured. As another option, changing of a title of the first database may also be allowed upon migration from the first folder to the second folder. Additionally, the information relating to the issues may also be allowed to be edited. 
     The displayed information may also be filtered based on criterion. The criterion may be selected by the user or be a predetermined group of criterion for reporting purposes. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     This portion of the present description provides a description of the installation and configuration of the Issues Tracker Database for use on a ReTA engagement. The Issues Tracker is be used to report development, testing, architecture, and infrastructure problem and provide a means for team leaders and project managers to manage the issue resolution process. 
     Tool Installation 
     The Issue Tracker tool is comprised of two Microsoft Access databases. ReTA Issues DB—Client.mdb, which provides the user interfaces and supporting application logic and ReTA Issues DB.mdb, which contains the actual Issue Tracking data. To access the issue data the client database contains linked Access tables that actually reside in the second database. In order to function correctly these tables must be reconfigured so that the location references are correct. This step needs to be done every time the databases are moved to a difference file system folder. 
     To configure the tool for normal operation the following steps must be completed. 
     Both files must reside within the same file system folder. 
     Referring to FIG. 132B, open the ReTA Issues DB—Client.mdb file  13230  by clicking on the Open button  13232  while holding down the &lt;Shift&gt; key. This may prevent the tool from actually launching. This should result in Microsoft Access starting with the database file open. 
     Remove the linked tables within the database (indicated by an arrow  13300  pointing to the right). This is done by selecting a table and striking the &lt;Delete&gt; key. As shown in FIG. 133, when prompted to confirm the deletion select the ‘Yes’ button  13302  to continue. This should be done for all of the linked tables within the client database. 
     Select the ‘New’ button  13304  to insert a new table. This may result in the ‘New Table’ dialog window  13400  being displayed as shown in FIG.  134 . Select the Link Table option  13402  and select the OK button  13404 . 
     With reference to FIG. 135, locate the database file  13500 , select it and press the Link button  13502  to continue. 
     When prompted by Access for which tables to link select the Select All button  13600 . See FIG.  136 . Click the OK button  13602  to continue. 
     When completed the database file should again have linked tables with the correct path stored internally. Close the client database and create a backup copy before using. 
     Using the Tool 
     To launch the Issue Tracker, open the ReTA Issues DB—Client.mdb Access database file by either double clicking on the file within the Windows Explorer. Alternatively, create a Windows Shortcut to the client database and distribute the shortcut to all project team members. 
     Customizing the Tool 
     To customize the tools windows and report pages follow the following steps. 
     Form and Report Labels 
     Open the ReTA Issues DB—Client.mdb file by clicking on the Open button while holding down the &lt;Shift&gt; key. This may prevent the tool from actually launching. This should result in Microsoft Access starting with the database file open as illustrated in FIG.  137 . 
     Select the ‘Welcome Form’  13700  and select the Design button. 
     Double click on the FormLabel label  13800  at the top of the form  13802 . See FIG.  138 . At that point it is possible to modify the label with the appropriate project name. Upon completion, close the window and save any changes. 
     Select the ‘Issue Form’  13702  of FIG.  137  and select the Design button. 
     Modify the FormLabel label  13800  of FIG.  138 . Close and save any changes. 
     To modify the available reports within the Issue tool select the desired report  13900  as best illustrated in FIG.  139 . Click the Design button  13902  to edit the report. 
     As shown in FIG. 140, modify the desired report elements  14000 , 14002  to the new project name. Close and save any changes. 
     Project Location, Team Members and Project Phases 
     With reference to FIG. 141, double click on the ‘Team Codes’ table  14100 . Add and delete project locations as desired. Close and save the changes. 
     With reference to FIG. 142, double click on the ‘Team Membership Table’  14200 . Make changes and save as necessary. 
     With reference to FIG. 143, double click on the ‘Project Phases’ table  14300 . Make changes and save as necessary. 
     Database Title 
     To change the title of the database to that of the current project open the client database while holding the &lt;shift&gt; key. With the client database open, select the Tools|Startup menu item. In the Startup dialog box  14400  as illustrated in FIG. 144, make any changes and select the OK button  14402  to save the changes. 
     DESIGNING BUSINESS COMPONENTS 
     FIG. 145A illustrates a method  14500  for generating software based on business components. A plurality of business components in a business are defined in operation  14502  with each business component having a plurality of capabilities. In operation  14504 , functional interrelationships are identified between the business components. Code modules are generated in operation  14506  to carry out the capabilities of the business components and the functional interrelationships between the business components, while ensuring the capabilities that are carried out by each code module are essentially unique to the business component associated with the code module. In operations  14508  and  14510 , the functional aspects of the code modules and the functional relationships of the code modules are tested. The code modules are subsequently deployed in an e-commerce environment in operation  14512 . 
     The business components may include customers, products, orders, inventory, pricing, credit check, billing, and fraud analysis. Further, a portion of the business components may be entity-centric. Alternatively, a portion of the business components may be process-centric. In such an embodiment, a portion of the business components that are entity-centric may be governed by the business components that are process-centric. As an option, the business components that are process-centric may also be user-controlled. The following material provides a more detailed description of the above-described method. 
     Over the past five years, component-based development has become an important, but often-misunderstood concept in the IT world. Components in themselves don&#39;t guarantee successful business applications, but coupled with a proven methodology and continuous technological advancements, they make it possible to realize a number of important benefits such as flexibility, adaptability, maintainability, reusability, integration readiness, interoperability, and scalability. 
     Components have been around for a long time. The wheels on an ancient Roman chariot were certainly components. When the local chariot maker invented a new wheel (one that promised greater speeds and improved reliability on a wider variety of terrain), chariot owners would replace their worn-out, inefficient, and out-dated wheels with the new ones, but only if the new ones offered, at a minimum, the same function (i.e., rolling) through the same interface (i.e., the connection between the wheel and the chariot). 
     Today components are used to build everything from cars to computers. In electronics, for example, they have led to the proliferation of product features, disposability, miniaturization, product selection, price reduction, and standard interfaces—all good for the consumer. This example also draws attention to some of the challenges that accompany components: setting standards, determining the right components, the need to change standard interfaces based on new requirements, and the legal and commercial structure for selling components. 
     Throughout the industry the word “component” is used broadly and often loosely. Components come in a wide variety of shapes and sizes. For example: JavaBeans, ActiveX controls, and COM objects. And more generically: application, architecture, development, engineering, Web, server, and business components. 
     Many industry experts have attempted to define “component.” Unfortunately, many of these definitions are too abstract, too academic, or too specialized to be useful. Yet below the surface of these definitions is some real business value for organizations. 
     Experience has shown that it&#39;s quite common for people to view components from different perspectives. Some of them—typically designers—take a logical perspective. They view components as a means for modeling real-world concepts in the business domain. These are Business Components. Others—typically developers—take a physical perspective. They view components as independent pieces of software, or application building blocks, that implement those real-world business concepts. These are Partitioned Business Components. Developers also emphasize that Partitioned Business Components can be built from other independent pieces of software that provide functionality that is generally useful across a wide range of applications. These are Engineering Components. 
     To use an analogy, the designer of a PC workstation would initially think in terms of logical components such as Disk Storage, Memory, Display, etc. These are analogous to Business Components. At some point in the design process, however, this thinking must become more precise. For example, Disk Storage might become a Hard Disk Drive and Disk Controller Card. These are analogous to Partitioned Business Components. And finally, the designer might use generic parts in the design of the Disk Controller Card, such as Memory Chips for cache, Bus Adapters, etc. These are analogous to Engineering Components. 
     Establishing one definition to satisfy all of these perspectives is certainly not required to be successful with components. What&#39;s more important is to recognize the different perspectives and to understand when it&#39;s appropriate to talk about a particular type of component. Hence, multiple definitions, one for each type of component: 
     Business Components represent real-world concepts in the business domain. They encapsulate everything about those concepts including name, purpose, knowledge, behavior, and all other intelligence. Examples include: Customer, Product, Order, Inventory, Pricing, Credit Check, Billing, and Fraud Analysis. One might think of a Business Component as a depiction or portrait of a particular business concept, and as a whole, the Business Component Model is a depiction or portrait of the entire business. It&#39;s also important to note that although this begins the process of defining the application architecture for a set of desired business capabilities, the applicability of the Business Component Model extends beyond application building. 
     Whereas Business Components model real-world concepts in the business domain, Partitioned Business Components implement those concepts in a particular environment. They are the physical building blocks used in the assembly of applications. As independent pieces of software, they encapsulate business data and operations, and they fulfill distinct business services through well-defined interfaces. Business Components are transformed into Partitioned Business Components based on the realities of the technical environment: distribution requirements, legacy integration, performance constraints, existing components, and more. For example, a project team might design an Order Business Component to represent customer demand for one or more products, but when it&#39;s time to implement this concept in a particular client/server environment, it may be necessary to partition the Order Business Component into the Order Entry component on the client and the Order Management component on the server. These are Partitioned Business Components. 
     Engineering Components are independent pieces of software that provide functionality that is generally useful across a range of applications. They come in all shapes and sizes, and they are typically packaged as black box capabilities with well-defined interfaces. They are the physical building blocks used in the assembly of Partitioned Business Components. Examples include: a workflow engine, a JavaBean that encapsulates a reusable concept like address or monetary unit, a complex widget that allows users to edit a list of order lines, a group of objects responsible for persistence, a JavaBean that sorts a collection of objects, and a simple list box coded as an ActiveX control. 
     Components are useful throughout the development process. As a design artifact, early in the process, Business Components provide an underlying logical framework for ensuring flexibility, adaptability, maintainability, and reusability. They serve to break down large, complex problems into smaller, coherent elements. They also model the business in terms of the real-world concepts that make up the domain (e.g., entities, business processes, roles, etc.). Thus they provide the application with conceptual integrity. That is, the logical Business Components serve as the direct link between the real-world business domain and the physical application. An important goal is to build an application that is closely aligned with the business domain. Later in the process, Partitioned Business Components and Engineering Components provide a means for implementing, packaging, and deploying the application. They also open the door to improved integration, interoperability, and scalability. 
     FIG. 145B shows a relationship between business components  14530  and partitioned business components  14532 . Business Components are an integral part of the previously discussed Framework Designs. Business Components represent real-world concepts in the business domain. They encapsulate everything about those concepts including name, purpose, knowledge, behavior, and all other intelligence. 
     In the Business Architecture stage  14534 , a project team begins to define the application architecture for an organization&#39;s business capabilities using Business Components. Business Components model real-world concepts in the business domain (e.g., customers, products, orders, inventory, pricing, credit check, billing, and fraud analysis). This is not the same as data modeling because Business Components encapsulate both information and behavior. At this point in the process, an inventory of Business Components is sufficient, along with a definition, list of entities, and list of responsibilities for each Business Component. 
     In Capability Analysis  14536  and the first part of Capability Release Design  14538 , the project team designs Business Components in more detail, making sure they satisfy the application requirements. The team builds upon its previous work by providing a formal definition for each Business Component, including the services being offered. Another name for these services is “Business Component Interfaces.” The team also models the interactions between Business Components. 
     Throughout the remainder of Capability Release Design and into Capability Release Build and Test  14540 , Business Components are transformed into Partitioned 
     Business Components based on the realities of the technical environment. These constraints include distribution requirements, legacy integration, performance constraints, existing components, and more. Furthermore, to ensure the conceptual integrity of the Business Component model, a given Partitioned Business Component should descend from one and only one Business Component. In other words, it should never break the encapsulation already defined at the Business Component level. Also at this time, the project team designs the internal workings of each Partitioned Business Component. This could mean the Engineering Components that make up the Partitioned Business Component, the “wrapper” for a legacy or packaged system, and other code. 
     In Capability Release Build and Test, Partitioned Business Components are built and tested. The build process varies depending upon the technology chosen to build the internal workings of each Partitioned Business Component. Among the many tests that are performed during this stage, the component, assembly, and performance tests are impacted the most by this style of development. A component test addresses a Partitioned Business Component as a single unit by testing its interfaces and its internal workings, while an assembly test addresses the interactions between Partitioned Business Components by testing broader scenarios. The performance test is impacted primarily by the techniques one would use to resolve the various performance issues. For example, it&#39;s common to run multiple copies of a Partitioned Business Component across multiple servers to handle a greater transaction volume. 
     In Deployment  14542 , the Partitioned Business Components are packaged and deployed as part of the application into the production environment. The application parameters and the manner in which the Partitioned Business Components are distributed are tweaked based on how well the application performs. 
     Well designed Business Components are anthropomorphic. That is, they take on characteristics and abilities as if they were alive. This means that Business Components should reflect directly the characteristics and abilities (i.e., the information and behavior) of the business concepts they represent. Therefore, only by examining the various types of business concepts will one discover an acceptable way to classify Business Components. 
     Business concepts come in a wide variety. For example, a product represents something of value that is up for sale, while a credit check represents the work that needs to be done to determine if a customer&#39;s credit is good. The former is centered around an entity—the product—while the latter is centered around a process-credit check. 
     This line of thinking leads to two types of Business Components: entity-centric and process-centric. Unfortunately, what commonly results from this paradigm is an argument over whether or not a particular Business Component is entity-centric or process-centric. In reality, Business Components are always a blend of both information and behavior, although one or the other tends to carry more influence. An appropriate mental model is a spectrum of Business Components. 
     Business Components on the entity-centric side of the spectrum tend to represent significant entities in the business domain. Not only do they encapsulate information, but also the behaviors and rules that are associated with those entities. Examples include: Customer, Product, Order, and Inventory. A Customer Business Component would encapsulate everything an organization needs to know about its customers, including customer information (e.g., name, address, and telephone number), how to add new customers, a customer&#39;s buying habits (although this might belong in a Customer Account component), and rules for determining if a customer is preferred. 
     Business Components on the process-centric side of the spectrum tend to represent significant business processes or some other kind of work that needs to be done. Not only do they encapsulate behaviors and rules, but also the information that is associated with those processes. Examples include: Pricing, Credit Check, Billing, and Fraud Analysis. A Pricing Business Component would encapsulate everything an organization needs to know about how to calculate the price of a product, including the product&#39;s base price (although this might belong in a Product component), discounts and rules for when they apply, and the calculation itself. 
     One might argue that the Pricing component is more entity-centric than process-centric. After all, it&#39;s centered around the concept of price, which is an entity. In reality, though, it depends on the business requirements, but again, whether or not a given Business Component is entity-centric or process-centric is not important yet. What is important is how well the Business Component represents its corresponding real-world business concept. The fact that most business concepts are a blend of information and behavior means that most Business Components should also be a blend of information and behavior. Otherwise applications would be much like they are today with a distinct separation of data and process. 
     Another way to think about the process-centric side of the spectrum is by asking, “What role performs the process?” For example, it&#39;s the picker-packer who picks inventory and packs it into a shipment. This might lead to the Picker-packer component. Another example is a Shopping Agent component that knows someone&#39;s buying preferences, shops for the best deals, and either reports back to the user or makes the purchase. 
     A pattern emerges when one examines the way these Business Components interact with each other. Process-centric Business Components are “in control,” while entity-centric Business Components do what they&#39;re told. To be more explicit, a process-centric Business Component controls the flow of a business process by requesting services in a specific sequence according to specific business rules (i.e., conditional statements). The services being requested are generally offered by entity-centric Business Components, but not always. Sometimes process-centric Business Components trigger other process-centric Business Components. 
     FIG. 146 shows how a Billing Business Component  14600  may create an invoice. The control logic  14602  (i.e., the sequence of steps and business rules) associated with the billing process is encapsulated within the Billing component itself The Billing component requests services from several entity-centric Business Components, but it also triggers Fraud Analysis  14604 , a process-centric Business Component, if a specific business rule is satisfied. Note also that “Step 6 ” is performed within the Billing component itself. Perhaps this is where the invoice is created, reflecting the design team&#39;s decision to encapsulate the invoice within the Billing component. This is one valid approach. Another is to model a separate entity-centric Invoice component that encapsulates the concept of invoice. This would effectively decouple the invoice from the billing process which might be a good thing depending on the requirements. 
     It would be logical to conclude that the two types of Business Components translate to two types of Partitioned Business Components, but a small adjustment is required. Entity-centric Business Components translate directly to Business Entity Components, but a closer look at the ways in which a business process can be implemented in an application reveals two possibilities for process-centric Business Components. A business process can be: 1) automated, like a billing process, or 2) controlled by a user, like an order entry process. The former results in a Business Process Component, while the latter results in a User Interface Component. 
     FIG. 147 illustrates the relationship between the spectrum of Business Components  14700  and the types of Partitioned Business Components  14702 . Business Entity Components  14704  and Business Process Components  14706  are straightforward. The former is the physical implementation of an entity-centric Business Component (e.g., Customer), while the latter is the physical implementation of an automated process-centric Business Component (e.g., Billing). User Interface Components  14708 , on the other hand, require further explanation. 
     As mentioned above, a User Interface Component is the implementation of a business process that is user controlled, but more explicitly it is a set of functionally related windows that supports the process(es) performed by one type of user. Examples include: Customer Service Desktop, Shipping Desktop, and Claim Desktop. These are not to be confused with low-level user interface controls (e.g., Active X controls), rather User Interface Components are usually built from low-level user interface controls. The reason for the dashed arrow in the diagram above is a subtle one. It points to the fact that earlier in the development process User Interface Components are generally not modeled as process-centric Business Components. Instead, they typically originate from the workflow, dialog flow, and/or user interface designs. See FIG. 148, which illustrates the flow of workflow, dialog flow, and/or user interface designs  14800 , 14802 , 14804  to a User Interface Component  14806 . This makes complete sense given their direct tie to user controlled business processes. 
     FIG. 149 is a diagram of the Eagle Application Model which illustrates how the different types of Partitioned Business Components might interact with each other. Business Entity Components  14900  and Business Process Components  14902  typically reside on a server, while User Interface Components  14904  typically reside on a client. 
     FIG. 150 illustrates what makes up a Partitioned Business Component  15000 . As long as a component does what it&#39;s suppose to do, it doesn&#39;t matter what kind of code is used to build the component&#39;s internal workings. It could be anything from COBOL to Java. This is a key benefit of encapsulation. Classifying this code is a different matter. Some code  15002  is specific to the Partitioned Business Component. Other code is more widely reusable, both functionally and technically; this is where we find Engineering Components  15004 . Another possibility is to “wrap” existing code  15006  from legacy and packaged systems. Finally, it&#39;s important to note that patterns and frameworks are frequently used as starting points for designing and building this code. 
     Engineering Components are physical building blocks used in the assembly of Partitioned Business Components. They are independent pieces of software that provide functionality that is generally useful across a range of applications, and they are usually packaged as black box capabilities with well-defined interfaces. 
     Engineering Components can be bought or built, and they come in a wide variety. Examples include: a workflow engine, a JavaBean that encapsulates a reusable concept like address or monetary value, a complex user interface control that allows users to edit a list of order lines, a group of objects responsible for persistence, a JavaBean that sorts a collection of objects, and a list box coded as an ActiveX control. 
     A pattern is “an idea that has been useful in one practical context and will probably be useful in others.” Think of them as blueprints, or designs for proven solutions to known problems. Having found the right pattern for a given problem, a developer must then apply it. Examples of patterns include: an analysis pattern for hierarchical relationships between organizations and/or people, a design pattern for maintaining an audit trail, a design pattern for applying different levels of security to different user types, and a design pattern for composite relationships between objects. 
     A framework is a template for the implementation of a particular function (similar to a shell program). It usually embodies a known pattern (or group of patterns) in a specific technical environment. Frameworks are available from a number of third-party vendors, and they are also developed on projects. Developers are typically expected to customize and extend frameworks to meet their specific requirements, but this involves a tradeoff. Customizing and extending a framework may optimize its use, but the resulting framework tends to be less abstract, and therefore less reusable in other contexts. Examples of frameworks include: a framework for displaying an object and its properties in Smalltalk, a Java-specific framework for persisting data, and a messaging and publish/subscribe framework for DCOM. 
     FIG. 151 illustrates the role of patterns and frameworks. More specifically, it introduces the Eagle Architecture Specification  15100  and the Component Solutions Handbook  15102 , both of which are groups of patterns. Eagle also offers technology-specific starter kits  15104 , which include frameworks for various environments. 
     The pace of change in today&#39;s business world is increasing faster than ever before. Meanwhile, advances in information technology have enabled businesses to better understand their customers, provide greater value, and create new markets. However, as technology becomes more complex, applications have become more difficult and time-consuming to build and maintain. Looking forward, applications must be dramatically more responsive to change. They must be more: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 In theory. . . 
                 In practice. . . 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Flexible 
                 Making it possible to quickly 
                 Making it possible to 
               
               
                   
                 satisfy new business require- 
                 accommodate a new product 
               
               
                   
                 ments by replacing or 
                 line solely by updating the 
               
               
                   
                 modifying certain components 
                 Product component. 
               
               
                   
                 with minimal impact to 
               
               
                   
                 others. 
               
               
                 Adaptable 
                 Making it easy to deliver an 
                 Making it easy to provide 
               
               
                   
                 application to a variety of user 
                 in-home access to customer 
               
               
                   
                 types through a variety of 
                 account information by 
               
               
                   
                 delivery channels with 
                 developing only a new user 
               
               
                   
                 minimal impact to the core 
                 interface while reusing 
               
               
                   
                 application. 
                 existing components. 
               
               
                 Maintain- 
                 Making it easy to update an 
                 Making it easy to add a new 
               
               
                 able 
                 application by reducing the 
                 customer attribute by 
               
               
                   
                 area of impact for most 
                 isolating the change to one 
               
               
                   
                 changes. 
                 component-the Customer 
               
               
                   
                   
                 component. 
               
               
                 Reusable 
                 Making it possible to quickly 
                 Making it possible to 
               
               
                   
                 assemble unique and dynamic 
                 assemble an application at 
               
               
                   
                 solutions from existing 
                 a fraction of the cost because 
               
               
                   
                 components. 
                 eight of the twelve 
               
               
                   
                   
                 components that are needed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 already exist. 
               
               
                 Integration 
                 Making it possible to reuse 
                 Making it possible to absorb 
               
               
                 Ready 
                 the functionality within 
                 newly acquired divisions by 
               
               
                   
                 existing systems by wrapping 
                 “wrapping” their systems 
               
               
                   
                 them as components within 
                 and “plugging” them into 
               
               
                   
                 new applications. 
                 the enterprise infrastructure. 
               
               
                 Inter- 
                 Making it possible to request 
                 Making it possible to integrate 
               
               
                 operable 
                 services across platforms. 
                 two applications built on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 different platforms. 
               
               
                 Scalable 
                 Making is easy to distribute 
                 Making it easy to accommo- 
               
               
                   
                 and reconfigure components 
                 date the holiday crunch by 
               
               
                   
                 to satisfy various 
                 running multiple copies of 
               
               
                   
                 transaction volumes. 
                 the Order component across 
               
               
                   
                   
                 multiple servers. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Components will help an IT organization achieve these quality attributes. Through encapsulation they make it possible to develop applications that are more responsive to change. We can make this claim with confidence because a component that is well encapsulated (i.e., an independent, black box component with predictable, well defined interfaces) can be used in any situation, as long as it&#39;s used for its intended purpose. It knows how to perform its services without regard to what&#39;s happening outside of its boundaries (e.g., the actions that precede or follow it). 
     Another key to embracing change is the predictability and conceptual integrity of the parts that make up an application. Fred Brooks, author of The Mythical Man-Month, writes, “. . . conceptual integrity is the most important consideration in system design.” Therefore, components must be conceptually whole, and they must perform functions that are aligned with their purpose and within their sphere of knowledge. If they accurately reflect the real world, they are much easier to develop and maintain. If the real world changes, so must the corresponding component. 
     Given a design with these characteristics, the opportunity for reuse is significantly enhanced, and the time it takes to upgrade the system is dramatically reduced. The Gartner Group agrees that component-based development will be a dominant method of application development in the years to come. They say that “by 2001, at least 60 percent of all new applications development will be based on assemblies of componentware, increasing speed to market and the ability to cope with change (0.7 probability).” 
     Business Components and Partitioned Business Components represent a major improvement in design capability—some might argue the first major change in design thinking since structured design. There are several reasons for this breakthrough: 
     Business Components model entities and processes at the enterprise level, and they evolve into Partitioned Business Components that are integrated into applications that operate over a network. Consequently, they serve as an excellent first step in the development of scalable, distributed enterprise applications that map closely to the business enterprise itself (i.e., the way it operates and the information that defines it). 
     Business Components model the business, and thus they enable applications to more completely satisfy the business needs. They also provide a business-oriented view of the domain and consequently a good way to scope the solution space. This results in a good context for making process and application decisions. Finally, Business Components provide a common vocabulary for the project team. They educate the team in what&#39;s important to the business. 
     When modeled correctly, entity-centric Business Components represent the most stable elements of the business, while process-centric Business Components represent the most volatile. Encapsulating and separating these elements contributes to the application&#39;s overall maintainability. 
     To manage the complexity of a large problem, it must be divided into smaller, coherent parts. Partitioned Business Components provide an excellent way to divide and conquer in a way that ties the application to the business domain. They provide the ability to “package software capabilities into more manageable (and useful) chunks.” By contrast, traditional modules are too cumbersome to be reusable in multiple contexts. On the other end of the spectrum, objects are too small to effectively divide and conquer; there are simply too many of them. 
     Partitioned Business Components provide a greater emphasis on application layering—a well known, but often neglected concept in application development. 
     Partitioned Business Components are application building blocks. As an application modeling tool, they depict how various elements of an application fit together. As an application building tool, they provide a means for systems delivery. 
     Proven processes, patterns, and frameworks offer a higher level of reuse. This is one of the key advantages because it means greater agility. These mechanisms make it possible for hundreds of developers to do things consistently and to benefit from previously captured, reusable knowledge capital. 
     Business Components model the business. It sounds straightforward, but even with experience it&#39;s a challenge to identify the right components and to design them for flexibility and reuse. Flexibility and reuse are certainly more achievable with Business Components, but they are not inherent to Business Components. To accomplish these goals, as the previous examples suggest, one must understand what&#39;s happening within the enterprise and across the industry. One must work with business experts who understand the factors that will influence the current and future evolution of the business domain. This will improve one&#39;s ability to anticipate the range of possible change (i.e., to anticipate the future). The Business Component Model will be more flexible and reusable if it is challenged by scenarios that are likely to take place in the future. 
     Reuse becomes a reality more quickly if one plans for it. And it endures if one manages it over time. However, both of these things are difficult to do, especially for large projects and large enterprises. First of all, it&#39;s easy for communication across one or more projects to break down. It&#39;s also common for individual projects to pay more attention to their requirements and deadlines than to project-wide or enterprise-wide reuse. After all, their most important objective is to deliver value to their customers. Reuse must be engrained into the culture. This could mean teams responsible for project-wide and enterprise-wide reuse, but no matter how it&#39;s done, reuse must be one of the most important technology objectives. 
     Too much focus on low-level (i.e., code) reuse can be a trap. To draw an analogy, take a look at the auto industry ten years ago. Some auto makers were focused on inter-changeable parts and low-level standardization. For example, they decided to use the same body style for all of their cars. Unfortunately, when the industry began to move away from the boxy body style, they were not well prepared, nor were they agile enough to react in a timely fashion. They had invested too much in low-level standardization. Conversely, other auto makers were focused on quality processes and frameworks (i.e., high-level reuse). As a result, they were able to respond more quickly to the changing requirements. Engagement experience has shown that the same thing can happen with components and objects (e.g., too much emphasis on low-level inheritance). That&#39;s why it&#39;s important to focus appropriately on the high-level reuse enabled by processes, patterns, and frameworks. 
     Although Business Components and Partitioned Business Components represent a significant breakthrough in design capability, the architectural frameworks to support this breakthrough are still maturing. Standards come to mind first: Will it be COM, JavaBeans, or CORBA? It&#39;s still not clear. Likewise with languages: Will it be Visual Basic, Java? Tools and repositories offer another challenge. Clear winners have yet to emerge, and newcomers are constantly popping up with promising products. Finally, the legal and commercial market for buying and selling components is not mature. The market for high-level common business objects is just emerging, while the market for low-level components is still chaotic. 
     One of the most important challenges is teaching a new application development style. Although components and objects have been around for a while, they are new to most people. Furthermore, component-based development requires a change in the way one thinks about designing and building applications. Engagement experience has shown that it takes a couple of months to feel comfortable with this paradigm—and longer for those pursuing deeper technical skills. But this challenge is certainly not impossible to overcome. A combination of training and mentoring has proven to be the best way to teach these concepts, and the more rigorous approach that results from this education is well worth the journey. 
     The following tips and techniques provide an introduction to some of the issues surrounding the design of Business Components. For more information, see the ODM. 
     What is the Right Number of Business Components? How Big Should They Be? 
     The granularity of Business Components is a frequent topic of discussion. A fairly common misconception is that Business Components are the same as applications, but in fact, applications are assembled from Business Components (or Partitioned Business Components to be more accurate). A typical application might have ten to twenty Business Components. On the other end of the spectrum, Business Components are larger than business objects. In fact, some people refer to Business Components as large-grained business objects. 
     So what is the Right Size for a Business Component? 
     Business Components should encapsulate concepts that are significant to the business domain. Of course, this is subjective, and it certainly varies by business domain. In fact, business domain experts, with help from component modelers, are in the best position to make this judgment. 
     Bigger Business Components hide more complexity, which in general is a good thing. However, too much complexity in a component can lead to many of the problems that preceded component-based development. For example, embedding too much policy information can lead to a Business Component that is more difficult to maintain and customize. Another advantage is the fact that the coupling between bigger components tends to be weaker. On the other hand, bigger components are generally less cohesive and consequently less flexible. For example, assume that the concepts of warehouse and inventory have been combined into one Business Component. This could be problematic if a future application needs warehouse information, but not inventory information. 
     Smaller Business Component tends to be more flexible. It&#39;s also easier to reuse them in future applications. Unfortunately, smaller components typically result in a higher degree of coupling. One will find significantly more interactions between smaller components. This could also lead to performance problems. If two or three small components send each other a lot of messages, it might make sense to combine them into one. Smaller components may also be more difficult to manage, simply because more of them exist. 
     It&#39;s important to strike a balance, and keep in mind that the ideal size depends on the domain. If there&#39;s a question in one&#39;s mind, it makes sense to lean toward smaller components. It&#39;s easier to combine them than to break them up. 
     What&#39;s the Best way to Identify Business Components? 
     During the Business Architecture stage, the project team defines its business capabilities. At this point in the process, one can begin to search the business domain for Business Components. Then again later, during Capability Release Design, when the project team documents scenarios and workflows, one can perform a second iteration through the identification process. 
     The following steps describe one technique for identifying Business Components. FIG. 152 illustrates this Business Component Identifying Methodology  15200  including both Planning and Delivering stages  15202 , 15204 : 
     1. Start with entity-centric Business Components. For example, the customer is a significant entity in most business domains, therefore a Customer component is quite common. A Customer Business Component would encapsulate everything an organization needs to know about its customers, including customer information (e.g., name, address, and telephone number), how to add new customers, a customer&#39;s buying habits (although this might belong in a Customer Account component), and rules for determining if a customer is preferred. Entities themselves can be physical or conceptual. For example, customers and products are physical—you can touch them. Orders, on the other hand, are conceptual. An order represents a specific customer&#39;s demand for a product. You cannot touch that demand. 
     2. Look for process-centric Business Components next. Generally speaking, a process-centric Business Component controls the flow of a business process. For example, in the utility industry, a Billing component would process customer, product, pricing, and usage information into a bill. Sometimes one will find an entity associated with the process—in this case, a bill or invoice—but another option is to model this entity as a separate, entity-centric Business Component, thus decoupling it from the process. 
     What&#39;s the Best way to Identify the Responsibilities of a Business Component? 
     Review the business capabilities, business processes, business practices, scenarios, workflows, and other requirements. Look for behaviors that will be supported by the application. In other words, what are the business functions that will be performed by the system? Assign them as responsibilities to the most appropriate component. If components were people and computers didn&#39;t exist, one might ask, “Who is responsible for this task?” In fact, sometimes it&#39;s helpful to assign component owners who speak up when they encounter a responsibility that should belong to their components-“Hey, I should be responsible for that!” 
     This section addresses several frequently asked questions that more broadly apply to the physical implementation of component—and object-based solutions. The answers are intended to increase the awareness of the reader. Most of them only scratch the surface of issues that are somewhat controversial within the component and object community. 
     What is the Role of Components in Net-centric Computing? 
     Physical components play a critical role in net-centric computing because they can be distributed, as encapsulated units of executable software, throughout a heterogeneous environment such as the Internet. They have the ability to make the Web more than a toy for retrieving and downloading information. Robert Orfali, Dan Harkey, and Jeri Edwards, well-known experts in the field of component—and object-based development, wrote the following about distributed objects (same as “distributed components” for the purpose of this discussion): 
     The next-generation Web—in its Internet, intranet, and extranet incarnations—must be able to deal with the complex requirements of multi-step business-to-business and consumer-to-business transactions. To do this, the Web must evolve into a full-blown client/server medium that can run your line-of-business applications (i.e., a delivery vehicle for business transaction processing) . . . . To move to the next step, the Web needs distributed objects. 
     What&#39;s the Difference Between Components and Objects? 
     From a logical perspective, components and objects are the same. They both model concepts from a particular domain, and they both encapsulate information and behavior. On this level, good component models and good object models share the same characteristics: high cohesion, low coupling, reusability, well defined services, and more. One might argue that granularity is a key difference. After all, for an object-oriented design, components are made up of objects. This may be true, but in reality both of them come in all sizes, thus making this difference rather insignificant. 
     From a physical perspective, components and objects are similar, but different. The key difference relates to the different ways in which they are implemented. As long as a component&#39;s interfaces comply with an accepted standard like COM, JavaBeans, or CORBA, its internal workings can be implemented using any technology (e.g., Java, Visual Basic, Smalltalk, C, or even COBOL). The internal workings of an object, on the other hand, can only be implemented using object technology. For the same reason (i.e., standard interfaces), it is possible to request a component&#39;s services from any platform. That&#39;s not true of objects, unless they are wrapped with interfaces that comply with the accepted standards, which would make them distributed objects (i.e., components) instead. 
     Robert Orfali, Dan Harkey, and Jeri Edwards also wrote the book The Essential Distributed Objects Survival Guide (1996). Chapter 2, “From Distributed Objects to Smart Component,” is an excellent source of information about objects, components, and the differences between them. They say the following about physical components: 
     A component is an object that&#39;s not bound to a particular program, computer language, or implementation . . . . They are the optimal building blocks for creating the next generation of distributed systems . . . . Components are standalone objects that can plug-and-play across networks, applications, languages, tools, and operating systems. Distributed objects are, by definition, components . . . . Unlike traditional objects, components can interoperate across languages, tools, operating systems, and networks. But components are also object-like in the sense that they support encapsulation, inheritance, and polymorphism. 
     “What is a Component Model? 
     This is a common point of confusion. From a logical perspective, the term “component model” is frequently used to refer to a Business Component Model in the same way that “object model” is used to refer to a business object model. 
     From a physical perspective, a component model (or a component object model) defines a set of conventions that provides a standard way to develop and use physical components, including how to define properties, events, behaviors, etc. It also includes the standard structure of a component&#39;s interfaces, the mechanism by which a component interacts with other components, patterns for asking a component about its features, a means for browsing active components, and more. Some of the existing component models are COM, JavaBeans, and CORBA. 
     Example: A Grocery Store 
     A grocery store chain is creating an enterprise-wide Business Component model. Currently the individual stores do not record specific customer information. 
     Consequently, a model based on today&#39;s requirements would not retain customer information. 
     However, they are looking into preferred customer cards. Furthermore, while analyzing the industry, the project team reads about a competitor with a pharmacy and video rental service. In both cases, customer information becomes critical. So the project team creates scenarios describing how they would use customer information to support these requirements. They create one Business Component Model that supports both today&#39;s and tomorrow&#39;s view of the customer. 
     In the near future, when the chain adopts preferred customer cards, and in the more distant future, if they decide to add a pharmacy or video rental service, the Business Component design for their current application will provide a solid foundation for the future requirement of tracking customer information. If they weren&#39;t using Business Components, they would not have a model that maps to their business domain, and introducing new requirements would require more abrupt changes. 
     Example: Inventory Management 
     A telecommunications company in the paging business sells and leases pagers and services. One part of the company is installing an inventory management system for tracking pagers, while another part of the company is trying to determine how to track the frequencies that are owned and leased by the company. What does this company mean by inventory? Does it simply mean knowing what items are in a warehouse? 
     When the company thinks abstractly about the concept of inventory, they discover that it&#39;s all about managing anything of value. When they look at what they have in inventory, they discover that it is countable, reservable, and has a cost associated with it. Inventory does not require specific knowledge of the use of an item in inventory; that knowledge can be put into another component, such as Item. If inventory does not need to know the specifics about its use, then it could apply its ability to count, reserve, and value anything it is associated with. Inventory could be used to manage a variety of things: conference rooms, fixed assets, work in process, finished goods, and leased frequencies. 
     So one can start out building an inventory management application and then build the ready-to-reuse Inventory component which, without modification, can support many other uses. In this way one can unload the concept of inventory so that it can be reused outside the context it was initially planned for. 
     ILLUSTRATIVE EMBODIMENTS 
     Any portion or portions of an exemplary embodiment described above may be used in any combination with any other portion or portions of any other exemplary embodiment or embodiments. The following examples illustrate various exemplary embodiments of such combinations: 
     EXAMPLE 1 
     FIG. 153 illustrates a method  15300  for providing an exemplary embodiment of a resources e-commerce technical architecture. In operation  15302 , a system is provided which includes a plurality of sub-activities. Each sub-activity includes sub-activity logic adapted to generate an output based on an input received from a user upon execution. Each sub-activity also includes a plurality of activities which each execute the sub-activities upon being selected for accomplishing a goal associated with the activity. The business objects employed by the sub-activities are managed in operation  15304 , and information used by the sub-activities is persisted in operation  15306  during the execution of the sub-activities. In operation  15308 , items such as issues, change requests, and/or service investigation reports relating to the system are reported. Software modules which support the sub-activities are tested in operation  15310 . 
     EXAMPLE 2 
     FIG. 154 illustrates a second exemplary embodiment of a method  15400  for maintaining data in an e-commerce based technical architecture. In operation  15402 , an interface is provided between a first server and a second server with a proxy component situated between the first and second servers to manage business components used by the sub-activities. Information used by the sub-activities is persisted during the execution of the sub-activities in operation  15404 . In operation  15406 , application consistency is maintained by referencing text phrases through a short codes framework. Additionally, software modules which support the sub-activities are also tested in operation  15408 . 
     EXAMPLE 3 
     FIG. 155 also illustrates an exemplary embodiment of a method  15500  for providing a resources e-commerce technical architecture where in operation  15502  context objects are shared among a plurality of components executed on a transaction server. In operation  15504 , services are also accessed within the server without a need for knowledge of an application program interface of the server. Application consistency is maintained in operation  15506  by referencing text phrases through a short codes framework. Additionally, a graphical user interface is also generated for the resources e-commerce technical architecture in operation  15508 . 
     EXAMPLE 4 
     FIG. 156 illustrates another exemplary embodiment of a method  15600  for providing a resources e-commerce technical architecture. In this embodiment of the present invention, in operation  15602  network performance modeling is performed on a network. In operation  15604 , context objects are shared among a plurality of components executed on a transaction server on the network. Application consistency is maintained in operation  15606  by referencing text phrases through a short codes framework. Further, software modules are managed during development of the architecture in operation  15608 . 
     EXAMPLE 5 
     FIG. 157 illustrates an additional exemplary embodiment of a method  15700  for providing a resources e-commerce technical architecture. In operation  15702  issues in the technical architecture are managed for the purpose of resolution. A database used while managing the issues is initialized when migrated in operation  15704 . Further, application consistency is maintained in operation  15706  by referencing text phrases through a short codes framework. In operation  15708 , a plurality of software modules are generated in order to execute the technical architecture. Such software modules are based on business components. 
     While various embodiments have been described above, it should be understood that they have been presented by way of example only, and not limitation. Thus, the breadth and scope of a preferred embodiment should not be limited by any of the above described exemplary embodiments, but should be defined only in accordance with the following claims and their equivalents.